diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792-8.txt | 6640 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 122710 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 207534 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792-h/34792-h.htm | 9334 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792-h/images/img-cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 81820 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792.txt | 6640 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34792.zip | bin | 0 -> 122678 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
10 files changed, 22630 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/34792-8.txt b/34792-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7af7c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6640 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Where Duty Called + or, In Honor Bound + +Author: Victor St. Clair + +Release Date: December 30, 2010 [EBook #34792] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: Cover art] + + + + +Round the World Library No. 86 + + + + +Where Duty Called + +OR + +IN HONOR BOUND + + + +By + +VICTOR ST. CLAIR + + +Author of "On His Merit," "Zip, the Acrobat," "Cast Away in the +Jungle," etc. + + + + +STREET & SMITH CORPORATION + +PUBLISHERS + +79-89 Seventh Avenue, New York + + + + +Copyright, 1904 + +By STREET & SMITH + + +Where Duty Called + + + + +All rights reserved, including that of translation into foreign +languages, including the Scandinavian. + +Printed in the U. S. A. + + + + +Contents + + +Chapter + + I. "A Grand Opportunity." + II. A Suspicious Craft. + III. The Young Exile. + IV. Put in Irons. + V. Escape from the _Libertador_. + VI. A Swim for Life. + VII. Taken Ashore. + VIII. Jaguar Claws. + IX. The Mystery of the Photograph. + X. "We have been Betrayed!" + XI. A Perilous Flight. + XII. A Lonely Ride. + XIII. In the Enemy's Country. + XIV. Indian Warfare. + XV. A Friendly Voice. + XVI. Colonel Marchand. + XVII. A Cunning Ruse. + XVIII. Ronie Receives a Commission. + XIX. The Scout in the Jungle. + XX. Adventures and Surprises. + XXI. "The Mountain Lion." + XXII. A Fight with the Guerillas. + XXIII. The News at La Guayra. + XXIV. Interview with General Castro. + XXV. The Spy of Caracas. + XXVI. "It is Manuel Marlin!" + XXVII. Good News. + XXVIII. Victory and Peace. + + + + +WHERE DUTY CALLED. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +"A GRAND OPPORTUNITY." + +"Hurrah, boys! here is a letter from home. At least, it is from the +homeland, as it is postmarked New York. Who can be writing us from +that city?" and the youthful speaker, in his exuberance of feeling, +waved the missive over his head, while he began to dance a lively step. + +"I know of no better way to find out than to open it, Harrie, or let +one of us do it for you; you seem suddenly to have lost your faculty +for doing anything rational yourself. Hand it to Jack if you do not +want to trust me with it." + +"Your very words, to say nothing of your impatient gestures, Ronie, +show that you are not one whit less excited than I am over receiving +some news from the great world outside of this lost corner," replied +the first speaker, beginning to tear open the end of the bulky envelope +he held in his hand. + +"There must be a lot of news, judging by the size of the package," said +the second, approaching so he could look over the shoulder of his +companion while he tore open the covering. + +"Go slow, lads," said a third person, who had been sitting slightly +apart from the others, but who moved near to the twain now. "It won't +do to get unduly excited in this climate." + +The three were none other than our old friends of the jungles of Luzon, +Ronie Rand, Harrie Mannering and Jack Greenland, whose exploits in +opening up one of the great forest tracts on that island were described +in "Cast Away in the Jungle," first of THE ROUND WORLD SERIES. They +had not been long in Manilla, the capital of the island, since +completing that hazardous undertaking, when an incoming steamer brought +them the letter which awakened such an interest, and which was to play +such an important part in their future actions. As its bulk indicated, +it was a lengthy epistle, and this length was more than doubled in +reading matter by the fine chirography which covered its large pages. + +Standing where he could not scan the mysterious pages, Professor Jack +fell to watching the countenance of Harrie Mannering as he followed +with his eye the closely written pages. As he read, his features began +to change their expression from gayety to seriousness, and by the time +he had finished a puzzled look had settled upon his sunburned but +good-looking face, and his lips, forming themselves unconsciously into +a pucker, gave vent to a prolonged whistle. Then, as if to obtain a +more comprehensive understanding of the message, he returned to the +beginning, and was about to read it through again, when Jack said: + +"Look here, boy, you are taking an unfair advantage of a fellow. You +must know that I am just as much interested in news from the homeland +as you, so read it aloud this time. If it is good news, I want to +enjoy it with you; if it is bad news, then I certainly ought to share +it with you." + +"Forgive me, or rather us, Jack--for I am sure Ronie has seen every +word--but it is all so strange and unexpected that my head is not quite +clear yet as to whether I have been reading or dreaming." + +"Then it is all the more necessary that I should hear it, as it is +possible my poor head may help unravel the skein. You remember the +story of the great novelist, Sir Walter Scott, who, upon recovering +from a long illness, was given a book to read for amusement. But upon +reading the book, he could get so little sense out of it that he feared +he had lost his reason. In this perplexed state of mind he handed the +work to another to read without giving his reason, while he waited +anxiously for the result. She, after reading a few chapters, threw the +book aside, declaring it was such senseless twaddle that she did not +care to follow it any further, whereupon the great author breathed +easier." + +"No offense was meant, Jack, and I will try and make amends at once. +In the first place, this is an invitation for us to start upon another +undertaking somewhat similar to the one we have just completed." + +"What! return to the jungles of Luzon?" + +"No; it is to South America this time--to Venezuela. A party of men, +some of whom are connected with the local government, are anxious to +open up the interior of the country in quest of rubber trees. The +writer, who is one of the company, and, I judge, an influential member, +has recommended us as 'capable persons'--you needn't laugh, Ronie, for +those are his words--to survey and engineer for the party. If we +conclude to go, he wants us to meet him at Caracas as soon as possible. +In the meantime, he will get everything in readiness to start as soon +as we arrive. I am at a loss to know what to think of it. The writer, +who is Colonel Rupert Marchand, is very enthusiastic over the scheme, +and he seems anxious that we should come. I never thought the colonel +was one to get wild over anything that was not likely to prove +successful." + +Jack made no reply in words, but took the letter from the hand of his +young friend, and began to hastily run over its contents, saying, by +way of apology for his action: + +"You will pardon me, Harrie, but it may not be best for us to read +aloud or talk to any great extent here. There may be those about whose +motives are not friendly." + +Thinking this suggestion a wise one, Harrie and Ronie willingly +followed their companion to a more retired place, where the three spent +fully five minutes looking over the lengthy missive together before one +of them spoke. Then Ronie said: + +"Well, what do you think of it, Jack?" + +"That it is a grand opportunity for two such adventure-loving fellows +as you are to embrace. But I would not advise less daring and +energetic youths to think of it for a moment." + +"So you think there is likely to be some dangerous experiences attached +to the journey?" + +"It has all of that appearance, though you may come out of it without a +scratch. Colonel Marchand, unless I have misjudged him, is just such a +man as would throw all thought of hazard to the wind if the prize was +worth striving for." + +"You do not believe he would lead any one into needless danger, Jack?" + +"Certainly not; he is too good a soldier for that, and you know he made +an honorable record in our recent war with Spain." + +"I judge, then, you think the people we should be likely to fall among +might be a dangerous element," said Ronie. + +"That is just what I meant. The inhabitants of the interior of the +country where he would have you go are treacherous and dangerous, if +they happen to take a dislike to you; and that they are more prone to +dislike than to like has been my experience." + +"What about this rubber business?" said Harrie. "Colonel Marchand +speaks as if he wants us to take an interest in the company as part pay +for our work. He seems very enthusiastic over that." + +"His excuse for having us take some shares is that we might possibly +have more interest in the venture," said Ronie. "That stipulation +makes me think there may be some sort of a trap to inveigle us into a +profitless adventure, though I do not think the colonel would do that." + +"You are as well able to judge of that as I am. In regard to the +rubber part of the venture, to use a poor simile, that is very elastic. +Unless you have given the matter some consideration you will not, at +first thought, realize the importance of that commodity, which must +govern the possibilities of the article in the markets. I will +acknowledge that I am very favorably impressed with the idea. Rubber +is fast becoming one of the most important commercial articles in +existence. Turn whichever way you will, do whatever you wish, and you +will almost invariably find that rubber is the most necessary thing +needed. + +"Not only is it used in large quantities toward helping clothe men and +creatures, but it is used in house furnishings, such as mattings for +floors, stairs and platforms, on board of ships, as well as in houses, +and in hundreds of other places. It is utilized largely in the +manufacture of druggists' materials; in the manufacture of all kinds of +instruments and machinery that require pliable bearings and supporters, +printers' rollers, wheel tires, rings on preserve jars. Erasers on +lead pencils call for tons of the article. + +"Then steam mills must have rubber belts, cars rubber bearings, and gas +works call for miles of rubber hose, to say nothing of that used in +gardens and on lawns. Billiard tables alone call for nearly a third of +a million dollars' worth of rubber every year, while over a million +dollars are spent for the rubber used in baseball and football! +Typewriters call for a vast amount; so do the makers of rubber stamps, +water bottles, trimmings for harness, and fittings for pipes of one +kind and another. Altogether, the rubber factories of the United +States alone utilize sixty million pounds of rubber annually. You will +not wonder now if I say that rubber ranks as third among the imports of +the country, and that its handling is one of the most profitable +callings of the day. If this is the electrical age, as it has been +called, it is rubber that makes possible the many applications of +electricity." + +"I had not thought it of such importance," remarked Harrie, frankly. +"Where does it all come from?" + +"A very pertinent question," replied Jack. "Originally it came from +India, hence the name of India rubber, which still clings to it, though +the great bulk now, and that which is of the better quality, comes from +other countries. Foremost among these is South America. It is true a +large amount comes from Central America, the west part of Africa, and +the islands of the Indian Archipelago, but the best rubber comes from +the great belt of lowlands bordering upon the Amazon, the Rio Negro and +the Orinoco, the last named tract lying largely in Southern Venezuela. +This country in many respects is the Eldorado of South America." + +"Then we shall not be going into a country without at least one source +of wealth." + +"No; Venezuela is wonderfully well favored by nature. Capable of +producing abundant supplies of first quality coffee, sugar cane, cocoa +palm and cotton plant, it has its rich gold mines, its mines of +asphalt, affording paving enough for the cities of the world; while +last, but not least, are its rubber forests, which have only very +recently been considered as a valuable and available resource. It is +here American capital has entered the field of conquest." + +"Do you think we had better go there, Jack?" + +"That is a question you must answer yourselves. I know you will not +act hastily, and, having acted, will not regret the step taken." + +"What about the climate, Jack?" asked Harrie. "I believe you have been +there?" + +"Yes, I have been there," replied the other, shaking his grizzled head +slowly, "and it was likely at one stage of the scene that I should stay +there forever. But I am not answering your question. The climate of +South America, as a whole, is not very bad, though much of its +territory lies within the torrid zone. This is largely due to local +modifications. The burning heat of the plains of Arabia is unknown in +the western hemisphere. The hottest region of South America, as far as +I know, is the steppes of Caracas, the capital of Venezuela; but even +there the temperature does not reach a hundred degrees in the shade, +while it rises to one hundred and twelve degrees in the sand deserts +surrounding the Red Sea. In the basin of the Amazon, owing to the +protection of vast forests and the influence of prevailing easterly +winds, offshoots of the trade winds, which follow the great river +nearly to the Andes, the climate is not very hot or unhealthy." + +"What do you say, Ronie? Is it go, or stay here until something else +comes our way?" + +"I will suggest the way I would settle it. Let each one take a slip of +paper, and, without consulting the Others, write upon it his answer. +Whatever two of us shall say to be our decision, to go or to remain +here." + +His companions were nothing loath to agree to this, so paper and +pencils were quickly obtained, and each one wrote his reply. Upon +comparing notes a moment later, it was found that all three had written +the short but decisive word: + +"Go!" + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +A SUSPICIOUS CRAFT. + +"I tell you, boys, there is something wrong about this vessel." + +The speaker was Jack Greenland, and his companions were Ronie and +Harrie, but the scene is now many leagues from the quiet corner where +they took their vote to hazard a journey to the rubber forests of +Venezuela. Instead of the quaint old buildings of Manilla on the one +hand, and the sullen old bay, filled with its odd-looking crafts, on +the other, roll the blue waters of the Caribbean Sea, almost as placid +as the southern sky that bends so benignly over their heads, while they +stand by the taffrail of the rakish ship upon which they have only +recently taken passage to the South American coast. + +To explain in detail this change of base would require too much space. +A few words will suffice to describe the long journey by water and land +necessary to make this stupendous change. In the first place, having +decided unanimously to undertake the trip, they were exceedingly +fortunate in finding that they could leave Manilla within twenty-four +hours by steamer for San Francisco. This required some smart hustling, +but our trio were used to this, and the next morning found them safely +aboard ship, looking hopefully forward to a speedy and safe arrival in +the city of the Golden Gate. In this they were not disappointed, while +the run down the coast to Panama was also made under favorable +conditions. Then the isthmus was crossed with some delay and vexation, +when their adventures and misadventures began in earnest. + +At Colon tidings of war in Venezuela reached them. These being +somewhat indefinite, and the republic in question being a land of +revolutions and uprisings, but little attention was given these vague +reports. They had barely left port, however, before the captain of the +little coastwise vessel declared that they were likely to have trouble. + +The next day they were, indeed, fired upon by a strange craft, and +instead of keeping on toward La Guayra, the port of Caracas, he put to +sea. While bent upon this aimless quest, they were overtaken by a +tropical storm, and were eventually driven upon one of the small isles +forming the lower horn of that huge crescent of sea isles known as the +Windward Islands. From this they managed to reach, after repairing +their damages somewhat, Martinique, where our three heroes were only +too glad to part with such uncertain companions. + +There was a strange ship in this port, which immediately attracted +them. Learning that the captain, though he had taken out papers for +Colon, intended to stop at La Guayra, they engaged passage. At the +outset they had felt some distrust in doing this, while the commander +showed equal hesitation in taking them. Still, it was their only +chance to get away, so they resolved to take their chances, with the +determination to keep their eyes and ears open. Thus they had +frequently expressed the opinion among themselves that they had been +justified in their suspicions, though this was the first outspoken +belief in the fact. + +"I agree with you, Jack," declared Ronie. + +"What have you learned that is new, Jack?" asked Harrie. + +"Enough to confirm what doubts I already had as to her character. +Captain Willis does not intend to put in at La Guayra, as he claimed he +should to us." + +"Perhaps he dares not," said Ronie. + +"Ay, lad, that's where you hit the bull's-eye. He dares not do it." + +"That means either that his intentions are not honest, or that the war +in Venezuela is more than a civil war," said Harrie. + +"Now you've hit the bull's-eye with a double shot. I do not believe he +is honest," nodding in the direction of the commander, "and that this +is an international war!" + +"Whew!" exclaimed the young engineers in the same breath. While both +had really about come to this conclusion, the proposition seemed more +startling when expressed in so many words. + +"Before we fully agree to this," continued Professor Jack, "let's +compare notes. In the first place this vessel before undergoing some +slight alterations came to Martinique as a Colombian vessel, officered +and manned by Englishmen. Upon reaching this island she was +immediately sold, and her English crew discharged. But her captain +remained the same, while she still carried the English colors. The +next day it was claimed she had been again sold, this time passing into +the possession of followers of General Matos, the leader of the +Venezuelan revolutionists. Her English flag was now replaced by the +colors of Venezuela, and she was renamed from the _Ban Righ_ to the +_Libertador_. Can the chameleon beat that in changing colors? It is +my private opinion she is a cruiser in the employ of the insurgents, +and that we are booked for lively times." + +"With small chance of reaching Caracas for a long time, if at all," +added Ronie. + +"How came England to allow such a vessel to leave her port?" asked +Harrie. + +"She must have been deceived as to her real character. Thinking she +was a Colombian ship, and being on peaceful terms with that republic, +she had no business to stop her.[1] Hi! what have we here?" + +Jack's abrupt question was called forth by the sudden appearance almost +by his side of a tall, slender youth, whose tawny skin and dark +features proclaimed that he belonged to the mixed blood of the South +American people. He had risen from the midst of a coil of rope, and in +such close proximity that it was evident he had overheard what had been +said. The three Americans realized their situation, though the opening +speech of the young stranger reassured them. + +"Seņors speak very indiscreetly," he said, "of affairs which they must +know bode them ill, in case their words reach the ears of others." + +"Who are you?" demanded Jack, who was the first to speak. He +remembered having seen this youth among the men on board, but had not +given him any particular notice, although he noticed that he presented +an appearance that showed he did not belong to the class of common +sailors, while dressed no better than the poorest. There was an air of +superiority about him which they did not possess. + +"It is not always well for one to be too outspoken to strangers," he +answered, glancing cautiously about as he said the words. "Even coils +of rope have ears," he added, significantly. + +"You overheard what we said?" queried Jack, who continued to act as +spokesman for the party. + +"_Si, seņor_. I could not help hearing some of it, though you did +speak in a low tone. My ears are very keen, and not every one would +have heard the little I did." + +"It is not well for one to repeat what one hears, sometimes," said +Jack, by way of reply. + +"I have a mind as well as ears, seņors," replied the youth. "While I +can see as well as I can hear, I can think for both eyes and ears. You +are not satisfied with the appearance of the _Libertador_?" + +"I judge you are pretty well informed as to our opinion," replied Jack, +more vexed than he was willing to show that they should have been +caught off their guard. "Listeners are not apt to hear any good of +themselves, we are told." + +"Had I been a spy," retorted the youth, with some animation, "I should +have remained quietly in my concealment, and not shown my head at all, +and most assuredly not when I was likely to hear that which was to +prove the most important." + +"Please explain, then, your motive in addressing us at all." + +"Not here--not now," he answered. "When the Southern Cross appears in +the sky, and the sharp-eyed, doubting Englishman at the head sleeps, I +will meet one of you here, and make plain many things you do not +understand." + +"Why not meet all of us?" demanded Jack, suspiciously. + +"Because one of you in conversation with me would create less suspicion +than all of you would be likely to do. That is my only reason, seņor." + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please," exclaimed Professor +Jack, "there is a bit of common sense in that. One of us will be here, +if we find it convenient." + +"Good, seņor. Now, as we seem to be attracting attention, it may be +well for us to separate. I will be on hand at the appointed time." + +A moment later the unknown youth mingled with the motley crew, leaving +our friends wondering what their meeting with him portended. + +"He seems honest," declared Ronie. + +"He must be half Spaniard, and the other is doubtless something worse, +if that is possible," said Jack, who confessed that he had no liking +for the South American races. + +"Shall we accept his proposition?" asked Harrie. "I will confess I am +curious to know what he has to tell." + +"I do not understand what this disturbance between the countries +means," said Ronie. "When foreign nations take a hand in the affair it +would seem to show that something more serious than a civil revolt is +likely to follow. There could not have been a suspicion of this +outside preparation of war in the United States, or Colonel Marchand +would have known of it. I do not see how this has gone on under the +American eyes." + +"It is probably due to the fact that these republics of South America +are almost continually at war. Venezuela has had a stormy time of it +from the very first. I think one of us had better listen to what this +young Venezuelan has to say. He is evidently not in sympathy with the +commander of this vessel." + +"Who is working in the interest of Matos, the leader of the +revolutionists?" + +"As President Castro is at the head of the government, and the target +for the fire of the whole world at this time." + +It was finally decided that Harrie should meet the stranger at the +appointed time, while Ronie and Jack were to remain nearby to lend +their assistance in case the youth showed any signs of treachery. +Having come to this decision, the three waited, as may be imagined, +with considerable anxiety for the hour to come. + + + +[1] Jack hit nearer the truth than he realized at the time. The _Ban +Righ_ had, in fact, awakened the suspicions of the English authorities, +and the attention of the custom officers was directed to her by the +placing of a searchlight on her foremast. An examination disclosed the +fact that parts of guns and gun-mountings had been stowed away below +deck, where passages had been cut to allow the crew to move about with +facility. She was released and permitted to leave port because the +Colombian official in London claimed that she was being fitted out for +the service of his government. Sailing ostensibly for Colon, she +called at Antwerp, where she was loaded with 175 tons of Mausers and +180 tons of ammunition, besides field guns, billed as "hardware, +musical instruments and kettledrums." She also took on here a French +artillery captain, a doctor, and two sergeants. The guns were mounted +before she reached Martinique, and while there a sham sale was made. +So it will be seen that Jack and the young engineers had ample reason +for mistrusting the vessel whose career reads like a chapter from +romance rather than the actual history of a ship that, possibly, did +more to foment international disputes concerning the Venezuelan war +than anything else.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE YOUNG EXILE. + +The night proved clear and beautiful, a typical southern evening most +fitly closing a day that had been flawless. All the afternoon the sky +and sea, so nearly of the same cerulean hue that where they met they +matched so perfectly as to seem a curtain of the same texture, had +appeared to vie with each other in their placidity, while now the stars +overhead were scarcely brighter than their reflections in the waters +below. On the rim of the distant horizon shone with a soft luster the +glorious radii of the gem of the Antipodes, the Southern Cross. + +Harrie was promptly on hand to keep his meeting with the strange youth, +but no earlier than the other, who greeted him in his musical voice: + +"Seņor is in good season. It is well, for our time cannot be long in +which to talk. While we speak let us walk slowly back and forth, arm +in arm, so we shall not be overheard." + +He spoke in a low tone, a little above a whisper, while Harrie allowed +his arm to be drawn into the other's grasp, though he was very watchful +not to be taken unawares in case of an attack on him. + +"In the first place," said the young Venezuelan, "I judge seņor is +anxious to know who it is who has placed himself in his way. But +before that I would speak of the ship which is at this moment bearing +us whither we fain would not go." + +"What about the ship?" asked Harrie, as he hesitated. "What have you +to say of that?" + +Lowering his voice so our hero could barely catch his words, he said: + +"It is a pirate ship, seņor!" + +Harrie could not repress a low exclamation at this startling +announcement, but he quickly recovered his presence of mind, saying, as +he recalled the wild deeds of Morgan and his freebooters, Conrad and +his Blue Water Rovers, who once boasted dominion over these seas: + +"How can that be?" + +"At least it is outlawed by the Venezuelan Government, and a big reward +offered for its capture. It is a conscript working in the interest of +Matos, the outlaw." + +"Who are you who says this, and how come you by this information? You +appear to be one of the crew; why is this so?" + +"I could answer the last question by asking the same of seņor. I am +here solely with the hope of getting back to my native land, and to the +side of my dear mother. Perhaps you will understand my situation +better when I tell you that I belong to a family that once ruled +Venezuela. The two Guzman Blancos, the elder of whom was an American, +were my ancestors. My name is Francisco de Caprian. My family is +hated by Matos, while father, who is not living now, did something to +incur the displeasure of Castro, so I am in ill-favor all around," he +added, with a smile which disclosed two rows of very white teeth. + +"Notwithstanding this," he added, "I am anxious to get back to Caracas, +to protect my dear mother in these perilous times, and, it may be, +strike one blow more for my country. The De Caprians can trace their +ancestry back to Juan Ampues, who founded the first Spanish settlement +in Venezuela, and one of them was a captain under Bolivar. Whatever +they may say of my family, they have ever been true to their native +land. The illustrious General Blanco did much for downtrodden +Venezuela, if some complained of him. You cannot suit all, seņor, at +the same time. Whither do you wish to go?" + +"To Caracas," replied Harrie. + +"I am glad to hear that, seņor, for it will enable us to join fortunes. +That is, if you do not hesitate to associate with me. I am frank to +say that I am likely to involve you in trouble; but, at the same time, +judging you are strangers there, I may be able to help you. Then, too, +I do not believe they will dare to molest you to any serious extent, so +long as your country is not mixed up in this imbroglio. Yet a South +American aroused is like a wild bull, whose coming actions are not to +be gauged by his former behavior. I never have found an American who +could not take care of himself." + +"Thank you, Seņor Francisco. I trust you have not found one who would +desert a comrade in an hour of need." + +Quick and earnest came the reply, while the young Venezuelan grasped +Harrie's hand. + +"Never, seņor." + +"You shall find my friends and me faithful to our promises." + +"I was confident of that, or I should not have dared to address you. +Believe me, the risk was greater than you may realize. Were my +identity to become known on this ship I have no doubt but I should be +hung at the yardarm, or shot down like a brute, within an hour." + +The youthful speaker showed great earnestness, and with what appeared +to be genuine honesty and candor. At any rate, Harrie was fain to +believe in his honor, and without further delay related enough of his +experiences for the other to understand the situation of his friends +and himself. + +"I was very sure you were here involuntarily," said Francisco, when he +had finished. "It is likely we can be of service to each other. From +what I have been able to pick up, we are to coast along the shore of +Venezuela, leaving here and there arms and ammunition for Matos and his +insurgents. It is possible we shall stop at Maracaibo. In case we do +so, that will be the place for us to leave the _Libertador_. If there +is a chance before, we shall be remiss as to our personal welfare if we +do not discover and improve it. The eyes of the watch are upon us," he +said, in a lower tone, "and we had better separate. Keep your eyes and +ears open until we have opportunity to speak to each other again." + +Before Harrie could reply, the other had slipped away, and he was fain +to return to his companions, whom he found anxiously awaiting him. In +a few words he apprized them of what had passed between him and the +young Venezuelan outlaw, Francisco de Caprian. + +"His words only confirm what we had concluded, and for that I am +inclined to believe the young man in part, at least. I was in +Venezuela at the time of the downfall of that pompous patriot Guzman +Blanco, and I knew something of the De Caprians. Possibly it was this +fellow's father who was mixed up in the muddle, and who was killed, +according to report, soon after I got away. Mind you, I say this, but +it will be well for us if we are careful whom we trust. In Venezuela +every man is a revolutionist, and where revolutions reign the +sacredness of human faith is lost. As we seem to be in for our share +of lively times, it may be well for us to look at the situation +intelligently." + +"I am surprised at the small amount I know of these South American +republics," declared Harrie. "Though they are much nearer to us, I +really know far less of them than I do of European nations of to-day, +or the ancient empires that crumbled away long years ago." + +"It is usually so," replied Jack. "It is a trait of human nature to be +reaching after the things beyond our reach, while we push right over +those near us. The history of South America is a most interesting one, +but the most interesting chapter is close at hand, when out of the +crude material shall crystallize a government and a people that shall +place themselves among the powers of the world. I should not know as +much as I do of Venezuela if it had not been for the two years I spent +there quite recently--years I am not likely to forget." + +"Ojeda, the Spanish adventurer who followed Columbus, named the country +Venezuela, which means "Little Venice," from the fact that he found +people living in houses built on piles, which suggested to him the +'Queen of the Adriatic,'" said Ronie. + +"Very true," argued [Transcriber's note: agreed?} Jack. "These were +natives living about Lake Maracaibo, but the name was extended to cover +the whole country, though its original inhabitants did not, as a whole, +live in dwellings on poles, and move about in canoes. This Alonso de +Ojeda carried back to his patrons much gold and many pearls that he +stole from the simple but honest natives." + +"If I am not mistaken, Vespucci, who had so much to do with naming the +new continent,[1] accompanied Ojeda's expedition," said Harrie. + +"Very true," replied Jack. "I am glad to think that he was more humane +than the majority of the early discoverers, who treated the natives so +cruelly. The Indians of this country were not only rapidly despoiled +of their gold and pearls, but they were themselves inhumanly butchered +or seized and sold into captivity. The result was they soon became +bitter enemies to the newcomers, who thus found colonization and +civilization not only difficult but dangerous. Among those of a kinder +heart who came here was Juan Ampues, whom your young friend, Harrie, +claims was an ancestor of his. Ampues succeeded, through his kindness, +in winning over the natives to his side, and he was thus enabled to +found the first settlement in Venezuela. This was in 1527, and the +town whose foundations he laid still exists under the name he gave it, +Santa Ana de Coro. But for the most part the Spaniards treated the +Indians in a brutal manner, and in the end the unfortunate race was +looted and slain." + +"But I have read that the people of Venezuela fell into worse hands +when the country was leased for a while to the Germans," said Ronie. + +"Right!" declared Jack, earnestly. "You are evidently well posted on +history. Germany's hold was broken in 1546, but it took two hundred +years to conquer and settle Venezuela, while all the slaughter of human +lives and vast outlay of wealth proved in the end a poor investment for +old Spain. One by one her American dependencies have slipped away from +her control, and Venezuela has the honor of being the first to gain her +freedom from Old World tyranny. + +"The first effort to break the chains was made in 1797. This was +unsuccessful, and another attempt was made in 1806, this time by +General Francisco Miranda, who invaded Venezuela with an expedition +organized in the United States, This revolution was successful only so +far as it served to awaken the people to the possibility that lay +before them. The prime opportunity came when Napoleon dethroned +Ferdinand of Spain, and the inhabitants of this dependency declared +that they would not submit to this Napoleonic usurpation. Though this +movement was made under a claim of allegiance to the deposed king of +Spain, he was incapable of seeing that it was for his interest to stand +by them, so he renounced their declaration. The result was another +declaration made on July 5, 1811, a declaration of independence and a +constitution in some respects like ours." + +"It seems a bit strange that they should have an independence day that +comes so close to ours," said Harrie. + +"Yes; and it is quite as singular that the first blow for liberty was +struck by their ancestors on the same day in April that our forefathers +fired their opening guns upon the British at Concord and Lexington," +replied Jack. + +"What means that confusion and those loud voices upon the deck?" asked +Ronie, as they were arrested in the midst of their conversation by the +sounds of a great commotion having suddenly begun over their heads. + +"There is something new afoot!" declared Jack. "It sounds as if there +was going to be a fight. Follow me, and we will find out what it +means." + + + +[1] Our geographies were wont to credit this nobleman with having given +his name to the continent, but modern research has shown this to be an +error. The country was already called by the native inhabitants +Amarca, or America, which Vespucci very appropriately retained in his +written account of the New World, the first that was given to the +scholars of that day. From this fact his name became associated with +that country, and he became known as "Amerigo" Vespucci, which was very +appropriate, though his real name was Albertigo. Later writers, +without stopping to investigate, declared that the continent had been +named for him, and in that way others accepted the mistake as a fact. +The truth is the name of "America" is older and grander than that of +any of those who followed in the train of Columbus, and was that +appellation given it by the ancient Peruvians, the most highly +civilized people on the Western Continent at the coming of the Great +Discoverer.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +PUT IN IRONS. + +As the three hurried to the deck of the _Libertador_ they found the +noise and confusion increasing, though the seamen were fast falling +into their line of duty with greater regularity. Captain Willis was on +hand giving out his orders in his brusque manner. + +"Where away has it been sighted, lookout?" called the commander. + +"Off our windward quarter, captain." + +"Maintain your watch, sir, and report if there is any change." + +"They have sighted land," whispered Jack. "It must be one of the +islands lying off the Venezuelan coast." + +Both of his companions could not help feeling a thrill of pleasure at +this announcement, while they hoped it might lead to their speedy +escape from their present uncertain situation. But, from their +position, no trace of the looked-for shore could be discovered, and it +is safe to say no three upon the vessel watched and waited for the +morning light with greater anxiety than the two young engineers and +their faithful companion. + +At different intervals the lookout announced the situation as viewed +from his vantage ground, but no satisfactory word came until the dawn +of day, when even those upon deck saw in plain sight the shore of one +of the tropical islands dotting the sea. + +While our friends were looking on the scene with intense interest, +Francisco de Caprian passed by them, whispering as he did so: + +"The island of Curacao. It looks as though we were going to touch at +the port." + +He did not stop for any reply from our party, but Jack said to his +companions a moment later: + +"If I am not mistaken Curacao belongs to the Dutch. It is about fifty +miles from the Venezuelan coast, and westward of Caracas." + +"Which means that we have passed the line of that city," said Ronie. + +"Exactly." + +"Had we better try and land here?" + +"I am in doubt. Perhaps young De Caprian will be able to advise us. +There is no doubt but they intend to stop here." + +This was now evident to his companions, and half an hour was filled +with the exciting emotions of entering harbor after a voyage at sea. +As they moved slowly toward the pier it became evident that they had +been expected, for, early as it was, quite a throng of spectators were +awaiting them, and among the crowd were to be seen a small body of +troops. + +At this moment Francisco managed to pause a minute beside them, saying: + +"They are stopping here to take off one of Matos' officers. The island +seems to have been turned into a sort of recruiting ground for the +insurgents." + +"Aren't the Dutch neutral in this quarrel?" + +"They are supposed to be, but it is my opinion considerable secret +assistance is being given the insurgents from Europe--particularly from +the Germans. But I shall create suspicion if I talk longer. Above +all, appear to be indifferent to whatever may take place." + +"You do not think we had better try and leave the vessel here?" + +"You could not if you would. Every movement of yours is watched. Be +careful what you say or----" + +Francisco de Caprian did not stop to finish his sentence, though his +unspoken words were very well understood by the anxious trio, who saw +him among the most active of the mixed crew a moment later. + +Then they were witnesses of the embarkation of a small squad of +Venezuelan soldiers under charge of an officer who appeared in a +supercilious mood. + +"Whoever he is," whispered Jack, "he stands pretty near the head, and +he evidently intends that every one shall know it. Our stop is going +to be short. Well, the shorter the better, perhaps, for us. If we +should succeed in getting ashore we should find ourselves in the power +of the insurgents, which, it may be, we are at present," he added, with +a smile. "All we can do is to keep our eyes open and await further +developments." + +Jack realized that his companions knew this as well as he, so he did +not expect a reply, while they watched the following scenes in silence. +They saw the last of the little party of insurgents on shipboard, and +soon after the _Libertador_ was once more ploughing her way through the +blue water of the Caribbean. Their course was now south-southwest, but +nothing occurred during the rest of the day to break the monotony of +the voyage. The newcomers went below immediately, so that our friends +saw nothing of them. Toward night Francisco found opportunity to speak +a few words to the three. + +"We are steering directly for the Venezuelan shore," he said. "I +overheard Captain Willis say that he intended to land somewhere near +Maracaibo, where, I judge, our passengers are going. We may find +opportunity to escape then." + +"Do you think we shall touch port again soon?" asked Ronie. + +"The officer and his followers whom we took aboard at Curacao are to be +left somewhere near Maracaibo. That is all I have been able to learn. +They are extremely careful what they say." + +The following morning it was found that the _Libertador_ was flying +signals, which Jack declared were intended to attract the insurgents. + +"Mark my words, we are approaching the shore so closely that we shall +soon sight land." + +Jack proved himself a true prophet, but before this announcement came +from the lookout, something of a more startling nature took place. +About an hour after sunrise the sail of a small coastwise vessel was +sighted, and within another hour the stranger had been so closely +overtaken that she was hailed in no uncertain tones. + +The reply was uttered in defiance, and the sloop showed that she was +crowding ahead with all the speed she could, a steady breeze lending +its favor. But it soon became evident that it would be a short race, +and then the bow-chaser of the _Libertador_ was brought to bear upon +the fugitive. + +As the first shot our heroes had heard in the war rang out over the +sea, and the leaden messenger struck in close proximity to its target, +the strange sloop was seen to soon slacken its flight. A few minutes +later, in answer to the stentorian command of Captain Willis, she lay +to. + +"It is war in earnest," said Harrie, as they saw a boat let down from +the cruiser, and the second officer, accompanied by half a dozen men, +started toward the prize. "I wonder what they will do with the sloop +now she has capitulated?" + +"We shall know as soon as the mate and his men return," replied Jack. + +It proved in the end that an officer and half a dozen men were sent +from the _Libertador_ to take charge of the captured sloop, which took +an opposite course from that pursued by her captor. The latter +continued along the coast, flying her signals, but did not offer to +touch shore until Jack assured his companions that they must be near to +Maracaibo. Then an unexpected thing happened. Though aware that they +were continually under close surveillance, they had not been molested +in any way until now they were ordered below. Upon showing a little +hesitation in obeying, Ronie Rand was sent headlong to the deck by a +blow from one of the sailors, sent to see that the order was carried +out. + +"Our only way is to obey at present," whispered Jack, leading the way +to their berths below, followed by their enemies. They were left here +by the latter. For a little time the three remained silent, each busy +with his own thoughts. Finally Harrie said: + +"This begins to look serious. Why is it done?" + +"It looks to me as if they were afraid we might try to leave them as +soon as we come to port, and they have taken this precaution." + +"What can they wish to keep us for?" asked Ronie. "We have been of no +benefit to them." + +"True. But they may possibly fear to let us go free, as we are +Americans, and would be likely to inform our government about some +things they think we may have learned of them." + +"Hark! I believe they are coming back." + +While this did not prove true at the time, it was less than an hour +later when an officer, with four companions, did visit them, the former +saying he had received orders to put them in irons. + +Upon listening to this announcement, the three looked upon their +captors and then each upon his companions, Unable, at first, to +comprehend the statement. + +"Why should we be accorded such treatment?" demanded Jack. "We have +done no harm to any one, but have come and remained as peaceful +citizens of a country that has no trouble with your government or its +subjects." + +The officer shook his head, as much as to say: "I know nothing of this. +My orders must be obeyed." Then he motioned for his men to carry out +their purpose. + +Although they were not armed, except for their small firearms, and the +Venezuelans carried heavy pistols and cutlasses, the first thought that +flashed simultaneously through the minds of our heroes was the idea +that they could overpower the party, and thus escape the indignity +about to be heaped upon them. But, fortunately, as later events +proved, the calmer judgment of Jack prevailed. If they succeeded in +overpowering these men, they must stand a slim chance of escaping. In +fact, it would be folly to hope for it under the present conditions. +Thus they allowed the irons to be clasped upon their wrists and about +their ankles. This task, which did not seem an unpleasant one to them, +accomplished to their satisfaction, the men returned to the deck, +leaving our friends prisoners amid surroundings which seemed to make +their situation hopeless. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +ESCAPE FROM THE LIBERTADOR. + +During the hours which followed--hours that seemed like ages--the +imprisoned trio were aware of a great commotion on deck, and Jack +assured his companions that the _Libertador_ had come to anchor. + +"We are in some port near Maracaibo," he said. "I feel very sure of +that." + +"If we were only free," said Harrie, "there might be a possibility that +we could get away. It begins to look as if we are not going to regain +our freedom." + +"I wish we had resisted them," exclaimed the more impulsive Ronie. "I +know we could have overpowered them." + +"It would have done no good in the end," replied Jack. "In fact, it +would have worked against us in almost any turn affairs may take. In +case we do escape, we shall be able to show that we have not given +cause for this treatment. The United States Government will see that +we are recompensed for this." + +"If we live to get out of it," said Ronie. + +"That is an important consideration, I allow," declared Jack. "But I +never permit myself to worry over my misfortunes. So long as there is +life there is hope." + +"I wonder if Francisco knows of this," said Ronie. + +"If he does, and he must learn of it sooner or later, he will come to +us if it is in his power," replied Harrie, whose faith in the outlawed +Venezuelan was greater than his companions'. + +Some time later, just how long they had no way of knowing, it became +evident to them that the _Libertador_ was again upon the move. Whither +were they bound? No one had come near them, and so long had they been +without food and drink that they began to feel the effects. Had they +been forgotten by their captors, or was it a premeditated plan to kill +them by starvation and thirst? Such questions as these filled their +minds and occupied most of their conversation. + +"I wonder where Colonel Marchand thinks we are?" asked Harrie. + +"I tell you what let's do, boys," suggested the fertile Jack Greenland. +"Let's remind them that we are human beings, and that we must have food +and drink or perish. Now, together, let us call for water!" + +The young engineers were not loath to do this, and a minute later, as +with one voice that rang out loud and deep in that narrow place of +confinement, they shouted three times in succession: + +"Water! water! water!" + +This cry they repeated at intervals for the next half hour without +bringing any one to their side, when they relapsed into silence. But +it was not long before an officer and two companions brought them both +food and drink. They partook of these while their captors stood grimly +over them, ready to return the irons to their wrists as soon as they +had finished their simple meal. The only reply they could get to their +questions was an ominous shake of the head from the leader of the +party. So Jack gave up, and he and his companions relapsed into +silence which was not broken until the disappearance of the men. + +"This beats everything I ever met with," declared Jack, "though I must +confess I have been in some peculiar situations in my time." + +Nothing further occurred to break the monotony of their captivity for +what they judged to be several hours. Then they suddenly became aware +of a person approaching them in a stealthy manner. At a loss to know +who could be creeping upon them in such a manner, they could only +remain silent till the mystery should be solved. This was done in a +most unexpected way by a voice that had a familiar sound to it, though +it spoke scarcely above a whisper: + +"Have no fear, seņors, it is I." + +The speaker was Francisco de Caprian, and he was not long in gaining +their side. + +"How fares it with you, seņors?" + +"Poorly," replied Jack, speaking for his captors as well as himself. +"What does this mean?" + +"I cannot stop to explain now. This ship is now bound to Porto +Colombia for some repairs. It stopped off Maracaibo to land General +Riera and his staff. From what I have overheard the present commander +will leave her there, and one of Matos' more intimate followers will +become the captain. It is possible we may fare better in Porto +Colombia than out to sea here. But I am not certain. The captain +seems concerned over what to do with you, and desperate measures may be +carried out. I cannot say. But one fact remains. Every moment we are +being carried farther and farther from Caracas. As far as I could I +have arranged for immediate flight. I have bribed a sailor, who will +help us get a boat. The night promises to be dark, which will +materially aid us in escaping. But there is a lookout who stands in +fear of his life lest he lets anything pass his gaze. It is not more +than an even chance that we can succeed in evading him and the others. +Do you care to take that chance with me, seņors, or remain here and +possibly escape with more or less harm?" + +"For one," said Ronie, "I am in favor of getting away as soon as +possible." + +"Will it be possible for us to take our trunk with us?" asked Harrie. +"We can ill afford to lose that." + +"I thought as much, seņor," replied Francisco. "I think we can manage +to take it along." + +Though it was too dark for them to see the countenance of their +companion, the young engineers looked anxiously toward him while they +waited for his answer. Jack spoke in a moment: + +"I know how you feel, boys, and I think I have some of that spirit +myself. I have always found, too, that the bold dash for freedom +always counted best. If you think we had better take our chances now, +I am with you, by the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please!" + +"Good!" exclaimed Harrie and Ronie together. "You hear, Francisco, +that we are going with you?" + +"_Si, seņors_. We will begin at once. For I will free you from those +irons. Then you must follow my directions to the letter." + +While he was speaking Francisco began to work upon the manacles upon +Ronie's wrists, and he showed that he had come prepared for his task, +as inside of five minutes the three were free, very much to their +relief. + +"Now," said Francisco, "you had better remain quietly here for what you +judge to be an hour. Then you come upon deck, being careful to get +astern without being seen. During this interval of waiting I will have +a boat in readiness, and be prepared to lower your chest into it at +short notice. You will have to bring this with you, and if it is too +heavy to handle easily and rapidly, I should advise you to remove +whatever of its contents you can spare. You understand?" + +"We do, Francisco, and we will not fail to be on hand." + +"I will be there to assist you. In case I fail to accomplish my +purpose in getting the boat, you will hear an alarm, in which case you +had better replace your irons and stay where you are until the +excitement blows over. Under these circumstances it will be for your +interest to look out for yourselves, as you will know that I cannot +help you." + +"We shall not desert you," replied the young engineers, while they +clasped his hands as he started to leave them. + +"He is a brave fellow, and thoroughly unselfish," said Harrie. + +Exchanging now and then a few words, they waited and listened while the +silence remained unbroken. At times the sound of footsteps reached +their ears, and constantly the steady swish of waters, but nothing to +warn them that the plans of Francisco had miscarried. + +"The hour must be passed," declared Jack at last. + +"And we must be moving," added Ronie. + +"Can you find your chest easily?" asked the first. + +"I think so," replied Harrie. "Follow me." + +The next five minutes were occupied in reaching the deck with their +burden. Upon feeling the salt sea breath the three breathed easier, +while they glanced about to see if the way was clear. As Francisco had +prophesied, the night was quite dark, though there were signs in the +west that the clouds were breaking away. No one was to be seen nearby, +and silently the three stole along toward the place where they expected +to meet Francisco, bearing the chest containing the instruments, charts +and papers of the young engineers. Fortunately, this was small, as +they had not taken more than was necessary. + +Harrie and Ronie bore this between them, while Jack followed with every +sense strained to catch the first sight or hear the first movement of +their enemies. In this way they had passed half the distance, and had +caught a glimpse of one ahead whom they believed to be their friend, +when a sharp voice rang out an alarm that for a moment fairly took away +their breath. Before they had fairly recovered the cry was answered +from the fore part of the vessel, and they realized that their flight +had been discovered. + +"Quick, seņors!" called Francisco. "In a moment we shall be too late." + +Ronie and Harrie quickened their advance, while Jack prepared to meet +the enemy hand-to-hand, if it should be necessary, while he kept close +beside his companions. + +"The boat is ready," said Francisco. "Let me fasten the rope about the +chest. If we can lower that before they get here, we will give them +the slip." + +Already they could hear the crew of the _Libertador_ rushing wildly +about, uttering confusing cries, which told that they had little idea +of what was taking place, the majority doubtless thinking they had been +attacked by some unknown and mysterious foes. Above this medley of +voices rang the stern command of the captain, trying to bring order out +of the excitement. + +Francisco had now arranged the rope about the chest, and then it was +lowered down the ship's side, rapidly, hand over hand. + +"They are coming!" exclaimed Jack, hoarsely. "If I only had a weapon +of some kind I would show them the mettle of my arm." + +"Over the rail!" said Francisco, and he and Harrie shot down the line +at a furious rate. But before Ronie and Jack could follow they found +their retreat cut off, and themselves confronted by a dozen armed men, +with others coming swiftly toward the scene. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +A SWIM FOR LIFE. + +Thinking that his friends were close beside him, Harrie dropped into +the boat arranged for their flight. At the same moment Francisco +landed in the bow of the slight craft rocking at its moorings, while +flashes of light and wild orders of men under the stress of great +excitement came from the deck of the _Libertador_. + +"Are you all here?" asked the young Venezuelan, while he looked +hurriedly upward to the scene of excitement Over their heads, rather +than about him. + +"Jack and Ronie are not here!" replied Harrie. "Hark! That must be +them engaged in a hand-to-hand fight." + +"We must cut loose!" exclaimed Francisco, through his clinched teeth. +"Some of them are coming over the rail!" + +"Boat ahoy!" thundered a stentorian voice from the vessel. + +Francisco was in the act of cutting the boat adrift at that moment, and +before the sound of the speaker's voice had died away the fugitives +were several yards astern. + +"Ply the oars, for your life!" said Francisco. "Our lives depend on +our work for the next few minutes." + +Loath as he was to make this flight without his friends, it was really +all that Harrie could do, and he lent his arm to that of his companion, +and with each stroke of the oar they were taken farther and farther +from the scene of wild commotion reigning upon the deck of the outlawed +ship. + +"They are laying to," panted Francisco. "They have sighted us, and +boats will be lowered to give us pursuit. Ha! that shows they mean +business." + +A volley of firearms at that instant awoke the night scene, +illuminating the sea for a considerable distance. But the shots flew +wide of their mark, though the light from the guns had disclosed their +position, so the following volley whistled uncomfortably near. A +darkness deeper than ever succeeded the discharge of firearms, and +under this cover the fugitives managed to get beyond range before the +third volley could be sent after them. + +Harrie had improved the passing gleams to look for Ronie and Jack, but +he had failed to learn aught of their fates, and his heart was very +heavy, as he concluded that he alone had been permitted to escape. +Francisco was silently bending over his oar, sending the boat swiftly +through the water into the unknown dangers that must lie in their +pathway. + +Meanwhile, how has it fared with Jack and Ronie, who found their escape +cut off at the very moment they were about to follow their companions? + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please!" gritted the first, +seizing upon a stout lever that some one had dropped nearby, and which +promised to be a formidable club when wielded by his nervous arms, +"when ye keelhaul old Jack Greenland ye'll hear Gabriel's trumpet +sounding not far away!" + +Then, as the mob rushed forward, he sprang in front of Ronie, who had +suddenly found himself flung back from the ship's rail, to be sent +headlong to the deck, and swinging his primitive weapon over his head +he mowed down a semi-circle of the seamen as if he was cutting a swath +of grain. By that time Ronie, whose determined nature was aroused by +this rough treatment, was upon his feet, holding in his right hand a +serviceable small arm that he had been able to pick up. + +Shots were fired upon them by the crew of the _Libertador_, but, +fortunately, the assailants proved but poor marksmen. One burly +ruffian attempting to fell Ronie, the latter pointed at his body and +discharged his firearm. At least he cocked the weapon and pulled the +trigger, but it failed to respond. Realizing that it was empty, he +used it as a club, and a moment later had cleared his path of the big +seaman. At that moment Jack cried out: + +"Quick--into the sea!" + +An instant later their forms disappeared over the rail, and they shot +headforemost into the water. Almost simultaneously with their escape +the deck where they had just stood swarmed with the armed rabble. + +Ronie for a brief while lost consciousness, and then the voice of Jack +came faintly to his ears: + +"Where are you, lad?" + +"Here, Jack." + +"Good! I will be with you in a minute. Drop astern as fast as you +can." + +Ronie was a good swimmer, and as soon as he had recovered from the +shock of his headlong leap from the vessel he gathered himself +together, and when Jack came alongside he felt equal to the task which +seemed to lie ahead. + +"Are you hurt, my lad?" asked Jack. + +"No, Jack." + +"Then keep beside me, and mind that you do not waste any of your +strength, for if we do not find Harrie and the boat it is likely to be +a long swim." + +"Where can he be? I believe they are lowering a boat from the ship." + +"Let them lower away, lad. It'll be a long chase before they overhaul +us. Let's keep a little more to the right, for the boat has in all +probability gone that way, if they got away. I am not sure they did, +but it looked like it." + +Then, the cries of the excited officers and crew of the _Libertador_ +growing fainter, as they swam on and on, Ronie and Jack steadily forged +ahead, peering with anxious gaze into the gloom about them for a sight +of their friends. + +At the end of an hour the dark hulk of the _Libertador_ had faded from +view, and no more did the shouts of the exasperated men on board reach +their ears, while they, feeling the fearful strain upon them, moved +slowly through the water, hope slowly dying out in their breasts. + +"We shall not find them!" declared Ronie. + +"We must!" said Jack. "Let's shout to them again, now, together: + +"Boat a-h-o-y!" + +As they had done a dozen times before without receiving any welcoming +reply, they sent their united voices far out over the sea, shimmering +now in the starlight. Still no response--no sound to break the +dreadful silence of their watery surroundings. + +"My old arms are not quite tired out yet, lad; hold upon me." + +"No--no, Jack. I am young and strong. I can bear up a while longer. +If I only knew Harrie had escaped I should feel better." + +"We can only hope that they have, and fight for our lives a little +longer." + +Nothing more was said for some time, while they continued their battle +with the sea, each stroke of the arm leaving them a little weaker, +until it seemed to the castaways that they could not hold up much +longer. + +"The race is almost over, lad," said Jack, at last. "I feel worse for +you than for myself. You have been a true boy. It does not matter so +much with an old wornout veteran like me, but you are----" + +"Look, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, in the midst of his speech. "I believe +that is the boat!" + +His companion glanced in the direction pointed out by Ronie, and a glad +cry escaped his lips. + +"Boat, ahoy!" he cried. "Help! H-e-l-p!" + +Then they listened for a reply, fearing lest the other should fail to +catch their faint appeal, for both were so hoarse and exhausted that +their united voices could not reach far. + +"It is a sloop," declared Jack. "It is coming straight down upon us. +They cannot miss us--ay, they are veering away! They have not heard +us--they have not seen us--they are going to pass us. Once again, lad, +shout for your life. It is our only hope." + +Never did two poor mortals appeal with greater desperation for succor, +and a moment later a low cry of rejoicing left their sea-wet lips as +the reply rang over the water in a piercing tone: + +"Ahoy--there! Where away?" + +"Here--to your lee!" replied the castaways, and then, quite overcome, +they suddenly lost consciousness. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +TAKEN ASHORE. + +Neither Jack or Ronie had a full realization of what followed. The +sound of a voice that seemed to be muffled rang dimly in their ears, +and soon after strong arms lifted them bodily from the water, to place +them in the bottom of a boat. Some one spoke in a language they could +not understand, when the boat started back to the larger craft awaiting +its return. By the time they had been taken upon the deck of this +strange sloop both had recovered sufficiently to understand their +situation. + +A motley-looking crew stood around them, but they did not give these +particular attention at the time, as one who was in command immediately +caught their notice. He was a stout-framed, bewhiskered man of middle +age, and in spite of his foreign dress, plainly an American. But he +seemed to be the only American on board the sloop. Prefacing his +question with an oath, he demanded: + +"Who are you, and where did you come from?" + +Understanding the suspicious character of the _Libertador_, Jack was +wise enough not to acknowledge that they had come from that vessel +until he should deem it good policy to do so. Accordingly he answered: + +"We are two castaways who fell overboard from a ship just out from +Maracaibo." + +"Pretty seamen!" declared the other, showing that he scouted the idea. +"Is it a trick of yours to fall overboard every time you step on deck?" + +"We were only passengers," replied Jack. "As you will see, like +yourself, we are Americans, who have come to this country with peaceful +intentions." + +"As if anybody was peaceful at such a time as this. What are your +names?" + +"Mine is Jack Greenland, and my friend's is Roland Rand," replied Jack, +respectfully. + +"Names are nothing," grunted the other. "You look like drowned rats. +If you will go below with one of the men he will see that you have a +change of clothing." + +"We do not care for that, sir, Captain----" + +"Captain Hawkins, sirrah. If you prefer wet duds to dry ones it is not +my fault. Shift for yourselves while I look after my men, who are as +lazy a lot of devils as ever swore in Spanish." + +Jack and Ronie were in a dilemma. While they hesitated about arousing +further the other regarding their identity, it seemed cowardly not to +say or do something for Harrie and Francisco, whom they believed afloat +in the boat, though not certain of this. Exchanging a few hurried +words, Jack then ventured to address the captain again, though he felt +he was treading upon dangerous ground. There was that air of mystery +about the sloop and those who manned her, which already created a +feeling in the breasts of our twain of doubt as to the honesty of the +craft. What was this single American doing in these waters with a +Venezuelan crew, not one of whom did they believe could speak a word of +English, and certainly not one of whom appeared as if he would shrink +from cutting a man's throat in case that person stood between him and +any purpose he may have had in view. + +"Captain Hawkins," said Jack, frankly and fearlessly, "we wish to ask +whither you are bound. We realize we are under great favor to you, but +we are very anxious to learn the fate of a couple of friends whom we +have reason to believe were adrift at the time we found ourselves in +the sea." + +"Humph!" grunted the captain. "I should like to know what you expect +of me. You may thank your stars that I am an American, as that fact +alone has spared your lives." + +"For which we are very grateful. But for the sake----" + +"If you haven't been on this craft long enough to know that I am her +master it's because you ---- ---- idiots, and fit food for the fishes +only. I will leave you at the first sod of earth that I see. Is that +enough?" + +It was a trying situation. It was evident that it would be worse than +useless to continue this subject under his present mood. + +"They are better off than we were," declared Jack, aside to Ronie. +"That is, if they really gained the boat." + +"I would give a good deal to know," said Ronie. + +"Captain Hawkins is tacking ship," declared Jack, a moment later. + +"What does that mean?" + +"I cannot tell, unless, by the great horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you +please! he means to keep his word, and run us ashore at the first point +of land to be reached." + +"That will take us away from Harrie," said Ronie. + +"Too true, lad; too true!" + +"Jack, what do you make of Captain Hawkins and his men?" + +"They are greater mysteries to me than the officers and crew of the +_Libertador_. I set them down at once as pirates, but these fellows +stump me out of my boots. All we can do is to watch and wait. They +have done us one good turn, anyway." + +Standing by the rail of this strange sloop, Jack and Ronie watched in +silence the scenes that followed. Dark clouds had again risen on the +sky, obscuring the stars in the west, while throwing a gloom over the +sea far and wide. Captain Hawkins paid no further attention to them, +but appeared oblivious of their presence. + +"Are all of the ships that ply in these waters like those we have +found?" asked Ronie, in a low tone. + +"Not all, lad," replied Jack; "but I fear by far too many have followed +in the wake of Sir Henry Morgan and his buccaneers. By my faith, lad, +we must be going over very nearly the same course pursued by that +infamous outlaw of the sea when he sailed with his expedition to sack +the coast of Venezuela in the last half of the seventeenth century. In +1668 he captured the important city of Puerto Bello, the booty obtained +amounting to over 250,000 pieces of eight, to say nothing of rich +merchandise and precious gems. Encouraged in his unholy warfare by +these ill-gotten gains, he rallied his lawless forces for another raid. +So, early in 1669, he sailed with fifteen vessels and 800 men in this +direction, making the rich city of Maracaibo his object. Again success +came to him, and at that city and Panama he reaped a greater harvest of +spoils than he had done at Puerto Bello. But this time Spain had got +wind of his intentions, and sent a mighty squadron to intercept and +capture him. At last it seemed as though the bold outlaw must yield, +but his daring stood him still in hand, and by a sudden and unexpected +swoop upon his unsuspecting foe he carried confusion and dismay into +their midst, burning several of their ships and actually routing the +fleet. There was still a blockading fort to pass, but throwing his +colors to the breeze, now bearing directly down upon the guns, and then +veering off, he succeeded in running the gantlet without the loss of a +vessel. + +"As may be imagined, Morgan was king of the buccaneers now. Did he +need more men he had but to say so, and they flocked to his standard by +scores. So a year later, in command of thirty-seven vessels and over +two thousand men, he started upon the most difficult and the most +audacious expedition ever planned by the wild outlaws of this coast. +The outcome was too horrible to contemplate. The Spaniards fought +well, for their all was at stake, but against the demoniac followers of +a man who knew neither mercy nor hesitation in carrying out his +infamous purposes. Panama was laid in ruins, and her unhappy +inhabitants were nearly all inhumanly butchered or spared to fates even +worse. Following this terrible expedition, the infamous leader was +knighted by an infamous king, and for a time it seemed as if his evil +deeds were to bear him only fruits of contented peacefulness. But it +was not long before his old spirit began to reassert itself, he fell +into trouble, was seized for some of his crimes, thrown into prison, +where his history ends in oblivion." + +Ronie was about to speak, when the cry of "land--oh!" came from the +lookout, when their attention was quickly turned toward a dark line +that had seemed to come up on the distant horizon. + +"The sloop is about to lay to," declared Jack. + +"And it looks as if they were going to lower a boat," added Ronie. + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! that is what they are +doing. I wonder what is on hand now?" + +They were kept in suspense but a short time, when Captain Hawkins +approached them, saying: + +"Whatever else Jerome Hawkins may have to answer for, it cannot be said +that he ever failed to keep his word. You said you wanted to go to +Venezuela. Yonder lies its shore, and I bid you a hearty God-speed. +No thanks, sirrah," as Jack was about to speak, "you go your way and +I'll go mine." + +Without further words he turned upon his heel, and our twain had no +further opportunity to exchange speech with him. A moment later they +were ordered by gestures more forcible than speech to enter the boat, +and knowing they could do no better, they obeyed. A crew of four +accompanied them, and in a short time the keel of the boat grated upon +the sandy shore of a point of land jutting out into the sea. + +Understanding what was expected of them, and knowing it would avail +nothing to resist, Jack and Ronie sprang out upon the land. Without +even a parting gesture, the boatmen started upon their return to the +sloop, whose dark hull loomed up gloomily in the distance. So intense +was the feeling of the utter loneliness hanging over the hapless couple +that neither of them spoke until they had seen the boat reach the +strange sloop and the four seamen climb to the deck, when Jack said: + +"Well, my lad, we are in Venezuela at last." + +"But how different is our coming from what we had expected." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +JAGUAR CLAWS. + +Jack Greenland made no reply to the remark of Ronie. In fact, there +did not seem anything for him to say by way of answer. They saw that +the country which lay back of them appeared barren and desolate. A few +sickly shrubs pushed their crabbed heads above the sand dunes, but as +far as they could see in the night the country was nearly level, and +nothing more inviting than a sandy plain. The only cheerful sight that +greeted their gaze was the crimson streak marking the eastern horizon, +and which announced the breaking of a new day. + +"I would give a good deal to know where Harrie is at this moment," said +Ronie. + +"We can only hope that he is able to look after himself," replied Jack. +"And we can only make the most of our situation. As for me, I feel +better on this sand bar than I have felt on board such ships as we have +known since leaving Colon." + +"If this is a sample of Venezuela," said Ronie, "I am heartily sick of +it already." + +"It is not. From what Captain Hawkins said, I judge we are on or near +the shore, where the narrow tongue of water connects Lake Maracaibo +with the sea. If this is the case we are twenty miles from the city. +The lake is about one hundred and twenty miles long and ninety miles +wide." + +"But there must be some town nearer than the city you mention," said +Ronie. + +"Quite likely. As we can do no good by remaining here we might as well +do a little prospecting. It may be well for us to move cautiously, as +it is uncertain how we shall be treated. It is unfortunate that our +letters of credit and other papers were lost with our chest." + +"And all of our instruments and charts. Truly, Jack, it would seem as +if we had been prompted to undertake this trip under the influence of +an unlucky star." + +Jack made no reply to this, but led the way from the shore, closely +followed by Ronie. It was getting light enough for them to move with +ease, as well as to get a good idea of their surroundings, which were +not very inviting so far. But in the distance could be seen the dim +outlines of the mountains and the borders of one of those luxuriant +forests for which South America is noted. + +Something like half a mile was passed in silence, when Jack paused, +saying: + +"If I am not mistaken, there is a small settlement off to our right. +Perhaps we had better get a little nearer, though I hardly believe it +will be good policy for us to be seen until we get a better +understanding of our situation. We certainly cannot boast of being +able to present a very attractive appearance," he added, ruefully, +while he looked over his companion and himself. + +In their bedraggled garments, not yet fully dry, it was small wonder if +they did present a decidedly disheveled appearance. + +"Do you think we are liable to an attack from the inhabitants in case +we should be seen?" + +"I do not know what to think. If this rebellion is general then we are +in constant danger. I know of no better way than for us to push ahead +and find out." + +Suiting action to his words, Jack resumed the advance, with Ronie still +beside him. It was now rapidly growing lighter, which was a source of +satisfaction to them, as the cover of the growth they were entering +promised to prove as effective a shield as the darkness had been when +upon the sand plain. + +Contrary to the expectations of Jack, they had not found the settlement +looked for. In fact, as far as they could see, there were no signs of +habitation anywhere in that vicinity. Thus, as they advanced, a +feeling of loneliness came upon them that they could not throw off. + +"I would give a good sum, if I had it, just to hear some one speak," +declared Jack, thrusting his hands into his pockets, to pull them out +the next moment with a prolonged whistle, which caused Ronie to start +with fear at the unexpected sound. + +"What is it, Jack?" + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! talk of being penniless +when one pulls out of his pockets a whole handful of Spanish coin." + +"It must be what you took in exchange at Colon," said Ronie, appearing +relieved to find that nothing worse than a happy discovery had for a +moment seemed to upset his companion. "I may have a little, too," +beginning to search his pockets. "If I have not got money, then I have +something here that may prove of use to us," producing a small pocket +compass. + +"Right, lad," said Jack. "Zounds! here's something that pleases me +quite as much as the Spanish silver pieces. Here is the old knife I +have carried with me on so many jaunts that it seems a part of myself. +It had slipped down between the lining and the outside cloth of my +jacket. In this jungle one feels better to have something with which +to defend himself, even if it is nothing more than a good, stout knife, +with a blade that has been tried and tested in some tough scrimmages. +I think more of the old knife than ever." + +The revival of Jack's usual good spirits served to encourage Ronie to +somewhat forget their perils and uncertainty. + +"Let's see," said Jack, dropping the coin back into his pocket, but +holding the knife firmly in his hand, "if I'm not mistaken, by going +due west we shall eventually reach the shore of Lake Maracaibo. We +shall not have much difficulty then in reaching the city, from which we +can go by rail to Caracas; if not all of the way, nearly so." + +"In that case the compass will come in handy," said Ronie, and having +selected their course, they now pushed forward with better courage than +at any period since they had come to land. + +It must have been half an hour later, and the sun was now sending its +bright bars of light down through the umbrageous branches of the forest +trees, one kind of which was laden with a profusion of bright and +beautiful flowers, making the largest and most magnificent bouquets of +floral offerings Ronie had ever seen, even in the Philippines, where +the vegetation abounds on the grandest scale, when they were attracted +by the sound of a human voice. + +"There we get what a few minutes ago I was willing to give a big silver +piece to hear," declared Jack. "By my faith, the fellow has lusty +lungs. He must be getting excited, too." + +"His tone shows he is in great fear," said Ronie. "Whoever he be, he +is in some great danger or critical situation." + +"Perhaps we had better push ahead, so as to lend him a helping hand in +case he needs one." + +Quickening their pace they tore through the tropical vegetation, the +undergrowth of which stood high over their shoulders, in the direction +of the appeals for help. These grew rapidly louder and more fraught +with terror. + +"He is close at hand," panted Jack, and the next moment they came upon +a startling sight, which, for a brief while, held them spellbound. The +underbrush had here been beaten down, and bruised into fragments by the +furious trampling back and forth of a huge specimen of that king of the +South American forest, the jaguar. The cause of the anger of this +terrible brute, equal in size and ferocity to the tiger of the jungles +of Asia, was the sight of a human being--a man--suspended in midair, +almost over the head of the maddened creature. It was this person who +had given forth his frantic cries for help, and who, unconscious of the +arrival of strangers upon the scene, was continuing to utter his +piteous appeals. His situation was as singular as it was startling. +Somehow his feet had become caught in the topmost branches of a tall, +slender sapling, which, bowed by his weight, held him head downward in +the air, swaying to and fro like the pendulum of a clock. Fortunately, +the tree was too small for the jaguar to climb so as to reach him in +that way, while he hung just above the clutch of the brute as it sprang +upward time and again in its furious attempt to seize its prey. + +At that moment the infuriated creature was crouching to the earth +preparatory to making another vault into the air in order to pounce +upon its victim. Then the scent of newcomers reached its nostrils, and +its small, piercing eyes quickly became fixed upon its prey within +reach. The long tail lashed the air with renewed fury, the lissom form +hugged closer to the ground, as it made swift preparation to spring +upon the couple who had dared to enter its domain at this critical time. + +To Jack and Ronie it was a moment not to be forgotten. The first +clutched his knife savagely, but what could he hope to do against such +a foe with so simple a weapon? In the brief interval between the +discovery of the brute and its attack upon them, Ronie's gaze fell upon +a thrice-welcome sight. This was nothing less than a short, +serviceable-looking firearm, lying scarcely a yard distant from his +feet. It was doubtless the property of the man hanging from the +pendant tree, and who had somehow dropped it at the outset of his +meeting with the jaguar. + +He had no time to think of this, or even to question whether the gun +was loaded or empty before the dark form of the jaguar shot into the +air, and the maddened creature came like a cannon ball toward the twain. + +"Jump for your life!" cried Jack, and so closely followed the animal +upon his words that, as the couple separated, Ronie springing to the +right and he to the left, an outstretched paw of the creature brushed a +shoulder of each as it sped past them! + +The jaguar had not struck the ground a few feet away, flinging up a +cloud of dirt where he landed in a heap, before Ronie had seized the +firearm. It was the work of but another instant for him to cock the +gun and bring its stock to his shoulder. + +As quickly as this was done, the jaguar had as quickly recovered from +the effect of its disastrous jump, had wheeled about, and now crouched +for a second leap, his maddening rage increased twofold by his recent +failure. The muzzle of Ronie's firearm now caught its attention, and +our hero was now its object. + +So hurriedly had this all taken place that Ronie was still in ignorance +as to the condition of his weapon, and knowing that his life hung upon +the result, he took hasty aim and pulled the trigger. + +A quick, sharp report sent a thrill of joy through his frame, while it +was so swiftly followed by a cry of rage that the latter seemed an echo +of the first, and then the jaguar again sprang upward and forward, +fully ten feet into the air before it descended at Ronie's feet, +snarling, twisting, struggling, in an outbreak of fury frightful to +behold. + +Trembling lest his shot had only served to add to the volcano of +ferocity burning in the brute's form, Ronie would have failed to +retreat quickly enough to escape its claws had not Jack's ringing voice +warned him of his danger. The next moment his companion was beside him. + +"You fixed the creature," declared Jack, "but it dies hard. Give it +plenty of room, lad, we can afford to." + +Then, in silence they watched the dying struggles of the brute, as it +beat earth and space with its lacerated body, now groveling in the +dust, now bounding upward in blind endeavor to reach an enemy it could +not see, each moment growing weaker, until it lay at last quite still, +scarcely less terrible to look upon in death than it had been in life. + +"Your shot saved us," said Jack, frankly. "It was well done, lad, +exceedingly well done, and it alone has saved us from the claws of the +jaguar." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE MYSTERY OF THE PHOTOGRAPH. + +"It seemed as if I could not miss, Jack; but I do not care to go +through that ordeal again." + +"Nor I, Ronie. But now that we are safe, let's look after the chap +over our heads. It must be he needs our aid bad enough. I never saw +one in just such a predicament." + +The hapless man had ceased his outcries, and was trying to find out +what had taken place underneath him, and as to what bearing it would +have upon his fate. Seeing no other way to reach him, Ronie +immediately climbed the tree holding him. His weight, added to that of +the other's, caused the sapling to bend so that Jack was soon able to +reach the poor fellow by standing under him. + +"A little lower, lad, and I shall be able to get him. His feet are +caught in the tree's bootjack, but I--there! I have got him free and +clear. Look out that the tree doesn't hang you up." + +Jack quickly laid the man upon the ground, and began to straighten out +his limp limbs. + +"Has he fainted?" asked Ronie, quickly joining him by springing from +the tree to the earth, leaving the sapling to leap back into its normal +position with a force that cut the air like a lash. + +"He is overcome by his experience. But he'll soon come out all right, +as I do not see that he has been injured more than a few scratches. +Looks like a tolerable sort of a fellow for a South American. Got a +little of the native blood in him mixed up with the Spanish. He +belongs to the common class." + +The man was a person of middle age, of slight figure, but wiry build. +He presented a somewhat warlike nature by the armament he carried about +his body. This consisted of a pair of heavy pistols, a huge knife, and +inside his stout jacket a pair Of smaller pistols were to be seen. He +also had fastened about his waist by a belt a good stock of cartridges, +evidently for the firearm Ronie had picked up. Certainly it had not +been for a lack of means of defense that he had fared so roughly in his +meeting with the jaguar. + +It seemed like a long time to our friends before he opened his eyes and +revived enough to seek a sitting posture. Then he rubbed his head, +stared stupidly about, and tried to regain his feet, giving expression +to his surprise in Spanish. Both Jack and Ronie were able to converse +in that language, and Jack at once assured him of his safety at that +moment. + +He was profuse in his thanks, though somewhat reticent in regard to +himself. He had climbed a tree near the sapling, but somehow had lost +his footing and fallen into the topmost branches of the latter. +Lodging between the branches of this his weight had brought it and him +into the positions in which they had been found. The jaguar had come +along, and discovering him began at once its attempted attack. That +was what Jack and Ronie made out of his disjointed account. + +"I do not know what to make of him," said Jack, aside in English. "He +is either afraid of us, or he is a rogue. Probably both. I will see +if I can find out where we are." + +Then, addressing the Venezuelan, he said: + +"How far is it to the nearest town?" + +"You mean San Carlos, seņor?" + +"_Si, seņor_," replied Jack, at a hazard. + +"Have you friends at San Carlos?" asked the other, without answering +the question propounded him. + +"I hope so, seņor." + +This reply seemed to stagger him for a moment, but he managed to +recover in a moment, when he said: + +"How long have you been in this country, Seņor Americanos?" + +"Since sunrise," was the reply, which gave the other a second surprise. + +"I do not understand, seņor." + +Thinking nothing could be gained by withholding all of the truth from +him, Jack soon explained how they had been lost overboard from a vessel +in the gulf, picked up by another, and then left ashore among strangers +in a strange land. He did not consider it necessary or advisable to +enter into descriptions of the ships they had recently left. If his +account aroused at first some suspicion in the mind of the Venezuelan, +Jack's honesty of tone quickly dispelled this, and the other said: + +"You have been unfortunate, seņors. There are many ships upon the sea +at this time who do not care to pick up strangers. No doubt the craft +was one of Castro's spies. They are looking far and wide for the +_Libertador_, but they cannot find her," he concluded, showing evident +pleasure at the thought. Then he asked, as if a new thought had come +suddenly to him: + +"What do they say of us in the Great Republic?" + +"The sympathy of the United States is ever with the down-trodden," +replied Jack, cautiously. "But we are not able to say just how our +nation looks upon the revolution here, except that it will see fair +play, for you must remember it has been nearly a year since we left +home." + +The other showed his disappointment at this, but soon asked: + +"Have you friends in this country?" + +"If we were at Caracas we might find them." + +At this the man shook his head. + +"It would be worth more than your lives to get to Caracas at this time. +The 'Sons of Liberty' are looking sharp after the dogs of Castro." + +"This man is one of the insurgents," was the thought which came +simultaneously to Jack and Ronie. Then the latter asked: + +"You said we were near to San Carlos. Is this town held by Castro or +by the followers of Matos?" + +"You prove yourself a stranger, seņor, by your words. San Carlos holds +the blackest spot on fair Venezuela, the dungeon that keeps in captive +chains the noble El Mocho." + +"You mean General Hernandez, seņor? I have heard of him. But I +thought he was once friendly to Castro." + +"So he was, seņor, until the tyrant abused the common people, then El +Mocho led his gallant followers against Castro, was betrayed by a +cowardly dog, and now he lies at San Carlos a captive." + +"Do you live near here?" + +"_Si, seņor._" Then he added, with a curve of his lips, which gave an +ugly-looking smile: "When I am at home. I was going hither when I met +with this little adventure, which would have ended the warfare of +Manuel Marlin for the freedom of poor Venezuela. If you will come with +me the hospitality of my humble home is at your disposal." + +"I do not think we can do any better than to go with him," said Jack, +aside to Ronie, "providing we keep our eyes and ears open." + +Ronie was about to signify his assent, when an object nearly buried in +the crumpled foliage and torn up earth where the jaguar had made its +stand, caught his attention. It was about the size of an ordinary +postal card, and at first glance looked like a piece of cardboard. But +Ronie had discovered on the other side a portrait, which prompted him +to pick up the photograph, as it proved to be. + +It was crumpled and soiled, but hastily brushing as much of the dirt +from it as he could, he gazed earnestly at the sweet, womanly face +pictured before him. As he gazed the color left his countenance, his +hand shook so it threatened to drop the card, while he exclaimed in a +husky voice: + +"My mother!" + +Jack showed almost as much emotion as his young companion, as he +stepped quickly beside him, saying: + +"Your mother's photograph in this place? How can that be?" + +"I do not know, Jack. But it is surely hers. See! It was taken in +New York." + +"Doubtless Seņor Marlin can throw some light upon the matter," declared +Jack. "You picked it up almost under where he had been hanging. The +photograph fell from one of your pockets, Seņor Manuel?" asked Jack, +addressing the Venezuelan. + +The latter had retreated a few paces, and he showed considerable +agitation, while he shook his head, replying in a low tone: + +"If it was in my pocket, I did not know it, seņors. Some one else must +have dropped it here. It would not be strange, as there are many +scouts in the forests at this time." + +Both Jack and Ronie felt sure that the man was trying to deceive them, +but deemed it wise not to let him know it. + +"I mistrust the fellow," whispered Jack, aside. "We must keep a close +watch upon him. I do not think he understands English, so he does not +know what relation the portrait may bear to you. Let's feign +indifference in the matter, and keep with him." + +So Ronie placed the photograph in one of his pockets without further +remarks, though he found it difficult to conceal his emotions. While +he was doing this Jack signified to Manuel Marlin that they were +anxious to go to his home, or at least to be shown the way out of the +forest. Then, with rapid steps, the Venezuelan led the way out of the +jungle, not once looking back in his hasty advance. This gave our +friends opportunity to exchange thoughts, though they were careful not +to say enough to arouse the suspicions of their guide. + +"I cannot understand what it means," declared Ronie. "How could +mother's picture be brought here, and why?" + +As this was a question Jack could not answer, he merely shook his head, +adding: + +"This fellow, or some of his friends, may have been in New York, and +accidentally picked it up. In that case it would not indicate any +cause for worriment." + +"I cannot help feeling, Jack, that there is some other explanation. I +cannot help thinking that in some way it portends trouble to mother. +It can do no harm to question this fellow more closely in regard to the +matter." + +"We will take our chances on that score, though I believe he is a +thoroughbred liar." + +Then they did question this man as closely as they thought prudent, but +without gleaning a single ray of light upon the subject. In fact, he +persisted in maintaining an absolute ignorance in regard to it. So +finally Ronie was compelled to drop the subject, while he tried in vain +to find some plausible explanation of the mystery. + +Manuel Marlin showed that he was glad of the sight ahead, when at last +they reached the edge of the forest, and found themselves looking at +the rim of sandy sea-coast, with the glimmer of water in the distance. +The day was very calm, and the bay stretched as smoothly as if formed +of plate glass, while overhead the sky had that peculiar flat +appearance so common in the tropics. + +"Does seņors see that dismal building on yonder point of land?" asked +their guide, and, without waiting for their reply, went on: "It is the +fort of San Carlos, where the 'El Mocho' is chained like a dog!" + +"Look yonder!" exclaimed Ronie, "there is a train of men going thither +now." + +"Looks to me as if they were conducting prisoners to the penitentiary," +said Jack. "If my old eyes do not deceive me one of them is an +American." + +"I am sure you are right, Jack. Let's get a little nearer, so we can +see as they pass along." + +Their guide showed some hesitation in doing this, though he led the way +somewhat circuitously forward, so as to gain a view of the soldiery +train without being seen themselves, saying as he did so: + +"This is more of the dirty work of Castro's dogs of war." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +"WE HAVE BEEN BETRAYED!" + +Ronie and Jack paid but little heed to the words of their companion, as +their attention was already fixed upon the file of men moving with +martial steps toward the gloomy structure, whose walls had echoed to so +many cries of distress from its heart-broken captives. Even now this +squad was taking thither two prisoners, as Jack had said, and one of +these had awakened an exciting interest. He was surely an American, +and in the distance there seemed something familiar about him, which +caused them to hold their breath while they watched and waited. Then +the truth of their convictions finally overpowered their doubts, and +Ronie exclaimed under his breath: + +"It is Harrie, Jack!" + +"Ay, lad; and Francisco is with him." + +"What does it mean, Jack?" + +"One thing certain, lad; they have escaped the sea. It is better than +becoming victims to that." + +"I agree with you, Jack. Now that we have found them it will be our +duty to rescue them. Perhaps Manuel here can give us some light on the +subject." + +The train had by this time passed beyond them, and not thinking it wise +to follow, our friends turned to their companion for such information +as he might be able to give. Upon learning that the prisoners were +friends of theirs, Manuel suddenly became very friendly. + +"So you belong to the Sons of Liberty!" he exclaimed. "Yonder +penitentiary is where Castro imprisons some of his most important +captives. But it won't be so for long. The mountain Indian[1] cannot +long hold his own against the noble Matos, who belongs to the Guzman +Blanco family. Seņors shall soon see their comrades free." + +While this thought tickled the vanity of the Venezuelan to a high +degree, it did not afford any satisfaction to Jack and Ronie, the last +saying: + +"We must act promptly in their behalf. Have you any plan to suggest, +Manuel?" + +"Only this, seņor. I know of one who lives in San Carlos, who makes it +his business to keep posted on what is going on. I will see him at +once, and no doubt he will be able to give us information that will be +of assistance." + +Ronie and Jack gladly agreed to this, and while Manuel was seeing his +friend it was thought best for them to remain at his home. This proved +to be less than a mile away, so it was only about an hour later that +the Venezuelan started upon his errand, leaving our twain anxiously +awaiting his return. Since he had learned that they had friends in the +hands of his enemies, he had grown very friendly. They had not thought +it best to say anything to create a feeling of distrust, but Ronie +freely confessed to Jack, as soon as they were alone: + +"I want to know what Harrie's imprisonment means before I decide to +which side I belong." + +"It is generally prudent to take the side of the government," replied +Jack. "I can easily understand how an insurgent like Manuel can come +to hate the name of Castro, and call him a savage from the mountains. +Mountaineers sometimes are men who accomplish much, and President +Castro seems to be one of them. I remember a few years ago, about +eight, when I was in this country, he suddenly appeared from obscurity +to lead a body of men against President Crespo in the interest of +President Andrade. He soon proved that he was made of good metal, for +he usually led his followers to victory. The Crespo party being +successful, the president offered Castro a position in his cabinet if +he would desist from further opposition. Possibly the daring +mountaineer foresaw greater possibilities, for he declined the honor. +Then, when President Crespo named General Andrade as his successor, +Castro appeared on the Colombian frontier with the nucleus of a +revolutionary army. From the very outset success perched upon his +banner, and after overcoming the government troops wherever he met +them, taking city after city, all the time receiving reinforcements to +his army, he laid siege to the capital. President Andrade fled at this +point of the war, and General Castro was declared ruler of the +republic. Our country a few months later was the first, I think, to +recognize him as ruler. I do not think he has been elected president +by vote of the people.[2] Be that as it may, his dash and courage, +with considerable military ability, has endeared him to a large number +of the people. General Matos and his followers, on the other hand, +claim that he has been corrupt in his management of the country's +affairs, as well as dictatorial beyond the bounds of endurance." + +From a discussion of the affairs of the country, they began to seek +some solution to the mystery of the photograph found in such a strange +way, Ronie firm in his belief that his mother was in dire distress at +that very moment. + +"I cannot help thinking that for some reason she is in this country, +Jack, and in trouble." + +"Tut--tut, lad! that cannot be. The mere fact that her picture has in +some way found its way to this place does not prove that she is nearby, +too. No doubt, as soon as we reach Colonel Marchand we shall get good +news from her. She may have sent her photograph by him to you, and +some of the rebels have stolen it." + +"Forgive me, Jack. Of course that may have been the case. Now you +speak of it, it is really the most likely solution to the mystery. By +that I am led to believe that you think Colonel Marchand has joined +President Castro's party." + +"He would be likely to do it. In fact, it would be good policy for him +to do so, as it would be necessary for him to be on good footing with +the government in order to carry out the business venture which has +drawn us all to this country." + +"I agree with you, Jack. I feel better, too, in regard to mother. Now +if we can rescue Harry safely it will bring great relief. I wish +Manuel would come with some word of him." + +"Do not get impatient, lad. It is likely to take the fellow some time +to get his information, even if he gets any. I do not have great faith +in the rascal, and if we were not in his own house, I should not expect +to see him back." + +If Jack counseled patience in waiting for the insurgent's return, he +quite forgot his advice before Manuel Marlin put in an appearance, and +with good reasons, for it was well into the following night before he +came. He seemed then greatly excited, and told his story in a +disjointed way. + +"Seņors' friends came ashore in a boat from the _Libertador_," he +declared, in what seemed an exultant tone. "Then Castro's spies +captured them and threw them into prison. But seņors need not fear, +for the Sons of Liberty will soon free them. Even now Matos is hewing +his way toward the capital. Many recruits are being added to his army, +and never did the prospects of down-trodden Venezuela look brighter." + +"So our friends are held as prisoners of war?" asked Jack. + +"As spies under Matos," replied Manuel. "Perhaps I should add, seņors, +that Francisco de Caprian has been recognized as an old offender +against Castro. But they cannot hold him any more than they can hold +long El Mocho." + +If this information did not disturb the spirits of Manuel Marlin, it +did awaken considerable uneasiness on the part of Ronie and Jack. + +"Perhaps, if we should see the authorities at San Carlos they might set +Harrie, at least, free," said Ronie. + +Manuel shook his head. + +"No power below Castro's can free them until Matos enters San Carlos." + +Ronie was about to reply, when a commotion outside of the dwelling +arrested their attention, and before they were able to understand what +it meant, the wife of the Venezuelan hurriedly entered the apartment, +exclaiming: + +"Fly, for your life, Manuel! The yard is full of soldiers searching +for the Gringos!" + +Even Ronie knew this last word was a term applied by the Spanish races +to Americans, and that he and Jack were the objects sought for by the +newcomers. + +Manuel Marlin quickly anticipated the truth, and he cried out in alarm: + +"We have been betrayed! Some one has carried the news of your coming +to El Capitan. Quick! flee from here, if you value your lives and +mine." + + + +[1] President Castro was horn of humble parentage, his parents being of +mixed blood, mostly Indian, in the mountainous district of Western +Venezuela. Thus the revolutionists were wont to paint him as an +untamable savage, who had come to the surface in the turbulent broil of +the uprisings of the times and had hewn and burned his way to the +presidency. Manuel Matos was of superior birth, and was related by +marriage to the Guzman Blanco family. He had had some military +experience under President Blanco, but was more of a civic leader. He +claimed that the Castro administration was corrupt.--AUTHOR. + +[2] Singularly enough, General Castro was elected President for a term +of six years on February 20, 1902, within a few days of this +talk.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A PERILOUS FLIGHT. + +Renewed outcries now came from outside the building, and it seemed +evident that the mob was about to enter the place. Certainly it would +unless something could be done to evade such a movement. Jack +Greenland was the first to speak: + +"Can't you or the woman parley with them long enough for us to slip +away by the rear of the building, Manuel?" + +"Me--parley? They would string me up like a dog. Curses upon their +pig heads!" + +By this time his wife had become calmer than he, and she showed that if +he was lacking in courage to meet the enemy, she was not. So she +immediately offered to keep the crowd at bay long enough for them to +effect their escape, her husband showing great eagerness to profit by +her heroism. Accordingly, she returned to the front part of the +dwelling without loss of time, and a moment later Ronie heard her +challenging the leader of the would-be captors. + +"While it may not be good policy for us to use them too freely, it may +not be amiss for us to provide ourselves with firearms," said Jack. + +"Si, seņors," replied Manuel, quickly darting away from them, but +returning in an incredibly short time with a couple of short, but +serviceable weapons, one of which he handed to each of his companions. + +"Follow me, seņors. They are getting impatient, and Dolores will not +be able to hold them back long. I think we had better cross the bay to +the other shore. I have a boat." + +As Ronie and Jack had no better plan to offer, they followed the +speaker in silence. He led the way to the rear of his humble dwelling, +where they paused to listen for sounds of their enemies. These came +from the front, and judging that the soldiers had not yet surrounded +the place they plunged boldly into the midst of the dense tropical +plants which reached above their heads, Manuel still leading the way. +But they had not gone far before he suddenly stopped, and motioned for +his companions to do the same. + +As the three fugitives thus abruptly paused they heard the sound of +footsteps, which rapidly became plainer. There were evidently several +persons approaching at a headlong rate, and knowing only enemies were +likely to be in that vicinity, they dropped swiftly and silently to the +earth, the broad leaves of the thrifty plants about them affording +shields for their bodies. + +A minute later, half a dozen men burst through the rank vegetation +within a yard of where they were lying! Jack and Ronie, believing they +were going to be discovered, thought hastily of flight in another +direction, but the party quickly swept past and disappeared in the +distance below them. As soon as they felt it was prudent they resumed +their flight, having no further cause for alarm until they came in +sight of the narrow body of water ahead. Between the growth and this +was a broad belt of sand, where not a shrub found sustenance. The +clear, starlit night made this space almost as bright as by day. + +"Hark!" panted Manuel Marlin, "they are coming! They have scented us +like bloodhounds. Our only hope is in reaching the boat. It is just +above that highest sand bar. Run for your lives, seņors!" + +Ronie and Jack now heard plainly the sounds of their enemies +approaching from their rear, and the exciting words of their companion +were not needed to urge them ahead. With light, swift steps they +bounded forward across the open country. When about halfway to the +shore a volley of bullets was sent after them, and then their pursuers +burst out from the growth into sight. + +The aim of the pursuing crowd must have been poor, for their shots +failed to strike any of the fugitives, who were urged on to greater +effort, if that were possible. Jack, glancing back, saw the party +following at a furious pace upon their heels, and instinctively glanced +toward the water. It was nearer to the boat than back to their +pursuers, and he felt confident they would be able to reach the little +craft in season. Ronie was slightly ahead, while Manuel was as far +behind, unable to make as good speed as the young American engineer. + +"Don't leave me!" sputtered the latter, and as if he were going to make +this a necessity he stumbled over a sand knoll, to measure his length +on the ground. His companions, not hearing him fall upon the soft +earth, and being ahead, were not aware of his mishap until prolonged +yells from their pursuers and piteous cries from him, caused both to +look backward. + +The ring of triumph in the tones of the soldiers in the distance told +plainly that they anticipated a certain capture of at least one of the +fugitives, but Manuel rallied quickly, and was again upon his feet. + +"Keep on for the boat!" cried Jack, who felt that it would be fatal for +them to stop now. So they sped ahead, with Manuel sprinting his best +to overtake them, and the armed posse behind madly pursuing. + +They were soon close down to the boat, drawn up on the white sand, out +of the reach of the water, and then Ronie and Jack, panting for breath, +stopped beside it. + +"Quick! push it out into the water," said Jack, seizing upon the +gunwale and giving the object a furious shove toward the tide. Ronie +had already caught upon the boat, and together they sent it forward +more than its length in the twinkling of an eye. But the short delay +enabled Manuel to overtake them, so, as the boat floated on the water, +he sprang into the stern. There were a pair of oars in the bottom, and +Jack and Ronie each took one of these, to begin to send the light craft +flying across the narrow bay, while the Venezuelan steered for the +opposite shore. + +Renewed cries from their pursuers reached their ears in the midst of +this flight, and another volley of shot followed them. But the latter +proved as ineffectual as the first, and glancing back a few minutes +later, Manuel gave expression to a chuckle of delight, while he said: + +"We've outstripped them, seņors. There is not another boat they can +get in season to follow us before we reach the land." + +Nothing further was said until the keel of the boat grated on the sand, +when Ronie and Jack jumped out upon the land, closely followed by +Manuel. The shadowy forms of their enemies could be discerned upon the +other side of the water, but feeling comparatively safe from them, our +twain turned to their guide for such suggestion as he might have to +offer. It was a beautiful tropical night, the full, round moon of the +South, now fairly above the horizon, was gliding over a sky of +cloudless blue, having already driven the stars into the background of +space, so that only Venus, the zone of Orion and the brilliant radii of +the Southern Cross were visible. + +Away from their feet stretched the silvery mirror of the sea, marking +the meridian of the moon. So calm and silent lay the deep water that a +satellite sky seemed carved from its azure depths. Upon the other +hand, the country, growing more and more broken in the distance, lay +clothed in its tropic verdure as silent and mysterious as the Blue +Water Empire. The beauty of nature, however, had no attraction for +Manuel Marlin, who felt that his life was at stake, and only swift +flight could save him. + +"A friend of mine, living a short distance from here, has a couple of +horses you can get," he said. "I shall not need one," he added, seeing +their looks of inquiry, "as I shall not go very far. I have friends +who will afford me protection until this shall blow over." + +Then he led the way up from the shore and along a path at times nearly +choked with the overhanging growth, until they finally reached the home +of a planter. After considerable trouble Manuel succeeded in rousing +the owner, who did not appear in very good humor at being thus +disturbed. But as soon as he understood the errand of his untimely +caller he became more genial. Would he let the Americanos have horses +to carry important news to the revolutionists near Caracas? Most +assuredly he would for so important a purpose! It will be noticed that +Manuel did not try to stick very near to the truth in the matter, and +neither of our friends felt like correcting him under the circumstances. + +Finally the planter ordered out a couple of peons, who soon brought +forward a pair of small, but hardy ponies, which their owner declared +were good for all that might be required of them. Leaving Manuel to +arrange for the loan of them in such a manner as he thought best, Ronie +and Jack sprang into the saddles and prepared to start upon their long +and hazardous journey. + +"Keep your eyes open for our friends, Manuel," were the parting words +of Ronie. + +"Trust me for that, seņor, and may you live to come back with the +welcome word that Caracas is once more safe from the spoils of the +mercenary knaves that flock to the mountain savage." + +Murmuring an unintelligible reply to this, the couple then urged their +ponies forward, and a moment later were starting side by side upon the +first stage of a ride through a country overrun with hostile armies and +dangers which they had not stopped to contemplate. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +A LONELY RIDE. + +Ronie and Jack were crossing the vast plain which extends westward and +southward along the shore of Lake Maracaibo, upon the border of which +stands that beautiful city by the same name, and which is the capital +of the State of Zulia. The climate of this region is warm, but cooled +by the lake breezes, as well as by the breath of old ocean, it becomes +very enjoyable. Thus they rode on under conditions that must have been +pleasant had it not been for the shadows of war which overhung every +step of their journey. + +The road, if the trampled path at places overgrown with rank +vegetation, and at others smooth and bare as an open floor, deserved +the dignity of the name, soon after leaving the sand belt of the coast, +wound across broad fields of sugar cane, indigo and tobacco, or through +great plantations given over to the cultivation of cacao trees, which +yield those luscious beans that have been described as affording food +for gods. These trees to flourish well have to be protected by some +taller species of tree, and for this purpose the tall, over-arching +_Erithynas_ is raised, giving the scene the appearance at a distance of +being a huge forest, rather than a cultivated field. + +Frequently the progress of our heroes was checked, if not quite +stopped, by growths of weeds which had sprung up on deserted +plantations. In Venezuela land is so cheap that it is more +advantageous to abandon a tract of land when it becomes worn out by +cultivation, and clear a new territory, than it is to reclaim the old. +The latter thus soon becomes a forest of weeds, which, insignificant at +first, soon develop into trees with branches, so that by the second +season these overtop the head of a man on horseback. These huge +tree-weeds afford support for dense masses of creepers, among which +Ronie noticed the convolvulus, begonias and passion flowers. These at +places hung their flowering heads so as to form graceful festoons, or +anon lifted them proudly to the breeze, forming picturesque bowers and +floral archways. + +If displaying beauty and magnificence in their bountiful offerings, +these jungles were anything but pleasant paths to follow, and it +required skillful management on the part of the rider to save himself +from being pulled from his seat, or escape that fate he might expect at +the hands of the hangman. The native riders show wonderful ability to +run these gantlets, which the newcomer must naturally lack. Now +hanging by one leg down the side of his horse, or stretching himself +along its back, he would escape the blows a novice would be sure to +receive while continuing his flight with speed scarcely abated. + +By and by, however, Ronie and Jack came out into a more thickly +populated country. The sun was beginning to crimson the eastern +horizon with its early beams, and the two drew rein for a short +consultation. + +"I am afraid we have kept too far to our right," said Jack. "Manuel +spoke of leaving the mountains over our shoulder, and we seem to be +approaching them." + +"If the country is becoming more broken, it has the appearance of being +more thickly populated. Do you think, Jack, we need to stand in much +fear of the insurgents in this vicinity?" + +"Manuel spoke of a victory for his side recently at Barquisimete, and +if I am not mistaken, we shall pass near that city--certainly near +enough to be within range of the revolutionists. In fact, I feel +pretty sure that the revolution is mainly centered in this part of the +republic." + +"I almost wish we had taken the route to Valencia." + +"No doubt, whichever we had taken we should wish we had taken the other +before we reached our destination. But that is not the right way to +look at it. We must put on a bold front and push ahead." + +"In order to do that we must see that our horses have sufficient food +to enable them to keep moving, even if we go hungry ourselves." + +"Right, my lad, and if there is an inn in yonder village I suggest we +stop there long enough to allow them rest and feed." + +"I agree to that. Shall you claim to be a revolutionist or a follower +of Castro?" + +"At present that must depend on circumstances. Ha! as I thought, we +are approaching a coffee planter's little republic, with the liberty of +his followers left out. Look beyond that ridge, and in the valley +formed by the twin ranges of foothills you will see a typical peasant +settlement, which certainly denotes that not far ahead we shall come +upon some wealthy planter. These peons of Venezuela are to all intents +and conditions slaves, resulting from the debts, it may be, contracted +by their remote ancestors, as generation after generation have been +doomed to work to satisfy the laws and customs of a country which never +outlaws its debts, when those debts have been contracted by a weaker +party. The consequence is that the poor of these South American States +are destined to remain poor until some radical change has been made in +this direction. It is true, Venezuela is not as bad off in this +respect as some of the other republics, but it is bad enough here. Ay, +in South America the word 'republic' loses the significance of liberty +that it bears in other lands. It is natural a people condemned to +lifelong poverty, for no fault of their own in most cases, should be +ever ready to listen to the call to arms as a summons to a holiday. So +you see it is easy to raise an army of this sort, and it is small +wonder Venezuela has been bothered with so many outbreaks against its +peace and progress. But here we are close upon the spacious abode of +the coffee planter, who is the principal man of this vicinity, unless +there happens to be another of his class." + +After having seen the pyramidal structures of the peasants or peons, +with roofs slanting to within a few feet of the ground, and thatched +with palm leaves, the collection looking like a colony of beehives, +Ronie was somewhat surprised to find now a dwelling that closely +resembled the houses of his native land. It was, in fact, a fine +residence, standing back several rods from the road, and reached by a +broad avenue running under rows of stately trees resembling the +American elms. He was to learn that these were known here as the +_Alcornoque_, lifting as graceful heads, and as tall, tapering trunks +as their northern cousins. Everything about this home of the coffee +planter denoted wealth and comfort, in marked contrast to the humble +huts scarcely beyond the vision, and of a style of architecture +peculiar to the country. + +"Whoever lives here must be a man of importance," remarked Ronie. + +"True, lad, and being such a rich man, we are running little risk in +assuming him to be a follower of Castro at this time. The cultivation +of coffee is, in fact, a more certain way of earning a competence, and +it may be, something above a living, than any other calling in +Venezuela. For this reason nearly all others have been neglected. +Sugar cane can be raised profitably, but that requires more capital to +start with, and more manual labor to carry it on. To cultivate sugar +successfully one must fertilize it, so to speak, with gold. But any +man, if he is poor, can have a coffee estate if he has courage to work +and wait for a short season. The day his bushes yield their first red +berries he finds something coming into his pockets. The berries are +worth as high as thirty dollars a hundred pounds, and cost less than +one-third to raise. So you see a poor man, who may have hired the use +of a piece of land, which he pays for on long instalments, may plant a +coffee farm with the aid of his family, living on products that mature +earlier on the same land, until at the end of three years he gathers +his first crop of berries, followed by a full crop the next year. We +shall doubtless meet with more of these small coffee plantations after +this. If I mistake not, here comes the planter himself. Let us risk +it in claiming to be friendly to the government." + +Their approach had evidently attracted the owner of the estate, for +Ronie had already seen a small, wiry-framed man, of a very dark +complexion and dashing dress, coming, toward them. He now stopped to +allow them to come forward, saying in a tone of apparent friendliness: + +"Good-morning, seņors," somewhat to their surprise speaking in their +language. + +"Good-morning," replied both in unison. + +"You must have taken an early start, seņors." + +"It is because our journey is a long one, seņor," replied Jack, who +acted as spokesman. "Our horses are tired, and we would bespeak for +them food and rest at your hospitality." + +"Dismount, gentlemen. My men will look after them, while I entertain +you." + +While Jack and Ronie did as they were told, a couple of peons appeared +on the scene, to lead the tired animals away, as the hospitable planter +requested his visitors to follow him to his favorite morning retreat +under one of the beautiful shade trees standing in his yard within +sight of his house. If he had shown a friendly spirit in his tone so +far, his next words, as the three sank upon the rustic benches +encircling the tree, showed that he was not free from concern in regard +to the character of his early callers: + +"You say your journey is a long one, sirs; no man travels a long +journey without an urgent purpose. Especially is this true on an +occasion like this." + +Jack, who could see no good likely to result from appearing mysterious, +replied frankly and promptly: + +"We are bound for Caracas, though it may not be well for every idle ear +to catch the word." + +"Right, sir. Who would you see in Caracas?" + +"President Castro." + +"Then your journey will be in vain, for the President is unavoidably +kept away from the capital. You might have traveled much quicker by +rail." + +"Possibly. But as you say the President is not in Caracas, that would +not have helped us. Can you tell if Minister Bowen is at the capital?" + +"If he is, he would hardly be accessible at this time. Come, +strangers, throw off your cloak of reticence and let us be frank with +each other. My name is José Pelado, and having lived several years in +your country, I am free to confess I have imbibed some of your Yankee +spirit." + +Our Americans immediately gave their names, adding that it was to +obtain assistance in securing the freedom of a companion that they were +on their way to the capital. + +"I expected something of this kind. It is fortunate that you have come +thus far without molestation, and I will assure you you cannot go as +far on your next stage without falling into the hands of the guerilla +hordes that infest the jungles. But, pardon me for keeping you from +the rest and food that you must need. Partake of such refreshments as +I can offer you, then we will discuss the situation." + +Ronie and Jack were not loathe to do this, though while they ate, their +host related to them much they had not known of the situation in the +country. He showed that he was not only an educated man, but that he +was well posted upon affairs, while he was very pronounced in his +admiration for Castro. + +"Venezuela has had revolutions and shades of revolutions, but not one +more unwarranted than this. Castro is a patriot, and the uprising that +he led a few years since, and which placed him at the head of the +government, is no more to be compared to this than the snarling of a +cowardly cur seeking to rob a bigger dog of his breakfast because he is +too lazy to hunt for his own, is to the good, honest bark of a mastiff +that seeks to defend his master's property. Andrade's administration, +following Crespo's, was grossly dishonest, and would have drained the +republic of its healthy interest, had it not been for the mountain +patriot, Castro, who fought his way straight from the Venezuelan +frontier, a good thousand miles, to Caracas, the capital. In a +twinkling Andrade went out and Castro went in. He lost no time in +setting about to clear up the clouded system of government. It +required a masterly hand to guide the current of affairs. He soon +found it difficult to know whom to trust. + +"Among those who had rebelled with apparent honesty against Crespo and +then his successor, Andrade, was the hunchback warrior, Manuel +Hernandez, called by friends and foes alike as 'El Mocho.' His forces +were scattered about in this region, he having rallied them by +inflammable speeches against Andrade, whom he declared had been +selected by fraud. Finally two thousand men, under the command of a +relative of Crespo, met his band of scarcely five hundred near +Valencia. In this unequal fight Crespo was killed and his men utterly +routed by the hunchback, who instantly sprang into wild favor. His +little army was swiftly increased by recruits. The people in general +rejoiced at the fate of Crespo, who had made himself obnoxious to many. +But the military prestige of Hernandez suffered an early frost. +Andrade sent his minister of war to treat with him, and in the next +battle he was defeated, his troops utterly routed, and he himself put +into prison. + +"Then Castro's triumph completely changed this. Andrade fled, and many +of the followers of El Mocho joined the new ruler, who soon freed +Hernandez, and offered him a place in his cabinet. Hernandez accepted, +though it proved that he had not stifled his ambition to become +president. He improved his new opportunity to inflate some of Castro's +followers with his wild dreams. He believed he had had the experience +now to enable him to overthrow the ruling power, so he stole out of the +capital between two days, leading a small army at his heels. + +"El Mocho made a desperate fight for his cause, but he misjudged the +ability of his rival. Castro did not worry over his escapades, but +when the favorable opportunity came he caught the hunchback rebel and +returned him to the prison where he is likely to remain for a goodly +time. Castro is the last man to be baffled where so much is at stake. +What can be on foot now?" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +IN THE ENEMY'S COUNTRY. + +The last words of José Pelado were called forth by the sudden +appearance of a peon with the announcement that a body of insurgents +had been seen the night before, and that a flock of cattle had been +killed or driven away by them. Upon receiving this intelligence, the +coffee planter replied in Spanish in a tone that showed great anger. +When he had conversed with the messenger for a few minutes he turned +back to his guests, saying: + +"The hungry hounds are again abroad. That mountain outlaw, Juan +Rhoades, is at his old pranks, and this time he has become bolder than +common from the fact that he has succeeded in calling about him more +than five hundred rebels. News also comes from San Carlos that two +spies are in this vicinity, and that efforts are being made to hunt +them down. Well, let the fools look after themselves. Rhoades had +better give me a wide berth." + +Ronie and Jack were beginning to think it was about time for them to be +on their way. Their horses were well rested by this time, so they +proposed to Seņor Pelado that they bid him good-by. He seemed +disappointed to find they were not going to stay longer, and showed his +good-will by offering to send an escort of men to protect them in case +they should be attacked by Rhoades and his outlaws. But our heroes +stoutly opposed this, while thanking him for his kindness. + +"Two will be able to get through where a larger body might attract +attention and find it difficult to escape," replied Jack. + +"You seem like plucky fellows, and I think you will get through all +right. In case you do need help, do not hesitate to call on José +Pelado. If you succeed in meeting General Castro give him my regards." + +These parting words were not spoken until Ronie and Jack had regained +their saddles, and were heading their horses toward Caracas. As they +dashed out upon the road they noticed a crowd of peons watching them +with looks not altogether friendly. + +"Did you notice that tall fellow--the one with the extraordinary +mustache--who stood somewhat in the background while we talked with +Pelado?" asked Ronie. + +"That I did, lad, and I says to myself: 'That fellow is hatching +mischief.' He was not in sight the last part of our stay." + +"I did not see him, Jack. What do you think he will do--follow us?" + +"Not exactly; but if we do not meet some of his confederates before +night I shall be happily disappointed. At any rate, it behooves us to +be on the lookout continually." + +The way now wound through a coffee country, and they were frequently +met by these small planters, sometimes singly, but more often by twos +or in squads. + +"The idleness that usually follows in the footsteps of war seems lo +have fallen on the inhabitants," remarked Jack. + +As this did not seem to call for any reply, Ronie remained silent, his +mind busy with the thoughts of past adventures and conjectures over the +possibilities ahead. So the midday was passed, and the afternoon came +on apace, while they moved leisurely on so as not to exhaust their +horses. These were given their noon meal, and allowed two hours of +rest under the friendly shade of a tacamahaca, which was fragrant with +the resinous substance that it exuded from its trunk, an opaque, +lemon-colored sort of wax which the natives on the Orinoco used very +much for torchlights. This was a tree of great size and beauty. They +were now in a region broken by the outlying spurs of mountain, and +about sunset reached a mountain hamlet which bore a decidedly deserted +appearance. + +It had been their intention to push on beyond this place, preferring to +pass the night at some isolated planter's than here, but Ronie's horse, +which had showed slight lameness for several hours, now became unable +to go any farther. In this dilemma they looked about for a stopping +place. In this matter they soon found they were not to be given much +choice. The dwellings were so nearly alike, and built after the +pyramidal style of architecture already described, slanting roofs +reaching nearly to the ground, thatched with palm leaves, four posts +with ox hides stretched between composed the walls, so the collection +looked like a colony of beehives. Unfortunately, they were soon to +learn that it was not "a land of milk and honey." The houses possessed +no doors and windows, professedly for the reason that they were not +needed in that climate. Neither were they needed to protect the +occupant from prowling thieves, for the very simple reason that the +owner owned nothing worth stealing! + +After passing nearly the length of this poverty-marked hamlet, our +heroes hailed with delight the appearance of a building which looked +like a palace when compared to the others. It did prove to be a sort +of public house, or, rather, a hospital where people seeking the +bracing atmosphere of this mountain retreat and the mineral water to be +found here could stop. The lower half of the walls were made of stout +planks in the rough, with doors and windows. The upper portion was +left open to allow free passage of air and light. Ample protection +from sun and storm was afforded by the slanting roof, which reached to +within five feet of the ground. Under these overhanging eaves a narrow +veranda encircled the building. + +Half a dozen swarthy-hued men in loose attire, a pair of breeches, +tightly buttoned at the knees, and a shirt of bright colors, marked off +like a checkerboard, lounged about the abode, but not one of them +offered them any attention, except to stare upon them with undisguised +curiosity, as our twain paused in front of the main entrance. Upon +dismounting and entering the building, they were greeted by the +proprietor with many smiles and much scraping and bowing. + +"Seņor, Americanos have heard of the wonderful curative powers of the +waters of San Andrea, and have come hither to recover their wasted +vitality?" he half questioned, half answered, bowing at almost each +word which he delivered in a musical tone. + +"Partly for that, and partly for pleasure," replied Jack. "Our horses +are tired, and one of them is lame. We ourselves are weary and dust +laden, and so desire rest and quiet more than we do food." + +"_Si, seņors_," waving one hand to a group of peons, who instantly left +the apartment, ostensibly to look after the jaded animals, and the +other toward an opening leading into an adjoining room. Thinking it +was meant for them to repair thither, Jack and Ronie did so at once. +It must have been dark in the room at midday; it was certainly now too +dusky for them to distinguish each other with clearness. Seeing two or +three clumsy, cedar chairs, covered with rawhide, standing near the +wall, they each selected a seat, while they glanced about them with +feelings hard to describe. If the place boasted as the resort for +invalids and pleasure seekers, it had very little to offer in the way +of the comforts of either. It was in truth scarcely better fitted to +accommodate its guests than the tent of the wandering Arab of the +desert. In addition to the rude chairs mentioned, there was a rough +table placed against the wall, evidently because it could not stand +alone, and a couple of grass hammocks that were intended for the double +purpose of bed and lounge. Nothing in the shape of a bowl in which to +lave their dust-stained faces and hands was to be seen, while they were +to learn a little later that water was too scarce at this resort of +mineral springs to show any need of it. + +"Well," said Jack, in a low tone, "this beats anything we have found +before. But if they will give our poor horses care we can get along +ourselves." + +"I suppose we had better give them our personal attention," said Ronie. + +"In due course of time, lad. I wish now we had kept nearer the +seacoast, but I will not borrow trouble. Who is coming now?" + +The visitor proved to be an attendant of the house, who wished to +inquire in regard to the wants of their "illustrious guests." + +"We need nothing more at present," replied Jack, "than a couple of +basins of cool water in which to lave these bodies and limbs of ours." + +"_Si, seņors_; your slightest wish is law at San Andrea," and, bowing +very low, the speaker withdrew, and our friends were left alone for +more than half an hour, when the man returned bearing in either hand a +small calabash filled with water that was too thick with mud to spill +over. These rude dishes possibly contained a quart of the dirty liquid +each. Depositing these vessels on the table, the servant expressed the +wish that they might enjoy a "very excellent bath." + +"No doubt we shall," declared Jack. "Did you have to bring this far?" + +"From the river, seņor; two kilometers away." + +"Horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please, we'll excuse you for the time +it took you. But haven't you water nearer than a mile?" + +"A little, seņor. Supper will be ready when you have washed." + +After supper they went to examine their-horses, to find that Ronie's +did not show much improvement. One of the peons, however, had +interested himself so far as to bandage the limb in some black +decoction that he claimed was good for a sprain, which was evidently +the trouble with the creature. This man became very friendly upon +finding that his efforts were so well appreciated, and he began to talk +glibly of other matters, saying, among other things: + +"You come from Maracaibo, I think, seņors. Did you see anything of +Captain Rhoades and his bold riders?" + +"We heard of him," replied Jack. "We have been looking for them. Are +you expecting them this way?" + +"No one can tell where El Capitan will strike next, seņor. He is very +brave, and he moves about as if he and his men had wings." + +"Is it possible that Castro's hirelings have penetrated into this +region?" asked Jack, as a feeler. + +"Possible it may be, but not probable. He has been whipped on every +hand, and I have no doubt General Matos will ride into Caracas its +conquerer before we are much older." + +"_Si, seņor_," replied Jack, who, finding that nothing more was likely +to be learned, led the way back into the house. A few men were +standing about in the reception-room, but everything seemed very quiet, +giving little indication of the storm so soon to rise. + +Ronie and Jack lay down upon their hammocks without delay, believing it +would be good policy to rest while they; might, knowing not what an +hour might bring forth. They had slept about three hours, when they +were awakened by a commotion in the adjoining apartment, supplemented +by loud voices. In a moment they were sitting bolt upright, listening +to catch what was being said. The tones were loud enough for them to +do this, but the speakers, all of whom were talking in Spanish, spoke +in such excitement and disjointed manner that it was some time before +even Jack could understand sufficient to explain the situation. + +"I think it is a band of the mountain guerrillas," he whispered to +Ronie, as they moved close together. "It may be Rhoades' band, I +cannot say. Ha! they are speaking of a couple of Americanos coming +this way. Now the proprietor is telling them there are two stranger +Americanos in here. Lad, they mean us! It looks so we have got to get +out or fall into their hands." + +Before his companion could reply an ugly-looking visage appeared above +the edge of the woodwork forming the walls of the building, and which, +as has been said, were built only half the height of the structure. +Then it became evident from the sounds that the body of soldiers in the +adjoining room were about to enter their quarters! + +"We are in for it now!" said Jack. "We might as well make a bold dash +for liberty. The time for palavering is past." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INDIAN WARFARE. + +Ronie realized that it was a critical moment for them. While it was +too dark in the room to see anything plainly, the dark visages above +the walls were silhouetted against the background of the night with +vivid clearness. They proved beyond a doubt that the building was +surrounded by the armed men. All this flashed through his mind very +quickly, for they lost no time in attempting to make their escape. + +"Follow me," whispered Jack, leading the way to the rear wall. Then, +notwithstanding the presence of the enemies without, he caught upon the +top of the wall, and, springing into the air, cleared the obstruction +with an agility some young athletes might have envied. Nor was Ronie a +bit behind him. Seizing firmly on the wall, the young engineer bounded +upward, and, turning a complete somersault, landed on his feet a couple +of yards beyond the other side of the wall. + +Jack struck within half a dozen feet of him, outside of the cordon of +watchers surrounding the building. At the same moment an outburst of +cries from inside the building told that the mob within had entered the +room our twain had just left so unceremoniously. Without stopping to +hear more, they darted into the thicket of bushes bordering the +clearing about the dwelling. + +They were barely in time to escape a volley of bullets sent after them +by the insurgents, who had rallied with celerity and prepared to start +in pursuit, giving expression to loud yells of mingled surprise and +consternation at the bold act just performed. These cries served to +tell the fugitives of their situation without doing any material harm. +At any rate, Ronie and Jack found themselves several rods from the +building before their enemies mustered for pursuit. But at the very +outset it promised to be a stern chase. + +Unacquainted with the grounds as they were, Ronie and Jack had to be +constantly on the watch against running into some of the impassable +thickets that grew in every direction. The woods seemed to be full of +the insurgents, for go whither they would they soon found their further +flight cut off in that course by a body of the armed outlaws lying in +wait for them, or crossing their path like so many hounds running down +a brace of foxes. They could still hear the outcries and excitement +prevailing at the building they had left. + +"Hist!" exclaimed Jack, suddenly grasping Ronie by the arm. "I hear +them coming from the right and left. Down upon your hands and knees, +lad. We must crawl for it." + +It was evident the enemies were too numerous for them to risk a +hand-to-hand struggle, so the fugitives dropped close to the earth and +began a tedious advance through the matted bushes which formed a sort +of hedge between the parties of insurgents. Jack was slightly ahead, +but Ronie kept as near to him as possible. In this way they advanced +for three or four yards. It was quite dark in the growth, but they +could discern the forms of the natives plain enough to see that a dozen +or more were within a few paces of them. Then Jack paused, signaling +to Ronie to do the same by a gentle grip upon his wrist. + +It had become very still in the jungle-like forest, and Ronie was +wondering what this movement of his companion meant, when a sharp +scream pierced the night air. It was a woman's voice, freighted with +great fear and suffering. + +"We are not the only ones in trouble," whispered Jack. + +"What does it mean? Hark, Jack! she is pleading for her liberty. +There is a man's voice, and he, too, is begging for some one to spare +his life. Is there nothing we can do for them?" + +"It looks as if we had about all we could look after to save our own +lives, lad. But, as long as it is in our way let's creep a little +nearer the place." + +The insurgents, having apparently moved farther to their right, they +cautiously advanced, being careful not to disturb a bush or make any +noise. They advanced in this way for a few rods, when they found +themselves on the margin of a sunken swamp, dense with a growth of +vines and bushes enveloped in moss and lichens. Finding this +impenetrable, they crawled along its border, though forced to steer +more to their right than they thought prudent. It was evidently this +impassable jungle which had changed the course of the insurgents. + +They must have advanced a hundred rods without finding any end to the +swamp, when the sound of voices now became distinctly heard, though +they were not raised above an ordinary tone. It was the same woman +speaking they had heard before, while her accents were scarcely less +intense. She was saying, in Spanish: + +"Have mercy, seņors! I have never wronged you nor the poor country you +profess to be fighting for. My poor husband died in her defense, and I +am willing to give my life in her cause, but do not torture me." + +"Tell us where he is and we will spare you," replied a masculine voice, +pitched in a high key. + +"Alas! I do not know. I would that I did, seņors. But if I did you +cannot think me cowardly enough to betray him, not at the price of my +poor life. God forbid that I should for a moment have such a thought +or that you should so far misjudge me in my weakness. He is all there +is left me--if he yet lives, which I am not certain--my noble son, the +noblest of the De Caprians." + +At the mention of that name Ronie and Jack instantly remembered the +brave young exile then with Harrie in prison at San Carlos, and, as may +be imagined, listened with excitement hard to suppress for the next +words, which were hissed rather than spoken by the man who held her a +prisoner: + +"You lie!" and the concealed listeners fancied they could see him lift +his armed hand over her head, as if he would kill her then and there. +Her reply was spoken with the calmness born of despair: + +"Think as you will, seņor; I have spoken the truth. Had I a dozen +lives depending on my answer, it would be the same. Kill me if you +wish. I can die without a regret, knowing that Francisco is not here +to witness my death or suffer at your hands, El Capitan." + +"She is Francisco's mother," whispered Ronie, anxiously. + +"Ay, lad; and he is Rhoades, the insurgent leader." + +"Must we let him butcher her in cold blood and remain inactive?" asked +Ronie, whose hot nature was aroused by this unwarranted treatment of a +helpless captive. + +"Hist!" warned Jack. "We are watched by an enemy in yon coppice." + +Ronie saw nothing in the direction indicated by his companion, but +under the circumstances he felt certain he was right, and he grasped +his firearm more firmly, feeling that it would not be long before he +would be obliged to use it. The voices of the speakers ahead had +become silent, so that not a sound broke the stillness of the scene. + +"What can we do, Jack?" + +"I have been thinking lad, that it may be well for us to do a little +scouting, in order to get a better idea of the situation. That fellow +in the thicket has got to be disposed of before we can do much else. +If you will lie here and not let any of them spring a surprise on you, +I will see what I can do in the way of Indian warfare. I do not +believe I have lost the little cunning I picked up in fighting the +Igorrotos of Luzon." + +Without waiting for Ronie's reply, Jack began to creep to their rear, +moving so silently that our hero was not aware of his retreat until he +had fairly left his side. The voice of the insurgent chief again fell +on his ear, followed by the reply of the woman, which was spoken too +low for him to distinguish. Jack had now disappeared, and he knew he +was alone in the midst of enemies. + +Five minutes dragged themselves slowly away without bringing any +material change in the situation. Ronie had not discovered any sign of +Jack, but twice he had seen a man's head thrust cautiously above the +matted undergrowth where he knew one of their enemies lurked. +Evidently the scout, for such he judged him to be, was getting uneasy +and anxious to end the suspense. During the time he had heard a small +body of horsemen ride up to where the insurgent leader and his prisoner +were stopping. + +"Jack told me at the end of five minutes to lift my cap on the muzzle +above the rim of bushes," he mused. "The time must be up now. I think +I will try it." + +Then Ronie removed the covering on his head, and, placing it on the end +of his rifle barrel, gently raised the weapon as he had been told, in +doubt as to what the result would be. He had barely accomplished the +simple feat before the sharp report of a firearm rang out, and a bullet +sped just over him with a hearty zip! The cap dropped by his side, and +when he came to pick it up he found that it had a hole through its +crown where the bullet had gone. Most assuredly the insurgent was a +good marksman, and he shuddered to think what his own fate would have +been had he carelessly exposed himself. + +The shot of the sharpshooter brought an exclamation from the lips of +the chief, but beyond that Ronie heard nothing to explain to him what +was succeeding. He fancied at first he heard the man starting toward +him, but he was not quite sure of it. He was becoming alarmed in +regard to Jack. Where could he be all this time? Had he fallen into +some trap and become a prisoner? In the midst of these reflections he +suddenly became aware of the presence of some one near him, and he was +about to act in his defense when the familiar voice of Jack caused him +to stop. + +"Easy, lad! It's all right with him yonder. Your ruse worked to +perfection and just in the nick of time. I managed to handle him +without making a disturbance. His shot has not seemed to arouse them, +and it is time for us to act. The road is not far away, and the +insurgents seemed to have halted near the outlet of this swamp. I +judge they are waiting for some of their force to join them. Besides +the woman, they have one or two other captives, which I judge they are +taking to headquarters. If you feel like looking at them, follow me. +We might as well go that way as any other, for the woods are full of +the cusses behind us. Somehow, they run an idea we have taken to the +mountains, which is natural, I suppose." + +Ronie was nothing loath to move, as he had begun to tire of this +inactivity, so he kept close behind Jack, who began to worm his way +along the margin of the lowlands, until, after several minutes of this +tedious advance, Jack paused. + +"If I am not mistaken, we are within gunshot of these brown-skinned +rebels," he whispered. "But there is no doubt but they are on the +lookout for us, and we must move with great caution. Let's make +another hitch." + +Once more they went forward, keeping close to the earth, and under the +cover of the overhanging tropical vegetation, being careful how they +disturbed each bush, and with their eyes constantly trying to pierce +the gloom around them. So, like woodsmen following some Indian trail +in the days of the pioneers, they wormed their way along, Jack ever and +anon lifting his head slightly so as to get a wider view of his +surroundings, but always careful not to expose any part of his figure. + +Finally he paused again, Ronie quickly imitating his example, while he +listened for the explanation he knew his companion was ready to make. +Though slightly behind him, he had discovered the shadowy outlines of +several horsemen drawn up in a semi-circle. + +"We have reached the road," said Jack, softly. "Can you see the +horsemen just to our right, where the way curves slightly?" + +"Yes," replied Ronie, in the same cautious tone. + +"And the woman? She is a little beyond the main body, on the gray +horse." + +"I see her, now that you have called my attention to her. I should +know her by her skirts." + +"Right, lad. The brook is just below. The crafty dogs are still +harkening and waiting. But they will not wait much longer. Hark! a +body of horsemen are coming up the road at this moment! It is probably +these they are waiting for." + +"What do you propose to do, Jack?" + +"Get a little nearer, lad." + +"Do you think we can save her?" + +"We will try, but it can be done only at great risk and under cover of +the excitement of the meeting of these squads. Come on, lad, every +moment is precious to us." + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A FRIENDLY VOICE. + +In the work that followed, Jack Greenland showed that he was no novice +in woodcraft, but it would take more space than I can give to it to +describe minutely the details of what I shall only attempt to outline. +It would not do for them to leave the thick fringe of bushes +overhanging the road, and yet, in order to accomplish his purpose, it +was necessary for them to shorten the space between them and the rebel +riders under "El Capitan," as the mountain insurgent was called. To do +this more safely, Jack retreated about a yard, and then crept forward +in the same direction of the road. In spite of his extreme caution, +Ronie heard a stick snap under his knee, when his heart came into his +mouth. Fortunately, one of the horses stamped its foot at this moment, +and thus the fainter sound was drowned by the heavier. Then the harsh +voice of the insurgent was heard to exclaim: + +"Fire on the head of the laggard! I cannot wait here any longer. +Forward, men! on to the mansion, which shall be the cage for our bird." + +Without further delay the body of half a dozen riders struck their +impatient steeds smartly with their spurs, and would have swiftly +disappeared from the scene, but for an accident to the foremost. His +animal, thus suddenly aroused, reared into the air and then plunged +forward, but, either stepping into a hole or stumbling, it staggered +ahead, coming nearly upon its knees. Its rider was flung headlong into +the bushes within a hand's reach of our amateur scouts! + +This mishap plunged the rest of the riders into confusion, nearly +unseating Rhoades himself, but who rallied with a horrible imprecation +upon the head of his unfortunate follower. With rare presence of mind +the woman on the gray horse wheeled her spirited animal quickly around +to make a bold dash for freedom. There were horsemen behind her, but +that was her only way of escape, if she could hope to get away at all. +In a moment the entire scene had become one of wildest excitement, and +above the clatter of hoofs and the cries of his men, rang the voice of +the leader, as he swung his own horse around, calling upon his +panic-stricken followers: + +"Don't let her escape! Shoot her if must be, but stop her!" + +The mountain outlaw was about to carry out his own order, when he +received a terrific blow from Jack Greenland, which tumbled him from +his seat to the ground. Jack and Ronie had been quick to perceive that +in this exciting tableau lay their chance of action. + +"Mount the free horse and ride down the road for your life!" said Jack. +"A bold dash will carry us through." + +Then he sprang forward to capture the horse ridden by the insurgent +chief, knowing that, could he be successful in this, it would throw the +squad into confusion. Without a leader they were not likely to make a +very effective pursuit. I have described the result of his swift and +daring onset. And, as Rhoades, stunned by the blow, sank helpless to +the earth, the fearless American seized the bridle rein of the +frightened horse before it could clear itself from the hand of its +former master. Almost simultaneously with this action Jack would have +been in the saddle, but for the fact that the right foot of the +insurgent had caught in the stirrup. This caused a brief delay, but, +wrenching the offending limb aside, the captor vaulted into the seat +just as two or three shots whistled through the air at random from the +discomfited insurgents, who were at a loss to account for just what was +being enacted in their midst. One of these bullets cut away a lock of +his silvered hair, but, unminding his narrow escape, he turned the +horse sharply about, crying to the woman, who had succeeded in heading +her steed down the road: + +"Ride for your life. It is your only hope." + +She had already reached the outside circle of the little group, and her +horse, a spirited one, cleared the last of the dismayed riders, to bear +her down the way at a terrific pace, her long, black hair streaming in +the wind as she sped on. Once a white face was turned backward for a +moment, and then she disappeared from sight. + +Meanwhile Ronie was having an experience equally as exciting and even +more dangerous to his life and liberty. He had succeeded in catching +upon the bridle of the horse that had thrown its rider, and he gained +the saddle an instant later, while the terrified animal reared and +plunged furiously. But the young engineer had secured a firm hold on +the reins, and was likely to obtain quick control over the creature, +when he found stout hands laid on the bridle with a power which threw +the struggling brute back upon its haunches. + +The attack of the insurgents, three in number, was so sudden and +powerful that Ronie's escape seemed impossible. + +"Shoot the dog!" cried one of the insurgents. + +"Don't let him get away!" exclaimed the chief, who had rallied by this +time sufficient to realize something of the situation. + +Ronie knew he could expect no assistance from Jack, who was having all +he could attend to, and he resolved to make a desperate attempt to get +away. Accordingly, he whipped out the stout knife which had been given +him by Manuel Marlin, and as the shots of his enemies sped past his +head, he cut the reins upon which the insurgents were clinging, when +the men, suddenly losing their hold, staggered forward, leaving the +animal freed from their clutches. + +Finding itself thus relieved of the weight dragging it down, the horse +flung up its head, gave vent to a wild snort, and bounded madly over +their writhing forms, to rush like a whirlwind down the road, scarcely +a head behind Jack, mounted on the chief's fleet-footed steed. Though +nearly unseated by this abrupt onset, Ronie held fast to his position, +while he was borne on at a rate of speed which fairly took away his +breath. Even Jack, going at his terrific pace, was passed, and then +the woman on the stout gray was outdistanced. Without check or +guidance to its headlong flight, Ronie soon found that his horse was +running away! + +The cries and the rifle shots of his enemies were soon lost in the +distance, but the young engineer had barely recovered his equilibrium, +so to speak, when he became conscious of the approach of a body of +horsemen from ahead. Naturally expecting only enemies, he began to +wonder how he was to come out of this new danger. The sounds of the +approaching horses told that this party were coming at a gait almost as +swift as that by which he was carried along. Thus he was not given +sufficient time in which to prepare for the meeting, if any preparation +could be made by him in his plight, before he found himself carried +into the very midst of a squad of a dozen horsemen, sweeping toward him +at a breakneck pace. Wild shouts rang in his ears, but if efforts were +made to stop him he was not aware of it. In some manner, never quite +plain to him, he was carried through the party of riders, brushing +against them on the right and left, but clearing them in an incredible +space of time, to be still carried on with unabated speed. + +So far Ronie had not gathered his scattered faculties enough to act, +but now, remembering that the bridle was still left on the head of the +horse he bestrode, he leaned forward and grasped the side straps close +down to the bit. Perhaps the animal had begun to tire of its wild race. + +At any rate, it quickly yielded to the strong hands wrenching at its +mouth, and began to slacken its speed. + +All this really took place in less time than it has taken to describe +it, even in outline, and the excitement and confusion of the surprised +riders in his rear were yet ringing in his ears, when Ronie, for the +second time, became aware of the approach of horsemen. But before he +could obtain control of his own horse, or anticipate who might now be +in his pathway, a stentorian voice thundered in English: + +"Halt! Who comes here?" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +COLONEL MARCHAND. + +It was fortunate for Ronie Rand that he had succeeded in getting +control of the horse he rode, or his experiences in Venezuela would +have terminated in a tragic manner. With the thrilling command of the +leader of this body of horsemen, the firearms of his soldiers leaped to +their shoulders, and in another moment a volley of bullets would have +stopped the advance of our hero. Seeing only the inevitable to be met, +he cried out: + +"I am an American! I surrender if need be." + +"Hold, men!" called out the officer. "He is a lone American. He +cannot belong to the gang we are running down. Who are you, sir?" + +"My name is Roland Rand, sir, and I have only recently reached this +country. With a friend I am on my way to Caracas, and just escaped +from the rebels under El Capitan." + +Ronie had answered thus boldly and openly, for he was certain the body +of soldiers in front of him were not a part of the insurgents he had +just escaped by so narrow a margin. By this time the sound of other +horses approaching came from near at hand, and the officer ordered his +men to be in readiness to meet them. Believing them to be Jack and the +captive woman, he wheeled smartly about, saying: + +"I believe they are friends of mine. Hold up, Jack!" he cried, as the +latter, with the woman riding abreast of him, came into sight. "I +believe these are friends." + +"Halt! Who comes here?" demanded the officer. + +"Friends," replied Jack, suddenly checking his headlong flight, while +the woman followed his example. Then, before anything further could be +said or done, the officer did a most unexpected thing. Urging his +horse close beside Ronie, he cried: + +"Roland Rand! Is it possible I find you here?" + +Ronie, at first thinking the other meant to do him harm, shrank back, +but he quickly rallied at the familiar tone of the speaker. Then, with +a wild feeling of joy, he looked more closely upon him, to exclaim the +next moment: + +"Colonel Marchand!" + +"At your service, Mr. Rand, but I am puzzled to know how it is I meet +you here, where I least expected to find you." + +"It is a very long story to tell, Colonel Marchand, and I will gladly +explain it all to you at the first opportunity. This is my friend, +Jack Greenland," signifying that individual, who had not yet recovered +from the surprise he had experienced. + +"Glad to meet you, too, Mr. Greenland. But where is Harrie, Ronie? Is +he coming behind you?" + +"He is in prison at San Carlos, colonel. Jack and I were on our way to +Caracas to find relief for him." + +"What is he in prison for? The penitentiary is mainly filled with +rebels now." + +"That is the charge against him. He was taken under suspicious +circumstances, but I can vouch for his honor." + +"Then you are not rebels, Ronie?" + +"No, sir--that is, we have not committed ourselves as being against the +government." + +"Good! You evidently carry a level head. I am at the head of a +regiment fighting for President Castro. We were in hot pursuit of a +body of the insurgents whom we routed in a fight below here. But who +is this woman with you?" + +"She is a captive in the hands of Rhoades' guerrillas. I do not know +her name. Perhaps she will give it herself. We were trying to strike +a blow in her behalf." + +The strange woman, thus appealed to, said, in that musical voice so +common to the better class of Venezuelans: + +"You are very kind, seņors. I do not know that you would care to hear +my name, for it has too often been a bone of contention in this unhappy +land. My husband was Francisco de Caprian. I am not ashamed to say +that." + +Colonel Marchand uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, though Ronie +Rand was expecting this reply, he could not wholly conceal his emotion +at the mention of that name which he had learned to both fear and +respect. He could not refrain from saying: + +"You are Francisco's mother?" + +"You know my son!" she cried somewhat wildly. + +"We met him on the _Libertador_, seņora. He is now in prison at San +Carlos with our friend." + +"Then he lives! They told me he was dead. Oh, my son! When shall I +meet him again?" + +"I do not understand this," declared Colonel Marchand, brusquely. "You +talk of the _Libertador_, the outlawed scourge of the coast, of the De +Caprians, every one of whom is denounced as spies, and of loyalty to +Castro, the patriot president, all in the same breath." + +"I will explain fully if I am given the opportunity," replied Ronie, +stoutly. + +"Pardon me, Ronie," Colonel Marchand hastened to say. "I do not doubt +you, but this is no time for explanations here. We have dallied too +long already, if we would catch our birds. Go to the rear, you three, +under an escort to protect you. Mind you, Lieutenant Garcia, the woman +remains with you until I return. We will make short work of the +mountain rebels." + +Upon finishing his brusque orders, Colonel Marchand wheeled smartly +about and dashed up the road, followed by his troops, numbering half a +hundred or more, Lieutenant Garcia and three privates remaining to look +after the two Americans and Seņora de Caprian. The lieutenant showed +by his reluctance to move on his duty that he was not well pleased with +the plan, and he was heard to exclaim under his breath that it was a +shame to be cheated of the sport at this juncture. However, he soon +recovered his good nature, and, requesting his companions to follow, +rode sharply in an opposite direction to that just taken by his +superior officer. + +About two miles below they came upon a small town, where Lieutenant +Garcia ordered a halt until he should receive further orders from +Colonel Marchand, or meet him in person. This place, which had been +the scene of a stirring skirmish a few days before, was now in the +hands of the government troops, which the latter did not hesitate to +display in their actions. Though Seņora de Caprian was treated with +extreme courtesy, Ronie and Jack did not fail to observe that a strict +watch was kept over her, and the room assigned her at the house where +the little party made its headquarters had a guard stationed outside +the door. Of course, our heroes were allowed their liberty, but they +were only too glad to improve the interval of waiting for the +reappearance of Colonel Marchand by throwing themselves down upon the +floor and seeking sleep. + +It was broad daylight when they awoke, and the sound of a body of horse +outside the building at once attracted their attention. They were soon +highly pleased to find that Colonel Marchand had returned. News came +to them that he had been successful in his pursuit of El Capitan and +his mountain rebels. As anxious as they were to see their old friend, +Ronie and Jack deemed it wise to wait until he had sought them. + +This did not give over half an hour's suspense before an orderly called +upon them to say that the colonel was awaiting them in his +headquarters. It is needless to say that they lost no time in obeying +this request to see him. They found the genial commander established +in one of the smaller buildings of the village, engaged in studying a +map of the country. But at sight of them he quickly forgot his chart, +and motioned for them to be seated, saying: + +"I have sent for you that I might know your story. We have sent the +rebels flying back into their mountain caves like rats driven to their +holes. They will not dare to show a head for at least twenty-four +hours, so I have a half-day's leisure, except that I must prepare my +report to send to General Castro. First I want to hear your story, and +I suggest you begin at the very beginning, so I may understand its +details and know how to act." + +Ronie, acting as spokesman, told their story in as few words as +possible from the time they had left Manilla to the present moment, +interrupted several times by the impulsive officer, who was both +surprised and pleased at the information they gave him. + +"By the right hand of Bolivar!" he exclaimed finally, "you may not be +aware of it, but you bear valuable intelligence that I shall take the +liberty to forward to General Castro. The character of the _Ban Righ_ +or the _Libertador_ has been pretty well known to us, but you make +plain some things which have been dark. I can see how Harrie fell +under suspicion under the conditions that he was taken prisoner." + +"You can secure his freedom, can you not, Colonel Marchand?" + +The colonel was a tall, slender man, with flashing, black eyes and long +mustache, which he was wont to twist very vigorously when he was +excited. He gave these a savage twirl now, and, springing to his feet, +began to pace to and fro furiously. + +"I know what I can do, I can try," he declared, returning to his seat +after pacing back and forth several times. "If I had been a little +more successful up this way, and he himself had not met with so many +reverses, I can imagine he might be more willing to grant my request. +But I will try--of course, I will try! I can but fail. If I do," and +here he lowered his voice, "by the right hand of Bolivar, the sword of +Leon Marchand shall be sheathed while Cipriano Castro holds the rein of +government." + +Both Ronie and Jack were somewhat taken aback by this speech, which +they could see was not a discreet one to make, especially in that +place. But the excitement of Colonel Marchand passed as quickly as it +had arisen, and he resumed, with marked calmness: + +"Coming here strangers, as you have, you can have little idea of the +real feeling slumbering like a volcano in the hearts of us Venezuelans. +The truth is, our people are the most ungrateful on the face of the +earth. All of the revolutions and political plots that have harassed +our country have been almost entirely uncalled for, though I will +confess our leaders have made an excuse easy through their eagerness to +"feather their nests," as you would say. But honest men have ever +found little encouragement to remain honest, when the populace stands +ready to take up the cry of 'fraud' the moment some disgruntled office +seeker utters such a cry to cover his own disappointment. The +utterance of the word becomes instantly the battle cry to call the mob +to riot and ruin. From a Venezuelan riot a general uprising will +follow in a single day, until the country is ravaged far and wide. +This is accounted for mainly by the fact that the population is made up +to nine out of ten of Indians, half-breeds and mulattoes, who are +naturally ignorant and easily aroused to fight. + +"Matos is followed by just such a rabble. He is rich, but not a +soldier by training. Still, it was enough that he was brilliant in +uniform and pompous in bearing; these, coupled with the rattle of the +drum and the tramp of many feet, aroused the mongrel crowd, until the +disgruntled rebel found himself tagged by an army of ragged, +boisterous, hungry men, who gladly followed him, and follow him still. +We saw an example of the stock in El Capitan's mountain horde. He +escaped me only by the skin of his teeth." + +"Here I am making a proclamation of war when I ought to be preparing my +dispatch for General Castro. I will use every argument I can for +Harrie, as I know he is a noble boy, and that his imprisonment is +unjust and wicked." + +"How about Francisco de Caprian?" asked Ronie, for Colonel Marchand had +not hinted of him. + +"I can do nothing," he replied, with a shake of the head. "The De +Caprians are very much in ill-favor just now. However, for your sake I +will mention him, and suggest that it will do no harm to set him free. +I think you said he suggested that he was willing to espouse our cause. +By the way, what do you say to a campaign under the illustrious Castro, +the modern Bolivar of Venezuela? I will mention your willingness, and +you can answer me afterward." + +Then Colonel Marchand became very busy with the preparation of his +dispatch. When it was finished he called an orderly, who was told to +see that it was forwarded to the commander-in-chief with as great +promptness as possible. + +"Bring me back a reply," added the colonel, and when he had seen the +messenger depart he turned to resume his conversation with Ronie and +Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +A CUNNING RUSE. + +"Speaking about joining our forces," said Colonel Marchand, "under the +circumstances it will be impossible for me to fulfill my promise to you +when I wrote. Neither would it be practicable to carry out plans made +under different conditions. Join our army for a while; it will prove a +lively vacation for you, and just as soon as this little cloud blows +over we will start. We will have the government behind us, too. It is +a great undertaking in more senses than one. I expect to become +regularly attached to Castro's army within a short time. In fact, I am +away now only temporarily. What do you say to becoming comrades under +Castro?" + +"I should want to consult Harrie before I decided," replied Ronie. + +"So you shall. Now that is settled, let us talk of other matters. It +is perfectly natural, however, that you should cast your fortunes with +ours for a short time. Venezuela does not forget that it was due to +Miranda's experience gained in fighting for the independence of the +Great Republic that he learned something of what might come to his +native land, and that it was the friendship of Lafayette, Hamilton and +Fox which encouraged him to push forward. When the revolution opened +in 1810, the United States furnished Venezuela with her munitions of +war. Two years later, when the earthquake destroyed twenty thousand of +our people, she sent supplies with a liberal hand to us. In this +crisis, which I believe is to be the most important affair in her +history, we stand in need of Northern friendship. Europe is against +us, and in the jealousy of the powers there would gladly hail any +pretext upon which she could seize us." + +"The Monroe Doctrine must be a great safeguard to you." + +"If it hadn't been for that these little South American republics would +have been swallowed by European powers long before this." + +"While the swallowing would have caused some bloody wars." + +"Very true, but we are used to that. There has not been a time within +my remembrance when there has not been a war of some form in process. +Speaking of the European nations swallowing us, you may forget that we +are three times as large as France or Germany, and five times as large +as Italy. We are larger than any European country outside of Russia. +Something of its natural features may be understood from the fact that +it holds within its domain some beautiful bodies of inland water, the +largest of which, Lake Maracaibo, is somewhat larger than Lake Ontario. +Within the republic are over a thousand rivers, the largest of which is +the Orinoco, next in size to the Amazon of the rivers of South America. + +"In regard to its physical features, the country may be divided into +three great zones, increasing in size according to the following order: +First, the zone of agriculture; second, the zone of grazing land; last, +the larger in area than both of the others, the zone of the forests. +There are two seasons, the wet and the dry, called winter and summer. + +"Venezuela is thinly populated, having about two and one-half millions +of inhabitants. They still preserve the type of the Spanish race, +which afforded them origin, though they have become largely a +cosmopolitan race, due to the mixture with the natives. These have +retained to a wonderful extent their primitive beauty, so the men are +manly and symmetrical, the women graceful and beautiful." + +"How is it about the wild horses our geographies describe as still +roaming with flowing manes and foaming nostrils and llanoes and +pampas?" asked Ronie. + +"They disappeared before the buffalo vanished from your Western plains. +I would say also of the people, instead of the wild beauties your books +tell you are yet living in almost primitive simplicity, you will find, +when you get to the capital, women and maidens looking quite as +anxiously for the fashion sheet from Paris as her sisters in New York. +We are apt to think the only civilization is that around us. How well +do I remember that my first impressions were that the little space +about me in which I was reared comprised the world. Gradually my +vision extended, and my knowledge expanded, until I find it is a big +old world, and that it holds many people." + +Colonel Marchand's kindly words, and his willingness to inform his +friends, put our couple very much at their ease. Ronie improved the +first opportunity to speak of that matter which was frequently +uppermost in his mind, the finding of his mother's photograph under +such peculiar circumstances. He was unable to offer any solution of +the mystery, while he showed a deep concern. + +"I cannot think your mother would come to this country, even with the +hope of meeting you, without first sending me word of her intentions. +Of course, I should have tried and met her at La Guayra." + +"You have not heard from her?" + +"Not a word, though I did expect to get a letter in regard to your +coming. I feel very sure the photograph must have been brought from +New York by some disinterested party, who came into possession of it by +accident. I cannot imagine anything else, though this is rather hard +to believe." + +Realizing that Colonel Marchand had affairs that needed his attention, +Ronie and Jack asked if they might look about the town, and the simple +request being granted, they passed the next few hours in exploring the +place, though finding little to interest them. The regular inhabitants +had nearly all fled, and those who had remained appeared ill at ease +under the existing conditions, as they might have been expected to be. + +"I tell you what it is, Jack," said Ronie, "it looks to me as if these +revolutions are sapping the very life out of the country." + +"Ay, lad; and now it looks as if you and I were to become actors in one +of them. I wonder what is going on yonder." + +These words were spoken by Jack as their attention was caught by the +sight of a group of people gathered near the building where they had +been lodged. As they advanced with quickening steps, it became evident +that a fight or street brawl was in process. Around this a couple of +dozen or more civilians had clustered, and by the way they encircled +the combatants it looked as if they were trying to shield them from the +gaze of the soldiers, should any of these happen to come that way. For +a wonder not one of these was in sight at that moment, though the +steady tread of the sentry within the building could be heard as he +paced back and forth with measured step. + +"Better give them a wide berth," declared Jack. "It never does any one +good to get mixed up in one of these senseless encounters. Why, if you +should go to the assistance of one of them, thinking he was being +abused, the chances are more than even he would join with the other in +abusing you. By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! this does +not seem to be a fight by common brawlers, for their _mantas_ show they +belong to the better class of civilians." + +The garment which had attracted the attention of Jack was the _manta_ +or _poncho_ made of white linen, which has the quality of repelling the +heat of the sun on a warm day. These garments are worn almost +continually by certain classes, among them the vaqueros, or riders of +the pampas. That of the latter consists of two blankets sewed +together, one of a dark blue color and the other of a bright red. +These hues are universally selected for a purpose, as they receive +light and heat differently, and are used so as to afford the best +results. Thus in dark and cloudy days the dark side of the blanket is +turned outward; on other days this is reversed. The double blanket +thus formed is quite two yards square, with a hole in the center to +admit the head of the owner. Its purpose is two-fold, to protect the +rider from the heavy dews and showers of the tropics, and to spread +under him at night when there is no place to sling up his hammock. But +the effect of this linen _manta_ worn by these street fighters was even +better than that of the woolen _cobija_ of the vaqueros. These +_mantas_ worn by this twain were fancifully embroidered, and showed +that they were expensive garments. At a distance they would present a +striking, picturesque appearance. + +Our heroes found it difficult to get near enough to obtain a view of +the stirring scene in the little opening made by the encircling +on-lookers, and, caring little for the affair, anyway, quietly +retreated. Then, the alarm having been spread, no doubt, the soldiers +began to appear in sight, and a squad led by an orderly started in to +disperse the crowd. But the spectators seemed too earnest to be easily +driven off, while the soldiers themselves quickly became so interested +in the contest that they tried little more than to get a good look at +the tableau. + +"I never saw a Venezuelan yet who didn't relish a good fight," remarked +Jack. + +"But look there, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "What is going on that way?" + +As Ronie pointed toward the rear of the building already mentioned, +Jack saw half a dozen loungers hanging along in a manner suspiciously +like a row of loafers, and not in knots, as men of this kind usually +congregate. + +"See! two of them are helping away a woman. Why, Jack! it is the +prisoner, Seņora de Caprian! She is trying to escape." + +In a moment the whole situation was plain to them. The brawl and fight +was simply a ruse to catch the attention of the soldiers while the +captive woman made her escape. So cleverly had it been carried out so +far, that it was likely to succeed beyond the most sanguine expectation. + +Ronie glanced hurriedly around to see that the orderly and his men were +in the thickest of the mob, oblivious of all except the hand-to-hand +tussle. Another minute and the captive would be beyond recapture, +except, possibly, after a long chase. His first thought was that of +gladness for the unfortunate woman, then he remembered that there was +another side to the question, and that it might be well to retain her +as a prisoner of war. He decided quickly upon his course of action; +whether it was right or wrong must be proven in the future. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +RONIE RECEIVES A COMMISSION. + +"She must not be allowed to escape, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "I heard +Colonel Marchand say that she knows secrets which it would not be well +for his enemies to learn." + +"Ay, lad; it is not too late for us to stop them." + +Without further delay the twain sprang forward, and were in season to +intercept the fugitives. As they brought their firearms to bear upon +the men who had constituted themselves Seņora de Caprian's escort, +Ronie cried, sharply: + +"Stand where you are!" + +The woman uttered a cry of dismay at this command, while the men +suddenly stopped, facing the determined Americans with frightened looks. + +"Let me pass, seņors, I implore you," begged the prisoner, the tears +springing to her eyes, while she clasped her hands and turned upon them +such looks of agony as haunted them for many a day. Ronie, at least, +felt that he had committed an act which he should regret, and it is +possible if the opportunity had remained when he could have allowed her +to escape with safety, he might have done it. But the die was cast, +and there was no retreat. The loud, authoritative words had aroused +others. The soldiers were suddenly recalled to their duty, while the +sight of the fugitive and their captors quickly caught the attention of +the newcomers upon the scene, foremost among these being Colonel +Marchand! + +He instantly comprehended the situation, and a look of admiration for +the prompt deed lightened the bronze upon his cheeks, while he said: + +"By the soul of Bolivar! you have done well, seņors. Soldiers, secure +the prisoner immediately, and see that her liberators are taken into +custody." + +"I hope there will be no cause for us to regret what we have done, +colonel," said Ronie, who really felt sorry for the prisoner. + +"You may cut off my right hand if you do, Seņor Rand. At present it is +necessary that we hold the woman as a prisoner of war, but she shall be +well treated, and I have no doubt be set free soon." + +Ronie knew Colonel Marchand was a man of his word, and he felt better +over what he and Jack bad done. This pleasure was further increased by +the words of the colonel as they accompanied him to his headquarters. + +"This will prove a good day's work for you, Ronie. I only regret I had +not been able to report it to General Castro when I sent my dispatch, +but better late than never. What do you say to going with us on our +campaign toward Maracaibo? We start within an hour. The rebels are +rallying in that direction, and we must look after them before they +become too strong." + +The fact that it was likely to take them nearer to Harrie, if not quite +to San Carlos, was enough to shape their decision, and inside of an +hour they were mounted and riding with the troops toward the west, +Ronie getting his first taste of warfare. + +The days that followed would never be forgotten by our American +soldiers in the service of Venezuela. Colonel Marchand seemed to be +always on the move, but the enemy was even more active than he, and +always kept one scene ahead of him. For instance, he left the little +hamlet where Ronie and Jack joined his forces to go to another country +town called Verona, where it was reported the insurgents had made a +raid. Upon reaching this settlement, which was little more than a +collection of coffee planters' conical dwellings, it was ascertained +that the enemies had been gone a few hours, and that they were headed +toward Juan. Hither, posthaste, dashed the Venezuelan cavalry, +resolved to be in season this time, only to find that again the bird +had flown. But Castro's troops were led by a captain who had the name +of never sleeping, and once more he followed on their heels. Then he +learned they had gone back to Verona! Thus two weeks were spent in +vain advances and retreats, swift dashes ahead and equally as rapid +doubling upon the track, until we finally find the grimy riders halted +near the rim of a little plain which formed the foot of a mountain +range trending away toward the more lofty peaks making the highest +elevations of land in the Western World. As may be imagined, the +doughty colonel was in no enviable mood, as he sat by the door of his +tent, whose roof was the bended sky. It was one of those inns found at +those outposts between the agricultural and pastoral regions. + +The men were busy getting the evening meal, which was to be made up +largely of a fat bullock killed a few minutes before. Evidence had +been witnessed where the insurgents had broken into a herd that very +day and slaughtered several of the best beeves. This killing of cattle +was characteristic of Venezuelan warfare. The ragged troops of the +revolutionists must be fed, and what easier way to do it? + +Ronie and Jack, who had ridden until they were tired and sore, were +attending to their tough ponies before spreading their ponchos over the +stony spot which they had cleared of the rank vegetation so as to +prepare their couch for the night, as there were no posts upon which to +hang their hammocks, when a messenger informed them that Colonel +Marchand wished to see them immediately. At a loss to know what this +order could mean, they lost no time in answering the summons. + +They found the colonel, usually so genial, very much out of humor. At +first Ronie feared that he had done something to arouse this uncommon +state of mind on the part of his superior. + +"Sergeant Rand," greeted the colonel, brusquely, giving our hero a +title quite unexpected to him, "I have sent for you to see if your +Yankee ingenuity and courage cannot help me out of this difficulty." + +"I am at your service, colonel," replied Ronie, with a military salute, +"and I am sure my friend here is equally as faithful." + +"Ay, ay, Colonel Marchand; where Ronie Rand leads I----" + +"Sergeant Rand, if you please, Seņor Greenland," interrupted the +officer. "I will now explain what I want of you." + +Though taken somewhat aback by this greeting, our twain bowed and +waited respectfully for the other to explain. + +"In the first place," began the colonel, "I need not tell you how I +have been buffeted about for the last ten days. It has set my teeth on +edge. On every hand my scouts have been baffled by these scoundrels of +the bush, who make a farce of war and style themselves 'Sons of +Liberty!' Word comes in that they are everywhere successful, and that +Castro is discouraged. I know better than the last. He is not that +kind of a man. But enough of that. What I want of you is simply this: +Take as many men with you as you wish, and reconnoiter the country as +far as you think best, and report to me as often as possible. Are you +willing to undertake this hazardous mission?" + +"I am willing to do my duty, Colonel Marchand." + +"Ay, ay, colonel," added Jack. + +"Spoken like true soldiers. I know I can depend on you. Now name the +number of men you want to go with you, and I will have them detailed at +once. Remember you are to have command of the squad, with your friend +as deputy." + +"I assure you, colonel, we appreciate the honor. I think three men +will be sufficient. A small body of men can go where a large one would +be likely to attract attention." + +"Good! My scouts dare not stir out of their hammocks without an army +is at their heels. How soon can you be ready to report, sergeant?" + +"In half an hour, colonel." + +"Thank you, sergeant. That will give me time to detain [Transcriber's +note: detail?] the men, and I will see that you have the best in the +regiment. By the way, sergeant, I wish to say that I have received as +yet no reply from General Castro, but I probably shall before you get +back. I would also add that I expect to move to Baracoa in the +morning, where I shall await news from you." + +"Well, Jack, what do you think of this?" asked Ronie, as soon as they +had left the presence of Colonel Marchand. + +"Looks as if we were going to taste of real warfare," replied Jack. "I +can't say that I am sorry, for as long as we cannot go ahead with our +work it will serve to break the monotony." + +"If I only knew that mother was safely at home, and Harrie was with us, +I really think I should enjoy it. If there was only some way I could +get a letter sent to her, I would write to mother in New York, hit or +miss." + +"Perhaps the colonel will have a chance to get it to the capital," +suggested Jack. "If you want to write it, I will see that everything +is got in readiness for our start." + +"You are very kind. I think I will do it. It will certainly do no +harm." + +So Ronie wrote his letter to his mother, describing briefly his recent +experiences, and speaking particularly of the portrait he had picked +up. He had to make his letter short, for he not only prepared that, +but he ate a hasty meal, which Jack had prepared, and with his faithful +companion presented himself at the commander's tent in exactly half an +hour. + +"I am glad to find you so punctual," remarked the colonel. "Yes, I +will send your letter along at the first opportunity. Here are the men +who are to accompany you. I wish you success, but I do not believe I +need to caution you to move cautiously. You have been here long enough +to know something of the character of these bush rebels." + +In this brusque manner Colonel Marchand saw them depart, though he did +not return to his papers until they had disappeared beyond the line of +forest vegetation which encircled the clearing in the shadows of the +mountains. His eye trained upon the spot where he had last seen them +after they had vanished for several minutes, he finally turned back, +saying, under his breath: + +"I hope I shall not be disappointed in them as I have the others who +have gone before them." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +THE SCOUT IN THE JUNGLE. + +Riding at a leisurely pace, the five scouts started upon their +dangerous quest, Ronie and one of the Venezuelans riding side by side, +with Jack and another behind them, leaving the single man to follow. +The young sergeant was pleased to find that the trio selected to +accompany him by Colonel Marchand were very prepossessing men, one of +them a man with gray hair, while the others were but a little over +twenty years of age. The oldest, whose name was Riva Baez, claimed he +knew the country well, so it was he who rode beside our hero to show +the way. + +"About ten kilometers to the west we shall strike the main road to +Truxillo," he remarked. "But it may be well for us to avoid that. El +Capitan and his followers are believed to be hovering around the +foothills between here and Barquisimete. It is a country just suited +to ambuscade and concealment." + +"How far is it to the nearest town?" + +"Less than five kilometers. It is a small town called Caro." + +"Is it held by the insurgents?" + +"No, though it bears the marks of one of their raids. The people have +been left too poor to be either feared or sought for." + +"We need not go there?" + +"About a kilometer this side we can strike a mountain road leading into +the wild country." + +"Where we are likely to find El Capitan and his insurgents?" + +"_Si_, Sergeant Rand." + +"Then that is our course, seņor. Show us the way." + +Nothing further was said until possibly three miles had been passed, +when Riva Baez drew rein. The road they had taken soon after leaving +the encampment of the troops, by this time had sort of "dwindled away," +as Jack put it, until it was now little more than a cattle path. The +country ahead was thinly populated, if settled at all. The guide of +the little party was the first to speak: + +"If we follow this course half a kilometer farther we shall come out +upon the road leading to Caro, which winds down from the mountains. +Beyond, the country is infested with the insurgents, and we are likely +to run upon them at every turn. If we keep on through Caro we shall +soon come into the lower country, where we shall find a string of towns +along the way, but the people, as a rule, unfriendly to us. If we bend +to the left here we shall be able to make a short cut over the spur of +the ridge and reach the region of Maracaibo without much risk of +stirring up El Capitan's hornets. Which way shall we go, sergeant?" + +"Our purpose is to learn all we can of the enemy," replied Ronie. +"According to your account, we shall learn very little of them by +keeping to the left. Neither are we especially anxious just at present +to seek towns in the lower country. But we will go to Caro first." + +"_Si_, Sergeant Rand," and without longer delay Riva Baez led the march +forward again. Owing to the unfavorable conditions of the route, they +had advanced slowly, and it was now past midnight. The moonbeams +tipped the treetops with a silvery halo, but underneath this foliage it +was so dark that our riders had to pick their way with constant +caution, lest they should run into some trap of nature or set by the +hand of an enemy that claimed this country as his own. + +Nothing to cause them actual alarm, however, took place, and after a +while Riva declared they were close down to Caro, which he described as +lying in a narrow valley through which wound one of the numerous +mountain streams watering the country. Upon receiving this +intelligence, Ronie called a halt, and after a short consultation with +his guide and Jack, he decided to enter the town alone with the former, +leaving the others to await their return, unless called by a signal +agreed upon. With this understanding he and the guide rode cautiously +forward, the road overhung with the dense vegetation springing from a +rich soil under most favoring conditions of the atmosphere. + +A ride of less than five minutes, even at a slow pace, brought the two +scouts in sight of the little hamlet made tip of coffee planters' +homes. At that time the silence of sleep lay upon the place, no sound +of night breaking the gentle murmur of the river flowing parallel with +the road. Near the edge of the first plantation Ronie motioned for his +companion to stop, when he slipped from the saddle to the ground. + +"I am going to make a little exploration alone," he whispered. "Do you +remain here with the horses. I will not be gone over ten minutes. If +I am, you may understand that I am in trouble, and act at your own +discretion." + +"Look sharp, seņors," warned Riva Baez. "No one seems to be astir, +but, for all that, one of El Capitan's sharpshooters may be lying in +wait to shoot you down like a jaguar." + +"I have had a bit of experience among the Igorrotes of Luzon," replied +Ronie, "and you can count upon me not running headlong into an ambush. +What a beautiful night it is," he could not refrain from adding. + +"If you think this is delightful, sergeant, you ought to witness a +night on the Orinoco in the great rubber country of the south." + +Without making any reply to this, Ronie stole silently forward upon +foot, soon finding himself in the midst of the beehive homes of the +small coffee planters. But not a soul seemed to occupy the primitive +dwellings without doors or windows, but left free for the passage of +the night breeze. + +"It is singular no one should be awake," he mused, "but the houses +appear to be as deserted as if they had never been occupied. There is +a mystery about this I do not understand. I am inclined to risk my +chances and enter one of them. I will if they all prove to look as +empty as these." + +With these thoughts in his mind he moved stealthily along past hut +after hut, reached by avenues bordered by stately, flowering plants of +tropical brightness and verdure. But everywhere he went prevailed the +utter loneliness and emptiness which had first struck him as so +unusual. Finally, satisfied in his own mind regarding the actual +situation, he ventured to enter one of the dwellings, though not +without extreme caution. He crept along under cover of a row of +broad-leafed guamos bearing pods eight or ten inches in length, which +were filled with rows of black beans enveloped in a pulp of snowy +whiteness and agreeable sweetness. But if these facts had been known +to the young scout at this time they would certainly have been unheeded +by him, as he made his stealthy advance. He was aware that the time +for his return to Riva Baez was nearly passed, but he disliked to +return until the mystery of the silent town had been solved. So he +continued his advance until at last he stood on the earth floor under +the thatched roof, where the complete silence of undisturbed repose +reigned. + +The conviction which had at first forced itself upon him had before +this become a settled fact. The dwelling was entirely deserted. Not +only was this the case with the hut he had entered, but it was true of +all the others. Caro was an abandoned town! + +Anxious now to return to his companions with the intelligence, he lost +no further time in retracing his steps, but he had barely gained the +road when he was aware of the approach of a horse! Ay, listening a +moment, he was certain there were two of them. Knowing it was +necessary for him to be on the alert for enemies, he drew back into the +mass of plants and waited until he should obtain a good view of the +riders who were abroad, half expecting one of them to be Riva Baez. He +was rewarded a moment later by the sight of his guide, who had become +uneasy and had come in search of him. A signal from him attracted the +Venezuelan's attention, and he showed unfeigned delight at finding his +leader so quickly. + +Riva Baez expressed little surprise when Ronie told him that Caro was a +deserted settlement, though he could offer no satisfactory explanation +for the fact. + +"El Capitan may have taken them all captives, or butchered them in cold +blood." + +"There is nothing to show that violence has been done them. The huts +are simply deserted, just as if the owners had been called suddenly +away for a brief absence." + +"True, Sergeant Rand. Shall we stop here a while or push on toward the +next place?" + +"We have no time to waste at this stage of action," replied the +energetic young American. "Let's move on into the country of the +insurgents. We can learn nothing by keeping away from them. The day +will soon be breaking." + +"_Si_, sergeant; I am at your command. We will climb the hill back of +us, and then turn to the right. At the top of the hill I think a call +will bring our comrades." + +"The safer call is to go to them. I will wait on the hill while you +are gone." + +From the vantage he had gained where he waited for his companions to +rejoin him, Ronie obtained a wide sweep of the surrounding country, a +view he knew was likely to prove of great value to him in his future +actions. He could not follow, even in the pale light of the western +moon, which was beginning to lose its glory before the coming of the +new light on the eastern horizon, the trend of the mountain ranges as +he had not been able to do before. He was really in the region of a +distinct offshoot of mountains from those that lead away from the +greatest mountain chain on the globe, the mighty Andes. The mountain +system which crosses Venezuela in this district is an offset from the +eastern Cordillera, and runs down to the Caribbean Sea in irregular +conformity with the eastern shore of the Lake of Maracaibo. From this +chain the Venezuelan system of two ranges, running almost side by side, +extends toward the east, the most northerly branch, which follows quite +closely to the seashore culminating in the Island of Trinidad. As he +looked down upon it in the still morning atmosphere, the whole panorama +of country appeared like a solid mass of forest, uneven, it is true, +but unbroken by the hand of man. The intense silence which had hung +over deserted Caro was intensified here, so that it became oppressive. +Ronie could not fully throw off this spirit of utter loneliness which +weighed down his very soul, so that he exclaimed involuntarily, in an +undertone: + +"Strange I should feel so impressed that something wrong is going to +happen. Somehow, I cannot shake off the impression that I stand in the +presence of a power that portends me mortal danger." + +He had only partially succeeded in overcoming this passing weakness +when he hailed with delight the reappearance of his companions, and the +five then moved ahead with their accustomed caution. + +Half an hour later, when the light of the new day was beginning to +penetrate the tropical foliage with growing brightness, they were still +slowly moving along the narrow way, overhung by tall, graceful trees, +adorned at their tops with brilliant flowers, when the silence of the +scene was suddenly broken by a loud rifle shot. It was, in fact, two +reports blending into one, for two bullets cleft the air; with a swift, +hissing sound. One of these struck the horse ridden by Riva Baez, and +the poor animal reared suddenly into the air, and snorted with pain and +terror. The other bullet cut away a lock of hair from the temple of +Ronie, and for an instant he was stunned by the force of the shot. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +ADVENTURES AND SURPRISES. + +While Riva Baez was struggling with his wounded horse, whose sudden +plunge had nearly unseated him, Ronie was also active, but in quite +another manner. The flash of the shots from the treetops had not sent +out its blaze of lurid light before he had discovered a pair of dark +forms crouching in the foliage overhead, and the double report had not +died away before he had covered one of these with his rifle, his clear, +ringing voice exclaiming: + +"Hold, there! Move an inch, and I will send a bullet through your +head!" + +Immediately cries of fright were uttered by the twain in their lofty +ambush, but neither man offered to move. The companions of Ronie and +Riva Baez, who had fallen behind a little, startled by these shots and +outcries, now dashed hurriedly upon the scene. + +"Cover the other rebel up there with your Mauser, Jack," commanded +Ronie. "Do not hesitate to fire if he dares to lift a finger." + +Jack quickly comprehended the situation, and no sooner had his youthful +commander spoken than he took swift aim at the trembling wretch in the +tree, saying, loud enough for the victim to hear: + +"Ay, sergeant; I glory in such shooting!" + +By this time Riva had succeeded in quieting his horse, which had not +received a fatal wound, and the veteran scout was ready to do his part +in the exciting drama. + +"Stand at the foot of the tree to receive them, boys," ordered Ronie. +"I am going to invite them to join us. Their company may be more +desirable than we think." + +Then, addressing the twain above, he continued in the best Spanish he +could command: + +"Come down, seņors, as quickly as may be." + +"Spare our lives, seņor!" begged the one whom the young American had +selected as his victim. + +"Upon the condition that you surrender peacefully. As proof that you +mean what you profess, please drop your weapons down to my men." + +Without delay, the couple dropped their Mausers, which were caught by +the young Venezuelans. + +"If you have any other firearms, kindly let them down, We have more use +for them than you." + +This demand was followed by two braces of heavy pistols, followed by a +couple of ugly-looking knives. + +"Any more such playthings?" asked Ronie. + +"No, seņor. We have no more weapons, unless you call this rope such." + +"Let that down, too. It will come in handy in a few minutes. You were +very thoughtful to take it along with you." + +The stout hempen rope was next thrown to the ground, after which the +terrified sharpshooters waited for the succeeding order. + +"Now, come down yourselves. Don't waste any powder, boys, if they are +foolish enough to think of trying to run away." + +"Ay, sergeant, trust us for that," replied Jack. + +Ronie soon had the satisfaction of seeing the two cringing before him +like a couple of curs about to receive a whipping. One of them was +evidently a half-breed, while his companion, who had done the talking +so far, showed more of Spanish blood. + +"You have been caught in an ugly game, seņors," said Ronie, whereupon +both bowed, the spokesman saying: + +"Do not shoot us, Seņor Americano. If you will spare our lives, we +will fight for you." + +"A pretty mess you'd make of it. You were scouts for El Capitan?" + +"_Si, seņor_." + +"You mistook us for Castro's soldiers?" + +"_Si, seņor_. We could not see very plain, and we thought you were +only two." + +"Which made your shooting more justifiable, I suppose. Seeing you are +such poor marksmen, we will forgive you, providing you will answer my +questions." + +"_Si, seņor_." + +"Where is El Capitan?" + +"At Morova." + +"How far is that from here?" + +"Four kilometers, seņor." + +"What is he doing there?" + +"Waiting for reinforcements." + +"What does he need reinforcements for?" + +"To whip the dogs of Castro." + +"No doubt he needs them. But are there any of Castro's soldiers in +this vicinity?" + +"_Si, seņor_, at Baracoa." + +This bit of information caused Ronie to resume his questioning with +greater interest, for he knew this referred to Colonel Marchand's +regiment. + +"How many men has El Capitan under him?' + +"Five thousand, seņor." + +"Beware, seņor, for I know now you lie." + +"He will have, seņor, before he reaches Valencia." + +"So he is headed in that way?" + +"_Si, seņor_." + +"What I want to know is, how many men has he now? Be careful, for +another lie will send your cringing souls to purgatory. How many men +has El Capitan now?" + +"Spare me, seņor! I do not lie. El Capitan has about two hundred with +him now, but he expects more soon." + +"Do you mean to say he has two hundred at Morova?" + +"Seņor misunderstood me. He will have two hundred as soon as Calveras +reaches him with his troops." + +"Dog!" cried Ronie, looking as fierce as he could, while he threatened +to resort to violence then and there, "you are trying to cheat me. I +asked you how many soldiers El Capitan has at Morova." + +"Fifty, seņor," and the frightened wretch and his companion seemed +about to collapse. + +"That is all now," declared the young sergeant. "Secure them, men, at +once." + +Nothing loath, his companions began to carry out his order, Jack +assisting Riva Baez in binding the spokesman of the twain. While they +were doing this, the former heard the sound of paper crumpled in the +prisoner's pocket. Thrusting his hand into the receptacle, he quickly +drew forth two soiled and wrinkled missives. + +"What have we here?" he asked. "As I live, here is a dispatch for +Colonel Marchand from General Castro," handing, as he spoke, the paper +to Ronie. Then, his eye falling upon the well-known envelope and stamp +of his own country, he exclaimed: + +"A letter for you, Ronie; and from New York!" + +If honest Jack Greenland had unconsciously committed a breach of good +respect in thus addressing a superior, Ronie did not heed it, while he +took the crumpled missive handed him, his own hand trembling and a mist +coming over his eyes at this unexpected communication from his native +land. This mist deepened and his hand shook more violently, as he +murmured, after glancing at its superscription: + +"It is from mother, Jack!" + +It was fortunate for the reputation of our hero that his companions +were attentive to their duty, or the prisoners might have eluded their +captors. But he was certainly excusable for his temporary lack of +discretion. The finding of this letter from his mother, under the +circumstances and condition of affairs, was enough to rob him of his +usual presence of mind. While the others completed their tasks, he +examined the missive, to find that it had already been opened. With +blurred sight, he ran hastily over its closely-written page, saying, +when he finished: + +"It is as I expected. Mother was to leave New York soon after writing +this, to meet me in Caracas. This was directed in the care of Colonel +Marchand, and has been forwarded through the courtesy of General Castro +to the colonel. She is here in this country, and in trouble, as I have +feared." + +"Let us hope it is nothing serious," said Jack. "At least, we can only +hope for the best until we are able to learn more and do more. Has the +dispatch to Colonel Marchand been opened?" + +"Excuse me, Jack, for forgetting my duty. It must be duty before +personal afflictions, I suppose. Yes, this has been opened. In that +case, it will do no harm for me to read it, particularly as I may learn +something to guide us in our work. It says," he continued, while he +scanned the document, "that General Castro has been elected president +of the republic for a term of six years. It says also that a body of +his troops have been defeated at Barquismoto by the insurgents; that +the _Libertador_ has fixed on and sunk a Venezuelan ship named _Crespo_ +off Cumarebo, and that Matos has succeeded in landing twenty thousand +rifles and two million cartridges at Trinidad. + +"Now I come to news that interests us more. General Castro has sent to +San Carlos demanding that Harrie be set at liberty immediately. That +is good news indeed. But he goes on to say that he cannot set +Francisco free until his case has had an investigation. Well, this has +proved to be a pretty fortunate capture." + +"A newsy one, certainly, and not all of it bad news, by any means. +Shall we take these fellows along with us, sergeant?" + +"Pardon me, Jack, I must be more mindful of my duty. Yes, I suppose we +shall have to do so. It is also necessary that one of us return to +Colonel Marchand with all haste possible, apprising him of what we have +done, and to take him this dispatch from the general. While you are +arranging for one of the boys to undertake this duty, I will write a +few words to the colonel." + +Then Ronie prepared his first war dispatch, succinctly describing what +he had done and discovered. By the time he had finished this Jack had +got one of the younger Venezuelans in readiness for his journey back to +the regiment. Though he was loath to trust these important messages +with this scout, Ronie felt that he could not do any better. He could +not very well spare Jack or Riva Baez. Then, too, the latter vouched +for the honesty and capability of the other, so he saw him depart with +full confidence that the arduous duty would be performed faithfully. + +The hands of the prisoners having been securely bound behind them, they +were ordered to march in front of Jack and the younger Venezuelan, +while Ronie and Riva Baez rode in front. In this manner the journey +was resumed, though continued but a short time. It was now getting to +be sunrise, and Riva having a friend in that vicinity, it was deemed +best to stop there for a while--at least, long enough for the animals +to recuperate. + +The plantation of this man proved to be a huge farm of many thousand +acres, but much of it valueless on account of the revolutionary state +of the country. He was at home, and as soon as he learned the +character of his visitors from his old friend Riva, he extended a most +cordial greeting to them, promising to do everything in his power to +assist them. The sight of the prisoners pleased him hugely, for he was +a most pronounced admirer and supporter of Castro, and he quickly +placed the two spies in quarters from which they could not escape +without help. + +"How is it," asked Ronie, "that you keep from being molested by the +insurgents, when you are situated in the heart of the debatable ground?" + +"The reason is simply because I can muster a force that can outwhip any +army of curs that El Capitan can muster," he replied, rather +vaingloriously. "Oh, they have tried it, Sergeant Rand, but I have +routed them like a band of monkeys, and I can do it again." + +Our little party fared sumptuously at the hands of this rather pompous +Venezuelan, whose name was Don Isadora Casimiro, and so they could find +no fault if he was a bit boastful and radical in his ideas. He +insisted that they remain with him during the day, showing the +advantage they would gain by waiting until nightfall before starting +out. As much as Ronie disliked this inactivity, he believed it was +wisest to do so. During the day the news was brought in by one of Don +Isadora's scouts that El Capitan was mustering his forces to march on +San Carlos with the purpose of liberating El Mocho. + +As soon as the shadows of night began to fall, Ronie prepared to start +anew on his expedition, Jack and the two Venezuelans accompanying him, +the prisoners being left in care of the followers of Don Isadora. The +ride for half an hour continued through an archway of trees growing on +the plantation of their host, when Riva declared that they had reached +the limit of his broad domains. They soon after entered a valley, the +hoof-strokes of their horses muffled by the soft, spongy earth. + +It must have been nearly midnight, for they had ridden several miles up +and down the country without discovering any trace of the enemy, when +Riva, who was slightly ahead of the others, abruptly paused in his +advance. Ronie quickly gained his side, where he stopped to learn the +cause of this unexpected halt. It required no words on the part of the +guide to explain his action, as he mutely pointed with his right hand +to a ravine, or gorge, running parallel with the road. The sound of +human voices came up distinctly to the ears of Ronie. + +Handing the rein of his horse to his companion, he silently dismounted, +and crept toward the brink of the chasm overhanging the place. In a +moment the light of a camp-fire struggled dimly upward through the +thick foliage, while with the sound of voices came the noise and +confusion of a body of men moving about. + +"I believe it is an encampment of El Capitan," he whispered to Jack, +who had joined him. "I have a mind to get a little closer." + +"I need not tell you to be careful," said Jack. "Can I go with you?" + +"I do not believe you had better, Jack. I will not be gone long. From +the sounds, I judge the party below are about to start on some midnight +raid." + +Before he had finished speaking, Ronie began to lower himself down the +descent, moving with such care that he made no noise. The bank did not +prove to be perpendicular, but its smooth side sloped gently away to +its foot, and covered as it was with rank vegetation, Ronie had little +difficulty in descending, except that at places the matted mass of +growth was so dense that he could penetrate it only after persistent +effort. At the end of five minutes he found himself so near the bottom +that his next step was upon the thatched roof of one of the primitive +buildings that seemed to form a row on this side. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +"THE MOUNTAIN LION." + +The sight which met Ronie's gaze was one of wildness bordering upon +grandness. Its wildness consisted of a body of armed troops drawn up +in front of the rude building, a mob of untamable savages, as the +spectator from a civilized country must have judged them. They were +half clad, poorly fed, as shown by their emaciated visages, and armed +mainly with the rude implements that the uncivilized use. This wild +aspect of the scene was given the touch of a certain grandeur by the +sublime attention this motley throng paid to him who stood upon a +slightly-raised dais addressing them at this moment. + +This speaker was a man of stalwart figure, with a countenance naturally +dark, bronzed by long exposure to the tropic sun, and flashing eye that +could look without flinching upon the midday sun or upon the wildest +rabble that ever gathered under the shadows of the land of revolutions. +His speech was uttered in a manner and tongue in keeping with the man +and the scene. Ronie could not understand all of the fierce language +which seemed to have partaken of the mountain boldness and flowed from +the lips of the orator like a torrent springing from its fountain head +amid the rugged fastness of its native gorge, but he understood enough +to catch the import of this stimulating harangue. He knew the man was +El Capitan, and he was evidently resuming a speech which, for some +reason, had been temporarily broken. + +"Soldiers of freedom," he was saying, "the time for action has come. +You have rallied bravely at my call, and now I am ready to lead you to +battle and victory! Our path is clearly marked. To-night let us teach +that braggart, Don Isadora, that he is not a little king; that he +cannot longer defy El Capitan! From the smoking ruins of his estate we +will sweep downward like a torrent from the mountain, and like a +torrent we will gather volume as we sweep along. A trail of devastated +plantations shall mark our course wherever the foolhardy defy us, and +above the ruins of the smaller towns shall rise the captured columns of +Valencia, La Guayra, Caracas--ay, Caracas! When the capital shall be +ours, then will we make laws that lift the poor man into his just +deserts, while the lawless rich shall feel the spur of oppression as +his meeted judgment. Then shall the name of El Capitan stand beside +that of Crespo, the mountain lion!" + +As might have been expected, this bombastic speech was frequently +interrupted with wild applause, especially when the orator compared +himself to the late president of the republic. In one respect, at +least, the harangue of El Capitan was apt. Crespo, like himself, was +of humble birth and very large of stature. Whether he would equal the +ex-president in other ways remained to be seen. Crespo was the idol of +his brave followers, who were a dashing, picturesque soldiery, that the +inhabitants of Venezuela looked upon very much as the Parisians must +have looked with awe upon Napoleon's Mamelukes. + +The story of this Venezuelan conqueror is a most interesting one. +Following the rule of three or four presidents and dictators who +succeeded the noted Blancos[1]--there were two of these, father and +son--were three or four presidents and dictators whose main object +seemed to be to rob the government of all the money they could, and +then flee from the country. Such proceedings gave the right man an +excuse and an opportunity to rebel. This man was General Crespo, who +with seven hundred followers set out to conquer the country. You have +read history, know how the ambitious Pizarro, in the stormy days of +conquest following the discovery of America by Columbus, overthrew the +empire of the Incas with a handful of followers--only thirteen at the +start. Crespo did better than that, for with only seven men he made +himself president of a country more than twice as large as Spain and +Portugal together, while I am glad to be able to say there was less of +bloodshed and far less of inhuman sacrifice of innocent lives than in +the case of the conqueror of the Incas. + +I cannot refrain from giving the following story as typical of the man: +His half-wild followers needed arms, and there was no manufactory to +replenish them. In this extremity, when almost any other leader must +have faltered, Crespo gave the order for his men to strip their bodies +naked to the belt, and cover them with a liberal coating of grease. In +this shape they were to charge upon an encampment of the enemy +numbering more than six to one. This was to be done under cover of +darkness, and as they ran through the camp each man was to hold his +left hand straight out from his body. If it came in contact with a man +wearing a shirt he was to overpower him and seize his firearms. If the +body was like his own, he was to know it was a friend, and to keep on. +In this wild, impressive manner less than three hundred half-naked men, +armed only with their short knives, routed and disarmed over three +thousand troops, comprising the flower of the government's army. + +It will be noticed that El Capitan's appeal was personal rather than +patriotic. Like many another Venezuelan revolutionist, he was fighting +for selfish purposes, but his barbaric followers did not stop to +consider this. Some one, with a memory of other days, asked concerning +the liberation of El Mocho, when El Capitan replied: + +"El Mocho is not to be trusted," meaning, no doubt, in his mind that he +did not propose to give such a dangerous rival opportunity to be in his +way. + +Ronie felt that he had learned enough to show him his path of duty. +Every moment was precious if he would warn Don Isadora of his peril, +and he had no desire to leave the well-meaning don to the hands of this +mountain outlaw. So he at once began his ascent of the bluff, which he +found extremely difficult. But he accomplished the feat in safety, to +find Jack and the Venezuelans anxiously awaiting him. A few words +sufficed to explain the situation to them, when they heartily agreed +with him that it was best for them to hasten to the plantation of the +don as quickly as possible. + +"I judge from what I heard while I was leaving my perch that El Capitan +is expecting another body of his followers to join him this side of Don +Isadora's. This division comes from the way of San Carlos. If it is +half as large as the force now under him he will lead a formidable army +against the don." + +"A mere rabble," said Riva. "Don Isadora has some trained soldiers +under him." + +By this time the four were riding silently away, being careful to move +as cautiously as they could. Riva again led the way, but Ronie and +Jack were close behind him, while the younger Venezuelan kept as near +to them as he could. In this manner the return journey to the don's +plantation was speedily made, and without being discovered by the enemy. + +As may be expected, the wealthy planter was profuse in his thanks for +the information they gave him, and he began to prepare for the enemy at +once, with a confidence in his ability to defeat the other that was +sublime. As much as Ronie would have liked to remain and see the +outcome of the affair, he felt it was his duty to start immediately to +find Colonel Marchand. Don Isadora seemed to understand that it was +the proper course for the scouts to pursue, so he offered no objections. + +As our little party rode out of the grounds, having left their +prisoners under the don's care, they saw that he had mustered his +entire forces, numbering fully a hundred men, all of whom were armed +with Mausers, pistols and short knives. + +"El Capitan will be the one surprised this time," remarked Ronie to his +companions. "I really wish we could stay and see the fun." + +Little did any one of the quartet dream of the amount of "fun" in +warlike earnest that he was to take part in before they should get +beyond the don's big estate. + + + +[1] Bolivar the "Liberator" was followed by others who managed the +affairs of Venezuela very satisfactorily, until in 1846 two political +parties formed. These were styled the "Liberals" and the +"Conservatives," and trouble increased swiftly. In 1859 Guzman Blanco +became the head of the stronger party, holding his sway until 1864, +when he was succeeded by a rival. In less than ten years, however, his +son came to the front, and, more powerful than his father, he made +himself president, with all the prerogatives of a dictator. This +office he held until 1884, when Crespo became president. Still the +hold of Blanco was not broken, and two years later he reassumed the +reins of government, but in 1890 his successor was defeated, and he +suffered a loss of his good name. In fact, a complete change of heart +for the family which had been dominant in affairs for over thirty years +followed. His name was stripped from one of the States where it had +been placed, and the public statues he had caused to be erected were +torn down, and much of the really good work he had done was destroyed. +But these radical denunciations could not remove the name of the +pompous leader from the historic pages of Venezuela, and it is well to +be so, for with all his shortcomings he did much for the rising +republic, though his stalwart figure is the landmark of a stormy +period.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +A FIGHT WITH THE GUERRILLAS. + +Our scouts had gone about a mile, and Ronie was riding slightly in +advance, when he became aware of the approach of a body of horsemen +coming at a leisurely trot. In a moment he signaled for his companions +to stop. + +"We cannot avoid meeting them," he said, "and no doubt they are a part +of El Capitan's army. We have started too late to escape them. Is +there any path turning off from the road that we can turn into, Riva?" + +"None, seņor." + +"Then we must turn aside here. Quick! push your horses back into the +forest, making as little noise and disturbance as you can." + +They were so successful in this work that before the approaching riders +had come into sight they were all safely ambushed where they could peer +out upon the passers-by without being seen, except by some scrutinizing +eye. Ronie and Jack sat in their saddles, side by side, while Riva and +his companion were only slightly removed. As the sound of the horsemen +indicated their close proximity, our hero parted the bushes enough to +enable him to obtain a good view of the road. + +"If our horses will only keep quiet," he began, "there is a----" + +Ronie's attention, in the midst of his speech, had become fastened upon +the foremost of the approaching riders, so his companions never knew +what he was about to say. Nor did he speak until the horsemen were +within half a dozen yards of them. The body of men were riding two and +two, and what had arrested his eyes was the sight of the nearest rider +in the lead. + +"It must be--it is Harrie!" he whispered. + +"Ay, lad!" responded Jack, who had been watching as eagerly and closely +as his companion. + +"He is lashed upon the horse, and his hands tied behind him. What does +it mean?" + +Jack had no time to reply, but the situation was plain to both. The +horsemen were a portion of El Capitan's followers, and were on their +way to attack the don. Could they stand idle there and see Harrie +taken to some fate they could not understand? Ronie's impetuous +temperament would not permit it. He believed a sudden attack, a few +shots, and the unsuspecting enemy could be routed, and their friend +rescued. Jack must have been revolving the same daring scheme in his +mind, for at this critical moment he nudged Ronie, whispering: + +"Ready when you say the word, sergeant." + +Our hero spoke hastily to Riva and his companion, who quickly +comprehended what was wanted of them. Then the clear command of the +young sergeant broke the stillness of the lonely scene: + +"Ready, men, fire!" + +In the twinkling of an eye the flashes of the Mausers lightened the +night, and three of the leading riders reeled in their seats, while +sudden commotion took place among the others. + +"Forward--charge!" thundered Ronie, setting the example by dashing +furiously from his covert. "Look sharp, Harrie; we are here to save +you." + +The animal bestridden by the young engineer began to snort and plunge +excitedly, but Ronie was soon at its bit. His comrades were as swiftly +charging upon the surprised insurgents, who, no doubt thinking they had +been attacked by superior numbers, broke and retreated in wild disorder. + +"Give them a parting shot, lads!" cried Jack, who, in his adventurous +career had led more than one regiment upon an enemy. + +The Mausers spoke right merrily, the reports mingling with the yells of +the discomfited rebels, who fled down the road as fast as they could +make their steeds go. + +In the midst of this rout and confusion Ronie freed Harrie, but he had +barely accomplished this before the thunder of horses' hoofs down the +road suddenly increased in volume, and loud shouts reached their ears. +The clatter of retreating horses abruptly stopped, and it was apparent +to the scouts that the insurgents had come to a stand. + +"El Capitan is on the road," declared Ronie. "He is rallying his men. +Come on, boys! We can do no better than to return to the don's. Ha! +who comes here? Halt! Who comes?" + +"A friend from Don Isadora," was the prompt reply. "Word came to him +of a party of rebels taking an American prisoner to El Capitan, and he +sent me to warn you." + +"In good time, seņor. We have saved our friend. Hark! Yonder riders +are El Capitan's hornets. Back to the estate, and we will go with you." + +There being no need of silence now, the six horsemen rode back to the +estate at a furious gait, the messenger going ahead when they had +nearly reached the avenue leading to the building, so as to inform the +don of the approach of friends. He hailed them with hearty gladness, +but quickly prepared to meet the expected onset of the enemy. + +Ronie and his companions having decided to lend their assistance to the +defenders of the estate, Harrie asked for a rifle, that he might join +his friends. This was soon forthcoming, and while they waited for the +attack of the mountain rabble he found opportunity to say to Ronie: + +"I don't know how glad I am to see you, for I have supposed you were +drowned on the night we started to escape from the _Libertador_. How +is it I find you here?" + +"It is a long story, Harrie. I will tell it at the first opportunity. +Jack and I have seen our share of excitement, and it looks as if it +wasn't over yet. Did you escape from the prison at San Carlos?" + +"Not through my own efforts. An order came from General Castro for me +to be set at liberty. This was done, and a small escort started with +me to find the regiment of Colonel Marchand. Only think he is +somewhere in this vicinity. We were surprised by a body of rebels, who +put my guard to rout and made me a prisoner. I do not know what would +have become of me if you had not rescued me as you did. Hark! the foes +are coming!" + +It was a part of the don's plan to hold back his men, and not to fire +upon the enemy until they should come into close quarters, so no +response was given to the shouts and shots of the oncoming horde, whose +leader expected to carry everything before him by storm. A tempest of +lead followed his command to attack, but not a man was injured on the +estate. Thinking that an easy victory lay before him, El Capitan then +ordered his men to the double-quick. + +Don Isadora proved that he had had some military experience, as his men +were not only all well armed, but they stood coolly at bay waiting for +his word to open the fight on their part. Even Ronie began to get +impatient before his stentorian voice cried: + +"Now, men, mow them down like grass--fire!" + +The entire side of the estate toward the road was illuminated by a +sheet of flame as his followers obeyed the sharp command, and it was +like mowing a swath through grass to see how the motley mob led by the +"mountain lion" went down. The roar of rifles was followed by wild +shouts and shrieks of pain, while those who had escaped the deadly fire +beat a hasty retreat. + +"Follow them up, men!" cried the don, but he had barely uttered the +order before a bullet from a stray shot hit him, and staggering back, +he fell into the arms of Jack Greenland, while he murmured: + +"I am a dead man!" + +It was a sad occurrence. The moment the Venezuelans found their leader +had fallen, confusion and disorder reigned. + +"Is he fatally hurt?" asked Ronie, anxiously, as Jack bent over him. + +"I cannot tell yet, sergeant. The wound is bleeding profusely. Some +of you help me get him where I can examine him more closely. Is there +a surgeon about the place?" + +No one seemed to know. But half a dozen lusty fellows lifted the +wounded don and bore him into the house, while others stared after them +in complete dismay. + +"El Capitan is rallying," said Ronie. "It's too bad for us to be in +this condition. He will sweep the place, now the don has fallen." + +"Why not take the lead, Ronie?" asked Harrie. "Some one must, or we +are all lost." + +"I am not sure they would follow me. Here comes Seņor Riva." + +"Sergeant Rand, Don Isadora begs me to tell you that he is better, but +is not able to lead his men. He beseeches of you to do this." + +There was no opportunity for hesitation. El Capitan was already +advancing for his second attack. + +"Help me rally them, Riva, and I will do it," replied Ronie. + +Swiftly the word was carried along the ranks, when new life was +enthused into the men, who were really brave fellows. The young +sergeant decided that prompt action would be the most successful, and +to meet El Capitan halfway would show him that the forces on the +plantation were alive to the situation. So the word for an advance was +passed along the line. It met with a hearty response, and as Ronie +sprang forward with his rousing command he found himself supported by a +determined force. + +"Open fire--charge!" + +The volley of shots was succeeded by loud cheers from the Venezuelans, +who bounded forward under the lead of their gallant champion. + +"Forward!" cried Sergeant Rand. + +Harrie was close behind him, and so was Riva Baez, all three having +dismounted from their horses as soon as returning to the estate. A +random volley from the rebels answered their first fire, and at the +second, in spite of all that the mountain chief could do, his followers +fled in wild disorder, disappearing from the scene with a rapidity that +was surprising. + +That night, at the very outset of his campaign, El Capitan received his +first defeat. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE NEWS AT LA GUAYRA. + +Great rejoicing reigned at the plantation of Don Isadora following the +complete rout of the enemy, and this joy was increased by the fact that +the don had not received a fatal wound. In fact, it was believed with +careful nursing he would soon be about again. As he deserved, Ronie +was the hero of the occasion, while his friends shared with him the +praise showered upon them by one and all. + +As soon as the news of the victory had been carried to the master of +the estate he sent for our hero, and was lavish in his commendation, +declaring that he had been instrumental in saving them all from the +brutal clutches of El Capitan. But, as pleasant as all this hearty +applauding was, Ronie was glad to break away from his admirers in order +to be alone with Harrie and Jack. He and the former had much to say, +all of which was listened to with sincere interest by the latter. +Harrie explained how he and Francisco had drifted about in their boat, +looking in vain for their companions until daylight, when they had +sighted land, and gone ashore. Soon after, they were captured and +thrown into prison, as Ronie knew. Then came the unexpected release, +the journey to find Colonel Marchand, the capture by El Capitan's +followers, and the rescue by his friends, which seemed the most +miraculous part of his adventures. Ronie, in turn, told what had +befallen Jack and himself, saying in conclusion: + +"There is only one thing more that troubles me. If I knew mother was +safe I could bear this troublesome waiting without murmuring. But I am +afraid some fearful fate has overtaken her. I shall not rest until I +know the truth." + +"You know I am with you, Ronie," said Harrie. + +"Ay, lad; you can count on old Jack Greenland to stand by you both, +through thick and thin." + +"God bless you, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, clasping one hand, while Harrie +seized the other, echoing the words of his friend: + +"God bless you, Jack; a nobler soul never lived." + +When the three had hastily reviewed the troubles they had passed +through they decided unanimously to return to Colonel Marchand with +such haste as was consistent with safety. They had important +intelligence to bear, beside the fact that El Capitan was upon his +track. Under the changed circumstances, they decided to take the +captives with them, and of course Riva and his friend would keep along. +While the don was very loath to see them depart, he knew it was their +duty to go, and so he offered to send an escort of fifty men to conduct +them on their way as far as might be deemed necessary. At first +thought, Ronie felt like declining this, but he finally asked for an +escort of ten men, who went with them until noon of the second day, +when they turned back and the scouts kept on, reaching the encampment +of the Venezuelan regiment that night in safety. + +I need not describe the reception accorded our heroes by the impetuous +colonel, any more than I need dwell upon the scenes that followed. The +campaign had now opened in deadly earnest, and weeks of great activity +and considerable fighting and skirmishing ensued. El Capitan rallying +after a few days from his discomfiture at Isadora sought in every way +to disconcert and capture the doughty Venezuelan regiment. In his +efforts he was encouraged on every hand by the reports of the success +of the insurgents in almost every section. First intelligence came of +the capture of a town on the island of Margarita by the audacious +cruiser _Bolivar_, erstwhile the _Libertador_, and earlier the _Ban +Righ_. Close upon this, Castro's troops under Castillo were defeated +near San Antonio. In May, reports of insurrections came in from every +quarter. Castro suppressed two newspapers which had become pronounced +against him, and in his lack of sufficient funds to carry on the war, +levied a million bolivars from the widow of Guzman Blanco, the former +president. Then the revolution broke out in the State of Bolivar, and +after five days' fighting the president of the State was driven out of +the capital. In June General Matos, encouraged by the success of his +followers, announced a provincial government, with himself as president. + +This bit of news reached Colonel Marchand at the close of a warm day's +fight with his old-time enemy, El Capitan. As usual, it had been a +draw game, and the colonel was sitting in his hammock feeling in +anything but an amiable mood. + +"By the soul of Bolivar!" he exclaimed, slapping his knee by way of +emphasis, "he is like a ground mole, that runs for its hole the moment +an enemy is in sight. I wish we might meet a foe worthy of our steel. +Orderly, send for Sergeant Rand at once." + +Ronie was with his friends, discussing the outcome of the recent +meeting with the enemy, and deliberating upon their own fortunes since +they had become comrades under Castro, when this order was given him. + +"I wonder what this means?" he exclaimed. "Say to Colonel Marchand I +will report at once." + +Upon reaching the officer, the young sergeant found that he was anxious +to send a message to President Castro, and at the same time to +reconnoiter the country between them and the capital. + +"Castro must take the field himself," declared our hero, in the course +of the conversation. "If this growth of the insurgents is allowed to +continue much longer his cause will become hopeless." + +"By the soul of Bolivar! you are right, Sergeant Rand, and it is just +what I want you to say to Castro himself. You can do it and not offend +him, while I could not. You will go to him at once, taking as many men +as you choose. I have only to instruct you to start as soon as may be." + +"It shall be as you say, colonel. I desire to have only three +companions, Seņor Riva Baez and my countrymen, Harrie Mannering and +Jack Greenland." + +"As you say, sergeant. Here are the dispatches I wish you to hand to +President Castro personally." + +Handing this package to our hero, the colonel offered no further delay. +With feelings akin to gladness, Ronie returned to his expectant +companions. + +"I hail it as good news," he said. "We are to meet the 'Little +Captain,' President Castro, with what haste we can. I say we, for I +have the honor of being selected by Colonel Marchand to choose such +companions as I wish and hasten to the capital. You know whom I +select." + +Ronie was really pleased with this commission, as it would enable him +to enter a wider range of inquiry concerning his mother than he had +been situated to do so far. Thoughts of her were last in his mind as +he lay down to rest after a day's campaigning and the first to arouse +him in the morning. + +"Poor mother! how I pity you, and wish that I knew where you are!" + +Within an hour the little party was ready to start, deciding to go by +the way of La Guayra, which they reached without adventure, This +old-fashioned Spanish town is the chief seaport of Venezuela, as well +as the entrance way to the capital, situated about five miles inland +behind the series of mountain peaks whose chain runs down to the very +edge of the water. Our young engineers did not fail to notice, as they +looked out over the harbor, the close affinity to the same cerulean hue +that touched both sea and sky, so it was difficult to tell where they +met on the horizon, and blended like a curtain of the same soft +texture. Under the reflections the vessels appeared to rest flat on +the mirror-like surface, in the words of the poet: + + "Like a painted ship upon a painted sea." + + +The most conspicuous spot about La Guayra is the little fortress made +famous by Charles Kingsley, in his "Westward Ho," as the prison house +of his heroine, the Rose of Devon. This was the residence of the +Spanish governors in the days when Venezuela was a dependency of Spain. +Past this ancient point of defense against attacks from the sea and the +winds lead those three ways of travel to the capital, aptly +illustrating the changes of centuries; first, but of least importance +now, the mule path worn no doubt by the natives in their passages back +and forth; second, the wagon track, cut, it may be, when the continent +was young; and finally, that iron-banded course of modern construction, +the railroad. Caracas is embowered among the mountains three thousand +feet above the streets of La Guayra. + +Their arrival was soon after the bombardment of Macuto by Venezuelan +ships on account of an outbreak there. As this place was near to La +Guayra, great excitement was prevailing in the latter place. In fact, +the inhabitants everywhere were in an uproar. News came that General +Riera, who, it will be remembered, was a passenger on the _Libertador_ +when our heroes were on that vessel, had captured La Vela de Coro, +while the insurgents had also captured Barquisemoto, and Riera had +sacked Coro, the capital of the State of Falcon. + +Our party did not continue their journey to the capital, on account of +the fact that Castro was toward Barcelona, where the revolution had +become centered. With this bit of news came a rumor which, if it bore +but a light bearing on the international contention focused on +Venezuela, awakened an anxious interest on the part of Ronie Rand and +his friends. Riva Baez first learned of it from a native who had come +down from the mountainous districts. This man said an American woman +was held by the insurgents as a hostage of war. He could not give the +name of the woman, but believed she had not been long in the country. + +"It is mother!" exclaimed Ronie, as Riva related the story to him. "I +must see this man at once." + +"I am sorry, seņor, but he disappeared before I started to find you. +Knowing how you would feel about it, and not being able to find you at +once, I went to speak to him again, fearing he would slip away. He was +gone, and no one could tell me where he had left for. I believe he is +a spy." + +"Do you not know of some one who saw him?" + +"I will see what I can learn, Sergeant Rand." + +"Thank you, Riva. Meanwhile, the rest of us will do a little looking +around. Describe the fellow as minutely as possible." + +This Riva did, with the graphic speech peculiar to him, and then the +four went out to look for the missing man. In the midst of this +unsuccessful search Ronie learned that Castro had returned to La Guayra. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +INTERVIEW WITH GENERAL CASTRO. + +A soldier's first duty is always to obey his superior in command. Upon +hearing of General Castro's return to La Guayra, Ronie immediately +abandoned his search, leaving his companions to carry it on, while he +sought the president. He found him without difficulty, for he was +already besieged with callers. But our hero had only to send in his +passport from Colonel Marchand to receive an urgent request to come at +once. + +He was a little disappointed in the personal appearance of the man who +had become so prominent in the affairs, and whose name he had heard +spoken more often than any dozen others since he had come to Venezuela. +He was below medium height, of rather slight build, and moved with a +limp in one limb, caused by a wound he had received in battle. His eye +was the feature which bespoke most the man, and as Ronie stood before +him he seemed to read him at a glance. + +"Sergeant Rand," he greeted, in a hearty manner, which quickly won the +American boy's friendship, "I welcome you gladly to La Guayra. Colonel +Marchand sends his message by you?" + +"Here are your dispatches, General Castro. I trust they will prove +valuable to you." + +"Be seated, sergeant, while I read them." + +Ten minutes of silence followed, during which Ronie had ample time to +study the man before him, who seemed absorbed in the written messages +just placed in his hands. Then he laid the last one down, and said: + +"If I am not mistaken, you are the young American the colonel spoke of +in such laudable terms in his last. It seems by what he says now that +you have not let your reputation suffer by more recent conduct. It was +your friend I sent to have liberated from the penitentiary at San +Carlos, was it not?" + +"It was, general." + +"Is he in La Guayra?" + +"He is." + +"I wish he had come with you, for I am heartily glad to meet two such +allies in a time when the whole world seems against me. Forgive me for +saying that, as I would not have you think I distrust your own +republic. But tell me of what you have seen in the West, Sergeant +Rand. I am glad to get such information as I believe you can give me +of the hotbed of rebellion in my poor country. Take your time, and do +not be afraid to speak of yourself." + +Then Ronie described such portions of the events that had come under +his observation as he thought the other would be pleased to hear, +referring to himself very modestly, while General Castro listened with +great interest, now and then asking some question or expressing +admiration at the conduct of Colonel Marchand and his regiment. He was +especially pleased with the rout given El Capitan at the estate of Don +Isadora, and he made Ronie describe the affair so minutely that he was +forced to speak of the part he had taken. + +"I have heard nothing so pleasing," said the president. "You shall be +rewarded for your gallant conduct. I am again saying that I am sorry +this friend, or these American friends of yours, did not accompany you +here. I will send for them." + +"I am afraid you will not find them readily, as they are in search of a +man in La Guayra that we want to find very much." Then he hastened to +add: "But this is a personal matter, General Castro, and you will +pardon me for introducing it to you. I did not intend to." + +"What concerns my comrades, concerns me," cried Castro, with possibly +more vehemence than he had intended. "Tell me all about it, Sergeant +Rand." + +Thus urged, Ronie explained what he knew in regard to his mother, the +president listening attentively to every word. When he had finished, +the latter said: + +"Sergeant, this is a grave matter. To say nothing of my feelings for +you, I cannot afford to let this affair escape my notice. It might +easily be construed to mean an offense against your government. Have +you communicated with Minister Bowen?" + +"No, General Castro." + +"I should advise you to do so as early as may be. But in the meantime +we will leave no stone unturned to find her." + +"You are very kind, general. What would you suggest that we do first?" + +"Find the man who had her photograph, and make him tell all he knows." + +"I have regretted, general, that we did not return and do that." + +"You were hardly prepared to do it, as I understand your condition." + +"True, General Castro. We were glad to escape with our lives, and we +have been kept escaping ever since." + +"You have proved lively enough in the race. You spoke of that young De +Caprian. What do you know of him?" + +"I believe he is as true a patriot as you have in Venezuela," replied +Ronie, boldly. + +"I would not let anybody else say that," declared Castro, frankly. +"You think I have misjudged the man, Sergeant Rand?" + +"Perhaps I ought not to say it, but he appeared honest to us." + +"You would like to see him set free?" + +"Not if he is an enemy to your government, General Castro." + +"I understand. When you go to San Carlos to get your man I will send +by you the papers which shall give him his freedom. I will try him a +while, and if he proves faithful his mother shall be given her liberty. +I have given orders to see that she is given all the privileges +possible under the circumstances. I have been very much interested in +your intelligence, Sergeant Rand, and I trust I shall meet your friends +when you come again." + +Taking this as a hint that the interview was ended, Ronie saluted in +military style, and was in the act of withdrawing when Castro said: + +"Sergeant, I wish to ask you a question, and trust you will answer it +in the same good faith in which it is asked. What do you believe would +be the most effective thing for me to do toward quelling this rebellion +in the vicinity from which you have come?" + +The answer to be made came as quick as a flash into Ronie's mind, and +without stopping to consider how it might sound expressed in so many +words, he said: + +"Take the field yourself, General Castro!" + +If this reply suited him or not, the president did not show it by the +look upon his features, as he said, simply: + +"Good-day, Sergeant Rand." + +While in doubt as to the effect his words would have upon the energetic +president of the republic, Ronie was pleased in a large measure with +his interview. He regretted that Harrie was not with him, and he +resolved that the next time he would not go alone. Upon second +thought, he could not see that there would be any occasion for him to +call again. Then he drove these thoughts from his mind, and thinking +of his mother and what her fate might be, he began to look anxiously +for his companions. + +About half an hour later he found his friends, but they had to report a +failure in regard to finding the unknown man they had hoped to find. +Riva Baez, as well as Harrie and Jack, listened with interest to +Ronie's account of his meeting with General Castro. + +"I have faith to believe he will help us find your mother," said +Harrie, "and with his assistance we cannot fail." + +"Unless we are too late," replied Ronie. "I cannot bear this +inactivity." + +"I have always found it good policy to 'make haste slowly,'" declared +Jack, quoting an old saw. "Meanwhile let us see how Castro takes to +your advice, sergeant." + +"To think that I should have dared to speak in that way," said Ronie, +who feared he had overstepped his position so far as to incur the +displeasure of his superior. But he was speedily disarmed of this +fear, for the following day General Castro came out with a proclamation +in which he defined his purpose of taking the field personally, and of +leading the campaign in the West. An hour later a summons came for our +three Americans to visit the commander, and they met with a welcome +that proved the president had only the kindliest feelings toward them. +They were urged to accompany his army, and were only barred from being +offered a commission from the fact that General Castro did not wish to +curtail any of the liberties they might have if they were not regularly +attached to his forces. + +"You can go as far as Valencia with me, and from thence I will send you +an escort to San Carlos, so you may find your man if you can, and also +see that young De Caprian is given his liberty. To prove my good faith +with him, I will hold a commission for him, if he wishes to accept it." + +Thanking the general for the kindly interest in them, our three +withdrew, certain that at last something definite was being done. The +next day the entire force moved toward Valencia, and they accompanied +the Venezuelans, Riva also going along. + +The week that followed was one of great activity; but very little was +accomplished that seemed to forward matters with the impatient Ronie +and his friends. Leaving Castro's army at Valencia, they reached San +Carlos to find that the bird they were after had flown. As near as +they could learn, he had disappeared the morning our heroes had been +driven away, and that he had not been seen since he had taken them +across the bay in the boat. It was currently believed that he had +either been shot or drowned. In this way was lost what might have +proved an important clew in their search for Ronie's mother. + +Their disappointment was brightened somewhat by the joy with which +Francisco hailed his liberty. He embraced his American friends, and +showered upon them praises for their action in his behalf. When he was +told about his mother, he grew less demonstrative, but learning that +she was unharmed, with a promise of good protection, he recovered +exuberance of spirits. + +"I shall accept any commission General Castro will bestow upon me," he +said, "and I will show him my fealty to him and the true government of +my country. I am impatient to see him." + +Knowing nothing could be gained by remaining longer at San Carlos, our +heroes returned to the army at once. Having learned that he had +removed to Ocumare, they headed thither, learning all along the way +that the insurgents were everywhere successful, until it seemed as if +the government was doomed. These accounts were rendered more hopeless +to the cause by the fact that before they could reach him, Castro had +begun his retreat toward Caracas. + +In the face of this, he issued his decree of amnesty to all insurgents +laying down arms within forty days. + +"Unless he makes some more decided stand and wins a decided victory to +offset all this noise on the other side, Castro will have no government +for them to lay down their arms to," said Jack, grimly. "Of course it +isn't my dish that's cooking, but I feel just like saying so much." + +"General Castro will act decisively when the time comes, according to +his idea," said Ronie. + +In the midst of this uncertainty word reached them from La Guayra that +the cables were to be cut, and that Minister Bowen had sent to +Washington for warships. + +Castro's next movement was to take charge of his troops at Guaicaipuro, +and to establish his government there. Then followed the week's battle +with the insurgents led by Mendoza at La Gloria, which was to prove the +turning point in the war. Colonel Marchand's regiment of volunteers +was there, and in the thickest of the fight our heroes had ample +opportunity to prove the metal of which American soldiers are made. It +was a bitter fight, the more trying as it was made with +bush-fighters--scattered bodies of men who fought after the style of +the North American Indians, from behind trees, or whatever cover was at +hand. Fortunately, our friends escaped without a scratch, though +Colonel Marchand received an ugly wound that was likely to drive him +from the field for a time. + +His was not the only regiment that covered itself with glory, for there +was another, led by a boyish captain, who seemed everywhere in the +thickest of the fight. This little band gained the high-water mark of +the battle, and it was that more than any other which turned the tide +of the struggle and made of La Victoria a victory indeed. The name of +that gallant leader, who received special mention in the list of honor, +was Francisco de Caprian. General Castro had no longer any reason to +doubt his loyalty to Venezuela, and the president greeted him with the +promise that his conduct had chased away the shadows upon his family +name. + +The result of this victory for the government at La Victoria was such +that Matos, the head of the insurgents, gave up active command, while +Castro prepared for a triumphal return to Caracas. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE SPY OF CARACAS. + +Immediately after the victory at La Victoria our three Americans were +forced to part with Francisco, who was to return to the capital with +General Castro, while they were called to Don Isadora's estate, the +owner thinking he had got on the track of a clew to the whereabouts of +Mrs. Rand. The don received them with open arms, he having fully +recovered from the effects of his wounds, but the errand proved +fruitless, and they felt obliged to abandon the quest in this vicinity. + +So they again found themselves in La Guayra. But their stay here was +short. Ronie was anxious to get to Caracas, that he might consult with +Mr. Bowen, to see if nothing could be done by him toward finding his +mother. General Castro was also to join with him, and altogether he +felt very hopeful, though aware that his mother might be beyond his +power of help before this. But he was a brave youth, and he resolved +to do all he could and hope for the best. + +It has been said that the capital of Venezuela, while only five miles +inland from its port, La Guayra, is situated in the mountains, three +thousand feet above the seashore. The railroad which connects the two +coils about this rugged ascent like a steel lariat thrown by a dextrous +hand, now winding in and out where some bottomless abyss is encircled +like a huge letter U upon the landscape, or anon clinging upon the rim +of some sharp-pointed rock, where the same train creeps around the +angle, showing mortal fear by its snail-like pace. Another has aptly +compared it to a spider's thread strung from crag to crag. Time and +again the engineer can look back from his cab into the windows of the +rear coach, while between him and the object of his gaze yawns a +rock-walled well hundreds of feet in depth. + +The young engineers were standing on the rear platform, watching with +admiring gaze the wild scene stretching away from their feet. + +"Isn't it grand, magnificent!" exclaimed Harrie. "I never saw its +equal. Did ever you, Jack?" + +"Nothing to surpass it, lad; not even the Alpine Pass of the Colorado. +Where can one find a grander combination of sea, plain, valley and +mountain? And whoever saw a greener plain on a bluer sea?" + +"Or a sky quite as serene," added Harrie. + +Ronie was fain to agree with his enthusiastic companions, while they +admired together the rugged panorama falling away from them to the +foothills trending from the base of the mountain like the huge roots of +some great tree which had burst from their imprisonment in the earth +and stood out as the bold supports of the mighty burden they upheld. +Between these ridges, or leaping from their gnarled sides in silvery +cascades, numerous streams of water made bright bands on the background +of gray and dark green. Below the mountains, groves of royal palms, +standing with park-like regularity and so far apart that their white +trunks shone like pillars cased in silver foil, were to be seen. Out +from among these gleamed the white and yellow roofs of the cottages of +the people. Beyond these glistened the white line of breakers, forever +coming and forever going, leaving only a chalk mark to tell where they +have been but will never be again. Outside of this lay old ocean, +throbbing under the hot, fierce tropical sun like a hunted creature +panting to get its breath, but never resting. + +Still up, up, crept the iron conqueror, until it broke the veil of mist +in cloudland, up where the trees were jeweled with dewdrops and the +track reeked with the wine of the sky. At one place they could look +down into three thousand feet of space, and soon after their sight was +gladdened by the view of the valley on the other side and the thrice +welcome sight of Caracas. Again they were pleased by the happy +blending of art and nature, the beautiful country, the basin under its +stupendous rim, the city marked by the towers of its numerous churches, +the dazzling roofs of public buildings, the regular streets lined with +picturesque cottages, the gardens of white houses of the coffee +planters, and beyond more mountains. + +Caracas was founded by Diego de Losada in 1567, and named the "City of +Santiago de Leon de Caracas." The picturesque valley which forms its +site was the capital of the heroic tribe of natives known as "the +people of Caracas," which name was very appropriately given to the +capital of the race which after two hundred years of warfare succeeded +in annihilating the original owners of the soil. This long struggle +against the stronger power by the weaker forms one of the most glorious +pages in South American history, and scintillates with deeds of heroism +and human sacrifice. + +Now the ascent has been made, they find that the city is overlooked by +mountains smooth and bare of trees, but covered with a light-green +sward, except where some stream affords a band of a darker tint. The +clouds seem of more than northern fleeciness, and hang over the peaks +like smoke, or float lazily from valley to valley, giving varying hues +to the beautiful landscape. The climate is delightful; the first +impressions of the capital pleasing. + +Caracas has a population of about eighty thousand, it being the usage +that only one family shall occupy a house. It is a city of culture and +fashion, of public statues to scholars and artists, as well as +warriors, for not all of the history of this interesting republic is +filled with war. While a land of hotheaded people, whose career has +been largely filled with riots and revolutions, here and there are to +be found evidences of a high civilization, producing marked contracts +of the rival forces of man. + +What struck our energetic American as unexpected was the air of repose +which rested upon the scene, giving little hint of the excitement +reigning outside. Slowly along the streets, as if there was no +occasion for haste, moved trains of mules bearing on their backs bags +of coffee, or quite enveloped under huge bales of fodder, which had the +appearance at a distance of some huge, lifeless bulk upon legs. Then +there were bodies of foot soldiers, wearing blue uniforms with scarlet +trousers and facings, also moving with a deliberation which at least +bespoke their importance. This sight was enlivened by the appearance +of an open fiacre whirled along the street by a pair of small but fiery +horses, driven by a coachman from his high box seat, the gold trimmings +to his hat and coat rivaled for brightness by the ornaments on his top +boots. Evidently the carriage bore some person of importance in haste +to his destination. + +The cause of this undue haste, as well as the disturbance of the +equanimity of this everyday sight, was explained by the sounds of +another party approaching. Then, as the travelers upon the streets +moved with unaccustomed celerity to one side, a body of men mounted +upon high-stepping horses, strikingly caparisoned and carefully +groomed, appeared in sight, the riders presenting a bold effect in +their uniforms of white duck and high black boots. + +"The president's bodyguard," said Ronie. "General Castro and his +troops have returned, and we have got here just in the nick of time." + +"There is the general riding in the center," declared Harrie. "How the +people are cheering him! It cannot be that they knew of his coming so +soon. Shall we follow them?" + +"Perhaps we might as well," said Ronie. "I suppose Francisco is in the +train somewhere. Ay, look, boys! there he comes. Doesn't he look +fine? He has the natural military bearing of his race. Well, I am +glad of his good fortune." + +With these words Ronie began to move along with the crowd which had +quickly collected, and cheering lustily began to surge ahead in the +direction taken by the martial train that now moved along the street +farther than they could look. It was not long before they found +themselves surrounded by a jostling, but good-natured, mob, each member +of which seemed determined to keep in sight of the marching column. +The band had now begun to play, and as the strains of martial music +filled the air, Ronie Rand was conscious of hearing a voice muttering +in a deep, sullen tone: + +"Curses upon him! His triumph shall be short. Soon shall the sons +of----" + +The rest, if spoken aloud, and the words given seemed to have been +uttered involuntarily, were lost to our hero, but he caught his breath +at what he had heard. It was not the import of the words, but the tone +of the speaker which caused such emotion that he could constrain +himself with difficulty from trying to break through the mob and find +him. It was the voice of Manuel Marlin, of San Carlos! + +So satisfied was Ronie of this fact that he immediately tried to push +his way forward so as to reach the man, whispering for his companions +to follow. But people in a crowd like that give away slowly, when they +can, and when Ronie had reached the spot where the other must have been +at that time he was missing. Nor could he find any trace of him. + +"I am sure it was he," he said to Harrie and Jack, as soon as he +explained his sudden action. "But he has slipped away from me." + +"Let's keep along. He will doubtless follow the throng," said Harrie. +So they moved with the spectators toward the most notable building in +Caracas, the Federal Palace, which is built around a great square +overflowing with flowers and fountains, and lighted by swinging +electric lights. The palace is lightly built, and though painted in +imitation of stone, looks like an airy castle which might be blown over +at the next flaw of wind. It is profusely ornamented with statues made +either of plaster of Paris or of wood painted so as to imitate marble. +If this gives the building an unstable appearance and given over to +frivolous amusements, it is in keeping with its environments, the +high-colored walls and open fronts of the adjoining buildings that help +to fill this American Paris, and it is by all odds the handsomest +building in the city. And, rather than given over to scenes of +frivolity and mimic life, here are the chambers of the two branches of +legislature, the different offices of the department of state, and the +reception hall of the president, in which is the national portrait +gallery. The dome of this chamber, which is two hundred feet in +length, and bears many pictures of warlike scenes, is painted with a +panorama of life-size figures depicting the last battle of the +Venezuelans against the Spaniards. It is really a work of artistic +merit. So, altogether, the Federal Palace is a building of substantial +business, and it has played an important part in the shifting affairs +of the republic. + +To Guzman Blanco, more than all others, does the city owe these public +buildings. These were originally convents or monasteries, until Guzman +overthrew the power of the church. The Federal Palace was one of these +church buildings, so was the present opera house and the university. +All of them seem well located for their new uses, and go to show that +the church must have had a strong hold on the wealth of the capital +before this daring adventurer overcame them. + +Anxious to get sight of this spy, if possible, Ronie and Harrie did not +try to get in so as to witness the president's reception, though Jack +did so, in the hope that he might find the man if he should dare to +remain with the crowd. But the rest of the day passed, however, +without bringing success to them, and the two young engineers were +standing near the entrance to one of those cathedrals which form such +an important portion of the buildings of the capital. They had barely +gained a position where they could watch the comers and goers without +being noticed themselves, when they were glad to see Captain Francisco +de Caprian approaching, with their old-time friend, Jack Greenland. + +Naturally, the countenance of the first was radiant with joyous +excitement. + +"It has been a great day for Caracas," he said. "President Castro has +reason to be proud of it, as nothing has happened to mar its perfect +harmony. Yet there is a rumor afloat--I know not how it got +started--that there is a secret enemy in the capital, a spy, waiting +for a favorable chance to strike a deadly blow at the hero himself." + +"I suppose efforts will be made to capture him?" said Ronie. + +"Be assured of that. A handsome reward is offered. Oh, they will get +him, soon or late." + +Then a sigh escaped the lips of the handsome young officer, and he +murmured to himself rather than to his companions: + +"I would, dear father, you might have been spared to witness this day, +for I believe you would have rejoiced with the rest of us." Then, +suddenly remembering his companions, he said: "Forgive me, seņors, but +to me these very shadows of this building are sacred. It was here, in +the last revolution, my dear father, with nine others, made their final +stand and fought so good a fight that it was found necessary to build a +fire in the tower and smoke them out with the fumes of sulphur. Ay, it +was a desperate test for the ten," said Francisco, while his dark eyes +lighted with an intense light and his thin hand quivered spasmodically. + +"Did your father and his friends perish?" asked Harrie and Ronie, both +deeply interested in this simple narrative. + +"It was their only alternative, seņors, for to yield meant death and +torture. Father, let it be said to his credit, gave his companions +opportunity to surrender; but, let it be said to their credit, they +stood bravely together. Then, their last shot spent, and the fumes of +the drug rapidly overpowering them, they threw themselves from the +tower into the street. It is said they went downward to their fate +with clasped hands. I am glad I did not witness the sad sight. But I +believe a brighter day is dawning for poor Venezuela, and that her +brave defenders did not give their lives in vain." + +Our three friends were deeply touched with this pathetic story, related +in such gentle tones as to make it seem like some sweet vision rather +than one of grim war's bitter sacrifices. Looking beyond their heroic +companion, they were struck with the peacefulness of their +environments, so well in accord with the manner of the speaker, all +tending to soften the tragic interest of the scene of warlike and +heroic action. Where the ill-fated band of patriots, the last to make +a stand at that time, must have fallen, ran the sunken rails of the +tram cars, and in sight were the notion shops and confectionery stores, +where laughing, prattling children were wont to come to find the simple +toys and playthings to amuse them. At nighttime electric lights +illuminated with their dazzling splendor the now peaceful scene, while +seekers of religious promises wended their way softly in and out of the +old cathedral. + +"I am afraid I have made you sad, seņors, when there is so much to make +one happy. But I forgot that this is not for you, and that your heart +is heavy, Seņor Rand, over the fate of your poor mother. Let us hope +you, too, may soon find your cup of joy full to overflowing." + +"Have you heard how Colonel Marchand is?" asked Harrie, seeing that +Ronie did not feel like replying to their friend. + +"He is likely to recover, but his campaigning is doubtless over until +some time in the future. Come, seņors, I shall insist that you stop +with me to-night, and it is time you seek rest." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +"IT IS MANUEL MARLIN!" + +It was a beautiful morning, that which followed, and our friends were +astir early. Wandering out upon the streets, eager to learn if any new +tidings had come of the spy, they soon found themselves walking under +the refreshing shade of rows of ornamental trees. In following this +course, they came somewhat abruptly upon a plaza floored for a wide +space with rare mosaics, and lit at night by swinging electric lights. + +"This is the Plaza de Bolivar," said Jack, "a favorite place for the +president's band to come and play. See, there is the statue of the +republic's hero." + +Ronie and Harrie had already discovered an equestrian statue, mounted +upon a heavy pedestal, while the rider held with one hand a +straightened rein on his refractory steed, and with the other he +pointed his sword high into the air, as if he would pierce some +imaginary enemy stationed in space. It was a bizarre affair, the +weather-stained image of a horse rearing into the air after the fashion +of some huge rocking-horse. From the bold figure of man and steed +their gaze dropped to the base, where they saw in raised letters the +name of Simon Bolivar, the Liberator of Venezuela. Instinctively, our +Americans uncovered their heads out of respect to the memory of the man +who was not only a great warrior, but a notable statesman, and a poet +of considerable merit. His proclamations to the armies are examples of +masterly eloquence, and as much to be admired as his military genius, +which won for him the applause of the five republics that he liberated. +The statue of Bolivar is in bronze, and is considered one of the most +notable examples of modern art. + +When his young companions had tired of looking at the equestrian figure +of the warrior, Jack said: + +"Now come with me, lads, and I will show you a sight worth two of this +to you and me." + +Without reply, Ronie and Harrie followed their friend until they came +upon a delightfully retired retreat, which, without the bizarre +attractions of the Plaza Bolivar, had a freshness and quiet beauty the +other lacked. Anticipating now what they were to meet, to our young +Americans there was indeed an air of sanctity and hallowed peace that +the more ornate spot did not possess. With reverential steps they +moved silently but swiftly along the clean, graveled path bordered with +deep, green grass and overhung with interlacing branches of the trees +which formed a roof over their heads, until they reached the center of +the plot, where the torrid sun of the tropics beat down upon the head +of the statue they had come to see. + +This was the Plaza Washington, and the man honored here was the +American patriot, the Father of His Country, who had been given this +honored recognition in the capital of the United States of Venezuela. +Uncovering their heads, the three stood for several minutes in a +silence that seemed too sacred to be broken, while they looked upon the +calm, benign features of Washington, honored thus by a race they had +not expected would pay such homage. At that very moment, unobserved by +them, a couple of natives a little way off, at the uncovering of their +heads, removed their wide-brimmed headgear, and looked on with +respectful attention. Farther removed, a group of women, dark-eyed, +dark-featured, but not unpleasant of countenance, also paused in their +morning work to watch the newcomers with respectful admiration rather +than curiosity. Evidently these people understood and shared with +these strangers from a far-away land this spirit of national pride and +patriotism, for true patriots always revere the memory of heroes. + +"Isn't it strange Washington should be given a statue here?" asked +Harrie. + +"Not so very strange," replied Jack, "when you come to think that the +histories of the two countries are so nearly alike, up to the day of +these two heroes, they might be written by the same historian with +slight modifications. Bolivar was the Washington of Venezuela. Then, +too, you will remember that Miranda, the pioneer of patriots in this +country, served his apprenticeship under Washington, fighting for our +country. When he had finished there he returned to his native land to +take up her battles. What he learned with our army helped him here. + +"Bolivar had no small task on his hand when he undertook to free five +republics, and who conquered a territory nearly half as great as Europe. + +"It is a common practice for the inhabitants here to strew their +garlands of flowers about this place, and once I remember, upon a +holiday, coming here, to find the statue of Washington, pedestal and +base, literally decked with floral wreaths. Never, it seemed to me, +not even in our own land, did the noble countenance of Washington look +grander than here, surrounded by a race that did not speak his +language, but whose hearts beat as patriotically, as if they understood +every word." + +"It was a happy thought that they should have sculptured him as a man +of peace rather than of war," said Ronie. "It is more happy in its +effect, as I look upon him, than the warlike figure of Bolivar." + +"Very true; at least, from our standpoint. While they did well to +select this phase of his character, no doubt it thrills their hot veins +more to look on the defiant form of their beloved leader. What I have +said of the two men was truth, but similarity stops there. Bolivar had +very much of the savage wildness about him, and he was reckless, +headstrong, and sometimes foolhardy. But his career was a grand one, +as viewed by his countrymen. It was filled with bold, cunning, +victorious marches. His Valley Forge was the torrid jungles and +sun-swept plains of a tropical clime; his Delaware, filled with +floating ice, to be crossed in mid-winter, the broken mountain pass, or +the pathless swamp filled with deadly malaria. Like our Washington, he +came of a distinguished family, and he was educated in Europe for the +court and camp. But, if educated abroad, his love for his native land +never failed, and Venezuela never had a truer son, or a more valiant +fighter for her natural rights. + +"Ay, lads, his campaigns were filled with such stupendous feats of +activity and accomplishment as few have ever equaled. Starting on the +seacoast near Pallao, with his foot soldiers and rude cavalry mounted +on mule back, he crossed the continent. The perils of +mountain-climbing and the hardships of the jungle were met and overcome +by his indomitable followers, inspired by his glowing example, living +much of the time on berries and roots, sleeping at night upon the +ground, to free in turn Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador and Bolivia; then, +sweeping down the Pacific coast, to finally overthrow the empire of +Peru. He was a young man filled with the love of freedom and the fire +of ambition. So little was his heroism appreciated by those whom he +thus met that time and again he was forced to meet the assassin, only +to find himself deserted at last by those whom he had looked upon and +rewarded as friends. So he died alone, of heartaches over the +ingratitude of a people he had led out of bondage. But to-day tardy +justice makes him, as he deserved to be, the hero of five republics." + +"Why should his countrymen, after all he had done for them, strip him +of his honors and leave him forlorn and disappointed?" asked Ronie. + +"It was owing largely to the inborn fickleness of people of a tropical +clime. Two charges, one directly opposed to the other, were brought +against him. One party claimed, after having rid them of kings, he +tried to make a dictator of himself, with power more absolute than that +of those he had deposed. The other said it was because, upon his +followers asking him to accept such power, he declined and went into +voluntary exile at Santa Marta. Be that as it may, it was nearly +twenty years after his death before there was one bold enough to give +him the place in public opinion that he deserved. He caused an artist +to design a statue that should perpetuate his memory. + +"Now we come to see how closely the history of this country is blended +with our own. On the neck of the statue the artist placed a miniature +in the form of a medallion which the family of Washington had given +Bolivar. On the reverse of this was a lock of Washington's hair, with +the inscription: + +"'This portrait of the founder of liberty in North America is presented +by his adopted son to him who has acquired equal glory in South +America.' + +"You will notice that none of the insignias of honors showered upon him +in his hours of triumph by different countries have been retained by +the artist, this portrait of the Father of Our Country having been the +only ornament it was deemed he would have cared for, as in life he was +prouder of this than all else. So you see, the busts and statues of +the Liberator bear only this tribute, while those of his followers are +decked with glittering ornaments." + +"I have read of a very pretty story connected with its presentation," +said Harrie. "It was during the time of Lafayette's visit to our +country in 1824. A banquet was given in his honor and the memory of +Washington by Congress. In the midst of the rejoicings and tributes +paid to the venerable visitor, Henry Clay arose to say that, while they +were enjoying the fruits of independence, the grand institutions +founded by their patriotic forefathers, there were those in the +Southern continent who were fighting as valiantly for liberty, with +less hope of ultimate victory. Continuing to wax eloquent, the great +orator said: + +"'No nation, no generous Lafayette, has come to their succor; alone, +and without aid, they have sustained their glorious cause, trusting to +its justice, and with the assistance only of their bravery, their +deserts and their Andes--and one man, Simon Bolivar, the Washington of +South America.' + +"There was wild cheering then, while men sprang to their feet and +clapped their hands. Then Lafayette, the generous, asked that he might +send the Southern hero some token of their sympathy and appreciation of +his valor. The result was, Lafayette sent Bolivar the portrait of +Washington, and it proved a gift the young patriot of the Southland +revered, while his people grew to admire and cherish it." + +"True, my lad, and this spirit has spread so that you will see pictures +of Washington wherever you go. Now it is a portrait; then the American +army crossing the wintry Delaware, under its beloved leader; or, the +war over and victory's mantle of peace spread over the land, he stands +before the door at Mount Vernon. You find squares and public houses +named after Washington, with numerous other testimonials of him, all of +which seems very pretty to the visitor from the North." + +While Jack had been speaking, his gaze had become turned in an opposite +direction to where the figure of a man was to be seen skulking in the +thicket of flowers. Harrie and Ronie had already discovered the +suspicious person, but had understood that he would flee at the +slightest indication that he had been seen. Thus, before Jack had +finished his speech, Ronie began to retrace his steps, with apparent +carelessness, in the direction of a row of yellow, blue and pink +houses, with high, barred windows, from which peeped shyly dark-eyed, +swarthy-skinned women. But the moment he had passed beyond the range +of the concealed man's eyes, he darted into the shrubbery so as to +intercept the man should he try to escape by flight. + +The wisdom of this action was apparent when Jack and Harrie started +toward the spot, when he fled precipitately. This flight, however, +took him right into the path of Ronie, who quickly covered him with his +pistol, at the same time ordering him to stop, which he did with +trembling limbs, to begin to beg for his life. + +A good square look at him revealed his identity to Ronie, who exclaimed +to his companions: + +"Come quick, boys! it is the spy, Manuel Marlin!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +GOOD NEWS. + +Ronie did not have to repeat his call, for almost before he had +finished the last word Harrie and Jack were beside him. It was then +but the work of a moment to disarm the terrified fellow, when he was +ordered to march in front of them to the headquarters of the army. +Then he fell upon his knees, actually too weak to stand up longer, and +with clasped hands and white face, begged for his life. + +"Spare me, seņors! I am not a spy, but if you take me before the +officers of Castro they will condemn me without a trial and I shall be +shot! Spare me, I beg of you." + +His pathetic supplications touched the hearts of his young captors, but +they did not feel it would be right to let him go. + +"If you are innocent you can prove it," said Ronie. "I know you are in +sympathy with the insurgents, but I promise you shall have a fair +opportunity to prove your innocence of being a spy if you are not one." + +During these words of Ronie he bent a closer look upon him, and he +suddenly recognized our hero as one of the couple who had saved him +from the jaguar. He saw that Jack was another of his captors. + +"I remember you, seņors," he said. "You saved my life, but it would +have been better for me to have been eaten by the jaguar than to fall +into the hands of Castro. I will tell you something, seņor, that will +be worth more to you than my miserable life if you will let me go." + +"It is of my mother!" exclaimed Ronie. "You had her photograph. Tell +me where she is." + +"If you will spare my life." + +"I am a soldier under Castro; you know a soldier's duty, seņor." + +"I thought you were one of us," he murmured. "But I am going to tell +all I know. She was taken prisoner by some of El Capitan's men. As +the angels are my witness I had nothing to do with that. Her portrait +fell upon the ground during the struggle and I picked it up. That is +all I had to do about it." + +"Where is she now?" demanded Ronie, with extreme earnestness. + +"She is held as a prisoner at the old convent in Durango under command +of El Capitan." + +"Then she lives!" cried Ronie, in great joy. + +"_Si, seņor_. I can lead you to the place, and will if you will give +me my liberty." + +"That is beyond my power. I cannot--ha! here comes an officer now." + +The newcomer was none other than Captain de Caprian, who asked: + +"Whom have we here, seņors?" + +"A man we found prowling in the city under what we thought to be +suspicions circumstances, so we stopped him. He is from San Carlos, +and claims he is not a spy." + +"I shall leave it for you to say what is to be done with him," said +Francisco, "promising to see that he is fairly treated." + +"I know not in regard to his being a spy," replied Ronie, "but he has +given me valuable information in regard to my mother's fate." + +"Does he know of her?" asked Francisco, eagerly. "That fact alone +ought to save his life. What has he told you?" + +In a few words Ronie explained what he had learned, when the other +said, with an intonation of joy in his voice: + +"I am so glad, Seņor Roland. No time must be lost in going to her +rescue. I have this morning received word that my mother has been +given her liberty, and that she is on her way to meet me after many sad +months of separation. But, dear Roland, as much as I long to meet that +mother, if you are willing, and General Castro will permit, I want to +go with you to help save your mother. My company will be sufficient +force." + +Ronie and Harrie could not conceal their emotion at the earnest words +of their young friend, who showed that he spoke from the heart. + +"Nay----" began Ronie, but the other checked him. + +"I know what you would say, Seņor Roland, but as much as mother and I +want to see each other, we can both wait until this duty is performed. +I am going to General Castro at once for leave of absence. You can let +this man accompany us if you think he is to be trusted. I will meet +you near the old cathedral half an hour hence." + +After a short conference among themselves, in which Manuel Marlin was +allowed to express his opinion, it was decided to let him go with them. +He might prove a valuable companion, for they were all inclined to +think he would not be false to his pledges. + +Before an hour had passed, so promptly did they act, Captain de Caprian +led out his regiment of gallant men, to start upon the long and arduous +journey to Durango on the merciful errand of saving a captive from the +power of El Capitan. Were the truth told, more than one of the brave +band hoped they might meet the bold outlaw himself. + +I need not describe that journey to Durango. The town proved to be a +little hamlet under the brow of the Cordilleras, where the insurgents +sometimes made their headquarters. Knowing this, the advance was made +with extreme caution as soon as the regiment had entered the debatable +country. Scouts were constantly on the lookout, and among these were +our young engineers. + +"I can scarcely wait for the time when we shall attack them," declared +Ronie to Harrie and Manuel, as the three halted on the brink of a steep +hill overlooking the hidden town. + +"How quiet the place seems," replied Harrie. "It must be El Capitan +and his troops are away." + +"Off on one of his raids, no doubt. It will be so much the better for +us." + +"Still I really think Francisco will be disappointed if we do not find +the rebel chief." + +"I wonder if yonder old vine-clad building is where mother is +imprisoned?" asked Ronie, pointing to what the three felt must be the +ancient convent pictured by those who claimed to have been there. + +"_Si, seņors_," replied Manuel. "But look there, _seņors_! what does +the coming of that llaneros mean?" + +The question from Manuel was called forth by the sudden appearance of +one of the riders of the llanos, or plains of Venezuela, who drew rein +almost in front of the old convent. With what truly seemed wonderful +celerity the people began to collect, coming from every quarter. + +"Perhaps that fellow has discovered our men and is giving the alarm," +said Ronie. + +"I wish I was near enough to hear what he says," replied Manuel. "If +you will wait for me, seņors, a few minutes I will find out." + +Manuel Marlin then began the descent into the town, and as the distance +was not far, he soon got within hearing of the new arrival. It was not +over fifteen minutes before he returned to his anxious companions with +the somewhat startling announcement: + +"It is as I expected, seņors; El Capitan is on his way home, and is +expected within a few hours!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +VICTORY AND PEACE. + +Ronie and Harrie heard this announcement with considerable alarm, as +with their first thought they believed they had come too late to +accomplish their purpose. + +"We must get back to the regiment as soon as possible," declared Ronie. +"If we act promptly we may yet rout the inhabitants of the town and +save mother. How many men has El Capitan under him, do you think, +Manuel?" + +"I am sorry that I am not able to tell," replied the Venezuelan. "I +think by what I could catch that he is coming back with a large force." + +"Which makes it the more necessary that we act quickly. Come on, boys!" + +His companions needed no urging to follow him, and it was not long +before they were able to rejoin Captain de Caprian, who was anxiously +awaiting them. But their news did not disconcert the brave young +patriot. + +"It only fulfills my wishes," he said. "We have only to storm the town +without loss of time, and then get ready to meet El Capitan. Ay, we +will give him a welcome home that he little expects. I wish Seņor +Greenland would--but here he comes!" + +Jack had also been out on a reconnoissance, and he brought in the same +news that the others had--that El Capitan was expected at Durango +within a few hours. + +"They say he comes with five thousand troops," added Jack. + +Our heroes turned to see what effect this announcement would have upon +Francisco, but as far as they could see the young captain did not show +that he had heard the words. Fifteen minutes later the regiment was +ordered forward, and then was begun a swift, but silent, advance upon +the stronghold of the insurgents, Captain de Caprian giving out his +orders calmly and confidently, as if about to enter one of the camps of +Castro. Could he reasonably hope to meet successfully El Capitan's +superior numbers? What if the latter had five thousand men under his +command? + +Ronie and Harrie could not help asking each other these questions, as +they fell into line and moved sternly forward. When near to the lower +end of the town Captain de Caprian divided his men into two bodies, so +as to attack the place simultaneously from different parts. Our heroes +remained with his division, and entered the mountain hamlet from the +nearest quarter, this advance being along a narrow road overhung by a +range of hills on either side. + +In order to give the other division time to gain a position above them, +it was necessary to make a brief delay before opening the attack. But +the wait was not long before the signal was given for the double +assault, and the word rang along the ranks: + +"Forward! double-quick---charge!" + +It goes without saying that exciting scenes followed. Ronie, Harrie +and Jack managed to keep together, and it was their good fortune to be +among the first to come within close proximity to the convent where +Mrs. Rand was supposed to be imprisoned. This had, in fact, been a +part of Captain de Caprian's plans. + +The surprise was complete as far as the insurgents were concerned. The +onset of the government troops came like a tempest from a clear sky. +Women shrieked and fled, followed by men who made scarcely more +resistance, until they succeeded in rallying about the old convent. +Here then was fought the lion's part of the battle. A hundred or more +of the insurgents made a desperate stand, but they might as well have +hoped to stem the mountain torrent which swept down the gorge just +behind their native hamlet. They seemed to quickly realize this, and +the cry for quarter soon rang out above the medley of battle. + +"Forward!" still shouted the youthful commander. "Force an entrance to +the old building before it is too late." + +Captain de Caprian showed that he realized what was likely to follow +inside the structure, for he had barely uttered his order before a cry +with womanly sharpness in it rang out--an appeal for help. + +Our heroes were already storming the door, having dashed aside the +sentinels on duty there. The next moment, led by Ronie, and followed +by a dozen of the troops, our three burst into the convent. Running +swiftly along the main passage they soon came upon a scene which sent +the blood coursing fiercely through their veins. It would appear that +the insurgents, finding they were being routed by the government +troops, sought to kill the few prisoners they held within this old +building. At the very moment our rescuers appeared on the scene, one +of them was swinging over his head the ugly-looking knife he carried in +the act of slaying the woman who was kneeling at his feet. Ronie sent +the miscreant senseless to the floor, and the next moment clasped his +mother in his arms. + +"I was in season, mother," he murmured; "you are safe." + +But she had fainted, and as gently as possible, with the assistance of +Harrie and Jack, he bore her to a bench where the fresh air could cool +her fevered temple. + +"To think if we had been a minute later," said Ronie. + +"She opens her eyes," declared Harrie. "She has been spared." + +It was indeed an affecting scene, during which Jack Greenland drew +apart. He found that three other captives, all Venezuelans, had been +rescued, and that these had been all the persons held in the convent. + +Renewed commotion outside now caught his attention, and he returned to +the side of his friends. + +"I think El Capitan is coming, and that the boys are preparing to +welcome him home," he said, grimly. "I think I will help in the +greeting, if you will excuse me, lads." + +"Forgive me, Jack, for forgetting my duty," said Harrie. "But I felt +so anxious for Ronie's mother." + +"I must go, mother," declared Ronie. + +"Oh, my son!" she implored, "must you leave me here and now?" + +It was a serious problem for the young engineers to decide, between +filial and martial duty. Happily Jack quickly settled the matter by +saying: + +"It is your duty, lads, to remain here. I know Captain de Caprian +would wish it. Look sharp to yourselves, while I join the troops in +their welcome to El Capitan." + +The young engineers were fain to agree to this, feeling that it was +better they should. Especially was this the situation as they were not +regularly attached to the regiment. + +The "welcome" extended to El Capitan and his followers was given near +the lower end of the town, where the mountain ranges drew so near +together that the valley was narrow, uncomfortably narrow for the +surprised insurgents. El Capitan will never forget that "welcome," nor +will his men, who quickly scattered like sheep scaling the +mountainside. If outnumbering the government troops three to one, +numbers did not count then. Among those who won special distinction +was Manuel Marlin. + +As soon as he could do so, Captain de Caprian sought his American +friends to congratulate them, while he described the complete victory +of his troops. Altogether, it was a happy occasion to them. + +"I shall order an immediate return to the capital," declared the young +patriot. "You had better go to Caracas with us, friends." + +They were nothing loath to do this, and it was an exceedingly happy +company which found its way back to the mountain citadel, where they +were hailed with delight by the president himself. El Capitan, the +insurgent chief who had been so feared, was turned over to the proper +authorities, while Manuel Marlin, in consideration of his recent +bravery, was fully pardoned for any error of the past. Our friends at +this time witnessed what seemed to them rather a peculiar trait of +public justice. This was the return to Caracas of El Mocho, who, it +will be remembered, had been kept a prisoner at San Carlos for a long +time. He had been accused, and apparently with good reason, of +infidelity to the government. But this was now overlooked, and General +Castro openly welcomed him to his arms, upon his promise to be faithful +in the future. + +"It is a good specimen of South American sense of justice," remarked +Jack. "One day a man is hunted as an enemy, and the next he is +embraced as a loved friend. It may be all right. I cannot say." + +In their happiness our heroes had no desire to criticise, much more to +condemn, such a practice. Ronie was extremely thankful for this +meeting with his mother. While they had many explanations to make and +long stories to tell of what had happened since their parting, there is +little I need repeat here. It was perfectly natural that Mrs. Rand +should seek to improve the opportunity to meet Ronie in Caracas, and +she did not dream of the suffering it was going to cost her, of the +terror of captivity or the horrors of her long imprisonment, but these +had been safely passed, and all felt like rejoicing over the outcome. + +Another couple especially happy were Francisco and his mother, whom our +Americans quickly learned to love and respect. She proved indeed to be +a gentlewoman of the noblest type, who adored her patriotic son. + +Naturally it was not long before our engineers felt it was time for +them to move on their work, but this could not be done until Colonel +Marchand, who joined with them in their happiness, could recover from +his wounds so as to accompany them. While these healed, and our +friends passed the time pleasantly in the capital, flitting back and +forth between their friends, the warlike affairs of the republic grew +apace. There was some fighting to be done, but mainly it had come to +be a matter of diplomacy and argument between the powers, until finally +the glad news of a peaceful negotiation came to them. + +Once more President Castro had triumphed, achieving this time, it +seemed, his grandest victory. When the account of this rang over the +mountain city our American engineers began to prepare for an arduous +campaign of an altogether different kind from that which befell them +when they were COMRADES UNDER CASTRO. + + + + +THE END. + + + + +"Engineer Ralph," by Frank H. MacDougal, No. 87 of the ROUND THE WORLD +LIBRARY, is a splendid story of a boy's supreme struggle to success. + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + +***** This file should be named 34792-8.txt or 34792-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/7/9/34792/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/34792-8.zip b/34792-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..814fd16 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792-8.zip diff --git a/34792-h.zip b/34792-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..49ffd1f --- /dev/null +++ b/34792-h.zip diff --git a/34792-h/34792-h.htm b/34792-h/34792-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c1ac69 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792-h/34792-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9334 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML> +<HEAD> + +<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> + +<TITLE> +The Project Gutenberg E-text of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair +</TITLE> + +<STYLE TYPE="text/css"> +BODY { color: Black; + background: White; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-left: 10%; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + text-align: justify } + +P {text-indent: 4% } + +P.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +P.poem {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; } + +P.letter {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.footnote {text-indent: 0% ; + font-size: 80%; + margin-left: 10% ; + margin-right: 10% } + +P.finis { font-size: larger ; + text-align: center ; + text-indent: 0% ; + margin-left: 0% ; + margin-right: 0% } + +H4.h4center { margin-left: 0; + margin-right: 0 ; + margin-bottom: .5% ; + margin-top: 0; + float: none ; + clear: both ; + text-align: center } + +IMG.imgcenter { margin-left: auto; + margin-bottom: 0; + margin-top: 1%; + margin-right: auto; } + +</STYLE> + +</HEAD> + +<BODY> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Where Duty Called + or, In Honor Bound + +Author: Victor St. Clair + +Release Date: December 30, 2010 [EBook #34792] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + +</pre> + + +<BR><BR> + +<A NAME="img-cover"></A> +<CENTER> +<IMG CLASS="imgcenter" SRC="images/img-cover.jpg" ALT="Cover art" BORDER="2"> +</CENTER> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +Round the World Library No. 86 +</H4> + +<BR><BR> + +<H1 ALIGN="center"> +Where Duty Called +</H1> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +OR +</H4> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +IN HONOR BOUND +</H3> + +<BR><BR> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +By +</H4> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +VICTOR ST. CLAIR +</H3> + +<BR> + +<H5 ALIGN="center"> +Author of "On His Merit," "Zip, the Acrobat," <BR> +"Cast Away in the Jungle," etc. +</H5> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +STREET & SMITH CORPORATION +<BR> +PUBLISHERS +<BR> +79-89 Seventh Avenue, New York +</H4> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H5 ALIGN="center"> +Copyright, 1904 +<BR> +By STREET & SMITH +<BR><BR> +Where Duty Called +<BR><BR><BR> +All rights reserved, including that of translation into<BR> +foreign languages, including the Scandinavian. +<BR> +Printed in the U. S. A. +</H5> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +Contents +</H2> + +<TABLE ALIGN="center" WIDTH="80%"> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">Chapter</TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> </TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">I. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap01">"A Grand Opportunity."</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">II. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap02">A Suspicious Craft.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">III. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap03">The Young Exile.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap04">Put in Irons.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">V. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap05">Escape from the <I>Libertador</I>.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap06">A Swim for Life.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap07">Taken Ashore.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">VIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap08">Jaguar Claws.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">IX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap09">The Mystery of the Photograph.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">X. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap10">"We have been Betrayed!"</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap11">A Perilous Flight.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap12">A Lonely Ride.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap13">In the Enemy's Country.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap14">Indian Warfare.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap15">A Friendly Voice.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap16">Colonel Marchand.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap17">A Cunning Ruse.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XVIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap18">Ronie Receives a Commission.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XIX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap19">The Scout in the Jungle.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XX. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap20">Adventures and Surprises.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap21">"The Mountain Lion."</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap22">A Fight with the Guerillas.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap23">The News at La Guayra.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXIV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap24">Interview with General Castro.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXV. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap25">The Spy of Caracas.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVI. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap26">"It is Manuel Marlin!"</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap27">Good News.</A></TD> +</TR> + +<TR> +<TD ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top">XXVIII. </TD> +<TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top"> +<A HREF="#chap28">Victory and Peace.</A></TD> +</TR> + +</TABLE> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap01"></A> + +<H2 ALIGN="center"> +WHERE DUTY CALLED. +</H2> + +<BR> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER I. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +"A GRAND OPPORTUNITY." +</H4> + +<P> +"Hurrah, boys! here is a letter from home. At least, it is from the +homeland, as it is postmarked New York. Who can be writing us from +that city?" and the youthful speaker, in his exuberance of feeling, +waved the missive over his head, while he began to dance a lively step. +</P> + +<P> +"I know of no better way to find out than to open it, Harrie, or let +one of us do it for you; you seem suddenly to have lost your faculty +for doing anything rational yourself. Hand it to Jack if you do not +want to trust me with it." +</P> + +<P> +"Your very words, to say nothing of your impatient gestures, Ronie, +show that you are not one whit less excited than I am over receiving +some news from the great world outside of this lost corner," replied +the first speaker, beginning to tear open the end of the bulky envelope +he held in his hand. +</P> + +<P> +"There must be a lot of news, judging by the size of the package," said +the second, approaching so he could look over the shoulder of his +companion while he tore open the covering. +</P> + +<P> +"Go slow, lads," said a third person, who had been sitting slightly +apart from the others, but who moved near to the twain now. "It won't +do to get unduly excited in this climate." +</P> + +<P> +The three were none other than our old friends of the jungles of Luzon, +Ronie Rand, Harrie Mannering and Jack Greenland, whose exploits in +opening up one of the great forest tracts on that island were described +in "Cast Away in the Jungle," first of THE ROUND WORLD SERIES. They +had not been long in Manilla, the capital of the island, since +completing that hazardous undertaking, when an incoming steamer brought +them the letter which awakened such an interest, and which was to play +such an important part in their future actions. As its bulk indicated, +it was a lengthy epistle, and this length was more than doubled in +reading matter by the fine chirography which covered its large pages. +</P> + +<P> +Standing where he could not scan the mysterious pages, Professor Jack +fell to watching the countenance of Harrie Mannering as he followed +with his eye the closely written pages. As he read, his features began +to change their expression from gayety to seriousness, and by the time +he had finished a puzzled look had settled upon his sunburned but +good-looking face, and his lips, forming themselves unconsciously into +a pucker, gave vent to a prolonged whistle. Then, as if to obtain a +more comprehensive understanding of the message, he returned to the +beginning, and was about to read it through again, when Jack said: +</P> + +<P> +"Look here, boy, you are taking an unfair advantage of a fellow. You +must know that I am just as much interested in news from the homeland +as you, so read it aloud this time. If it is good news, I want to +enjoy it with you; if it is bad news, then I certainly ought to share +it with you." +</P> + +<P> +"Forgive me, or rather us, Jack—for I am sure Ronie has seen every +word—but it is all so strange and unexpected that my head is not quite +clear yet as to whether I have been reading or dreaming." +</P> + +<P> +"Then it is all the more necessary that I should hear it, as it is +possible my poor head may help unravel the skein. You remember the +story of the great novelist, Sir Walter Scott, who, upon recovering +from a long illness, was given a book to read for amusement. But upon +reading the book, he could get so little sense out of it that he feared +he had lost his reason. In this perplexed state of mind he handed the +work to another to read without giving his reason, while he waited +anxiously for the result. She, after reading a few chapters, threw the +book aside, declaring it was such senseless twaddle that she did not +care to follow it any further, whereupon the great author breathed +easier." +</P> + +<P> +"No offense was meant, Jack, and I will try and make amends at once. +In the first place, this is an invitation for us to start upon another +undertaking somewhat similar to the one we have just completed." +</P> + +<P> +"What! return to the jungles of Luzon?" +</P> + +<P> +"No; it is to South America this time—to Venezuela. A party of men, +some of whom are connected with the local government, are anxious to +open up the interior of the country in quest of rubber trees. The +writer, who is one of the company, and, I judge, an influential member, +has recommended us as 'capable persons'—you needn't laugh, Ronie, for +those are his words—to survey and engineer for the party. If we +conclude to go, he wants us to meet him at Caracas as soon as possible. +In the meantime, he will get everything in readiness to start as soon +as we arrive. I am at a loss to know what to think of it. The writer, +who is Colonel Rupert Marchand, is very enthusiastic over the scheme, +and he seems anxious that we should come. I never thought the colonel +was one to get wild over anything that was not likely to prove +successful." +</P> + +<P> +Jack made no reply in words, but took the letter from the hand of his +young friend, and began to hastily run over its contents, saying, by +way of apology for his action: +</P> + +<P> +"You will pardon me, Harrie, but it may not be best for us to read +aloud or talk to any great extent here. There may be those about whose +motives are not friendly." +</P> + +<P> +Thinking this suggestion a wise one, Harrie and Ronie willingly +followed their companion to a more retired place, where the three spent +fully five minutes looking over the lengthy missive together before one +of them spoke. Then Ronie said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, what do you think of it, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"That it is a grand opportunity for two such adventure-loving fellows +as you are to embrace. But I would not advise less daring and +energetic youths to think of it for a moment." +</P> + +<P> +"So you think there is likely to be some dangerous experiences attached +to the journey?" +</P> + +<P> +"It has all of that appearance, though you may come out of it without a +scratch. Colonel Marchand, unless I have misjudged him, is just such a +man as would throw all thought of hazard to the wind if the prize was +worth striving for." +</P> + +<P> +"You do not believe he would lead any one into needless danger, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"Certainly not; he is too good a soldier for that, and you know he made +an honorable record in our recent war with Spain." +</P> + +<P> +"I judge, then, you think the people we should be likely to fall among +might be a dangerous element," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"That is just what I meant. The inhabitants of the interior of the +country where he would have you go are treacherous and dangerous, if +they happen to take a dislike to you; and that they are more prone to +dislike than to like has been my experience." +</P> + +<P> +"What about this rubber business?" said Harrie. "Colonel Marchand +speaks as if he wants us to take an interest in the company as part pay +for our work. He seems very enthusiastic over that." +</P> + +<P> +"His excuse for having us take some shares is that we might possibly +have more interest in the venture," said Ronie. "That stipulation +makes me think there may be some sort of a trap to inveigle us into a +profitless adventure, though I do not think the colonel would do that." +</P> + +<P> +"You are as well able to judge of that as I am. In regard to the +rubber part of the venture, to use a poor simile, that is very elastic. +Unless you have given the matter some consideration you will not, at +first thought, realize the importance of that commodity, which must +govern the possibilities of the article in the markets. I will +acknowledge that I am very favorably impressed with the idea. Rubber +is fast becoming one of the most important commercial articles in +existence. Turn whichever way you will, do whatever you wish, and you +will almost invariably find that rubber is the most necessary thing +needed. +</P> + +<P> +"Not only is it used in large quantities toward helping clothe men and +creatures, but it is used in house furnishings, such as mattings for +floors, stairs and platforms, on board of ships, as well as in houses, +and in hundreds of other places. It is utilized largely in the +manufacture of druggists' materials; in the manufacture of all kinds of +instruments and machinery that require pliable bearings and supporters, +printers' rollers, wheel tires, rings on preserve jars. Erasers on +lead pencils call for tons of the article. +</P> + +<P> +"Then steam mills must have rubber belts, cars rubber bearings, and gas +works call for miles of rubber hose, to say nothing of that used in +gardens and on lawns. Billiard tables alone call for nearly a third of +a million dollars' worth of rubber every year, while over a million +dollars are spent for the rubber used in baseball and football! +Typewriters call for a vast amount; so do the makers of rubber stamps, +water bottles, trimmings for harness, and fittings for pipes of one +kind and another. Altogether, the rubber factories of the United +States alone utilize sixty million pounds of rubber annually. You will +not wonder now if I say that rubber ranks as third among the imports of +the country, and that its handling is one of the most profitable +callings of the day. If this is the electrical age, as it has been +called, it is rubber that makes possible the many applications of +electricity." +</P> + +<P> +"I had not thought it of such importance," remarked Harrie, frankly. +"Where does it all come from?" +</P> + +<P> +"A very pertinent question," replied Jack. "Originally it came from +India, hence the name of India rubber, which still clings to it, though +the great bulk now, and that which is of the better quality, comes from +other countries. Foremost among these is South America. It is true a +large amount comes from Central America, the west part of Africa, and +the islands of the Indian Archipelago, but the best rubber comes from +the great belt of lowlands bordering upon the Amazon, the Rio Negro and +the Orinoco, the last named tract lying largely in Southern Venezuela. +This country in many respects is the Eldorado of South America." +</P> + +<P> +"Then we shall not be going into a country without at least one source +of wealth." +</P> + +<P> +"No; Venezuela is wonderfully well favored by nature. Capable of +producing abundant supplies of first quality coffee, sugar cane, cocoa +palm and cotton plant, it has its rich gold mines, its mines of +asphalt, affording paving enough for the cities of the world; while +last, but not least, are its rubber forests, which have only very +recently been considered as a valuable and available resource. It is +here American capital has entered the field of conquest." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we had better go there, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"That is a question you must answer yourselves. I know you will not +act hastily, and, having acted, will not regret the step taken." +</P> + +<P> +"What about the climate, Jack?" asked Harrie. "I believe you have been +there?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes, I have been there," replied the other, shaking his grizzled head +slowly, "and it was likely at one stage of the scene that I should stay +there forever. But I am not answering your question. The climate of +South America, as a whole, is not very bad, though much of its +territory lies within the torrid zone. This is largely due to local +modifications. The burning heat of the plains of Arabia is unknown in +the western hemisphere. The hottest region of South America, as far as +I know, is the steppes of Caracas, the capital of Venezuela; but even +there the temperature does not reach a hundred degrees in the shade, +while it rises to one hundred and twelve degrees in the sand deserts +surrounding the Red Sea. In the basin of the Amazon, owing to the +protection of vast forests and the influence of prevailing easterly +winds, offshoots of the trade winds, which follow the great river +nearly to the Andes, the climate is not very hot or unhealthy." +</P> + +<P> +"What do you say, Ronie? Is it go, or stay here until something else +comes our way?" +</P> + +<P> +"I will suggest the way I would settle it. Let each one take a slip of +paper, and, without consulting the Others, write upon it his answer. +Whatever two of us shall say to be our decision, to go or to remain +here." +</P> + +<P> +His companions were nothing loath to agree to this, so paper and +pencils were quickly obtained, and each one wrote his reply. Upon +comparing notes a moment later, it was found that all three had written +the short but decisive word: +</P> + +<P> +"Go!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap02"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER II. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A SUSPICIOUS CRAFT. +</H4> + +<P> +"I tell you, boys, there is something wrong about this vessel." +</P> + +<P> +The speaker was Jack Greenland, and his companions were Ronie and +Harrie, but the scene is now many leagues from the quiet corner where +they took their vote to hazard a journey to the rubber forests of +Venezuela. Instead of the quaint old buildings of Manilla on the one +hand, and the sullen old bay, filled with its odd-looking crafts, on +the other, roll the blue waters of the Caribbean Sea, almost as placid +as the southern sky that bends so benignly over their heads, while they +stand by the taffrail of the rakish ship upon which they have only +recently taken passage to the South American coast. +</P> + +<P> +To explain in detail this change of base would require too much space. +A few words will suffice to describe the long journey by water and land +necessary to make this stupendous change. In the first place, having +decided unanimously to undertake the trip, they were exceedingly +fortunate in finding that they could leave Manilla within twenty-four +hours by steamer for San Francisco. This required some smart hustling, +but our trio were used to this, and the next morning found them safely +aboard ship, looking hopefully forward to a speedy and safe arrival in +the city of the Golden Gate. In this they were not disappointed, while +the run down the coast to Panama was also made under favorable +conditions. Then the isthmus was crossed with some delay and vexation, +when their adventures and misadventures began in earnest. +</P> + +<P> +At Colon tidings of war in Venezuela reached them. These being +somewhat indefinite, and the republic in question being a land of +revolutions and uprisings, but little attention was given these vague +reports. They had barely left port, however, before the captain of the +little coastwise vessel declared that they were likely to have trouble. +</P> + +<P> +The next day they were, indeed, fired upon by a strange craft, and +instead of keeping on toward La Guayra, the port of Caracas, he put to +sea. While bent upon this aimless quest, they were overtaken by a +tropical storm, and were eventually driven upon one of the small isles +forming the lower horn of that huge crescent of sea isles known as the +Windward Islands. From this they managed to reach, after repairing +their damages somewhat, Martinique, where our three heroes were only +too glad to part with such uncertain companions. +</P> + +<P> +There was a strange ship in this port, which immediately attracted +them. Learning that the captain, though he had taken out papers for +Colon, intended to stop at La Guayra, they engaged passage. At the +outset they had felt some distrust in doing this, while the commander +showed equal hesitation in taking them. Still, it was their only +chance to get away, so they resolved to take their chances, with the +determination to keep their eyes and ears open. Thus they had +frequently expressed the opinion among themselves that they had been +justified in their suspicions, though this was the first outspoken +belief in the fact. +</P> + +<P> +"I agree with you, Jack," declared Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"What have you learned that is new, Jack?" asked Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Enough to confirm what doubts I already had as to her character. +Captain Willis does not intend to put in at La Guayra, as he claimed he +should to us." +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps he dares not," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad, that's where you hit the bull's-eye. He dares not do it." +</P> + +<P> +"That means either that his intentions are not honest, or that the war +in Venezuela is more than a civil war," said Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Now you've hit the bull's-eye with a double shot. I do not believe he +is honest," nodding in the direction of the commander, "and that this +is an international war!" +</P> + +<P> +"Whew!" exclaimed the young engineers in the same breath. While both +had really about come to this conclusion, the proposition seemed more +startling when expressed in so many words. +</P> + +<P> +"Before we fully agree to this," continued Professor Jack, "let's +compare notes. In the first place this vessel before undergoing some +slight alterations came to Martinique as a Colombian vessel, officered +and manned by Englishmen. Upon reaching this island she was +immediately sold, and her English crew discharged. But her captain +remained the same, while she still carried the English colors. The +next day it was claimed she had been again sold, this time passing into +the possession of followers of General Matos, the leader of the +Venezuelan revolutionists. Her English flag was now replaced by the +colors of Venezuela, and she was renamed from the <I>Ban Righ</I> to the +<I>Libertador</I>. Can the chameleon beat that in changing colors? It is +my private opinion she is a cruiser in the employ of the insurgents, +and that we are booked for lively times." +</P> + +<P> +"With small chance of reaching Caracas for a long time, if at all," +added Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"How came England to allow such a vessel to leave her port?" asked +Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"She must have been deceived as to her real character. Thinking she +was a Colombian ship, and being on peaceful terms with that republic, +she had no business to stop her.[<A NAME="chap02fn1text"></A><A HREF="#chap02fn1">1</A>] Hi! what have we here?" +</P> + +<P> +Jack's abrupt question was called forth by the sudden appearance almost +by his side of a tall, slender youth, whose tawny skin and dark +features proclaimed that he belonged to the mixed blood of the South +American people. He had risen from the midst of a coil of rope, and in +such close proximity that it was evident he had overheard what had been +said. The three Americans realized their situation, though the opening +speech of the young stranger reassured them. +</P> + +<P> +"Seņors speak very indiscreetly," he said, "of affairs which they must +know bode them ill, in case their words reach the ears of others." +</P> + +<P> +"Who are you?" demanded Jack, who was the first to speak. He +remembered having seen this youth among the men on board, but had not +given him any particular notice, although he noticed that he presented +an appearance that showed he did not belong to the class of common +sailors, while dressed no better than the poorest. There was an air of +superiority about him which they did not possess. +</P> + +<P> +"It is not always well for one to be too outspoken to strangers," he +answered, glancing cautiously about as he said the words. "Even coils +of rope have ears," he added, significantly. +</P> + +<P> +"You overheard what we said?" queried Jack, who continued to act as +spokesman for the party. +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>. I could not help hearing some of it, though you did +speak in a low tone. My ears are very keen, and not every one would +have heard the little I did." +</P> + +<P> +"It is not well for one to repeat what one hears, sometimes," said +Jack, by way of reply. +</P> + +<P> +"I have a mind as well as ears, seņors," replied the youth. "While I +can see as well as I can hear, I can think for both eyes and ears. You +are not satisfied with the appearance of the <I>Libertador</I>?" +</P> + +<P> +"I judge you are pretty well informed as to our opinion," replied Jack, +more vexed than he was willing to show that they should have been +caught off their guard. "Listeners are not apt to hear any good of +themselves, we are told." +</P> + +<P> +"Had I been a spy," retorted the youth, with some animation, "I should +have remained quietly in my concealment, and not shown my head at all, +and most assuredly not when I was likely to hear that which was to +prove the most important." +</P> + +<P> +"Please explain, then, your motive in addressing us at all." +</P> + +<P> +"Not here—not now," he answered. "When the Southern Cross appears in +the sky, and the sharp-eyed, doubting Englishman at the head sleeps, I +will meet one of you here, and make plain many things you do not +understand." +</P> + +<P> +"Why not meet all of us?" demanded Jack, suspiciously. +</P> + +<P> +"Because one of you in conversation with me would create less suspicion +than all of you would be likely to do. That is my only reason, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"By the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please," exclaimed Professor +Jack, "there is a bit of common sense in that. One of us will be here, +if we find it convenient." +</P> + +<P> +"Good, seņor. Now, as we seem to be attracting attention, it may be +well for us to separate. I will be on hand at the appointed time." +</P> + +<P> +A moment later the unknown youth mingled with the motley crew, leaving +our friends wondering what their meeting with him portended. +</P> + +<P> +"He seems honest," declared Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"He must be half Spaniard, and the other is doubtless something worse, +if that is possible," said Jack, who confessed that he had no liking +for the South American races. +</P> + +<P> +"Shall we accept his proposition?" asked Harrie. "I will confess I am +curious to know what he has to tell." +</P> + +<P> +"I do not understand what this disturbance between the countries +means," said Ronie. "When foreign nations take a hand in the affair it +would seem to show that something more serious than a civil revolt is +likely to follow. There could not have been a suspicion of this +outside preparation of war in the United States, or Colonel Marchand +would have known of it. I do not see how this has gone on under the +American eyes." +</P> + +<P> +"It is probably due to the fact that these republics of South America +are almost continually at war. Venezuela has had a stormy time of it +from the very first. I think one of us had better listen to what this +young Venezuelan has to say. He is evidently not in sympathy with the +commander of this vessel." +</P> + +<P> +"Who is working in the interest of Matos, the leader of the +revolutionists?" +</P> + +<P> +"As President Castro is at the head of the government, and the target +for the fire of the whole world at this time." +</P> + +<P> +It was finally decided that Harrie should meet the stranger at the +appointed time, while Ronie and Jack were to remain nearby to lend +their assistance in case the youth showed any signs of treachery. +Having come to this decision, the three waited, as may be imagined, +with considerable anxiety for the hour to come. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="footnote"> +<A NAME="chap02fn1"></A> +[<A HREF="#chap02fn1text">1</A>] Jack hit nearer the truth than he realized at the time. The <I>Ban +Righ</I> had, in fact, awakened the suspicions of the English authorities, +and the attention of the custom officers was directed to her by the +placing of a searchlight on her foremast. An examination disclosed the +fact that parts of guns and gun-mountings had been stowed away below +deck, where passages had been cut to allow the crew to move about with +facility. She was released and permitted to leave port because the +Colombian official in London claimed that she was being fitted out for +the service of his government. Sailing ostensibly for Colon, she +called at Antwerp, where she was loaded with 175 tons of Mausers and +180 tons of ammunition, besides field guns, billed as "hardware, +musical instruments and kettledrums." She also took on here a French +artillery captain, a doctor, and two sergeants. The guns were mounted +before she reached Martinique, and while there a sham sale was made. +So it will be seen that Jack and the young engineers had ample reason +for mistrusting the vessel whose career reads like a chapter from +romance rather than the actual history of a ship that, possibly, did +more to foment international disputes concerning the Venezuelan war +than anything else.—AUTHOR. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap03"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER III. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +THE YOUNG EXILE. +</H4> + +<P> +The night proved clear and beautiful, a typical southern evening most +fitly closing a day that had been flawless. All the afternoon the sky +and sea, so nearly of the same cerulean hue that where they met they +matched so perfectly as to seem a curtain of the same texture, had +appeared to vie with each other in their placidity, while now the stars +overhead were scarcely brighter than their reflections in the waters +below. On the rim of the distant horizon shone with a soft luster the +glorious radii of the gem of the Antipodes, the Southern Cross. +</P> + +<P> +Harrie was promptly on hand to keep his meeting with the strange youth, +but no earlier than the other, who greeted him in his musical voice: +</P> + +<P> +"Seņor is in good season. It is well, for our time cannot be long in +which to talk. While we speak let us walk slowly back and forth, arm +in arm, so we shall not be overheard." +</P> + +<P> +He spoke in a low tone, a little above a whisper, while Harrie allowed +his arm to be drawn into the other's grasp, though he was very watchful +not to be taken unawares in case of an attack on him. +</P> + +<P> +"In the first place," said the young Venezuelan, "I judge seņor is +anxious to know who it is who has placed himself in his way. But +before that I would speak of the ship which is at this moment bearing +us whither we fain would not go." +</P> + +<P> +"What about the ship?" asked Harrie, as he hesitated. "What have you +to say of that?" +</P> + +<P> +Lowering his voice so our hero could barely catch his words, he said: +</P> + +<P> +"It is a pirate ship, seņor!" +</P> + +<P> +Harrie could not repress a low exclamation at this startling +announcement, but he quickly recovered his presence of mind, saying, as +he recalled the wild deeds of Morgan and his freebooters, Conrad and +his Blue Water Rovers, who once boasted dominion over these seas: +</P> + +<P> +"How can that be?" +</P> + +<P> +"At least it is outlawed by the Venezuelan Government, and a big reward +offered for its capture. It is a conscript working in the interest of +Matos, the outlaw." +</P> + +<P> +"Who are you who says this, and how come you by this information? You +appear to be one of the crew; why is this so?" +</P> + +<P> +"I could answer the last question by asking the same of seņor. I am +here solely with the hope of getting back to my native land, and to the +side of my dear mother. Perhaps you will understand my situation +better when I tell you that I belong to a family that once ruled +Venezuela. The two Guzman Blancos, the elder of whom was an American, +were my ancestors. My name is Francisco de Caprian. My family is +hated by Matos, while father, who is not living now, did something to +incur the displeasure of Castro, so I am in ill-favor all around," he +added, with a smile which disclosed two rows of very white teeth. +</P> + +<P> +"Notwithstanding this," he added, "I am anxious to get back to Caracas, +to protect my dear mother in these perilous times, and, it may be, +strike one blow more for my country. The De Caprians can trace their +ancestry back to Juan Ampues, who founded the first Spanish settlement +in Venezuela, and one of them was a captain under Bolivar. Whatever +they may say of my family, they have ever been true to their native +land. The illustrious General Blanco did much for downtrodden +Venezuela, if some complained of him. You cannot suit all, seņor, at +the same time. Whither do you wish to go?" +</P> + +<P> +"To Caracas," replied Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"I am glad to hear that, seņor, for it will enable us to join fortunes. +That is, if you do not hesitate to associate with me. I am frank to +say that I am likely to involve you in trouble; but, at the same time, +judging you are strangers there, I may be able to help you. Then, too, +I do not believe they will dare to molest you to any serious extent, so +long as your country is not mixed up in this imbroglio. Yet a South +American aroused is like a wild bull, whose coming actions are not to +be gauged by his former behavior. I never have found an American who +could not take care of himself." +</P> + +<P> +"Thank you, Seņor Francisco. I trust you have not found one who would +desert a comrade in an hour of need." +</P> + +<P> +Quick and earnest came the reply, while the young Venezuelan grasped +Harrie's hand. +</P> + +<P> +"Never, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"You shall find my friends and me faithful to our promises." +</P> + +<P> +"I was confident of that, or I should not have dared to address you. +Believe me, the risk was greater than you may realize. Were my +identity to become known on this ship I have no doubt but I should be +hung at the yardarm, or shot down like a brute, within an hour." +</P> + +<P> +The youthful speaker showed great earnestness, and with what appeared +to be genuine honesty and candor. At any rate, Harrie was fain to +believe in his honor, and without further delay related enough of his +experiences for the other to understand the situation of his friends +and himself. +</P> + +<P> +"I was very sure you were here involuntarily," said Francisco, when he +had finished. "It is likely we can be of service to each other. From +what I have been able to pick up, we are to coast along the shore of +Venezuela, leaving here and there arms and ammunition for Matos and his +insurgents. It is possible we shall stop at Maracaibo. In case we do +so, that will be the place for us to leave the <I>Libertador</I>. If there +is a chance before, we shall be remiss as to our personal welfare if we +do not discover and improve it. The eyes of the watch are upon us," he +said, in a lower tone, "and we had better separate. Keep your eyes and +ears open until we have opportunity to speak to each other again." +</P> + +<P> +Before Harrie could reply, the other had slipped away, and he was fain +to return to his companions, whom he found anxiously awaiting him. In +a few words he apprized them of what had passed between him and the +young Venezuelan outlaw, Francisco de Caprian. +</P> + +<P> +"His words only confirm what we had concluded, and for that I am +inclined to believe the young man in part, at least. I was in +Venezuela at the time of the downfall of that pompous patriot Guzman +Blanco, and I knew something of the De Caprians. Possibly it was this +fellow's father who was mixed up in the muddle, and who was killed, +according to report, soon after I got away. Mind you, I say this, but +it will be well for us if we are careful whom we trust. In Venezuela +every man is a revolutionist, and where revolutions reign the +sacredness of human faith is lost. As we seem to be in for our share +of lively times, it may be well for us to look at the situation +intelligently." +</P> + +<P> +"I am surprised at the small amount I know of these South American +republics," declared Harrie. "Though they are much nearer to us, I +really know far less of them than I do of European nations of to-day, +or the ancient empires that crumbled away long years ago." +</P> + +<P> +"It is usually so," replied Jack. "It is a trait of human nature to be +reaching after the things beyond our reach, while we push right over +those near us. The history of South America is a most interesting one, +but the most interesting chapter is close at hand, when out of the +crude material shall crystallize a government and a people that shall +place themselves among the powers of the world. I should not know as +much as I do of Venezuela if it had not been for the two years I spent +there quite recently—years I am not likely to forget." +</P> + +<P> +"Ojeda, the Spanish adventurer who followed Columbus, named the country +Venezuela, which means "Little Venice," from the fact that he found +people living in houses built on piles, which suggested to him the +'Queen of the Adriatic,'" said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Very true," argued [Transcriber's note: agreed?} Jack. "These were +natives living about Lake Maracaibo, but the name was extended to cover +the whole country, though its original inhabitants did not, as a whole, +live in dwellings on poles, and move about in canoes. This Alonso de +Ojeda carried back to his patrons much gold and many pearls that he +stole from the simple but honest natives." +</P> + +<P> +"If I am not mistaken, Vespucci, who had so much to do with naming the +new continent,[<A NAME="chap03fn1text"></A><A HREF="#chap03fn1">1</A>] accompanied Ojeda's expedition," said Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Very true," replied Jack. "I am glad to think that he was more humane +than the majority of the early discoverers, who treated the natives so +cruelly. The Indians of this country were not only rapidly despoiled +of their gold and pearls, but they were themselves inhumanly butchered +or seized and sold into captivity. The result was they soon became +bitter enemies to the newcomers, who thus found colonization and +civilization not only difficult but dangerous. Among those of a kinder +heart who came here was Juan Ampues, whom your young friend, Harrie, +claims was an ancestor of his. Ampues succeeded, through his kindness, +in winning over the natives to his side, and he was thus enabled to +found the first settlement in Venezuela. This was in 1527, and the +town whose foundations he laid still exists under the name he gave it, +Santa Ana de Coro. But for the most part the Spaniards treated the +Indians in a brutal manner, and in the end the unfortunate race was +looted and slain." +</P> + +<P> +"But I have read that the people of Venezuela fell into worse hands +when the country was leased for a while to the Germans," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Right!" declared Jack, earnestly. "You are evidently well posted on +history. Germany's hold was broken in 1546, but it took two hundred +years to conquer and settle Venezuela, while all the slaughter of human +lives and vast outlay of wealth proved in the end a poor investment for +old Spain. One by one her American dependencies have slipped away from +her control, and Venezuela has the honor of being the first to gain her +freedom from Old World tyranny. +</P> + +<P> +"The first effort to break the chains was made in 1797. This was +unsuccessful, and another attempt was made in 1806, this time by +General Francisco Miranda, who invaded Venezuela with an expedition +organized in the United States, This revolution was successful only so +far as it served to awaken the people to the possibility that lay +before them. The prime opportunity came when Napoleon dethroned +Ferdinand of Spain, and the inhabitants of this dependency declared +that they would not submit to this Napoleonic usurpation. Though this +movement was made under a claim of allegiance to the deposed king of +Spain, he was incapable of seeing that it was for his interest to stand +by them, so he renounced their declaration. The result was another +declaration made on July 5, 1811, a declaration of independence and a +constitution in some respects like ours." +</P> + +<P> +"It seems a bit strange that they should have an independence day that +comes so close to ours," said Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Yes; and it is quite as singular that the first blow for liberty was +struck by their ancestors on the same day in April that our forefathers +fired their opening guns upon the British at Concord and Lexington," +replied Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"What means that confusion and those loud voices upon the deck?" asked +Ronie, as they were arrested in the midst of their conversation by the +sounds of a great commotion having suddenly begun over their heads. +</P> + +<P> +"There is something new afoot!" declared Jack. "It sounds as if there +was going to be a fight. Follow me, and we will find out what it +means." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="footnote"> +<A NAME="chap03fn1"></A> +[<A HREF="#chap03fn1text">1</A>] Our geographies were wont to credit this nobleman with having given +his name to the continent, but modern research has shown this to be an +error. The country was already called by the native inhabitants +Amarca, or America, which Vespucci very appropriately retained in his +written account of the New World, the first that was given to the +scholars of that day. From this fact his name became associated with +that country, and he became known as "Amerigo" Vespucci, which was very +appropriate, though his real name was Albertigo. Later writers, +without stopping to investigate, declared that the continent had been +named for him, and in that way others accepted the mistake as a fact. +The truth is the name of "America" is older and grander than that of +any of those who followed in the train of Columbus, and was that +appellation given it by the ancient Peruvians, the most highly +civilized people on the Western Continent at the coming of the Great +Discoverer.—AUTHOR. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap04"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IV. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +PUT IN IRONS. +</H4> + +<P> +As the three hurried to the deck of the <I>Libertador</I> they found the +noise and confusion increasing, though the seamen were fast falling +into their line of duty with greater regularity. Captain Willis was on +hand giving out his orders in his brusque manner. +</P> + +<P> +"Where away has it been sighted, lookout?" called the commander. +</P> + +<P> +"Off our windward quarter, captain." +</P> + +<P> +"Maintain your watch, sir, and report if there is any change." +</P> + +<P> +"They have sighted land," whispered Jack. "It must be one of the +islands lying off the Venezuelan coast." +</P> + +<P> +Both of his companions could not help feeling a thrill of pleasure at +this announcement, while they hoped it might lead to their speedy +escape from their present uncertain situation. But, from their +position, no trace of the looked-for shore could be discovered, and it +is safe to say no three upon the vessel watched and waited for the +morning light with greater anxiety than the two young engineers and +their faithful companion. +</P> + +<P> +At different intervals the lookout announced the situation as viewed +from his vantage ground, but no satisfactory word came until the dawn +of day, when even those upon deck saw in plain sight the shore of one +of the tropical islands dotting the sea. +</P> + +<P> +While our friends were looking on the scene with intense interest, +Francisco de Caprian passed by them, whispering as he did so: +</P> + +<P> +"The island of Curacao. It looks as though we were going to touch at +the port." +</P> + +<P> +He did not stop for any reply from our party, but Jack said to his +companions a moment later: +</P> + +<P> +"If I am not mistaken Curacao belongs to the Dutch. It is about fifty +miles from the Venezuelan coast, and westward of Caracas." +</P> + +<P> +"Which means that we have passed the line of that city," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Exactly." +</P> + +<P> +"Had we better try and land here?" +</P> + +<P> +"I am in doubt. Perhaps young De Caprian will be able to advise us. +There is no doubt but they intend to stop here." +</P> + +<P> +This was now evident to his companions, and half an hour was filled +with the exciting emotions of entering harbor after a voyage at sea. +As they moved slowly toward the pier it became evident that they had +been expected, for, early as it was, quite a throng of spectators were +awaiting them, and among the crowd were to be seen a small body of +troops. +</P> + +<P> +At this moment Francisco managed to pause a minute beside them, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"They are stopping here to take off one of Matos' officers. The island +seems to have been turned into a sort of recruiting ground for the +insurgents." +</P> + +<P> +"Aren't the Dutch neutral in this quarrel?" +</P> + +<P> +"They are supposed to be, but it is my opinion considerable secret +assistance is being given the insurgents from Europe—particularly from +the Germans. But I shall create suspicion if I talk longer. Above +all, appear to be indifferent to whatever may take place." +</P> + +<P> +"You do not think we had better try and leave the vessel here?" +</P> + +<P> +"You could not if you would. Every movement of yours is watched. Be +careful what you say or——" +</P> + +<P> +Francisco de Caprian did not stop to finish his sentence, though his +unspoken words were very well understood by the anxious trio, who saw +him among the most active of the mixed crew a moment later. +</P> + +<P> +Then they were witnesses of the embarkation of a small squad of +Venezuelan soldiers under charge of an officer who appeared in a +supercilious mood. +</P> + +<P> +"Whoever he is," whispered Jack, "he stands pretty near the head, and +he evidently intends that every one shall know it. Our stop is going +to be short. Well, the shorter the better, perhaps, for us. If we +should succeed in getting ashore we should find ourselves in the power +of the insurgents, which, it may be, we are at present," he added, with +a smile. "All we can do is to keep our eyes open and await further +developments." +</P> + +<P> +Jack realized that his companions knew this as well as he, so he did +not expect a reply, while they watched the following scenes in silence. +They saw the last of the little party of insurgents on shipboard, and +soon after the <I>Libertador</I> was once more ploughing her way through the +blue water of the Caribbean. Their course was now south-southwest, but +nothing occurred during the rest of the day to break the monotony of +the voyage. The newcomers went below immediately, so that our friends +saw nothing of them. Toward night Francisco found opportunity to speak +a few words to the three. +</P> + +<P> +"We are steering directly for the Venezuelan shore," he said. "I +overheard Captain Willis say that he intended to land somewhere near +Maracaibo, where, I judge, our passengers are going. We may find +opportunity to escape then." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we shall touch port again soon?" asked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"The officer and his followers whom we took aboard at Curacao are to be +left somewhere near Maracaibo. That is all I have been able to learn. +They are extremely careful what they say." +</P> + +<P> +The following morning it was found that the <I>Libertador</I> was flying +signals, which Jack declared were intended to attract the insurgents. +</P> + +<P> +"Mark my words, we are approaching the shore so closely that we shall +soon sight land." +</P> + +<P> +Jack proved himself a true prophet, but before this announcement came +from the lookout, something of a more startling nature took place. +About an hour after sunrise the sail of a small coastwise vessel was +sighted, and within another hour the stranger had been so closely +overtaken that she was hailed in no uncertain tones. +</P> + +<P> +The reply was uttered in defiance, and the sloop showed that she was +crowding ahead with all the speed she could, a steady breeze lending +its favor. But it soon became evident that it would be a short race, +and then the bow-chaser of the <I>Libertador</I> was brought to bear upon +the fugitive. +</P> + +<P> +As the first shot our heroes had heard in the war rang out over the +sea, and the leaden messenger struck in close proximity to its target, +the strange sloop was seen to soon slacken its flight. A few minutes +later, in answer to the stentorian command of Captain Willis, she lay +to. +</P> + +<P> +"It is war in earnest," said Harrie, as they saw a boat let down from +the cruiser, and the second officer, accompanied by half a dozen men, +started toward the prize. "I wonder what they will do with the sloop +now she has capitulated?" +</P> + +<P> +"We shall know as soon as the mate and his men return," replied Jack. +</P> + +<P> +It proved in the end that an officer and half a dozen men were sent +from the <I>Libertador</I> to take charge of the captured sloop, which took +an opposite course from that pursued by her captor. The latter +continued along the coast, flying her signals, but did not offer to +touch shore until Jack assured his companions that they must be near to +Maracaibo. Then an unexpected thing happened. Though aware that they +were continually under close surveillance, they had not been molested +in any way until now they were ordered below. Upon showing a little +hesitation in obeying, Ronie Rand was sent headlong to the deck by a +blow from one of the sailors, sent to see that the order was carried +out. +</P> + +<P> +"Our only way is to obey at present," whispered Jack, leading the way +to their berths below, followed by their enemies. They were left here +by the latter. For a little time the three remained silent, each busy +with his own thoughts. Finally Harrie said: +</P> + +<P> +"This begins to look serious. Why is it done?" +</P> + +<P> +"It looks to me as if they were afraid we might try to leave them as +soon as we come to port, and they have taken this precaution." +</P> + +<P> +"What can they wish to keep us for?" asked Ronie. "We have been of no +benefit to them." +</P> + +<P> +"True. But they may possibly fear to let us go free, as we are +Americans, and would be likely to inform our government about some +things they think we may have learned of them." +</P> + +<P> +"Hark! I believe they are coming back." +</P> + +<P> +While this did not prove true at the time, it was less than an hour +later when an officer, with four companions, did visit them, the former +saying he had received orders to put them in irons. +</P> + +<P> +Upon listening to this announcement, the three looked upon their +captors and then each upon his companions, Unable, at first, to +comprehend the statement. +</P> + +<P> +"Why should we be accorded such treatment?" demanded Jack. "We have +done no harm to any one, but have come and remained as peaceful +citizens of a country that has no trouble with your government or its +subjects." +</P> + +<P> +The officer shook his head, as much as to say: "I know nothing of this. +My orders must be obeyed." Then he motioned for his men to carry out +their purpose. +</P> + +<P> +Although they were not armed, except for their small firearms, and the +Venezuelans carried heavy pistols and cutlasses, the first thought that +flashed simultaneously through the minds of our heroes was the idea +that they could overpower the party, and thus escape the indignity +about to be heaped upon them. But, fortunately, as later events +proved, the calmer judgment of Jack prevailed. If they succeeded in +overpowering these men, they must stand a slim chance of escaping. In +fact, it would be folly to hope for it under the present conditions. +Thus they allowed the irons to be clasped upon their wrists and about +their ankles. This task, which did not seem an unpleasant one to them, +accomplished to their satisfaction, the men returned to the deck, +leaving our friends prisoners amid surroundings which seemed to make +their situation hopeless. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap05"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER V. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +ESCAPE FROM THE LIBERTADOR. +</H4> + +<P> +During the hours which followed—hours that seemed like ages—the +imprisoned trio were aware of a great commotion on deck, and Jack +assured his companions that the <I>Libertador</I> had come to anchor. +</P> + +<P> +"We are in some port near Maracaibo," he said. "I feel very sure of +that." +</P> + +<P> +"If we were only free," said Harrie, "there might be a possibility that +we could get away. It begins to look as if we are not going to regain +our freedom." +</P> + +<P> +"I wish we had resisted them," exclaimed the more impulsive Ronie. "I +know we could have overpowered them." +</P> + +<P> +"It would have done no good in the end," replied Jack. "In fact, it +would have worked against us in almost any turn affairs may take. In +case we do escape, we shall be able to show that we have not given +cause for this treatment. The United States Government will see that +we are recompensed for this." +</P> + +<P> +"If we live to get out of it," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"That is an important consideration, I allow," declared Jack. "But I +never permit myself to worry over my misfortunes. So long as there is +life there is hope." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if Francisco knows of this," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"If he does, and he must learn of it sooner or later, he will come to +us if it is in his power," replied Harrie, whose faith in the outlawed +Venezuelan was greater than his companions'. +</P> + +<P> +Some time later, just how long they had no way of knowing, it became +evident to them that the <I>Libertador</I> was again upon the move. Whither +were they bound? No one had come near them, and so long had they been +without food and drink that they began to feel the effects. Had they +been forgotten by their captors, or was it a premeditated plan to kill +them by starvation and thirst? Such questions as these filled their +minds and occupied most of their conversation. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder where Colonel Marchand thinks we are?" asked Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you what let's do, boys," suggested the fertile Jack Greenland. +"Let's remind them that we are human beings, and that we must have food +and drink or perish. Now, together, let us call for water!" +</P> + +<P> +The young engineers were not loath to do this, and a minute later, as +with one voice that rang out loud and deep in that narrow place of +confinement, they shouted three times in succession: +</P> + +<P> +"Water! water! water!" +</P> + +<P> +This cry they repeated at intervals for the next half hour without +bringing any one to their side, when they relapsed into silence. But +it was not long before an officer and two companions brought them both +food and drink. They partook of these while their captors stood grimly +over them, ready to return the irons to their wrists as soon as they +had finished their simple meal. The only reply they could get to their +questions was an ominous shake of the head from the leader of the +party. So Jack gave up, and he and his companions relapsed into +silence which was not broken until the disappearance of the men. +</P> + +<P> +"This beats everything I ever met with," declared Jack, "though I must +confess I have been in some peculiar situations in my time." +</P> + +<P> +Nothing further occurred to break the monotony of their captivity for +what they judged to be several hours. Then they suddenly became aware +of a person approaching them in a stealthy manner. At a loss to know +who could be creeping upon them in such a manner, they could only +remain silent till the mystery should be solved. This was done in a +most unexpected way by a voice that had a familiar sound to it, though +it spoke scarcely above a whisper: +</P> + +<P> +"Have no fear, seņors, it is I." +</P> + +<P> +The speaker was Francisco de Caprian, and he was not long in gaining +their side. +</P> + +<P> +"How fares it with you, seņors?" +</P> + +<P> +"Poorly," replied Jack, speaking for his captors as well as himself. +"What does this mean?" +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot stop to explain now. This ship is now bound to Porto +Colombia for some repairs. It stopped off Maracaibo to land General +Riera and his staff. From what I have overheard the present commander +will leave her there, and one of Matos' more intimate followers will +become the captain. It is possible we may fare better in Porto +Colombia than out to sea here. But I am not certain. The captain +seems concerned over what to do with you, and desperate measures may be +carried out. I cannot say. But one fact remains. Every moment we are +being carried farther and farther from Caracas. As far as I could I +have arranged for immediate flight. I have bribed a sailor, who will +help us get a boat. The night promises to be dark, which will +materially aid us in escaping. But there is a lookout who stands in +fear of his life lest he lets anything pass his gaze. It is not more +than an even chance that we can succeed in evading him and the others. +Do you care to take that chance with me, seņors, or remain here and +possibly escape with more or less harm?" +</P> + +<P> +"For one," said Ronie, "I am in favor of getting away as soon as +possible." +</P> + +<P> +"Will it be possible for us to take our trunk with us?" asked Harrie. +"We can ill afford to lose that." +</P> + +<P> +"I thought as much, seņor," replied Francisco. "I think we can manage +to take it along." +</P> + +<P> +Though it was too dark for them to see the countenance of their +companion, the young engineers looked anxiously toward him while they +waited for his answer. Jack spoke in a moment: +</P> + +<P> +"I know how you feel, boys, and I think I have some of that spirit +myself. I have always found, too, that the bold dash for freedom +always counted best. If you think we had better take our chances now, +I am with you, by the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please!" +</P> + +<P> +"Good!" exclaimed Harrie and Ronie together. "You hear, Francisco, +that we are going with you?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņors</I>. We will begin at once. For I will free you from those +irons. Then you must follow my directions to the letter." +</P> + +<P> +While he was speaking Francisco began to work upon the manacles upon +Ronie's wrists, and he showed that he had come prepared for his task, +as inside of five minutes the three were free, very much to their +relief. +</P> + +<P> +"Now," said Francisco, "you had better remain quietly here for what you +judge to be an hour. Then you come upon deck, being careful to get +astern without being seen. During this interval of waiting I will have +a boat in readiness, and be prepared to lower your chest into it at +short notice. You will have to bring this with you, and if it is too +heavy to handle easily and rapidly, I should advise you to remove +whatever of its contents you can spare. You understand?" +</P> + +<P> +"We do, Francisco, and we will not fail to be on hand." +</P> + +<P> +"I will be there to assist you. In case I fail to accomplish my +purpose in getting the boat, you will hear an alarm, in which case you +had better replace your irons and stay where you are until the +excitement blows over. Under these circumstances it will be for your +interest to look out for yourselves, as you will know that I cannot +help you." +</P> + +<P> +"We shall not desert you," replied the young engineers, while they +clasped his hands as he started to leave them. +</P> + +<P> +"He is a brave fellow, and thoroughly unselfish," said Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +Exchanging now and then a few words, they waited and listened while the +silence remained unbroken. At times the sound of footsteps reached +their ears, and constantly the steady swish of waters, but nothing to +warn them that the plans of Francisco had miscarried. +</P> + +<P> +"The hour must be passed," declared Jack at last. +</P> + +<P> +"And we must be moving," added Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Can you find your chest easily?" asked the first. +</P> + +<P> +"I think so," replied Harrie. "Follow me." +</P> + +<P> +The next five minutes were occupied in reaching the deck with their +burden. Upon feeling the salt sea breath the three breathed easier, +while they glanced about to see if the way was clear. As Francisco had +prophesied, the night was quite dark, though there were signs in the +west that the clouds were breaking away. No one was to be seen nearby, +and silently the three stole along toward the place where they expected +to meet Francisco, bearing the chest containing the instruments, charts +and papers of the young engineers. Fortunately, this was small, as +they had not taken more than was necessary. +</P> + +<P> +Harrie and Ronie bore this between them, while Jack followed with every +sense strained to catch the first sight or hear the first movement of +their enemies. In this way they had passed half the distance, and had +caught a glimpse of one ahead whom they believed to be their friend, +when a sharp voice rang out an alarm that for a moment fairly took away +their breath. Before they had fairly recovered the cry was answered +from the fore part of the vessel, and they realized that their flight +had been discovered. +</P> + +<P> +"Quick, seņors!" called Francisco. "In a moment we shall be too late." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Harrie quickened their advance, while Jack prepared to meet +the enemy hand-to-hand, if it should be necessary, while he kept close +beside his companions. +</P> + +<P> +"The boat is ready," said Francisco. "Let me fasten the rope about the +chest. If we can lower that before they get here, we will give them +the slip." +</P> + +<P> +Already they could hear the crew of the <I>Libertador</I> rushing wildly +about, uttering confusing cries, which told that they had little idea +of what was taking place, the majority doubtless thinking they had been +attacked by some unknown and mysterious foes. Above this medley of +voices rang the stern command of the captain, trying to bring order out +of the excitement. +</P> + +<P> +Francisco had now arranged the rope about the chest, and then it was +lowered down the ship's side, rapidly, hand over hand. +</P> + +<P> +"They are coming!" exclaimed Jack, hoarsely. "If I only had a weapon +of some kind I would show them the mettle of my arm." +</P> + +<P> +"Over the rail!" said Francisco, and he and Harrie shot down the line +at a furious rate. But before Ronie and Jack could follow they found +their retreat cut off, and themselves confronted by a dozen armed men, +with others coming swiftly toward the scene. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap06"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VI. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A SWIM FOR LIFE. +</H4> + +<P> +Thinking that his friends were close beside him, Harrie dropped into +the boat arranged for their flight. At the same moment Francisco +landed in the bow of the slight craft rocking at its moorings, while +flashes of light and wild orders of men under the stress of great +excitement came from the deck of the <I>Libertador</I>. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you all here?" asked the young Venezuelan, while he looked +hurriedly upward to the scene of excitement Over their heads, rather +than about him. +</P> + +<P> +"Jack and Ronie are not here!" replied Harrie. "Hark! That must be +them engaged in a hand-to-hand fight." +</P> + +<P> +"We must cut loose!" exclaimed Francisco, through his clinched teeth. +"Some of them are coming over the rail!" +</P> + +<P> +"Boat ahoy!" thundered a stentorian voice from the vessel. +</P> + +<P> +Francisco was in the act of cutting the boat adrift at that moment, and +before the sound of the speaker's voice had died away the fugitives +were several yards astern. +</P> + +<P> +"Ply the oars, for your life!" said Francisco. "Our lives depend on +our work for the next few minutes." +</P> + +<P> +Loath as he was to make this flight without his friends, it was really +all that Harrie could do, and he lent his arm to that of his companion, +and with each stroke of the oar they were taken farther and farther +from the scene of wild commotion reigning upon the deck of the outlawed +ship. +</P> + +<P> +"They are laying to," panted Francisco. "They have sighted us, and +boats will be lowered to give us pursuit. Ha! that shows they mean +business." +</P> + +<P> +A volley of firearms at that instant awoke the night scene, +illuminating the sea for a considerable distance. But the shots flew +wide of their mark, though the light from the guns had disclosed their +position, so the following volley whistled uncomfortably near. A +darkness deeper than ever succeeded the discharge of firearms, and +under this cover the fugitives managed to get beyond range before the +third volley could be sent after them. +</P> + +<P> +Harrie had improved the passing gleams to look for Ronie and Jack, but +he had failed to learn aught of their fates, and his heart was very +heavy, as he concluded that he alone had been permitted to escape. +Francisco was silently bending over his oar, sending the boat swiftly +through the water into the unknown dangers that must lie in their +pathway. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile, how has it fared with Jack and Ronie, who found their escape +cut off at the very moment they were about to follow their companions? +</P> + +<P> +"By the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please!" gritted the first, +seizing upon a stout lever that some one had dropped nearby, and which +promised to be a formidable club when wielded by his nervous arms, +"when ye keelhaul old Jack Greenland ye'll hear Gabriel's trumpet +sounding not far away!" +</P> + +<P> +Then, as the mob rushed forward, he sprang in front of Ronie, who had +suddenly found himself flung back from the ship's rail, to be sent +headlong to the deck, and swinging his primitive weapon over his head +he mowed down a semi-circle of the seamen as if he was cutting a swath +of grain. By that time Ronie, whose determined nature was aroused by +this rough treatment, was upon his feet, holding in his right hand a +serviceable small arm that he had been able to pick up. +</P> + +<P> +Shots were fired upon them by the crew of the <I>Libertador</I>, but, +fortunately, the assailants proved but poor marksmen. One burly +ruffian attempting to fell Ronie, the latter pointed at his body and +discharged his firearm. At least he cocked the weapon and pulled the +trigger, but it failed to respond. Realizing that it was empty, he +used it as a club, and a moment later had cleared his path of the big +seaman. At that moment Jack cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"Quick—into the sea!" +</P> + +<P> +An instant later their forms disappeared over the rail, and they shot +headforemost into the water. Almost simultaneously with their escape +the deck where they had just stood swarmed with the armed rabble. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie for a brief while lost consciousness, and then the voice of Jack +came faintly to his ears: +</P> + +<P> +"Where are you, lad?" +</P> + +<P> +"Here, Jack." +</P> + +<P> +"Good! I will be with you in a minute. Drop astern as fast as you +can." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was a good swimmer, and as soon as he had recovered from the +shock of his headlong leap from the vessel he gathered himself +together, and when Jack came alongside he felt equal to the task which +seemed to lie ahead. +</P> + +<P> +"Are you hurt, my lad?" asked Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"No, Jack." +</P> + +<P> +"Then keep beside me, and mind that you do not waste any of your +strength, for if we do not find Harrie and the boat it is likely to be +a long swim." +</P> + +<P> +"Where can he be? I believe they are lowering a boat from the ship." +</P> + +<P> +"Let them lower away, lad. It'll be a long chase before they overhaul +us. Let's keep a little more to the right, for the boat has in all +probability gone that way, if they got away. I am not sure they did, +but it looked like it." +</P> + +<P> +Then, the cries of the excited officers and crew of the <I>Libertador</I> +growing fainter, as they swam on and on, Ronie and Jack steadily forged +ahead, peering with anxious gaze into the gloom about them for a sight +of their friends. +</P> + +<P> +At the end of an hour the dark hulk of the <I>Libertador</I> had faded from +view, and no more did the shouts of the exasperated men on board reach +their ears, while they, feeling the fearful strain upon them, moved +slowly through the water, hope slowly dying out in their breasts. +</P> + +<P> +"We shall not find them!" declared Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"We must!" said Jack. "Let's shout to them again, now, together: +</P> + +<P> +"Boat a-h-o-y!" +</P> + +<P> +As they had done a dozen times before without receiving any welcoming +reply, they sent their united voices far out over the sea, shimmering +now in the starlight. Still no response—no sound to break the +dreadful silence of their watery surroundings. +</P> + +<P> +"My old arms are not quite tired out yet, lad; hold upon me." +</P> + +<P> +"No—no, Jack. I am young and strong. I can bear up a while longer. +If I only knew Harrie had escaped I should feel better." +</P> + +<P> +"We can only hope that they have, and fight for our lives a little +longer." +</P> + +<P> +Nothing more was said for some time, while they continued their battle +with the sea, each stroke of the arm leaving them a little weaker, +until it seemed to the castaways that they could not hold up much +longer. +</P> + +<P> +"The race is almost over, lad," said Jack, at last. "I feel worse for +you than for myself. You have been a true boy. It does not matter so +much with an old wornout veteran like me, but you are——" +</P> + +<P> +"Look, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, in the midst of his speech. "I believe +that is the boat!" +</P> + +<P> +His companion glanced in the direction pointed out by Ronie, and a glad +cry escaped his lips. +</P> + +<P> +"Boat, ahoy!" he cried. "Help! H-e-l-p!" +</P> + +<P> +Then they listened for a reply, fearing lest the other should fail to +catch their faint appeal, for both were so hoarse and exhausted that +their united voices could not reach far. +</P> + +<P> +"It is a sloop," declared Jack. "It is coming straight down upon us. +They cannot miss us—ay, they are veering away! They have not heard +us—they have not seen us—they are going to pass us. Once again, lad, +shout for your life. It is our only hope." +</P> + +<P> +Never did two poor mortals appeal with greater desperation for succor, +and a moment later a low cry of rejoicing left their sea-wet lips as +the reply rang over the water in a piercing tone: +</P> + +<P> +"Ahoy—there! Where away?" +</P> + +<P> +"Here—to your lee!" replied the castaways, and then, quite overcome, +they suddenly lost consciousness. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap07"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +TAKEN ASHORE. +</H4> + +<P> +Neither Jack or Ronie had a full realization of what followed. The +sound of a voice that seemed to be muffled rang dimly in their ears, +and soon after strong arms lifted them bodily from the water, to place +them in the bottom of a boat. Some one spoke in a language they could +not understand, when the boat started back to the larger craft awaiting +its return. By the time they had been taken upon the deck of this +strange sloop both had recovered sufficiently to understand their +situation. +</P> + +<P> +A motley-looking crew stood around them, but they did not give these +particular attention at the time, as one who was in command immediately +caught their notice. He was a stout-framed, bewhiskered man of middle +age, and in spite of his foreign dress, plainly an American. But he +seemed to be the only American on board the sloop. Prefacing his +question with an oath, he demanded: +</P> + +<P> +"Who are you, and where did you come from?" +</P> + +<P> +Understanding the suspicious character of the <I>Libertador</I>, Jack was +wise enough not to acknowledge that they had come from that vessel +until he should deem it good policy to do so. Accordingly he answered: +</P> + +<P> +"We are two castaways who fell overboard from a ship just out from +Maracaibo." +</P> + +<P> +"Pretty seamen!" declared the other, showing that he scouted the idea. +"Is it a trick of yours to fall overboard every time you step on deck?" +</P> + +<P> +"We were only passengers," replied Jack. "As you will see, like +yourself, we are Americans, who have come to this country with peaceful +intentions." +</P> + +<P> +"As if anybody was peaceful at such a time as this. What are your +names?" +</P> + +<P> +"Mine is Jack Greenland, and my friend's is Roland Rand," replied Jack, +respectfully. +</P> + +<P> +"Names are nothing," grunted the other. "You look like drowned rats. +If you will go below with one of the men he will see that you have a +change of clothing." +</P> + +<P> +"We do not care for that, sir, Captain——" +</P> + +<P> +"Captain Hawkins, sirrah. If you prefer wet duds to dry ones it is not +my fault. Shift for yourselves while I look after my men, who are as +lazy a lot of devils as ever swore in Spanish." +</P> + +<P> +Jack and Ronie were in a dilemma. While they hesitated about arousing +further the other regarding their identity, it seemed cowardly not to +say or do something for Harrie and Francisco, whom they believed afloat +in the boat, though not certain of this. Exchanging a few hurried +words, Jack then ventured to address the captain again, though he felt +he was treading upon dangerous ground. There was that air of mystery +about the sloop and those who manned her, which already created a +feeling in the breasts of our twain of doubt as to the honesty of the +craft. What was this single American doing in these waters with a +Venezuelan crew, not one of whom did they believe could speak a word of +English, and certainly not one of whom appeared as if he would shrink +from cutting a man's throat in case that person stood between him and +any purpose he may have had in view. +</P> + +<P> +"Captain Hawkins," said Jack, frankly and fearlessly, "we wish to ask +whither you are bound. We realize we are under great favor to you, but +we are very anxious to learn the fate of a couple of friends whom we +have reason to believe were adrift at the time we found ourselves in +the sea." +</P> + +<P> +"Humph!" grunted the captain. "I should like to know what you expect +of me. You may thank your stars that I am an American, as that fact +alone has spared your lives." +</P> + +<P> +"For which we are very grateful. But for the sake——" +</P> + +<P> +"If you haven't been on this craft long enough to know that I am her +master it's because you —— —— idiots, and fit food for the fishes +only. I will leave you at the first sod of earth that I see. Is that +enough?" +</P> + +<P> +It was a trying situation. It was evident that it would be worse than +useless to continue this subject under his present mood. +</P> + +<P> +"They are better off than we were," declared Jack, aside to Ronie. +"That is, if they really gained the boat." +</P> + +<P> +"I would give a good deal to know," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Captain Hawkins is tacking ship," declared Jack, a moment later. +</P> + +<P> +"What does that mean?" +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot tell, unless, by the great horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you +please! he means to keep his word, and run us ashore at the first point +of land to be reached." +</P> + +<P> +"That will take us away from Harrie," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Too true, lad; too true!" +</P> + +<P> +"Jack, what do you make of Captain Hawkins and his men?" +</P> + +<P> +"They are greater mysteries to me than the officers and crew of the +<I>Libertador</I>. I set them down at once as pirates, but these fellows +stump me out of my boots. All we can do is to watch and wait. They +have done us one good turn, anyway." +</P> + +<P> +Standing by the rail of this strange sloop, Jack and Ronie watched in +silence the scenes that followed. Dark clouds had again risen on the +sky, obscuring the stars in the west, while throwing a gloom over the +sea far and wide. Captain Hawkins paid no further attention to them, +but appeared oblivious of their presence. +</P> + +<P> +"Are all of the ships that ply in these waters like those we have +found?" asked Ronie, in a low tone. +</P> + +<P> +"Not all, lad," replied Jack; "but I fear by far too many have followed +in the wake of Sir Henry Morgan and his buccaneers. By my faith, lad, +we must be going over very nearly the same course pursued by that +infamous outlaw of the sea when he sailed with his expedition to sack +the coast of Venezuela in the last half of the seventeenth century. In +1668 he captured the important city of Puerto Bello, the booty obtained +amounting to over 250,000 pieces of eight, to say nothing of rich +merchandise and precious gems. Encouraged in his unholy warfare by +these ill-gotten gains, he rallied his lawless forces for another raid. +So, early in 1669, he sailed with fifteen vessels and 800 men in this +direction, making the rich city of Maracaibo his object. Again success +came to him, and at that city and Panama he reaped a greater harvest of +spoils than he had done at Puerto Bello. But this time Spain had got +wind of his intentions, and sent a mighty squadron to intercept and +capture him. At last it seemed as though the bold outlaw must yield, +but his daring stood him still in hand, and by a sudden and unexpected +swoop upon his unsuspecting foe he carried confusion and dismay into +their midst, burning several of their ships and actually routing the +fleet. There was still a blockading fort to pass, but throwing his +colors to the breeze, now bearing directly down upon the guns, and then +veering off, he succeeded in running the gantlet without the loss of a +vessel. +</P> + +<P> +"As may be imagined, Morgan was king of the buccaneers now. Did he +need more men he had but to say so, and they flocked to his standard by +scores. So a year later, in command of thirty-seven vessels and over +two thousand men, he started upon the most difficult and the most +audacious expedition ever planned by the wild outlaws of this coast. +The outcome was too horrible to contemplate. The Spaniards fought +well, for their all was at stake, but against the demoniac followers of +a man who knew neither mercy nor hesitation in carrying out his +infamous purposes. Panama was laid in ruins, and her unhappy +inhabitants were nearly all inhumanly butchered or spared to fates even +worse. Following this terrible expedition, the infamous leader was +knighted by an infamous king, and for a time it seemed as if his evil +deeds were to bear him only fruits of contented peacefulness. But it +was not long before his old spirit began to reassert itself, he fell +into trouble, was seized for some of his crimes, thrown into prison, +where his history ends in oblivion." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was about to speak, when the cry of "land—oh!" came from the +lookout, when their attention was quickly turned toward a dark line +that had seemed to come up on the distant horizon. +</P> + +<P> +"The sloop is about to lay to," declared Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"And it looks as if they were going to lower a boat," added Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"By the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please! that is what they are +doing. I wonder what is on hand now?" +</P> + +<P> +They were kept in suspense but a short time, when Captain Hawkins +approached them, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"Whatever else Jerome Hawkins may have to answer for, it cannot be said +that he ever failed to keep his word. You said you wanted to go to +Venezuela. Yonder lies its shore, and I bid you a hearty God-speed. +No thanks, sirrah," as Jack was about to speak, "you go your way and +I'll go mine." +</P> + +<P> +Without further words he turned upon his heel, and our twain had no +further opportunity to exchange speech with him. A moment later they +were ordered by gestures more forcible than speech to enter the boat, +and knowing they could do no better, they obeyed. A crew of four +accompanied them, and in a short time the keel of the boat grated upon +the sandy shore of a point of land jutting out into the sea. +</P> + +<P> +Understanding what was expected of them, and knowing it would avail +nothing to resist, Jack and Ronie sprang out upon the land. Without +even a parting gesture, the boatmen started upon their return to the +sloop, whose dark hull loomed up gloomily in the distance. So intense +was the feeling of the utter loneliness hanging over the hapless couple +that neither of them spoke until they had seen the boat reach the +strange sloop and the four seamen climb to the deck, when Jack said: +</P> + +<P> +"Well, my lad, we are in Venezuela at last." +</P> + +<P> +"But how different is our coming from what we had expected." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap08"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER VIII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +JAGUAR CLAWS. +</H4> + +<P> +Jack Greenland made no reply to the remark of Ronie. In fact, there +did not seem anything for him to say by way of answer. They saw that +the country which lay back of them appeared barren and desolate. A few +sickly shrubs pushed their crabbed heads above the sand dunes, but as +far as they could see in the night the country was nearly level, and +nothing more inviting than a sandy plain. The only cheerful sight that +greeted their gaze was the crimson streak marking the eastern horizon, +and which announced the breaking of a new day. +</P> + +<P> +"I would give a good deal to know where Harrie is at this moment," said +Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"We can only hope that he is able to look after himself," replied Jack. +"And we can only make the most of our situation. As for me, I feel +better on this sand bar than I have felt on board such ships as we have +known since leaving Colon." +</P> + +<P> +"If this is a sample of Venezuela," said Ronie, "I am heartily sick of +it already." +</P> + +<P> +"It is not. From what Captain Hawkins said, I judge we are on or near +the shore, where the narrow tongue of water connects Lake Maracaibo +with the sea. If this is the case we are twenty miles from the city. +The lake is about one hundred and twenty miles long and ninety miles +wide." +</P> + +<P> +"But there must be some town nearer than the city you mention," said +Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Quite likely. As we can do no good by remaining here we might as well +do a little prospecting. It may be well for us to move cautiously, as +it is uncertain how we shall be treated. It is unfortunate that our +letters of credit and other papers were lost with our chest." +</P> + +<P> +"And all of our instruments and charts. Truly, Jack, it would seem as +if we had been prompted to undertake this trip under the influence of +an unlucky star." +</P> + +<P> +Jack made no reply to this, but led the way from the shore, closely +followed by Ronie. It was getting light enough for them to move with +ease, as well as to get a good idea of their surroundings, which were +not very inviting so far. But in the distance could be seen the dim +outlines of the mountains and the borders of one of those luxuriant +forests for which South America is noted. +</P> + +<P> +Something like half a mile was passed in silence, when Jack paused, +saying: +</P> + +<P> +"If I am not mistaken, there is a small settlement off to our right. +Perhaps we had better get a little nearer, though I hardly believe it +will be good policy for us to be seen until we get a better +understanding of our situation. We certainly cannot boast of being +able to present a very attractive appearance," he added, ruefully, +while he looked over his companion and himself. +</P> + +<P> +In their bedraggled garments, not yet fully dry, it was small wonder if +they did present a decidedly disheveled appearance. +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we are liable to an attack from the inhabitants in case +we should be seen?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do not know what to think. If this rebellion is general then we are +in constant danger. I know of no better way than for us to push ahead +and find out." +</P> + +<P> +Suiting action to his words, Jack resumed the advance, with Ronie still +beside him. It was now rapidly growing lighter, which was a source of +satisfaction to them, as the cover of the growth they were entering +promised to prove as effective a shield as the darkness had been when +upon the sand plain. +</P> + +<P> +Contrary to the expectations of Jack, they had not found the settlement +looked for. In fact, as far as they could see, there were no signs of +habitation anywhere in that vicinity. Thus, as they advanced, a +feeling of loneliness came upon them that they could not throw off. +</P> + +<P> +"I would give a good sum, if I had it, just to hear some one speak," +declared Jack, thrusting his hands into his pockets, to pull them out +the next moment with a prolonged whistle, which caused Ronie to start +with fear at the unexpected sound. +</P> + +<P> +"What is it, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"By the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please! talk of being penniless +when one pulls out of his pockets a whole handful of Spanish coin." +</P> + +<P> +"It must be what you took in exchange at Colon," said Ronie, appearing +relieved to find that nothing worse than a happy discovery had for a +moment seemed to upset his companion. "I may have a little, too," +beginning to search his pockets. "If I have not got money, then I have +something here that may prove of use to us," producing a small pocket +compass. +</P> + +<P> +"Right, lad," said Jack. "Zounds! here's something that pleases me +quite as much as the Spanish silver pieces. Here is the old knife I +have carried with me on so many jaunts that it seems a part of myself. +It had slipped down between the lining and the outside cloth of my +jacket. In this jungle one feels better to have something with which +to defend himself, even if it is nothing more than a good, stout knife, +with a blade that has been tried and tested in some tough scrimmages. +I think more of the old knife than ever." +</P> + +<P> +The revival of Jack's usual good spirits served to encourage Ronie to +somewhat forget their perils and uncertainty. +</P> + +<P> +"Let's see," said Jack, dropping the coin back into his pocket, but +holding the knife firmly in his hand, "if I'm not mistaken, by going +due west we shall eventually reach the shore of Lake Maracaibo. We +shall not have much difficulty then in reaching the city, from which we +can go by rail to Caracas; if not all of the way, nearly so." +</P> + +<P> +"In that case the compass will come in handy," said Ronie, and having +selected their course, they now pushed forward with better courage than +at any period since they had come to land. +</P> + +<P> +It must have been half an hour later, and the sun was now sending its +bright bars of light down through the umbrageous branches of the forest +trees, one kind of which was laden with a profusion of bright and +beautiful flowers, making the largest and most magnificent bouquets of +floral offerings Ronie had ever seen, even in the Philippines, where +the vegetation abounds on the grandest scale, when they were attracted +by the sound of a human voice. +</P> + +<P> +"There we get what a few minutes ago I was willing to give a big silver +piece to hear," declared Jack. "By my faith, the fellow has lusty +lungs. He must be getting excited, too." +</P> + +<P> +"His tone shows he is in great fear," said Ronie. "Whoever he be, he +is in some great danger or critical situation." +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps we had better push ahead, so as to lend him a helping hand in +case he needs one." +</P> + +<P> +Quickening their pace they tore through the tropical vegetation, the +undergrowth of which stood high over their shoulders, in the direction +of the appeals for help. These grew rapidly louder and more fraught +with terror. +</P> + +<P> +"He is close at hand," panted Jack, and the next moment they came upon +a startling sight, which, for a brief while, held them spellbound. The +underbrush had here been beaten down, and bruised into fragments by the +furious trampling back and forth of a huge specimen of that king of the +South American forest, the jaguar. The cause of the anger of this +terrible brute, equal in size and ferocity to the tiger of the jungles +of Asia, was the sight of a human being—a man—suspended in midair, +almost over the head of the maddened creature. It was this person who +had given forth his frantic cries for help, and who, unconscious of the +arrival of strangers upon the scene, was continuing to utter his +piteous appeals. His situation was as singular as it was startling. +Somehow his feet had become caught in the topmost branches of a tall, +slender sapling, which, bowed by his weight, held him head downward in +the air, swaying to and fro like the pendulum of a clock. Fortunately, +the tree was too small for the jaguar to climb so as to reach him in +that way, while he hung just above the clutch of the brute as it sprang +upward time and again in its furious attempt to seize its prey. +</P> + +<P> +At that moment the infuriated creature was crouching to the earth +preparatory to making another vault into the air in order to pounce +upon its victim. Then the scent of newcomers reached its nostrils, and +its small, piercing eyes quickly became fixed upon its prey within +reach. The long tail lashed the air with renewed fury, the lissom form +hugged closer to the ground, as it made swift preparation to spring +upon the couple who had dared to enter its domain at this critical time. +</P> + +<P> +To Jack and Ronie it was a moment not to be forgotten. The first +clutched his knife savagely, but what could he hope to do against such +a foe with so simple a weapon? In the brief interval between the +discovery of the brute and its attack upon them, Ronie's gaze fell upon +a thrice-welcome sight. This was nothing less than a short, +serviceable-looking firearm, lying scarcely a yard distant from his +feet. It was doubtless the property of the man hanging from the +pendant tree, and who had somehow dropped it at the outset of his +meeting with the jaguar. +</P> + +<P> +He had no time to think of this, or even to question whether the gun +was loaded or empty before the dark form of the jaguar shot into the +air, and the maddened creature came like a cannon ball toward the twain. +</P> + +<P> +"Jump for your life!" cried Jack, and so closely followed the animal +upon his words that, as the couple separated, Ronie springing to the +right and he to the left, an outstretched paw of the creature brushed a +shoulder of each as it sped past them! +</P> + +<P> +The jaguar had not struck the ground a few feet away, flinging up a +cloud of dirt where he landed in a heap, before Ronie had seized the +firearm. It was the work of but another instant for him to cock the +gun and bring its stock to his shoulder. +</P> + +<P> +As quickly as this was done, the jaguar had as quickly recovered from +the effect of its disastrous jump, had wheeled about, and now crouched +for a second leap, his maddening rage increased twofold by his recent +failure. The muzzle of Ronie's firearm now caught its attention, and +our hero was now its object. +</P> + +<P> +So hurriedly had this all taken place that Ronie was still in ignorance +as to the condition of his weapon, and knowing that his life hung upon +the result, he took hasty aim and pulled the trigger. +</P> + +<P> +A quick, sharp report sent a thrill of joy through his frame, while it +was so swiftly followed by a cry of rage that the latter seemed an echo +of the first, and then the jaguar again sprang upward and forward, +fully ten feet into the air before it descended at Ronie's feet, +snarling, twisting, struggling, in an outbreak of fury frightful to +behold. +</P> + +<P> +Trembling lest his shot had only served to add to the volcano of +ferocity burning in the brute's form, Ronie would have failed to +retreat quickly enough to escape its claws had not Jack's ringing voice +warned him of his danger. The next moment his companion was beside him. +</P> + +<P> +"You fixed the creature," declared Jack, "but it dies hard. Give it +plenty of room, lad, we can afford to." +</P> + +<P> +Then, in silence they watched the dying struggles of the brute, as it +beat earth and space with its lacerated body, now groveling in the +dust, now bounding upward in blind endeavor to reach an enemy it could +not see, each moment growing weaker, until it lay at last quite still, +scarcely less terrible to look upon in death than it had been in life. +</P> + +<P> +"Your shot saved us," said Jack, frankly. "It was well done, lad, +exceedingly well done, and it alone has saved us from the claws of the +jaguar." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap09"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER IX. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +THE MYSTERY OF THE PHOTOGRAPH. +</H4> + +<P> +"It seemed as if I could not miss, Jack; but I do not care to go +through that ordeal again." +</P> + +<P> +"Nor I, Ronie. But now that we are safe, let's look after the chap +over our heads. It must be he needs our aid bad enough. I never saw +one in just such a predicament." +</P> + +<P> +The hapless man had ceased his outcries, and was trying to find out +what had taken place underneath him, and as to what bearing it would +have upon his fate. Seeing no other way to reach him, Ronie +immediately climbed the tree holding him. His weight, added to that of +the other's, caused the sapling to bend so that Jack was soon able to +reach the poor fellow by standing under him. +</P> + +<P> +"A little lower, lad, and I shall be able to get him. His feet are +caught in the tree's bootjack, but I—there! I have got him free and +clear. Look out that the tree doesn't hang you up." +</P> + +<P> +Jack quickly laid the man upon the ground, and began to straighten out +his limp limbs. +</P> + +<P> +"Has he fainted?" asked Ronie, quickly joining him by springing from +the tree to the earth, leaving the sapling to leap back into its normal +position with a force that cut the air like a lash. +</P> + +<P> +"He is overcome by his experience. But he'll soon come out all right, +as I do not see that he has been injured more than a few scratches. +Looks like a tolerable sort of a fellow for a South American. Got a +little of the native blood in him mixed up with the Spanish. He +belongs to the common class." +</P> + +<P> +The man was a person of middle age, of slight figure, but wiry build. +He presented a somewhat warlike nature by the armament he carried about +his body. This consisted of a pair of heavy pistols, a huge knife, and +inside his stout jacket a pair Of smaller pistols were to be seen. He +also had fastened about his waist by a belt a good stock of cartridges, +evidently for the firearm Ronie had picked up. Certainly it had not +been for a lack of means of defense that he had fared so roughly in his +meeting with the jaguar. +</P> + +<P> +It seemed like a long time to our friends before he opened his eyes and +revived enough to seek a sitting posture. Then he rubbed his head, +stared stupidly about, and tried to regain his feet, giving expression +to his surprise in Spanish. Both Jack and Ronie were able to converse +in that language, and Jack at once assured him of his safety at that +moment. +</P> + +<P> +He was profuse in his thanks, though somewhat reticent in regard to +himself. He had climbed a tree near the sapling, but somehow had lost +his footing and fallen into the topmost branches of the latter. +Lodging between the branches of this his weight had brought it and him +into the positions in which they had been found. The jaguar had come +along, and discovering him began at once its attempted attack. That +was what Jack and Ronie made out of his disjointed account. +</P> + +<P> +"I do not know what to make of him," said Jack, aside in English. "He +is either afraid of us, or he is a rogue. Probably both. I will see +if I can find out where we are." +</P> + +<P> +Then, addressing the Venezuelan, he said: +</P> + +<P> +"How far is it to the nearest town?" +</P> + +<P> +"You mean San Carlos, seņor?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>," replied Jack, at a hazard. +</P> + +<P> +"Have you friends at San Carlos?" asked the other, without answering +the question propounded him. +</P> + +<P> +"I hope so, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +This reply seemed to stagger him for a moment, but he managed to +recover in a moment, when he said: +</P> + +<P> +"How long have you been in this country, Seņor Americanos?" +</P> + +<P> +"Since sunrise," was the reply, which gave the other a second surprise. +</P> + +<P> +"I do not understand, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +Thinking nothing could be gained by withholding all of the truth from +him, Jack soon explained how they had been lost overboard from a vessel +in the gulf, picked up by another, and then left ashore among strangers +in a strange land. He did not consider it necessary or advisable to +enter into descriptions of the ships they had recently left. If his +account aroused at first some suspicion in the mind of the Venezuelan, +Jack's honesty of tone quickly dispelled this, and the other said: +</P> + +<P> +"You have been unfortunate, seņors. There are many ships upon the sea +at this time who do not care to pick up strangers. No doubt the craft +was one of Castro's spies. They are looking far and wide for the +<I>Libertador</I>, but they cannot find her," he concluded, showing evident +pleasure at the thought. Then he asked, as if a new thought had come +suddenly to him: +</P> + +<P> +"What do they say of us in the Great Republic?" +</P> + +<P> +"The sympathy of the United States is ever with the down-trodden," +replied Jack, cautiously. "But we are not able to say just how our +nation looks upon the revolution here, except that it will see fair +play, for you must remember it has been nearly a year since we left +home." +</P> + +<P> +The other showed his disappointment at this, but soon asked: +</P> + +<P> +"Have you friends in this country?" +</P> + +<P> +"If we were at Caracas we might find them." +</P> + +<P> +At this the man shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"It would be worth more than your lives to get to Caracas at this time. +The 'Sons of Liberty' are looking sharp after the dogs of Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"This man is one of the insurgents," was the thought which came +simultaneously to Jack and Ronie. Then the latter asked: +</P> + +<P> +"You said we were near to San Carlos. Is this town held by Castro or +by the followers of Matos?" +</P> + +<P> +"You prove yourself a stranger, seņor, by your words. San Carlos holds +the blackest spot on fair Venezuela, the dungeon that keeps in captive +chains the noble El Mocho." +</P> + +<P> +"You mean General Hernandez, seņor? I have heard of him. But I +thought he was once friendly to Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"So he was, seņor, until the tyrant abused the common people, then El +Mocho led his gallant followers against Castro, was betrayed by a +cowardly dog, and now he lies at San Carlos a captive." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you live near here?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor.</I>" Then he added, with a curve of his lips, which gave an +ugly-looking smile: "When I am at home. I was going hither when I met +with this little adventure, which would have ended the warfare of +Manuel Marlin for the freedom of poor Venezuela. If you will come with +me the hospitality of my humble home is at your disposal." +</P> + +<P> +"I do not think we can do any better than to go with him," said Jack, +aside to Ronie, "providing we keep our eyes and ears open." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was about to signify his assent, when an object nearly buried in +the crumpled foliage and torn up earth where the jaguar had made its +stand, caught his attention. It was about the size of an ordinary +postal card, and at first glance looked like a piece of cardboard. But +Ronie had discovered on the other side a portrait, which prompted him +to pick up the photograph, as it proved to be. +</P> + +<P> +It was crumpled and soiled, but hastily brushing as much of the dirt +from it as he could, he gazed earnestly at the sweet, womanly face +pictured before him. As he gazed the color left his countenance, his +hand shook so it threatened to drop the card, while he exclaimed in a +husky voice: +</P> + +<P> +"My mother!" +</P> + +<P> +Jack showed almost as much emotion as his young companion, as he +stepped quickly beside him, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"Your mother's photograph in this place? How can that be?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do not know, Jack. But it is surely hers. See! It was taken in +New York." +</P> + +<P> +"Doubtless Seņor Marlin can throw some light upon the matter," declared +Jack. "You picked it up almost under where he had been hanging. The +photograph fell from one of your pockets, Seņor Manuel?" asked Jack, +addressing the Venezuelan. +</P> + +<P> +The latter had retreated a few paces, and he showed considerable +agitation, while he shook his head, replying in a low tone: +</P> + +<P> +"If it was in my pocket, I did not know it, seņors. Some one else must +have dropped it here. It would not be strange, as there are many +scouts in the forests at this time." +</P> + +<P> +Both Jack and Ronie felt sure that the man was trying to deceive them, +but deemed it wise not to let him know it. +</P> + +<P> +"I mistrust the fellow," whispered Jack, aside. "We must keep a close +watch upon him. I do not think he understands English, so he does not +know what relation the portrait may bear to you. Let's feign +indifference in the matter, and keep with him." +</P> + +<P> +So Ronie placed the photograph in one of his pockets without further +remarks, though he found it difficult to conceal his emotions. While +he was doing this Jack signified to Manuel Marlin that they were +anxious to go to his home, or at least to be shown the way out of the +forest. Then, with rapid steps, the Venezuelan led the way out of the +jungle, not once looking back in his hasty advance. This gave our +friends opportunity to exchange thoughts, though they were careful not +to say enough to arouse the suspicions of their guide. +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot understand what it means," declared Ronie. "How could +mother's picture be brought here, and why?" +</P> + +<P> +As this was a question Jack could not answer, he merely shook his head, +adding: +</P> + +<P> +"This fellow, or some of his friends, may have been in New York, and +accidentally picked it up. In that case it would not indicate any +cause for worriment." +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot help feeling, Jack, that there is some other explanation. I +cannot help thinking that in some way it portends trouble to mother. +It can do no harm to question this fellow more closely in regard to the +matter." +</P> + +<P> +"We will take our chances on that score, though I believe he is a +thoroughbred liar." +</P> + +<P> +Then they did question this man as closely as they thought prudent, but +without gleaning a single ray of light upon the subject. In fact, he +persisted in maintaining an absolute ignorance in regard to it. So +finally Ronie was compelled to drop the subject, while he tried in vain +to find some plausible explanation of the mystery. +</P> + +<P> +Manuel Marlin showed that he was glad of the sight ahead, when at last +they reached the edge of the forest, and found themselves looking at +the rim of sandy sea-coast, with the glimmer of water in the distance. +The day was very calm, and the bay stretched as smoothly as if formed +of plate glass, while overhead the sky had that peculiar flat +appearance so common in the tropics. +</P> + +<P> +"Does seņors see that dismal building on yonder point of land?" asked +their guide, and, without waiting for their reply, went on: "It is the +fort of San Carlos, where the 'El Mocho' is chained like a dog!" +</P> + +<P> +"Look yonder!" exclaimed Ronie, "there is a train of men going thither +now." +</P> + +<P> +"Looks to me as if they were conducting prisoners to the penitentiary," +said Jack. "If my old eyes do not deceive me one of them is an +American." +</P> + +<P> +"I am sure you are right, Jack. Let's get a little nearer, so we can +see as they pass along." +</P> + +<P> +Their guide showed some hesitation in doing this, though he led the way +somewhat circuitously forward, so as to gain a view of the soldiery +train without being seen themselves, saying as he did so: +</P> + +<P> +"This is more of the dirty work of Castro's dogs of war." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap10"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER X. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +"WE HAVE BEEN BETRAYED!" +</H4> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack paid but little heed to the words of their companion, as +their attention was already fixed upon the file of men moving with +martial steps toward the gloomy structure, whose walls had echoed to so +many cries of distress from its heart-broken captives. Even now this +squad was taking thither two prisoners, as Jack had said, and one of +these had awakened an exciting interest. He was surely an American, +and in the distance there seemed something familiar about him, which +caused them to hold their breath while they watched and waited. Then +the truth of their convictions finally overpowered their doubts, and +Ronie exclaimed under his breath: +</P> + +<P> +"It is Harrie, Jack!" +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad; and Francisco is with him." +</P> + +<P> +"What does it mean, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"One thing certain, lad; they have escaped the sea. It is better than +becoming victims to that." +</P> + +<P> +"I agree with you, Jack. Now that we have found them it will be our +duty to rescue them. Perhaps Manuel here can give us some light on the +subject." +</P> + +<P> +The train had by this time passed beyond them, and not thinking it wise +to follow, our friends turned to their companion for such information +as he might be able to give. Upon learning that the prisoners were +friends of theirs, Manuel suddenly became very friendly. +</P> + +<P> +"So you belong to the Sons of Liberty!" he exclaimed. "Yonder +penitentiary is where Castro imprisons some of his most important +captives. But it won't be so for long. The mountain Indian[<A NAME="chap10fn1text"></A><A HREF="#chap10fn1">1</A>] cannot +long hold his own against the noble Matos, who belongs to the Guzman +Blanco family. Seņors shall soon see their comrades free." +</P> + +<P> +While this thought tickled the vanity of the Venezuelan to a high +degree, it did not afford any satisfaction to Jack and Ronie, the last +saying: +</P> + +<P> +"We must act promptly in their behalf. Have you any plan to suggest, +Manuel?" +</P> + +<P> +"Only this, seņor. I know of one who lives in San Carlos, who makes it +his business to keep posted on what is going on. I will see him at +once, and no doubt he will be able to give us information that will be +of assistance." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack gladly agreed to this, and while Manuel was seeing his +friend it was thought best for them to remain at his home. This proved +to be less than a mile away, so it was only about an hour later that +the Venezuelan started upon his errand, leaving our twain anxiously +awaiting his return. Since he had learned that they had friends in the +hands of his enemies, he had grown very friendly. They had not thought +it best to say anything to create a feeling of distrust, but Ronie +freely confessed to Jack, as soon as they were alone: +</P> + +<P> +"I want to know what Harrie's imprisonment means before I decide to +which side I belong." +</P> + +<P> +"It is generally prudent to take the side of the government," replied +Jack. "I can easily understand how an insurgent like Manuel can come +to hate the name of Castro, and call him a savage from the mountains. +Mountaineers sometimes are men who accomplish much, and President +Castro seems to be one of them. I remember a few years ago, about +eight, when I was in this country, he suddenly appeared from obscurity +to lead a body of men against President Crespo in the interest of +President Andrade. He soon proved that he was made of good metal, for +he usually led his followers to victory. The Crespo party being +successful, the president offered Castro a position in his cabinet if +he would desist from further opposition. Possibly the daring +mountaineer foresaw greater possibilities, for he declined the honor. +Then, when President Crespo named General Andrade as his successor, +Castro appeared on the Colombian frontier with the nucleus of a +revolutionary army. From the very outset success perched upon his +banner, and after overcoming the government troops wherever he met +them, taking city after city, all the time receiving reinforcements to +his army, he laid siege to the capital. President Andrade fled at this +point of the war, and General Castro was declared ruler of the +republic. Our country a few months later was the first, I think, to +recognize him as ruler. I do not think he has been elected president +by vote of the people.[<A NAME="chap10fn2text"></A><A HREF="#chap10fn2">2</A>] Be that as it may, his dash and courage, +with considerable military ability, has endeared him to a large number +of the people. General Matos and his followers, on the other hand, +claim that he has been corrupt in his management of the country's +affairs, as well as dictatorial beyond the bounds of endurance." +</P> + +<P> +From a discussion of the affairs of the country, they began to seek +some solution to the mystery of the photograph found in such a strange +way, Ronie firm in his belief that his mother was in dire distress at +that very moment. +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot help thinking that for some reason she is in this country, +Jack, and in trouble." +</P> + +<P> +"Tut—tut, lad! that cannot be. The mere fact that her picture has in +some way found its way to this place does not prove that she is nearby, +too. No doubt, as soon as we reach Colonel Marchand we shall get good +news from her. She may have sent her photograph by him to you, and +some of the rebels have stolen it." +</P> + +<P> +"Forgive me, Jack. Of course that may have been the case. Now you +speak of it, it is really the most likely solution to the mystery. By +that I am led to believe that you think Colonel Marchand has joined +President Castro's party." +</P> + +<P> +"He would be likely to do it. In fact, it would be good policy for him +to do so, as it would be necessary for him to be on good footing with +the government in order to carry out the business venture which has +drawn us all to this country." +</P> + +<P> +"I agree with you, Jack. I feel better, too, in regard to mother. Now +if we can rescue Harry safely it will bring great relief. I wish +Manuel would come with some word of him." +</P> + +<P> +"Do not get impatient, lad. It is likely to take the fellow some time +to get his information, even if he gets any. I do not have great faith +in the rascal, and if we were not in his own house, I should not expect +to see him back." +</P> + +<P> +If Jack counseled patience in waiting for the insurgent's return, he +quite forgot his advice before Manuel Marlin put in an appearance, and +with good reasons, for it was well into the following night before he +came. He seemed then greatly excited, and told his story in a +disjointed way. +</P> + +<P> +"Seņors' friends came ashore in a boat from the <I>Libertador</I>," he +declared, in what seemed an exultant tone. "Then Castro's spies +captured them and threw them into prison. But seņors need not fear, +for the Sons of Liberty will soon free them. Even now Matos is hewing +his way toward the capital. Many recruits are being added to his army, +and never did the prospects of down-trodden Venezuela look brighter." +</P> + +<P> +"So our friends are held as prisoners of war?" asked Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"As spies under Matos," replied Manuel. "Perhaps I should add, seņors, +that Francisco de Caprian has been recognized as an old offender +against Castro. But they cannot hold him any more than they can hold +long El Mocho." +</P> + +<P> +If this information did not disturb the spirits of Manuel Marlin, it +did awaken considerable uneasiness on the part of Ronie and Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps, if we should see the authorities at San Carlos they might set +Harrie, at least, free," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +Manuel shook his head. +</P> + +<P> +"No power below Castro's can free them until Matos enters San Carlos." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was about to reply, when a commotion outside of the dwelling +arrested their attention, and before they were able to understand what +it meant, the wife of the Venezuelan hurriedly entered the apartment, +exclaiming: +</P> + +<P> +"Fly, for your life, Manuel! The yard is full of soldiers searching +for the Gringos!" +</P> + +<P> +Even Ronie knew this last word was a term applied by the Spanish races +to Americans, and that he and Jack were the objects sought for by the +newcomers. +</P> + +<P> +Manuel Marlin quickly anticipated the truth, and he cried out in alarm: +</P> + +<P> +"We have been betrayed! Some one has carried the news of your coming +to El Capitan. Quick! flee from here, if you value your lives and +mine." +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="footnote"> +<A NAME="chap10fn1"></A> +[<A HREF="#chap10fn1text">1</A>] President Castro was horn of humble parentage, his parents being of +mixed blood, mostly Indian, in the mountainous district of Western +Venezuela. Thus the revolutionists were wont to paint him as an +untamable savage, who had come to the surface in the turbulent broil of +the uprisings of the times and had hewn and burned his way to the +presidency. Manuel Matos was of superior birth, and was related by +marriage to the Guzman Blanco family. He had had some military +experience under President Blanco, but was more of a civic leader. He +claimed that the Castro administration was corrupt.—AUTHOR. +</P> + +<P CLASS="footnote"> +<A NAME="chap10fn2"></A> +[<A HREF="#chap10fn2text">2</A>] Singularly enough, General Castro was elected President for a term +of six years on February 20, 1902, within a few days of this +talk.—AUTHOR. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap11"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XI. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A PERILOUS FLIGHT. +</H4> + +<P> +Renewed outcries now came from outside the building, and it seemed +evident that the mob was about to enter the place. Certainly it would +unless something could be done to evade such a movement. Jack +Greenland was the first to speak: +</P> + +<P> +"Can't you or the woman parley with them long enough for us to slip +away by the rear of the building, Manuel?" +</P> + +<P> +"Me—parley? They would string me up like a dog. Curses upon their +pig heads!" +</P> + +<P> +By this time his wife had become calmer than he, and she showed that if +he was lacking in courage to meet the enemy, she was not. So she +immediately offered to keep the crowd at bay long enough for them to +effect their escape, her husband showing great eagerness to profit by +her heroism. Accordingly, she returned to the front part of the +dwelling without loss of time, and a moment later Ronie heard her +challenging the leader of the would-be captors. +</P> + +<P> +"While it may not be good policy for us to use them too freely, it may +not be amiss for us to provide ourselves with firearms," said Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"Si, seņors," replied Manuel, quickly darting away from them, but +returning in an incredibly short time with a couple of short, but +serviceable weapons, one of which he handed to each of his companions. +</P> + +<P> +"Follow me, seņors. They are getting impatient, and Dolores will not +be able to hold them back long. I think we had better cross the bay to +the other shore. I have a boat." +</P> + +<P> +As Ronie and Jack had no better plan to offer, they followed the +speaker in silence. He led the way to the rear of his humble dwelling, +where they paused to listen for sounds of their enemies. These came +from the front, and judging that the soldiers had not yet surrounded +the place they plunged boldly into the midst of the dense tropical +plants which reached above their heads, Manuel still leading the way. +But they had not gone far before he suddenly stopped, and motioned for +his companions to do the same. +</P> + +<P> +As the three fugitives thus abruptly paused they heard the sound of +footsteps, which rapidly became plainer. There were evidently several +persons approaching at a headlong rate, and knowing only enemies were +likely to be in that vicinity, they dropped swiftly and silently to the +earth, the broad leaves of the thrifty plants about them affording +shields for their bodies. +</P> + +<P> +A minute later, half a dozen men burst through the rank vegetation +within a yard of where they were lying! Jack and Ronie, believing they +were going to be discovered, thought hastily of flight in another +direction, but the party quickly swept past and disappeared in the +distance below them. As soon as they felt it was prudent they resumed +their flight, having no further cause for alarm until they came in +sight of the narrow body of water ahead. Between the growth and this +was a broad belt of sand, where not a shrub found sustenance. The +clear, starlit night made this space almost as bright as by day. +</P> + +<P> +"Hark!" panted Manuel Marlin, "they are coming! They have scented us +like bloodhounds. Our only hope is in reaching the boat. It is just +above that highest sand bar. Run for your lives, seņors!" +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack now heard plainly the sounds of their enemies +approaching from their rear, and the exciting words of their companion +were not needed to urge them ahead. With light, swift steps they +bounded forward across the open country. When about halfway to the +shore a volley of bullets was sent after them, and then their pursuers +burst out from the growth into sight. +</P> + +<P> +The aim of the pursuing crowd must have been poor, for their shots +failed to strike any of the fugitives, who were urged on to greater +effort, if that were possible. Jack, glancing back, saw the party +following at a furious pace upon their heels, and instinctively glanced +toward the water. It was nearer to the boat than back to their +pursuers, and he felt confident they would be able to reach the little +craft in season. Ronie was slightly ahead, while Manuel was as far +behind, unable to make as good speed as the young American engineer. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't leave me!" sputtered the latter, and as if he were going to make +this a necessity he stumbled over a sand knoll, to measure his length +on the ground. His companions, not hearing him fall upon the soft +earth, and being ahead, were not aware of his mishap until prolonged +yells from their pursuers and piteous cries from him, caused both to +look backward. +</P> + +<P> +The ring of triumph in the tones of the soldiers in the distance told +plainly that they anticipated a certain capture of at least one of the +fugitives, but Manuel rallied quickly, and was again upon his feet. +</P> + +<P> +"Keep on for the boat!" cried Jack, who felt that it would be fatal for +them to stop now. So they sped ahead, with Manuel sprinting his best +to overtake them, and the armed posse behind madly pursuing. +</P> + +<P> +They were soon close down to the boat, drawn up on the white sand, out +of the reach of the water, and then Ronie and Jack, panting for breath, +stopped beside it. +</P> + +<P> +"Quick! push it out into the water," said Jack, seizing upon the +gunwale and giving the object a furious shove toward the tide. Ronie +had already caught upon the boat, and together they sent it forward +more than its length in the twinkling of an eye. But the short delay +enabled Manuel to overtake them, so, as the boat floated on the water, +he sprang into the stern. There were a pair of oars in the bottom, and +Jack and Ronie each took one of these, to begin to send the light craft +flying across the narrow bay, while the Venezuelan steered for the +opposite shore. +</P> + +<P> +Renewed cries from their pursuers reached their ears in the midst of +this flight, and another volley of shot followed them. But the latter +proved as ineffectual as the first, and glancing back a few minutes +later, Manuel gave expression to a chuckle of delight, while he said: +</P> + +<P> +"We've outstripped them, seņors. There is not another boat they can +get in season to follow us before we reach the land." +</P> + +<P> +Nothing further was said until the keel of the boat grated on the sand, +when Ronie and Jack jumped out upon the land, closely followed by +Manuel. The shadowy forms of their enemies could be discerned upon the +other side of the water, but feeling comparatively safe from them, our +twain turned to their guide for such suggestion as he might have to +offer. It was a beautiful tropical night, the full, round moon of the +South, now fairly above the horizon, was gliding over a sky of +cloudless blue, having already driven the stars into the background of +space, so that only Venus, the zone of Orion and the brilliant radii of +the Southern Cross were visible. +</P> + +<P> +Away from their feet stretched the silvery mirror of the sea, marking +the meridian of the moon. So calm and silent lay the deep water that a +satellite sky seemed carved from its azure depths. Upon the other +hand, the country, growing more and more broken in the distance, lay +clothed in its tropic verdure as silent and mysterious as the Blue +Water Empire. The beauty of nature, however, had no attraction for +Manuel Marlin, who felt that his life was at stake, and only swift +flight could save him. +</P> + +<P> +"A friend of mine, living a short distance from here, has a couple of +horses you can get," he said. "I shall not need one," he added, seeing +their looks of inquiry, "as I shall not go very far. I have friends +who will afford me protection until this shall blow over." +</P> + +<P> +Then he led the way up from the shore and along a path at times nearly +choked with the overhanging growth, until they finally reached the home +of a planter. After considerable trouble Manuel succeeded in rousing +the owner, who did not appear in very good humor at being thus +disturbed. But as soon as he understood the errand of his untimely +caller he became more genial. Would he let the Americanos have horses +to carry important news to the revolutionists near Caracas? Most +assuredly he would for so important a purpose! It will be noticed that +Manuel did not try to stick very near to the truth in the matter, and +neither of our friends felt like correcting him under the circumstances. +</P> + +<P> +Finally the planter ordered out a couple of peons, who soon brought +forward a pair of small, but hardy ponies, which their owner declared +were good for all that might be required of them. Leaving Manuel to +arrange for the loan of them in such a manner as he thought best, Ronie +and Jack sprang into the saddles and prepared to start upon their long +and hazardous journey. +</P> + +<P> +"Keep your eyes open for our friends, Manuel," were the parting words +of Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Trust me for that, seņor, and may you live to come back with the +welcome word that Caracas is once more safe from the spoils of the +mercenary knaves that flock to the mountain savage." +</P> + +<P> +Murmuring an unintelligible reply to this, the couple then urged their +ponies forward, and a moment later were starting side by side upon the +first stage of a ride through a country overrun with hostile armies and +dangers which they had not stopped to contemplate. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap12"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A LONELY RIDE. +</H4> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack were crossing the vast plain which extends westward and +southward along the shore of Lake Maracaibo, upon the border of which +stands that beautiful city by the same name, and which is the capital +of the State of Zulia. The climate of this region is warm, but cooled +by the lake breezes, as well as by the breath of old ocean, it becomes +very enjoyable. Thus they rode on under conditions that must have been +pleasant had it not been for the shadows of war which overhung every +step of their journey. +</P> + +<P> +The road, if the trampled path at places overgrown with rank +vegetation, and at others smooth and bare as an open floor, deserved +the dignity of the name, soon after leaving the sand belt of the coast, +wound across broad fields of sugar cane, indigo and tobacco, or through +great plantations given over to the cultivation of cacao trees, which +yield those luscious beans that have been described as affording food +for gods. These trees to flourish well have to be protected by some +taller species of tree, and for this purpose the tall, over-arching +<I>Erithynas</I> is raised, giving the scene the appearance at a distance of +being a huge forest, rather than a cultivated field. +</P> + +<P> +Frequently the progress of our heroes was checked, if not quite +stopped, by growths of weeds which had sprung up on deserted +plantations. In Venezuela land is so cheap that it is more +advantageous to abandon a tract of land when it becomes worn out by +cultivation, and clear a new territory, than it is to reclaim the old. +The latter thus soon becomes a forest of weeds, which, insignificant at +first, soon develop into trees with branches, so that by the second +season these overtop the head of a man on horseback. These huge +tree-weeds afford support for dense masses of creepers, among which +Ronie noticed the convolvulus, begonias and passion flowers. These at +places hung their flowering heads so as to form graceful festoons, or +anon lifted them proudly to the breeze, forming picturesque bowers and +floral archways. +</P> + +<P> +If displaying beauty and magnificence in their bountiful offerings, +these jungles were anything but pleasant paths to follow, and it +required skillful management on the part of the rider to save himself +from being pulled from his seat, or escape that fate he might expect at +the hands of the hangman. The native riders show wonderful ability to +run these gantlets, which the newcomer must naturally lack. Now +hanging by one leg down the side of his horse, or stretching himself +along its back, he would escape the blows a novice would be sure to +receive while continuing his flight with speed scarcely abated. +</P> + +<P> +By and by, however, Ronie and Jack came out into a more thickly +populated country. The sun was beginning to crimson the eastern +horizon with its early beams, and the two drew rein for a short +consultation. +</P> + +<P> +"I am afraid we have kept too far to our right," said Jack. "Manuel +spoke of leaving the mountains over our shoulder, and we seem to be +approaching them." +</P> + +<P> +"If the country is becoming more broken, it has the appearance of being +more thickly populated. Do you think, Jack, we need to stand in much +fear of the insurgents in this vicinity?" +</P> + +<P> +"Manuel spoke of a victory for his side recently at Barquisimete, and +if I am not mistaken, we shall pass near that city—certainly near +enough to be within range of the revolutionists. In fact, I feel +pretty sure that the revolution is mainly centered in this part of the +republic." +</P> + +<P> +"I almost wish we had taken the route to Valencia." +</P> + +<P> +"No doubt, whichever we had taken we should wish we had taken the other +before we reached our destination. But that is not the right way to +look at it. We must put on a bold front and push ahead." +</P> + +<P> +"In order to do that we must see that our horses have sufficient food +to enable them to keep moving, even if we go hungry ourselves." +</P> + +<P> +"Right, my lad, and if there is an inn in yonder village I suggest we +stop there long enough to allow them rest and feed." +</P> + +<P> +"I agree to that. Shall you claim to be a revolutionist or a follower +of Castro?" +</P> + +<P> +"At present that must depend on circumstances. Ha! as I thought, we +are approaching a coffee planter's little republic, with the liberty of +his followers left out. Look beyond that ridge, and in the valley +formed by the twin ranges of foothills you will see a typical peasant +settlement, which certainly denotes that not far ahead we shall come +upon some wealthy planter. These peons of Venezuela are to all intents +and conditions slaves, resulting from the debts, it may be, contracted +by their remote ancestors, as generation after generation have been +doomed to work to satisfy the laws and customs of a country which never +outlaws its debts, when those debts have been contracted by a weaker +party. The consequence is that the poor of these South American States +are destined to remain poor until some radical change has been made in +this direction. It is true, Venezuela is not as bad off in this +respect as some of the other republics, but it is bad enough here. Ay, +in South America the word 'republic' loses the significance of liberty +that it bears in other lands. It is natural a people condemned to +lifelong poverty, for no fault of their own in most cases, should be +ever ready to listen to the call to arms as a summons to a holiday. So +you see it is easy to raise an army of this sort, and it is small +wonder Venezuela has been bothered with so many outbreaks against its +peace and progress. But here we are close upon the spacious abode of +the coffee planter, who is the principal man of this vicinity, unless +there happens to be another of his class." +</P> + +<P> +After having seen the pyramidal structures of the peasants or peons, +with roofs slanting to within a few feet of the ground, and thatched +with palm leaves, the collection looking like a colony of beehives, +Ronie was somewhat surprised to find now a dwelling that closely +resembled the houses of his native land. It was, in fact, a fine +residence, standing back several rods from the road, and reached by a +broad avenue running under rows of stately trees resembling the +American elms. He was to learn that these were known here as the +<I>Alcornoque</I>, lifting as graceful heads, and as tall, tapering trunks +as their northern cousins. Everything about this home of the coffee +planter denoted wealth and comfort, in marked contrast to the humble +huts scarcely beyond the vision, and of a style of architecture +peculiar to the country. +</P> + +<P> +"Whoever lives here must be a man of importance," remarked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"True, lad, and being such a rich man, we are running little risk in +assuming him to be a follower of Castro at this time. The cultivation +of coffee is, in fact, a more certain way of earning a competence, and +it may be, something above a living, than any other calling in +Venezuela. For this reason nearly all others have been neglected. +Sugar cane can be raised profitably, but that requires more capital to +start with, and more manual labor to carry it on. To cultivate sugar +successfully one must fertilize it, so to speak, with gold. But any +man, if he is poor, can have a coffee estate if he has courage to work +and wait for a short season. The day his bushes yield their first red +berries he finds something coming into his pockets. The berries are +worth as high as thirty dollars a hundred pounds, and cost less than +one-third to raise. So you see a poor man, who may have hired the use +of a piece of land, which he pays for on long instalments, may plant a +coffee farm with the aid of his family, living on products that mature +earlier on the same land, until at the end of three years he gathers +his first crop of berries, followed by a full crop the next year. We +shall doubtless meet with more of these small coffee plantations after +this. If I mistake not, here comes the planter himself. Let us risk +it in claiming to be friendly to the government." +</P> + +<P> +Their approach had evidently attracted the owner of the estate, for +Ronie had already seen a small, wiry-framed man, of a very dark +complexion and dashing dress, coming, toward them. He now stopped to +allow them to come forward, saying in a tone of apparent friendliness: +</P> + +<P> +"Good-morning, seņors," somewhat to their surprise speaking in their +language. +</P> + +<P> +"Good-morning," replied both in unison. +</P> + +<P> +"You must have taken an early start, seņors." +</P> + +<P> +"It is because our journey is a long one, seņor," replied Jack, who +acted as spokesman. "Our horses are tired, and we would bespeak for +them food and rest at your hospitality." +</P> + +<P> +"Dismount, gentlemen. My men will look after them, while I entertain +you." +</P> + +<P> +While Jack and Ronie did as they were told, a couple of peons appeared +on the scene, to lead the tired animals away, as the hospitable planter +requested his visitors to follow him to his favorite morning retreat +under one of the beautiful shade trees standing in his yard within +sight of his house. If he had shown a friendly spirit in his tone so +far, his next words, as the three sank upon the rustic benches +encircling the tree, showed that he was not free from concern in regard +to the character of his early callers: +</P> + +<P> +"You say your journey is a long one, sirs; no man travels a long +journey without an urgent purpose. Especially is this true on an +occasion like this." +</P> + +<P> +Jack, who could see no good likely to result from appearing mysterious, +replied frankly and promptly: +</P> + +<P> +"We are bound for Caracas, though it may not be well for every idle ear +to catch the word." +</P> + +<P> +"Right, sir. Who would you see in Caracas?" +</P> + +<P> +"President Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"Then your journey will be in vain, for the President is unavoidably +kept away from the capital. You might have traveled much quicker by +rail." +</P> + +<P> +"Possibly. But as you say the President is not in Caracas, that would +not have helped us. Can you tell if Minister Bowen is at the capital?" +</P> + +<P> +"If he is, he would hardly be accessible at this time. Come, +strangers, throw off your cloak of reticence and let us be frank with +each other. My name is José Pelado, and having lived several years in +your country, I am free to confess I have imbibed some of your Yankee +spirit." +</P> + +<P> +Our Americans immediately gave their names, adding that it was to +obtain assistance in securing the freedom of a companion that they were +on their way to the capital. +</P> + +<P> +"I expected something of this kind. It is fortunate that you have come +thus far without molestation, and I will assure you you cannot go as +far on your next stage without falling into the hands of the guerilla +hordes that infest the jungles. But, pardon me for keeping you from +the rest and food that you must need. Partake of such refreshments as +I can offer you, then we will discuss the situation." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack were not loathe to do this, though while they ate, their +host related to them much they had not known of the situation in the +country. He showed that he was not only an educated man, but that he +was well posted upon affairs, while he was very pronounced in his +admiration for Castro. +</P> + +<P> +"Venezuela has had revolutions and shades of revolutions, but not one +more unwarranted than this. Castro is a patriot, and the uprising that +he led a few years since, and which placed him at the head of the +government, is no more to be compared to this than the snarling of a +cowardly cur seeking to rob a bigger dog of his breakfast because he is +too lazy to hunt for his own, is to the good, honest bark of a mastiff +that seeks to defend his master's property. Andrade's administration, +following Crespo's, was grossly dishonest, and would have drained the +republic of its healthy interest, had it not been for the mountain +patriot, Castro, who fought his way straight from the Venezuelan +frontier, a good thousand miles, to Caracas, the capital. In a +twinkling Andrade went out and Castro went in. He lost no time in +setting about to clear up the clouded system of government. It +required a masterly hand to guide the current of affairs. He soon +found it difficult to know whom to trust. +</P> + +<P> +"Among those who had rebelled with apparent honesty against Crespo and +then his successor, Andrade, was the hunchback warrior, Manuel +Hernandez, called by friends and foes alike as 'El Mocho.' His forces +were scattered about in this region, he having rallied them by +inflammable speeches against Andrade, whom he declared had been +selected by fraud. Finally two thousand men, under the command of a +relative of Crespo, met his band of scarcely five hundred near +Valencia. In this unequal fight Crespo was killed and his men utterly +routed by the hunchback, who instantly sprang into wild favor. His +little army was swiftly increased by recruits. The people in general +rejoiced at the fate of Crespo, who had made himself obnoxious to many. +But the military prestige of Hernandez suffered an early frost. +Andrade sent his minister of war to treat with him, and in the next +battle he was defeated, his troops utterly routed, and he himself put +into prison. +</P> + +<P> +"Then Castro's triumph completely changed this. Andrade fled, and many +of the followers of El Mocho joined the new ruler, who soon freed +Hernandez, and offered him a place in his cabinet. Hernandez accepted, +though it proved that he had not stifled his ambition to become +president. He improved his new opportunity to inflate some of Castro's +followers with his wild dreams. He believed he had had the experience +now to enable him to overthrow the ruling power, so he stole out of the +capital between two days, leading a small army at his heels. +</P> + +<P> +"El Mocho made a desperate fight for his cause, but he misjudged the +ability of his rival. Castro did not worry over his escapades, but +when the favorable opportunity came he caught the hunchback rebel and +returned him to the prison where he is likely to remain for a goodly +time. Castro is the last man to be baffled where so much is at stake. +What can be on foot now?" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap13"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +IN THE ENEMY'S COUNTRY. +</H4> + +<P> +The last words of José Pelado were called forth by the sudden +appearance of a peon with the announcement that a body of insurgents +had been seen the night before, and that a flock of cattle had been +killed or driven away by them. Upon receiving this intelligence, the +coffee planter replied in Spanish in a tone that showed great anger. +When he had conversed with the messenger for a few minutes he turned +back to his guests, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"The hungry hounds are again abroad. That mountain outlaw, Juan +Rhoades, is at his old pranks, and this time he has become bolder than +common from the fact that he has succeeded in calling about him more +than five hundred rebels. News also comes from San Carlos that two +spies are in this vicinity, and that efforts are being made to hunt +them down. Well, let the fools look after themselves. Rhoades had +better give me a wide berth." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack were beginning to think it was about time for them to be +on their way. Their horses were well rested by this time, so they +proposed to Seņor Pelado that they bid him good-by. He seemed +disappointed to find they were not going to stay longer, and showed his +good-will by offering to send an escort of men to protect them in case +they should be attacked by Rhoades and his outlaws. But our heroes +stoutly opposed this, while thanking him for his kindness. +</P> + +<P> +"Two will be able to get through where a larger body might attract +attention and find it difficult to escape," replied Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"You seem like plucky fellows, and I think you will get through all +right. In case you do need help, do not hesitate to call on José +Pelado. If you succeed in meeting General Castro give him my regards." +</P> + +<P> +These parting words were not spoken until Ronie and Jack had regained +their saddles, and were heading their horses toward Caracas. As they +dashed out upon the road they noticed a crowd of peons watching them +with looks not altogether friendly. +</P> + +<P> +"Did you notice that tall fellow—the one with the extraordinary +mustache—who stood somewhat in the background while we talked with +Pelado?" asked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"That I did, lad, and I says to myself: 'That fellow is hatching +mischief.' He was not in sight the last part of our stay." +</P> + +<P> +"I did not see him, Jack. What do you think he will do—follow us?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not exactly; but if we do not meet some of his confederates before +night I shall be happily disappointed. At any rate, it behooves us to +be on the lookout continually." +</P> + +<P> +The way now wound through a coffee country, and they were frequently +met by these small planters, sometimes singly, but more often by twos +or in squads. +</P> + +<P> +"The idleness that usually follows in the footsteps of war seems lo +have fallen on the inhabitants," remarked Jack. +</P> + +<P> +As this did not seem to call for any reply, Ronie remained silent, his +mind busy with the thoughts of past adventures and conjectures over the +possibilities ahead. So the midday was passed, and the afternoon came +on apace, while they moved leisurely on so as not to exhaust their +horses. These were given their noon meal, and allowed two hours of +rest under the friendly shade of a tacamahaca, which was fragrant with +the resinous substance that it exuded from its trunk, an opaque, +lemon-colored sort of wax which the natives on the Orinoco used very +much for torchlights. This was a tree of great size and beauty. They +were now in a region broken by the outlying spurs of mountain, and +about sunset reached a mountain hamlet which bore a decidedly deserted +appearance. +</P> + +<P> +It had been their intention to push on beyond this place, preferring to +pass the night at some isolated planter's than here, but Ronie's horse, +which had showed slight lameness for several hours, now became unable +to go any farther. In this dilemma they looked about for a stopping +place. In this matter they soon found they were not to be given much +choice. The dwellings were so nearly alike, and built after the +pyramidal style of architecture already described, slanting roofs +reaching nearly to the ground, thatched with palm leaves, four posts +with ox hides stretched between composed the walls, so the collection +looked like a colony of beehives. Unfortunately, they were soon to +learn that it was not "a land of milk and honey." The houses possessed +no doors and windows, professedly for the reason that they were not +needed in that climate. Neither were they needed to protect the +occupant from prowling thieves, for the very simple reason that the +owner owned nothing worth stealing! +</P> + +<P> +After passing nearly the length of this poverty-marked hamlet, our +heroes hailed with delight the appearance of a building which looked +like a palace when compared to the others. It did prove to be a sort +of public house, or, rather, a hospital where people seeking the +bracing atmosphere of this mountain retreat and the mineral water to be +found here could stop. The lower half of the walls were made of stout +planks in the rough, with doors and windows. The upper portion was +left open to allow free passage of air and light. Ample protection +from sun and storm was afforded by the slanting roof, which reached to +within five feet of the ground. Under these overhanging eaves a narrow +veranda encircled the building. +</P> + +<P> +Half a dozen swarthy-hued men in loose attire, a pair of breeches, +tightly buttoned at the knees, and a shirt of bright colors, marked off +like a checkerboard, lounged about the abode, but not one of them +offered them any attention, except to stare upon them with undisguised +curiosity, as our twain paused in front of the main entrance. Upon +dismounting and entering the building, they were greeted by the +proprietor with many smiles and much scraping and bowing. +</P> + +<P> +"Seņor, Americanos have heard of the wonderful curative powers of the +waters of San Andrea, and have come hither to recover their wasted +vitality?" he half questioned, half answered, bowing at almost each +word which he delivered in a musical tone. +</P> + +<P> +"Partly for that, and partly for pleasure," replied Jack. "Our horses +are tired, and one of them is lame. We ourselves are weary and dust +laden, and so desire rest and quiet more than we do food." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņors</I>," waving one hand to a group of peons, who instantly left +the apartment, ostensibly to look after the jaded animals, and the +other toward an opening leading into an adjoining room. Thinking it +was meant for them to repair thither, Jack and Ronie did so at once. +It must have been dark in the room at midday; it was certainly now too +dusky for them to distinguish each other with clearness. Seeing two or +three clumsy, cedar chairs, covered with rawhide, standing near the +wall, they each selected a seat, while they glanced about them with +feelings hard to describe. If the place boasted as the resort for +invalids and pleasure seekers, it had very little to offer in the way +of the comforts of either. It was in truth scarcely better fitted to +accommodate its guests than the tent of the wandering Arab of the +desert. In addition to the rude chairs mentioned, there was a rough +table placed against the wall, evidently because it could not stand +alone, and a couple of grass hammocks that were intended for the double +purpose of bed and lounge. Nothing in the shape of a bowl in which to +lave their dust-stained faces and hands was to be seen, while they were +to learn a little later that water was too scarce at this resort of +mineral springs to show any need of it. +</P> + +<P> +"Well," said Jack, in a low tone, "this beats anything we have found +before. But if they will give our poor horses care we can get along +ourselves." +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose we had better give them our personal attention," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"In due course of time, lad. I wish now we had kept nearer the +seacoast, but I will not borrow trouble. Who is coming now?" +</P> + +<P> +The visitor proved to be an attendant of the house, who wished to +inquire in regard to the wants of their "illustrious guests." +</P> + +<P> +"We need nothing more at present," replied Jack, "than a couple of +basins of cool water in which to lave these bodies and limbs of ours." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņors</I>; your slightest wish is law at San Andrea," and, bowing +very low, the speaker withdrew, and our friends were left alone for +more than half an hour, when the man returned bearing in either hand a +small calabash filled with water that was too thick with mud to spill +over. These rude dishes possibly contained a quart of the dirty liquid +each. Depositing these vessels on the table, the servant expressed the +wish that they might enjoy a "very excellent bath." +</P> + +<P> +"No doubt we shall," declared Jack. "Did you have to bring this far?" +</P> + +<P> +"From the river, seņor; two kilometers away." +</P> + +<P> +"Horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please, we'll excuse you for the time +it took you. But haven't you water nearer than a mile?" +</P> + +<P> +"A little, seņor. Supper will be ready when you have washed." +</P> + +<P> +After supper they went to examine their-horses, to find that Ronie's +did not show much improvement. One of the peons, however, had +interested himself so far as to bandage the limb in some black +decoction that he claimed was good for a sprain, which was evidently +the trouble with the creature. This man became very friendly upon +finding that his efforts were so well appreciated, and he began to talk +glibly of other matters, saying, among other things: +</P> + +<P> +"You come from Maracaibo, I think, seņors. Did you see anything of +Captain Rhoades and his bold riders?" +</P> + +<P> +"We heard of him," replied Jack. "We have been looking for them. Are +you expecting them this way?" +</P> + +<P> +"No one can tell where El Capitan will strike next, seņor. He is very +brave, and he moves about as if he and his men had wings." +</P> + +<P> +"Is it possible that Castro's hirelings have penetrated into this +region?" asked Jack, as a feeler. +</P> + +<P> +"Possible it may be, but not probable. He has been whipped on every +hand, and I have no doubt General Matos will ride into Caracas its +conquerer before we are much older." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>," replied Jack, who, finding that nothing more was likely +to be learned, led the way back into the house. A few men were +standing about in the reception-room, but everything seemed very quiet, +giving little indication of the storm so soon to rise. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack lay down upon their hammocks without delay, believing it +would be good policy to rest while they; might, knowing not what an +hour might bring forth. They had slept about three hours, when they +were awakened by a commotion in the adjoining apartment, supplemented +by loud voices. In a moment they were sitting bolt upright, listening +to catch what was being said. The tones were loud enough for them to +do this, but the speakers, all of whom were talking in Spanish, spoke +in such excitement and disjointed manner that it was some time before +even Jack could understand sufficient to explain the situation. +</P> + +<P> +"I think it is a band of the mountain guerrillas," he whispered to +Ronie, as they moved close together. "It may be Rhoades' band, I +cannot say. Ha! they are speaking of a couple of Americanos coming +this way. Now the proprietor is telling them there are two stranger +Americanos in here. Lad, they mean us! It looks so we have got to get +out or fall into their hands." +</P> + +<P> +Before his companion could reply an ugly-looking visage appeared above +the edge of the woodwork forming the walls of the building, and which, +as has been said, were built only half the height of the structure. +Then it became evident from the sounds that the body of soldiers in the +adjoining room were about to enter their quarters! +</P> + +<P> +"We are in for it now!" said Jack. "We might as well make a bold dash +for liberty. The time for palavering is past." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap14"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIV. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +INDIAN WARFARE. +</H4> + +<P> +Ronie realized that it was a critical moment for them. While it was +too dark in the room to see anything plainly, the dark visages above +the walls were silhouetted against the background of the night with +vivid clearness. They proved beyond a doubt that the building was +surrounded by the armed men. All this flashed through his mind very +quickly, for they lost no time in attempting to make their escape. +</P> + +<P> +"Follow me," whispered Jack, leading the way to the rear wall. Then, +notwithstanding the presence of the enemies without, he caught upon the +top of the wall, and, springing into the air, cleared the obstruction +with an agility some young athletes might have envied. Nor was Ronie a +bit behind him. Seizing firmly on the wall, the young engineer bounded +upward, and, turning a complete somersault, landed on his feet a couple +of yards beyond the other side of the wall. +</P> + +<P> +Jack struck within half a dozen feet of him, outside of the cordon of +watchers surrounding the building. At the same moment an outburst of +cries from inside the building told that the mob within had entered the +room our twain had just left so unceremoniously. Without stopping to +hear more, they darted into the thicket of bushes bordering the +clearing about the dwelling. +</P> + +<P> +They were barely in time to escape a volley of bullets sent after them +by the insurgents, who had rallied with celerity and prepared to start +in pursuit, giving expression to loud yells of mingled surprise and +consternation at the bold act just performed. These cries served to +tell the fugitives of their situation without doing any material harm. +At any rate, Ronie and Jack found themselves several rods from the +building before their enemies mustered for pursuit. But at the very +outset it promised to be a stern chase. +</P> + +<P> +Unacquainted with the grounds as they were, Ronie and Jack had to be +constantly on the watch against running into some of the impassable +thickets that grew in every direction. The woods seemed to be full of +the insurgents, for go whither they would they soon found their further +flight cut off in that course by a body of the armed outlaws lying in +wait for them, or crossing their path like so many hounds running down +a brace of foxes. They could still hear the outcries and excitement +prevailing at the building they had left. +</P> + +<P> +"Hist!" exclaimed Jack, suddenly grasping Ronie by the arm. "I hear +them coming from the right and left. Down upon your hands and knees, +lad. We must crawl for it." +</P> + +<P> +It was evident the enemies were too numerous for them to risk a +hand-to-hand struggle, so the fugitives dropped close to the earth and +began a tedious advance through the matted bushes which formed a sort +of hedge between the parties of insurgents. Jack was slightly ahead, +but Ronie kept as near to him as possible. In this way they advanced +for three or four yards. It was quite dark in the growth, but they +could discern the forms of the natives plain enough to see that a dozen +or more were within a few paces of them. Then Jack paused, signaling +to Ronie to do the same by a gentle grip upon his wrist. +</P> + +<P> +It had become very still in the jungle-like forest, and Ronie was +wondering what this movement of his companion meant, when a sharp +scream pierced the night air. It was a woman's voice, freighted with +great fear and suffering. +</P> + +<P> +"We are not the only ones in trouble," whispered Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"What does it mean? Hark, Jack! she is pleading for her liberty. +There is a man's voice, and he, too, is begging for some one to spare +his life. Is there nothing we can do for them?" +</P> + +<P> +"It looks as if we had about all we could look after to save our own +lives, lad. But, as long as it is in our way let's creep a little +nearer the place." +</P> + +<P> +The insurgents, having apparently moved farther to their right, they +cautiously advanced, being careful not to disturb a bush or make any +noise. They advanced in this way for a few rods, when they found +themselves on the margin of a sunken swamp, dense with a growth of +vines and bushes enveloped in moss and lichens. Finding this +impenetrable, they crawled along its border, though forced to steer +more to their right than they thought prudent. It was evidently this +impassable jungle which had changed the course of the insurgents. +</P> + +<P> +They must have advanced a hundred rods without finding any end to the +swamp, when the sound of voices now became distinctly heard, though +they were not raised above an ordinary tone. It was the same woman +speaking they had heard before, while her accents were scarcely less +intense. She was saying, in Spanish: +</P> + +<P> +"Have mercy, seņors! I have never wronged you nor the poor country you +profess to be fighting for. My poor husband died in her defense, and I +am willing to give my life in her cause, but do not torture me." +</P> + +<P> +"Tell us where he is and we will spare you," replied a masculine voice, +pitched in a high key. +</P> + +<P> +"Alas! I do not know. I would that I did, seņors. But if I did you +cannot think me cowardly enough to betray him, not at the price of my +poor life. God forbid that I should for a moment have such a thought +or that you should so far misjudge me in my weakness. He is all there +is left me—if he yet lives, which I am not certain—my noble son, the +noblest of the De Caprians." +</P> + +<P> +At the mention of that name Ronie and Jack instantly remembered the +brave young exile then with Harrie in prison at San Carlos, and, as may +be imagined, listened with excitement hard to suppress for the next +words, which were hissed rather than spoken by the man who held her a +prisoner: +</P> + +<P> +"You lie!" and the concealed listeners fancied they could see him lift +his armed hand over her head, as if he would kill her then and there. +Her reply was spoken with the calmness born of despair: +</P> + +<P> +"Think as you will, seņor; I have spoken the truth. Had I a dozen +lives depending on my answer, it would be the same. Kill me if you +wish. I can die without a regret, knowing that Francisco is not here +to witness my death or suffer at your hands, El Capitan." +</P> + +<P> +"She is Francisco's mother," whispered Ronie, anxiously. +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad; and he is Rhoades, the insurgent leader." +</P> + +<P> +"Must we let him butcher her in cold blood and remain inactive?" asked +Ronie, whose hot nature was aroused by this unwarranted treatment of a +helpless captive. +</P> + +<P> +"Hist!" warned Jack. "We are watched by an enemy in yon coppice." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie saw nothing in the direction indicated by his companion, but +under the circumstances he felt certain he was right, and he grasped +his firearm more firmly, feeling that it would not be long before he +would be obliged to use it. The voices of the speakers ahead had +become silent, so that not a sound broke the stillness of the scene. +</P> + +<P> +"What can we do, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"I have been thinking lad, that it may be well for us to do a little +scouting, in order to get a better idea of the situation. That fellow +in the thicket has got to be disposed of before we can do much else. +If you will lie here and not let any of them spring a surprise on you, +I will see what I can do in the way of Indian warfare. I do not +believe I have lost the little cunning I picked up in fighting the +Igorrotos of Luzon." +</P> + +<P> +Without waiting for Ronie's reply, Jack began to creep to their rear, +moving so silently that our hero was not aware of his retreat until he +had fairly left his side. The voice of the insurgent chief again fell +on his ear, followed by the reply of the woman, which was spoken too +low for him to distinguish. Jack had now disappeared, and he knew he +was alone in the midst of enemies. +</P> + +<P> +Five minutes dragged themselves slowly away without bringing any +material change in the situation. Ronie had not discovered any sign of +Jack, but twice he had seen a man's head thrust cautiously above the +matted undergrowth where he knew one of their enemies lurked. +Evidently the scout, for such he judged him to be, was getting uneasy +and anxious to end the suspense. During the time he had heard a small +body of horsemen ride up to where the insurgent leader and his prisoner +were stopping. +</P> + +<P> +"Jack told me at the end of five minutes to lift my cap on the muzzle +above the rim of bushes," he mused. "The time must be up now. I think +I will try it." +</P> + +<P> +Then Ronie removed the covering on his head, and, placing it on the end +of his rifle barrel, gently raised the weapon as he had been told, in +doubt as to what the result would be. He had barely accomplished the +simple feat before the sharp report of a firearm rang out, and a bullet +sped just over him with a hearty zip! The cap dropped by his side, and +when he came to pick it up he found that it had a hole through its +crown where the bullet had gone. Most assuredly the insurgent was a +good marksman, and he shuddered to think what his own fate would have +been had he carelessly exposed himself. +</P> + +<P> +The shot of the sharpshooter brought an exclamation from the lips of +the chief, but beyond that Ronie heard nothing to explain to him what +was succeeding. He fancied at first he heard the man starting toward +him, but he was not quite sure of it. He was becoming alarmed in +regard to Jack. Where could he be all this time? Had he fallen into +some trap and become a prisoner? In the midst of these reflections he +suddenly became aware of the presence of some one near him, and he was +about to act in his defense when the familiar voice of Jack caused him +to stop. +</P> + +<P> +"Easy, lad! It's all right with him yonder. Your ruse worked to +perfection and just in the nick of time. I managed to handle him +without making a disturbance. His shot has not seemed to arouse them, +and it is time for us to act. The road is not far away, and the +insurgents seemed to have halted near the outlet of this swamp. I +judge they are waiting for some of their force to join them. Besides +the woman, they have one or two other captives, which I judge they are +taking to headquarters. If you feel like looking at them, follow me. +We might as well go that way as any other, for the woods are full of +the cusses behind us. Somehow, they run an idea we have taken to the +mountains, which is natural, I suppose." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was nothing loath to move, as he had begun to tire of this +inactivity, so he kept close behind Jack, who began to worm his way +along the margin of the lowlands, until, after several minutes of this +tedious advance, Jack paused. +</P> + +<P> +"If I am not mistaken, we are within gunshot of these brown-skinned +rebels," he whispered. "But there is no doubt but they are on the +lookout for us, and we must move with great caution. Let's make +another hitch." +</P> + +<P> +Once more they went forward, keeping close to the earth, and under the +cover of the overhanging tropical vegetation, being careful how they +disturbed each bush, and with their eyes constantly trying to pierce +the gloom around them. So, like woodsmen following some Indian trail +in the days of the pioneers, they wormed their way along, Jack ever and +anon lifting his head slightly so as to get a wider view of his +surroundings, but always careful not to expose any part of his figure. +</P> + +<P> +Finally he paused again, Ronie quickly imitating his example, while he +listened for the explanation he knew his companion was ready to make. +Though slightly behind him, he had discovered the shadowy outlines of +several horsemen drawn up in a semi-circle. +</P> + +<P> +"We have reached the road," said Jack, softly. "Can you see the +horsemen just to our right, where the way curves slightly?" +</P> + +<P> +"Yes," replied Ronie, in the same cautious tone. +</P> + +<P> +"And the woman? She is a little beyond the main body, on the gray +horse." +</P> + +<P> +"I see her, now that you have called my attention to her. I should +know her by her skirts." +</P> + +<P> +"Right, lad. The brook is just below. The crafty dogs are still +harkening and waiting. But they will not wait much longer. Hark! a +body of horsemen are coming up the road at this moment! It is probably +these they are waiting for." +</P> + +<P> +"What do you propose to do, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"Get a little nearer, lad." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you think we can save her?" +</P> + +<P> +"We will try, but it can be done only at great risk and under cover of +the excitement of the meeting of these squads. Come on, lad, every +moment is precious to us." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap15"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XV. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A FRIENDLY VOICE. +</H4> + +<P> +In the work that followed, Jack Greenland showed that he was no novice +in woodcraft, but it would take more space than I can give to it to +describe minutely the details of what I shall only attempt to outline. +It would not do for them to leave the thick fringe of bushes +overhanging the road, and yet, in order to accomplish his purpose, it +was necessary for them to shorten the space between them and the rebel +riders under "El Capitan," as the mountain insurgent was called. To do +this more safely, Jack retreated about a yard, and then crept forward +in the same direction of the road. In spite of his extreme caution, +Ronie heard a stick snap under his knee, when his heart came into his +mouth. Fortunately, one of the horses stamped its foot at this moment, +and thus the fainter sound was drowned by the heavier. Then the harsh +voice of the insurgent was heard to exclaim: +</P> + +<P> +"Fire on the head of the laggard! I cannot wait here any longer. +Forward, men! on to the mansion, which shall be the cage for our bird." +</P> + +<P> +Without further delay the body of half a dozen riders struck their +impatient steeds smartly with their spurs, and would have swiftly +disappeared from the scene, but for an accident to the foremost. His +animal, thus suddenly aroused, reared into the air and then plunged +forward, but, either stepping into a hole or stumbling, it staggered +ahead, coming nearly upon its knees. Its rider was flung headlong into +the bushes within a hand's reach of our amateur scouts! +</P> + +<P> +This mishap plunged the rest of the riders into confusion, nearly +unseating Rhoades himself, but who rallied with a horrible imprecation +upon the head of his unfortunate follower. With rare presence of mind +the woman on the gray horse wheeled her spirited animal quickly around +to make a bold dash for freedom. There were horsemen behind her, but +that was her only way of escape, if she could hope to get away at all. +In a moment the entire scene had become one of wildest excitement, and +above the clatter of hoofs and the cries of his men, rang the voice of +the leader, as he swung his own horse around, calling upon his +panic-stricken followers: +</P> + +<P> +"Don't let her escape! Shoot her if must be, but stop her!" +</P> + +<P> +The mountain outlaw was about to carry out his own order, when he +received a terrific blow from Jack Greenland, which tumbled him from +his seat to the ground. Jack and Ronie had been quick to perceive that +in this exciting tableau lay their chance of action. +</P> + +<P> +"Mount the free horse and ride down the road for your life!" said Jack. +"A bold dash will carry us through." +</P> + +<P> +Then he sprang forward to capture the horse ridden by the insurgent +chief, knowing that, could he be successful in this, it would throw the +squad into confusion. Without a leader they were not likely to make a +very effective pursuit. I have described the result of his swift and +daring onset. And, as Rhoades, stunned by the blow, sank helpless to +the earth, the fearless American seized the bridle rein of the +frightened horse before it could clear itself from the hand of its +former master. Almost simultaneously with this action Jack would have +been in the saddle, but for the fact that the right foot of the +insurgent had caught in the stirrup. This caused a brief delay, but, +wrenching the offending limb aside, the captor vaulted into the seat +just as two or three shots whistled through the air at random from the +discomfited insurgents, who were at a loss to account for just what was +being enacted in their midst. One of these bullets cut away a lock of +his silvered hair, but, unminding his narrow escape, he turned the +horse sharply about, crying to the woman, who had succeeded in heading +her steed down the road: +</P> + +<P> +"Ride for your life. It is your only hope." +</P> + +<P> +She had already reached the outside circle of the little group, and her +horse, a spirited one, cleared the last of the dismayed riders, to bear +her down the way at a terrific pace, her long, black hair streaming in +the wind as she sped on. Once a white face was turned backward for a +moment, and then she disappeared from sight. +</P> + +<P> +Meanwhile Ronie was having an experience equally as exciting and even +more dangerous to his life and liberty. He had succeeded in catching +upon the bridle of the horse that had thrown its rider, and he gained +the saddle an instant later, while the terrified animal reared and +plunged furiously. But the young engineer had secured a firm hold on +the reins, and was likely to obtain quick control over the creature, +when he found stout hands laid on the bridle with a power which threw +the struggling brute back upon its haunches. +</P> + +<P> +The attack of the insurgents, three in number, was so sudden and +powerful that Ronie's escape seemed impossible. +</P> + +<P> +"Shoot the dog!" cried one of the insurgents. +</P> + +<P> +"Don't let him get away!" exclaimed the chief, who had rallied by this +time sufficient to realize something of the situation. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie knew he could expect no assistance from Jack, who was having all +he could attend to, and he resolved to make a desperate attempt to get +away. Accordingly, he whipped out the stout knife which had been given +him by Manuel Marlin, and as the shots of his enemies sped past his +head, he cut the reins upon which the insurgents were clinging, when +the men, suddenly losing their hold, staggered forward, leaving the +animal freed from their clutches. +</P> + +<P> +Finding itself thus relieved of the weight dragging it down, the horse +flung up its head, gave vent to a wild snort, and bounded madly over +their writhing forms, to rush like a whirlwind down the road, scarcely +a head behind Jack, mounted on the chief's fleet-footed steed. Though +nearly unseated by this abrupt onset, Ronie held fast to his position, +while he was borne on at a rate of speed which fairly took away his +breath. Even Jack, going at his terrific pace, was passed, and then +the woman on the stout gray was outdistanced. Without check or +guidance to its headlong flight, Ronie soon found that his horse was +running away! +</P> + +<P> +The cries and the rifle shots of his enemies were soon lost in the +distance, but the young engineer had barely recovered his equilibrium, +so to speak, when he became conscious of the approach of a body of +horsemen from ahead. Naturally expecting only enemies, he began to +wonder how he was to come out of this new danger. The sounds of the +approaching horses told that this party were coming at a gait almost as +swift as that by which he was carried along. Thus he was not given +sufficient time in which to prepare for the meeting, if any preparation +could be made by him in his plight, before he found himself carried +into the very midst of a squad of a dozen horsemen, sweeping toward him +at a breakneck pace. Wild shouts rang in his ears, but if efforts were +made to stop him he was not aware of it. In some manner, never quite +plain to him, he was carried through the party of riders, brushing +against them on the right and left, but clearing them in an incredible +space of time, to be still carried on with unabated speed. +</P> + +<P> +So far Ronie had not gathered his scattered faculties enough to act, +but now, remembering that the bridle was still left on the head of the +horse he bestrode, he leaned forward and grasped the side straps close +down to the bit. Perhaps the animal had begun to tire of its wild race. +</P> + +<P> +At any rate, it quickly yielded to the strong hands wrenching at its +mouth, and began to slacken its speed. +</P> + +<P> +All this really took place in less time than it has taken to describe +it, even in outline, and the excitement and confusion of the surprised +riders in his rear were yet ringing in his ears, when Ronie, for the +second time, became aware of the approach of horsemen. But before he +could obtain control of his own horse, or anticipate who might now be +in his pathway, a stentorian voice thundered in English: +</P> + +<P> +"Halt! Who comes here?" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap16"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVI. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +COLONEL MARCHAND. +</H4> + +<P> +It was fortunate for Ronie Rand that he had succeeded in getting +control of the horse he rode, or his experiences in Venezuela would +have terminated in a tragic manner. With the thrilling command of the +leader of this body of horsemen, the firearms of his soldiers leaped to +their shoulders, and in another moment a volley of bullets would have +stopped the advance of our hero. Seeing only the inevitable to be met, +he cried out: +</P> + +<P> +"I am an American! I surrender if need be." +</P> + +<P> +"Hold, men!" called out the officer. "He is a lone American. He +cannot belong to the gang we are running down. Who are you, sir?" +</P> + +<P> +"My name is Roland Rand, sir, and I have only recently reached this +country. With a friend I am on my way to Caracas, and just escaped +from the rebels under El Capitan." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie had answered thus boldly and openly, for he was certain the body +of soldiers in front of him were not a part of the insurgents he had +just escaped by so narrow a margin. By this time the sound of other +horses approaching came from near at hand, and the officer ordered his +men to be in readiness to meet them. Believing them to be Jack and the +captive woman, he wheeled smartly about, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"I believe they are friends of mine. Hold up, Jack!" he cried, as the +latter, with the woman riding abreast of him, came into sight. "I +believe these are friends." +</P> + +<P> +"Halt! Who comes here?" demanded the officer. +</P> + +<P> +"Friends," replied Jack, suddenly checking his headlong flight, while +the woman followed his example. Then, before anything further could be +said or done, the officer did a most unexpected thing. Urging his +horse close beside Ronie, he cried: +</P> + +<P> +"Roland Rand! Is it possible I find you here?" +</P> + +<P> +Ronie, at first thinking the other meant to do him harm, shrank back, +but he quickly rallied at the familiar tone of the speaker. Then, with +a wild feeling of joy, he looked more closely upon him, to exclaim the +next moment: +</P> + +<P> +"Colonel Marchand!" +</P> + +<P> +"At your service, Mr. Rand, but I am puzzled to know how it is I meet +you here, where I least expected to find you." +</P> + +<P> +"It is a very long story to tell, Colonel Marchand, and I will gladly +explain it all to you at the first opportunity. This is my friend, +Jack Greenland," signifying that individual, who had not yet recovered +from the surprise he had experienced. +</P> + +<P> +"Glad to meet you, too, Mr. Greenland. But where is Harrie, Ronie? Is +he coming behind you?" +</P> + +<P> +"He is in prison at San Carlos, colonel. Jack and I were on our way to +Caracas to find relief for him." +</P> + +<P> +"What is he in prison for? The penitentiary is mainly filled with +rebels now." +</P> + +<P> +"That is the charge against him. He was taken under suspicious +circumstances, but I can vouch for his honor." +</P> + +<P> +"Then you are not rebels, Ronie?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, sir—that is, we have not committed ourselves as being against the +government." +</P> + +<P> +"Good! You evidently carry a level head. I am at the head of a +regiment fighting for President Castro. We were in hot pursuit of a +body of the insurgents whom we routed in a fight below here. But who +is this woman with you?" +</P> + +<P> +"She is a captive in the hands of Rhoades' guerrillas. I do not know +her name. Perhaps she will give it herself. We were trying to strike +a blow in her behalf." +</P> + +<P> +The strange woman, thus appealed to, said, in that musical voice so +common to the better class of Venezuelans: +</P> + +<P> +"You are very kind, seņors. I do not know that you would care to hear +my name, for it has too often been a bone of contention in this unhappy +land. My husband was Francisco de Caprian. I am not ashamed to say +that." +</P> + +<P> +Colonel Marchand uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, though Ronie +Rand was expecting this reply, he could not wholly conceal his emotion +at the mention of that name which he had learned to both fear and +respect. He could not refrain from saying: +</P> + +<P> +"You are Francisco's mother?" +</P> + +<P> +"You know my son!" she cried somewhat wildly. +</P> + +<P> +"We met him on the <I>Libertador</I>, seņora. He is now in prison at San +Carlos with our friend." +</P> + +<P> +"Then he lives! They told me he was dead. Oh, my son! When shall I +meet him again?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do not understand this," declared Colonel Marchand, brusquely. "You +talk of the <I>Libertador</I>, the outlawed scourge of the coast, of the De +Caprians, every one of whom is denounced as spies, and of loyalty to +Castro, the patriot president, all in the same breath." +</P> + +<P> +"I will explain fully if I am given the opportunity," replied Ronie, +stoutly. +</P> + +<P> +"Pardon me, Ronie," Colonel Marchand hastened to say. "I do not doubt +you, but this is no time for explanations here. We have dallied too +long already, if we would catch our birds. Go to the rear, you three, +under an escort to protect you. Mind you, Lieutenant Garcia, the woman +remains with you until I return. We will make short work of the +mountain rebels." +</P> + +<P> +Upon finishing his brusque orders, Colonel Marchand wheeled smartly +about and dashed up the road, followed by his troops, numbering half a +hundred or more, Lieutenant Garcia and three privates remaining to look +after the two Americans and Seņora de Caprian. The lieutenant showed +by his reluctance to move on his duty that he was not well pleased with +the plan, and he was heard to exclaim under his breath that it was a +shame to be cheated of the sport at this juncture. However, he soon +recovered his good nature, and, requesting his companions to follow, +rode sharply in an opposite direction to that just taken by his +superior officer. +</P> + +<P> +About two miles below they came upon a small town, where Lieutenant +Garcia ordered a halt until he should receive further orders from +Colonel Marchand, or meet him in person. This place, which had been +the scene of a stirring skirmish a few days before, was now in the +hands of the government troops, which the latter did not hesitate to +display in their actions. Though Seņora de Caprian was treated with +extreme courtesy, Ronie and Jack did not fail to observe that a strict +watch was kept over her, and the room assigned her at the house where +the little party made its headquarters had a guard stationed outside +the door. Of course, our heroes were allowed their liberty, but they +were only too glad to improve the interval of waiting for the +reappearance of Colonel Marchand by throwing themselves down upon the +floor and seeking sleep. +</P> + +<P> +It was broad daylight when they awoke, and the sound of a body of horse +outside the building at once attracted their attention. They were soon +highly pleased to find that Colonel Marchand had returned. News came +to them that he had been successful in his pursuit of El Capitan and +his mountain rebels. As anxious as they were to see their old friend, +Ronie and Jack deemed it wise to wait until he had sought them. +</P> + +<P> +This did not give over half an hour's suspense before an orderly called +upon them to say that the colonel was awaiting them in his +headquarters. It is needless to say that they lost no time in obeying +this request to see him. They found the genial commander established +in one of the smaller buildings of the village, engaged in studying a +map of the country. But at sight of them he quickly forgot his chart, +and motioned for them to be seated, saying: +</P> + +<P> +"I have sent for you that I might know your story. We have sent the +rebels flying back into their mountain caves like rats driven to their +holes. They will not dare to show a head for at least twenty-four +hours, so I have a half-day's leisure, except that I must prepare my +report to send to General Castro. First I want to hear your story, and +I suggest you begin at the very beginning, so I may understand its +details and know how to act." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie, acting as spokesman, told their story in as few words as +possible from the time they had left Manilla to the present moment, +interrupted several times by the impulsive officer, who was both +surprised and pleased at the information they gave him. +</P> + +<P> +"By the right hand of Bolivar!" he exclaimed finally, "you may not be +aware of it, but you bear valuable intelligence that I shall take the +liberty to forward to General Castro. The character of the <I>Ban Righ</I> +or the <I>Libertador</I> has been pretty well known to us, but you make +plain some things which have been dark. I can see how Harrie fell +under suspicion under the conditions that he was taken prisoner." +</P> + +<P> +"You can secure his freedom, can you not, Colonel Marchand?" +</P> + +<P> +The colonel was a tall, slender man, with flashing, black eyes and long +mustache, which he was wont to twist very vigorously when he was +excited. He gave these a savage twirl now, and, springing to his feet, +began to pace to and fro furiously. +</P> + +<P> +"I know what I can do, I can try," he declared, returning to his seat +after pacing back and forth several times. "If I had been a little +more successful up this way, and he himself had not met with so many +reverses, I can imagine he might be more willing to grant my request. +But I will try—of course, I will try! I can but fail. If I do," and +here he lowered his voice, "by the right hand of Bolivar, the sword of +Leon Marchand shall be sheathed while Cipriano Castro holds the rein of +government." +</P> + +<P> +Both Ronie and Jack were somewhat taken aback by this speech, which +they could see was not a discreet one to make, especially in that +place. But the excitement of Colonel Marchand passed as quickly as it +had arisen, and he resumed, with marked calmness: +</P> + +<P> +"Coming here strangers, as you have, you can have little idea of the +real feeling slumbering like a volcano in the hearts of us Venezuelans. +The truth is, our people are the most ungrateful on the face of the +earth. All of the revolutions and political plots that have harassed +our country have been almost entirely uncalled for, though I will +confess our leaders have made an excuse easy through their eagerness to +"feather their nests," as you would say. But honest men have ever +found little encouragement to remain honest, when the populace stands +ready to take up the cry of 'fraud' the moment some disgruntled office +seeker utters such a cry to cover his own disappointment. The +utterance of the word becomes instantly the battle cry to call the mob +to riot and ruin. From a Venezuelan riot a general uprising will +follow in a single day, until the country is ravaged far and wide. +This is accounted for mainly by the fact that the population is made up +to nine out of ten of Indians, half-breeds and mulattoes, who are +naturally ignorant and easily aroused to fight. +</P> + +<P> +"Matos is followed by just such a rabble. He is rich, but not a +soldier by training. Still, it was enough that he was brilliant in +uniform and pompous in bearing; these, coupled with the rattle of the +drum and the tramp of many feet, aroused the mongrel crowd, until the +disgruntled rebel found himself tagged by an army of ragged, +boisterous, hungry men, who gladly followed him, and follow him still. +We saw an example of the stock in El Capitan's mountain horde. He +escaped me only by the skin of his teeth." +</P> + +<P> +"Here I am making a proclamation of war when I ought to be preparing my +dispatch for General Castro. I will use every argument I can for +Harrie, as I know he is a noble boy, and that his imprisonment is +unjust and wicked." +</P> + +<P> +"How about Francisco de Caprian?" asked Ronie, for Colonel Marchand had +not hinted of him. +</P> + +<P> +"I can do nothing," he replied, with a shake of the head. "The De +Caprians are very much in ill-favor just now. However, for your sake I +will mention him, and suggest that it will do no harm to set him free. +I think you said he suggested that he was willing to espouse our cause. +By the way, what do you say to a campaign under the illustrious Castro, +the modern Bolivar of Venezuela? I will mention your willingness, and +you can answer me afterward." +</P> + +<P> +Then Colonel Marchand became very busy with the preparation of his +dispatch. When it was finished he called an orderly, who was told to +see that it was forwarded to the commander-in-chief with as great +promptness as possible. +</P> + +<P> +"Bring me back a reply," added the colonel, and when he had seen the +messenger depart he turned to resume his conversation with Ronie and +Jack. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap17"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A CUNNING RUSE. +</H4> + +<P> +"Speaking about joining our forces," said Colonel Marchand, "under the +circumstances it will be impossible for me to fulfill my promise to you +when I wrote. Neither would it be practicable to carry out plans made +under different conditions. Join our army for a while; it will prove a +lively vacation for you, and just as soon as this little cloud blows +over we will start. We will have the government behind us, too. It is +a great undertaking in more senses than one. I expect to become +regularly attached to Castro's army within a short time. In fact, I am +away now only temporarily. What do you say to becoming comrades under +Castro?" +</P> + +<P> +"I should want to consult Harrie before I decided," replied Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"So you shall. Now that is settled, let us talk of other matters. It +is perfectly natural, however, that you should cast your fortunes with +ours for a short time. Venezuela does not forget that it was due to +Miranda's experience gained in fighting for the independence of the +Great Republic that he learned something of what might come to his +native land, and that it was the friendship of Lafayette, Hamilton and +Fox which encouraged him to push forward. When the revolution opened +in 1810, the United States furnished Venezuela with her munitions of +war. Two years later, when the earthquake destroyed twenty thousand of +our people, she sent supplies with a liberal hand to us. In this +crisis, which I believe is to be the most important affair in her +history, we stand in need of Northern friendship. Europe is against +us, and in the jealousy of the powers there would gladly hail any +pretext upon which she could seize us." +</P> + +<P> +"The Monroe Doctrine must be a great safeguard to you." +</P> + +<P> +"If it hadn't been for that these little South American republics would +have been swallowed by European powers long before this." +</P> + +<P> +"While the swallowing would have caused some bloody wars." +</P> + +<P> +"Very true, but we are used to that. There has not been a time within +my remembrance when there has not been a war of some form in process. +Speaking of the European nations swallowing us, you may forget that we +are three times as large as France or Germany, and five times as large +as Italy. We are larger than any European country outside of Russia. +Something of its natural features may be understood from the fact that +it holds within its domain some beautiful bodies of inland water, the +largest of which, Lake Maracaibo, is somewhat larger than Lake Ontario. +Within the republic are over a thousand rivers, the largest of which is +the Orinoco, next in size to the Amazon of the rivers of South America. +</P> + +<P> +"In regard to its physical features, the country may be divided into +three great zones, increasing in size according to the following order: +First, the zone of agriculture; second, the zone of grazing land; last, +the larger in area than both of the others, the zone of the forests. +There are two seasons, the wet and the dry, called winter and summer. +</P> + +<P> +"Venezuela is thinly populated, having about two and one-half millions +of inhabitants. They still preserve the type of the Spanish race, +which afforded them origin, though they have become largely a +cosmopolitan race, due to the mixture with the natives. These have +retained to a wonderful extent their primitive beauty, so the men are +manly and symmetrical, the women graceful and beautiful." +</P> + +<P> +"How is it about the wild horses our geographies describe as still +roaming with flowing manes and foaming nostrils and llanoes and +pampas?" asked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"They disappeared before the buffalo vanished from your Western plains. +I would say also of the people, instead of the wild beauties your books +tell you are yet living in almost primitive simplicity, you will find, +when you get to the capital, women and maidens looking quite as +anxiously for the fashion sheet from Paris as her sisters in New York. +We are apt to think the only civilization is that around us. How well +do I remember that my first impressions were that the little space +about me in which I was reared comprised the world. Gradually my +vision extended, and my knowledge expanded, until I find it is a big +old world, and that it holds many people." +</P> + +<P> +Colonel Marchand's kindly words, and his willingness to inform his +friends, put our couple very much at their ease. Ronie improved the +first opportunity to speak of that matter which was frequently +uppermost in his mind, the finding of his mother's photograph under +such peculiar circumstances. He was unable to offer any solution of +the mystery, while he showed a deep concern. +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot think your mother would come to this country, even with the +hope of meeting you, without first sending me word of her intentions. +Of course, I should have tried and met her at La Guayra." +</P> + +<P> +"You have not heard from her?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not a word, though I did expect to get a letter in regard to your +coming. I feel very sure the photograph must have been brought from +New York by some disinterested party, who came into possession of it by +accident. I cannot imagine anything else, though this is rather hard +to believe." +</P> + +<P> +Realizing that Colonel Marchand had affairs that needed his attention, +Ronie and Jack asked if they might look about the town, and the simple +request being granted, they passed the next few hours in exploring the +place, though finding little to interest them. The regular inhabitants +had nearly all fled, and those who had remained appeared ill at ease +under the existing conditions, as they might have been expected to be. +</P> + +<P> +"I tell you what it is, Jack," said Ronie, "it looks to me as if these +revolutions are sapping the very life out of the country." +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad; and now it looks as if you and I were to become actors in one +of them. I wonder what is going on yonder." +</P> + +<P> +These words were spoken by Jack as their attention was caught by the +sight of a group of people gathered near the building where they had +been lodged. As they advanced with quickening steps, it became evident +that a fight or street brawl was in process. Around this a couple of +dozen or more civilians had clustered, and by the way they encircled +the combatants it looked as if they were trying to shield them from the +gaze of the soldiers, should any of these happen to come that way. For +a wonder not one of these was in sight at that moment, though the +steady tread of the sentry within the building could be heard as he +paced back and forth with measured step. +</P> + +<P> +"Better give them a wide berth," declared Jack. "It never does any one +good to get mixed up in one of these senseless encounters. Why, if you +should go to the assistance of one of them, thinking he was being +abused, the chances are more than even he would join with the other in +abusing you. By the horn of rock—Gibraltar, if you please! this does +not seem to be a fight by common brawlers, for their <I>mantas</I> show they +belong to the better class of civilians." +</P> + +<P> +The garment which had attracted the attention of Jack was the <I>manta</I> +or <I>poncho</I> made of white linen, which has the quality of repelling the +heat of the sun on a warm day. These garments are worn almost +continually by certain classes, among them the vaqueros, or riders of +the pampas. That of the latter consists of two blankets sewed +together, one of a dark blue color and the other of a bright red. +These hues are universally selected for a purpose, as they receive +light and heat differently, and are used so as to afford the best +results. Thus in dark and cloudy days the dark side of the blanket is +turned outward; on other days this is reversed. The double blanket +thus formed is quite two yards square, with a hole in the center to +admit the head of the owner. Its purpose is two-fold, to protect the +rider from the heavy dews and showers of the tropics, and to spread +under him at night when there is no place to sling up his hammock. But +the effect of this linen <I>manta</I> worn by these street fighters was even +better than that of the woolen <I>cobija</I> of the vaqueros. These +<I>mantas</I> worn by this twain were fancifully embroidered, and showed +that they were expensive garments. At a distance they would present a +striking, picturesque appearance. +</P> + +<P> +Our heroes found it difficult to get near enough to obtain a view of +the stirring scene in the little opening made by the encircling +on-lookers, and, caring little for the affair, anyway, quietly +retreated. Then, the alarm having been spread, no doubt, the soldiers +began to appear in sight, and a squad led by an orderly started in to +disperse the crowd. But the spectators seemed too earnest to be easily +driven off, while the soldiers themselves quickly became so interested +in the contest that they tried little more than to get a good look at +the tableau. +</P> + +<P> +"I never saw a Venezuelan yet who didn't relish a good fight," remarked +Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"But look there, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "What is going on that way?" +</P> + +<P> +As Ronie pointed toward the rear of the building already mentioned, +Jack saw half a dozen loungers hanging along in a manner suspiciously +like a row of loafers, and not in knots, as men of this kind usually +congregate. +</P> + +<P> +"See! two of them are helping away a woman. Why, Jack! it is the +prisoner, Seņora de Caprian! She is trying to escape." +</P> + +<P> +In a moment the whole situation was plain to them. The brawl and fight +was simply a ruse to catch the attention of the soldiers while the +captive woman made her escape. So cleverly had it been carried out so +far, that it was likely to succeed beyond the most sanguine expectation. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie glanced hurriedly around to see that the orderly and his men were +in the thickest of the mob, oblivious of all except the hand-to-hand +tussle. Another minute and the captive would be beyond recapture, +except, possibly, after a long chase. His first thought was that of +gladness for the unfortunate woman, then he remembered that there was +another side to the question, and that it might be well to retain her +as a prisoner of war. He decided quickly upon his course of action; +whether it was right or wrong must be proven in the future. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap18"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XVIII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +RONIE RECEIVES A COMMISSION. +</H4> + +<P> +"She must not be allowed to escape, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "I heard +Colonel Marchand say that she knows secrets which it would not be well +for his enemies to learn." +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad; it is not too late for us to stop them." +</P> + +<P> +Without further delay the twain sprang forward, and were in season to +intercept the fugitives. As they brought their firearms to bear upon +the men who had constituted themselves Seņora de Caprian's escort, +Ronie cried, sharply: +</P> + +<P> +"Stand where you are!" +</P> + +<P> +The woman uttered a cry of dismay at this command, while the men +suddenly stopped, facing the determined Americans with frightened looks. +</P> + +<P> +"Let me pass, seņors, I implore you," begged the prisoner, the tears +springing to her eyes, while she clasped her hands and turned upon them +such looks of agony as haunted them for many a day. Ronie, at least, +felt that he had committed an act which he should regret, and it is +possible if the opportunity had remained when he could have allowed her +to escape with safety, he might have done it. But the die was cast, +and there was no retreat. The loud, authoritative words had aroused +others. The soldiers were suddenly recalled to their duty, while the +sight of the fugitive and their captors quickly caught the attention of +the newcomers upon the scene, foremost among these being Colonel +Marchand! +</P> + +<P> +He instantly comprehended the situation, and a look of admiration for +the prompt deed lightened the bronze upon his cheeks, while he said: +</P> + +<P> +"By the soul of Bolivar! you have done well, seņors. Soldiers, secure +the prisoner immediately, and see that her liberators are taken into +custody." +</P> + +<P> +"I hope there will be no cause for us to regret what we have done, +colonel," said Ronie, who really felt sorry for the prisoner. +</P> + +<P> +"You may cut off my right hand if you do, Seņor Rand. At present it is +necessary that we hold the woman as a prisoner of war, but she shall be +well treated, and I have no doubt be set free soon." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie knew Colonel Marchand was a man of his word, and he felt better +over what he and Jack bad done. This pleasure was further increased by +the words of the colonel as they accompanied him to his headquarters. +</P> + +<P> +"This will prove a good day's work for you, Ronie. I only regret I had +not been able to report it to General Castro when I sent my dispatch, +but better late than never. What do you say to going with us on our +campaign toward Maracaibo? We start within an hour. The rebels are +rallying in that direction, and we must look after them before they +become too strong." +</P> + +<P> +The fact that it was likely to take them nearer to Harrie, if not quite +to San Carlos, was enough to shape their decision, and inside of an +hour they were mounted and riding with the troops toward the west, +Ronie getting his first taste of warfare. +</P> + +<P> +The days that followed would never be forgotten by our American +soldiers in the service of Venezuela. Colonel Marchand seemed to be +always on the move, but the enemy was even more active than he, and +always kept one scene ahead of him. For instance, he left the little +hamlet where Ronie and Jack joined his forces to go to another country +town called Verona, where it was reported the insurgents had made a +raid. Upon reaching this settlement, which was little more than a +collection of coffee planters' conical dwellings, it was ascertained +that the enemies had been gone a few hours, and that they were headed +toward Juan. Hither, posthaste, dashed the Venezuelan cavalry, +resolved to be in season this time, only to find that again the bird +had flown. But Castro's troops were led by a captain who had the name +of never sleeping, and once more he followed on their heels. Then he +learned they had gone back to Verona! Thus two weeks were spent in +vain advances and retreats, swift dashes ahead and equally as rapid +doubling upon the track, until we finally find the grimy riders halted +near the rim of a little plain which formed the foot of a mountain +range trending away toward the more lofty peaks making the highest +elevations of land in the Western World. As may be imagined, the +doughty colonel was in no enviable mood, as he sat by the door of his +tent, whose roof was the bended sky. It was one of those inns found at +those outposts between the agricultural and pastoral regions. +</P> + +<P> +The men were busy getting the evening meal, which was to be made up +largely of a fat bullock killed a few minutes before. Evidence had +been witnessed where the insurgents had broken into a herd that very +day and slaughtered several of the best beeves. This killing of cattle +was characteristic of Venezuelan warfare. The ragged troops of the +revolutionists must be fed, and what easier way to do it? +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Jack, who had ridden until they were tired and sore, were +attending to their tough ponies before spreading their ponchos over the +stony spot which they had cleared of the rank vegetation so as to +prepare their couch for the night, as there were no posts upon which to +hang their hammocks, when a messenger informed them that Colonel +Marchand wished to see them immediately. At a loss to know what this +order could mean, they lost no time in answering the summons. +</P> + +<P> +They found the colonel, usually so genial, very much out of humor. At +first Ronie feared that he had done something to arouse this uncommon +state of mind on the part of his superior. +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant Rand," greeted the colonel, brusquely, giving our hero a +title quite unexpected to him, "I have sent for you to see if your +Yankee ingenuity and courage cannot help me out of this difficulty." +</P> + +<P> +"I am at your service, colonel," replied Ronie, with a military salute, +"and I am sure my friend here is equally as faithful." +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, ay, Colonel Marchand; where Ronie Rand leads I——" +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant Rand, if you please, Seņor Greenland," interrupted the +officer. "I will now explain what I want of you." +</P> + +<P> +Though taken somewhat aback by this greeting, our twain bowed and +waited respectfully for the other to explain. +</P> + +<P> +"In the first place," began the colonel, "I need not tell you how I +have been buffeted about for the last ten days. It has set my teeth on +edge. On every hand my scouts have been baffled by these scoundrels of +the bush, who make a farce of war and style themselves 'Sons of +Liberty!' Word comes in that they are everywhere successful, and that +Castro is discouraged. I know better than the last. He is not that +kind of a man. But enough of that. What I want of you is simply this: +Take as many men with you as you wish, and reconnoiter the country as +far as you think best, and report to me as often as possible. Are you +willing to undertake this hazardous mission?" +</P> + +<P> +"I am willing to do my duty, Colonel Marchand." +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, ay, colonel," added Jack. +</P> + +<P> +"Spoken like true soldiers. I know I can depend on you. Now name the +number of men you want to go with you, and I will have them detailed at +once. Remember you are to have command of the squad, with your friend +as deputy." +</P> + +<P> +"I assure you, colonel, we appreciate the honor. I think three men +will be sufficient. A small body of men can go where a large one would +be likely to attract attention." +</P> + +<P> +"Good! My scouts dare not stir out of their hammocks without an army +is at their heels. How soon can you be ready to report, sergeant?" +</P> + +<P> +"In half an hour, colonel." +</P> + +<P> +"Thank you, sergeant. That will give me time to detain [Transcriber's +note: detail?] the men, and I will see that you have the best in the +regiment. By the way, sergeant, I wish to say that I have received as +yet no reply from General Castro, but I probably shall before you get +back. I would also add that I expect to move to Baracoa in the +morning, where I shall await news from you." +</P> + +<P> +"Well, Jack, what do you think of this?" asked Ronie, as soon as they +had left the presence of Colonel Marchand. +</P> + +<P> +"Looks as if we were going to taste of real warfare," replied Jack. "I +can't say that I am sorry, for as long as we cannot go ahead with our +work it will serve to break the monotony." +</P> + +<P> +"If I only knew that mother was safely at home, and Harrie was with us, +I really think I should enjoy it. If there was only some way I could +get a letter sent to her, I would write to mother in New York, hit or +miss." +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps the colonel will have a chance to get it to the capital," +suggested Jack. "If you want to write it, I will see that everything +is got in readiness for our start." +</P> + +<P> +"You are very kind. I think I will do it. It will certainly do no +harm." +</P> + +<P> +So Ronie wrote his letter to his mother, describing briefly his recent +experiences, and speaking particularly of the portrait he had picked +up. He had to make his letter short, for he not only prepared that, +but he ate a hasty meal, which Jack had prepared, and with his faithful +companion presented himself at the commander's tent in exactly half an +hour. +</P> + +<P> +"I am glad to find you so punctual," remarked the colonel. "Yes, I +will send your letter along at the first opportunity. Here are the men +who are to accompany you. I wish you success, but I do not believe I +need to caution you to move cautiously. You have been here long enough +to know something of the character of these bush rebels." +</P> + +<P> +In this brusque manner Colonel Marchand saw them depart, though he did +not return to his papers until they had disappeared beyond the line of +forest vegetation which encircled the clearing in the shadows of the +mountains. His eye trained upon the spot where he had last seen them +after they had vanished for several minutes, he finally turned back, +saying, under his breath: +</P> + +<P> +"I hope I shall not be disappointed in them as I have the others who +have gone before them." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap19"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XIX. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +THE SCOUT IN THE JUNGLE. +</H4> + +<P> +Riding at a leisurely pace, the five scouts started upon their +dangerous quest, Ronie and one of the Venezuelans riding side by side, +with Jack and another behind them, leaving the single man to follow. +The young sergeant was pleased to find that the trio selected to +accompany him by Colonel Marchand were very prepossessing men, one of +them a man with gray hair, while the others were but a little over +twenty years of age. The oldest, whose name was Riva Baez, claimed he +knew the country well, so it was he who rode beside our hero to show +the way. +</P> + +<P> +"About ten kilometers to the west we shall strike the main road to +Truxillo," he remarked. "But it may be well for us to avoid that. El +Capitan and his followers are believed to be hovering around the +foothills between here and Barquisimete. It is a country just suited +to ambuscade and concealment." +</P> + +<P> +"How far is it to the nearest town?" +</P> + +<P> +"Less than five kilometers. It is a small town called Caro." +</P> + +<P> +"Is it held by the insurgents?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, though it bears the marks of one of their raids. The people have +been left too poor to be either feared or sought for." +</P> + +<P> +"We need not go there?" +</P> + +<P> +"About a kilometer this side we can strike a mountain road leading into +the wild country." +</P> + +<P> +"Where we are likely to find El Capitan and his insurgents?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si</I>, Sergeant Rand." +</P> + +<P> +"Then that is our course, seņor. Show us the way." +</P> + +<P> +Nothing further was said until possibly three miles had been passed, +when Riva Baez drew rein. The road they had taken soon after leaving +the encampment of the troops, by this time had sort of "dwindled away," +as Jack put it, until it was now little more than a cattle path. The +country ahead was thinly populated, if settled at all. The guide of +the little party was the first to speak: +</P> + +<P> +"If we follow this course half a kilometer farther we shall come out +upon the road leading to Caro, which winds down from the mountains. +Beyond, the country is infested with the insurgents, and we are likely +to run upon them at every turn. If we keep on through Caro we shall +soon come into the lower country, where we shall find a string of towns +along the way, but the people, as a rule, unfriendly to us. If we bend +to the left here we shall be able to make a short cut over the spur of +the ridge and reach the region of Maracaibo without much risk of +stirring up El Capitan's hornets. Which way shall we go, sergeant?" +</P> + +<P> +"Our purpose is to learn all we can of the enemy," replied Ronie. +"According to your account, we shall learn very little of them by +keeping to the left. Neither are we especially anxious just at present +to seek towns in the lower country. But we will go to Caro first." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si</I>, Sergeant Rand," and without longer delay Riva Baez led the march +forward again. Owing to the unfavorable conditions of the route, they +had advanced slowly, and it was now past midnight. The moonbeams +tipped the treetops with a silvery halo, but underneath this foliage it +was so dark that our riders had to pick their way with constant +caution, lest they should run into some trap of nature or set by the +hand of an enemy that claimed this country as his own. +</P> + +<P> +Nothing to cause them actual alarm, however, took place, and after a +while Riva declared they were close down to Caro, which he described as +lying in a narrow valley through which wound one of the numerous +mountain streams watering the country. Upon receiving this +intelligence, Ronie called a halt, and after a short consultation with +his guide and Jack, he decided to enter the town alone with the former, +leaving the others to await their return, unless called by a signal +agreed upon. With this understanding he and the guide rode cautiously +forward, the road overhung with the dense vegetation springing from a +rich soil under most favoring conditions of the atmosphere. +</P> + +<P> +A ride of less than five minutes, even at a slow pace, brought the two +scouts in sight of the little hamlet made tip of coffee planters' +homes. At that time the silence of sleep lay upon the place, no sound +of night breaking the gentle murmur of the river flowing parallel with +the road. Near the edge of the first plantation Ronie motioned for his +companion to stop, when he slipped from the saddle to the ground. +</P> + +<P> +"I am going to make a little exploration alone," he whispered. "Do you +remain here with the horses. I will not be gone over ten minutes. If +I am, you may understand that I am in trouble, and act at your own +discretion." +</P> + +<P> +"Look sharp, seņors," warned Riva Baez. "No one seems to be astir, +but, for all that, one of El Capitan's sharpshooters may be lying in +wait to shoot you down like a jaguar." +</P> + +<P> +"I have had a bit of experience among the Igorrotes of Luzon," replied +Ronie, "and you can count upon me not running headlong into an ambush. +What a beautiful night it is," he could not refrain from adding. +</P> + +<P> +"If you think this is delightful, sergeant, you ought to witness a +night on the Orinoco in the great rubber country of the south." +</P> + +<P> +Without making any reply to this, Ronie stole silently forward upon +foot, soon finding himself in the midst of the beehive homes of the +small coffee planters. But not a soul seemed to occupy the primitive +dwellings without doors or windows, but left free for the passage of +the night breeze. +</P> + +<P> +"It is singular no one should be awake," he mused, "but the houses +appear to be as deserted as if they had never been occupied. There is +a mystery about this I do not understand. I am inclined to risk my +chances and enter one of them. I will if they all prove to look as +empty as these." +</P> + +<P> +With these thoughts in his mind he moved stealthily along past hut +after hut, reached by avenues bordered by stately, flowering plants of +tropical brightness and verdure. But everywhere he went prevailed the +utter loneliness and emptiness which had first struck him as so +unusual. Finally, satisfied in his own mind regarding the actual +situation, he ventured to enter one of the dwellings, though not +without extreme caution. He crept along under cover of a row of +broad-leafed guamos bearing pods eight or ten inches in length, which +were filled with rows of black beans enveloped in a pulp of snowy +whiteness and agreeable sweetness. But if these facts had been known +to the young scout at this time they would certainly have been unheeded +by him, as he made his stealthy advance. He was aware that the time +for his return to Riva Baez was nearly passed, but he disliked to +return until the mystery of the silent town had been solved. So he +continued his advance until at last he stood on the earth floor under +the thatched roof, where the complete silence of undisturbed repose +reigned. +</P> + +<P> +The conviction which had at first forced itself upon him had before +this become a settled fact. The dwelling was entirely deserted. Not +only was this the case with the hut he had entered, but it was true of +all the others. Caro was an abandoned town! +</P> + +<P> +Anxious now to return to his companions with the intelligence, he lost +no further time in retracing his steps, but he had barely gained the +road when he was aware of the approach of a horse! Ay, listening a +moment, he was certain there were two of them. Knowing it was +necessary for him to be on the alert for enemies, he drew back into the +mass of plants and waited until he should obtain a good view of the +riders who were abroad, half expecting one of them to be Riva Baez. He +was rewarded a moment later by the sight of his guide, who had become +uneasy and had come in search of him. A signal from him attracted the +Venezuelan's attention, and he showed unfeigned delight at finding his +leader so quickly. +</P> + +<P> +Riva Baez expressed little surprise when Ronie told him that Caro was a +deserted settlement, though he could offer no satisfactory explanation +for the fact. +</P> + +<P> +"El Capitan may have taken them all captives, or butchered them in cold +blood." +</P> + +<P> +"There is nothing to show that violence has been done them. The huts +are simply deserted, just as if the owners had been called suddenly +away for a brief absence." +</P> + +<P> +"True, Sergeant Rand. Shall we stop here a while or push on toward the +next place?" +</P> + +<P> +"We have no time to waste at this stage of action," replied the +energetic young American. "Let's move on into the country of the +insurgents. We can learn nothing by keeping away from them. The day +will soon be breaking." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si</I>, sergeant; I am at your command. We will climb the hill back of +us, and then turn to the right. At the top of the hill I think a call +will bring our comrades." +</P> + +<P> +"The safer call is to go to them. I will wait on the hill while you +are gone." +</P> + +<P> +From the vantage he had gained where he waited for his companions to +rejoin him, Ronie obtained a wide sweep of the surrounding country, a +view he knew was likely to prove of great value to him in his future +actions. He could not follow, even in the pale light of the western +moon, which was beginning to lose its glory before the coming of the +new light on the eastern horizon, the trend of the mountain ranges as +he had not been able to do before. He was really in the region of a +distinct offshoot of mountains from those that lead away from the +greatest mountain chain on the globe, the mighty Andes. The mountain +system which crosses Venezuela in this district is an offset from the +eastern Cordillera, and runs down to the Caribbean Sea in irregular +conformity with the eastern shore of the Lake of Maracaibo. From this +chain the Venezuelan system of two ranges, running almost side by side, +extends toward the east, the most northerly branch, which follows quite +closely to the seashore culminating in the Island of Trinidad. As he +looked down upon it in the still morning atmosphere, the whole panorama +of country appeared like a solid mass of forest, uneven, it is true, +but unbroken by the hand of man. The intense silence which had hung +over deserted Caro was intensified here, so that it became oppressive. +Ronie could not fully throw off this spirit of utter loneliness which +weighed down his very soul, so that he exclaimed involuntarily, in an +undertone: +</P> + +<P> +"Strange I should feel so impressed that something wrong is going to +happen. Somehow, I cannot shake off the impression that I stand in the +presence of a power that portends me mortal danger." +</P> + +<P> +He had only partially succeeded in overcoming this passing weakness +when he hailed with delight the reappearance of his companions, and the +five then moved ahead with their accustomed caution. +</P> + +<P> +Half an hour later, when the light of the new day was beginning to +penetrate the tropical foliage with growing brightness, they were still +slowly moving along the narrow way, overhung by tall, graceful trees, +adorned at their tops with brilliant flowers, when the silence of the +scene was suddenly broken by a loud rifle shot. It was, in fact, two +reports blending into one, for two bullets cleft the air; with a swift, +hissing sound. One of these struck the horse ridden by Riva Baez, and +the poor animal reared suddenly into the air, and snorted with pain and +terror. The other bullet cut away a lock of hair from the temple of +Ronie, and for an instant he was stunned by the force of the shot. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap20"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XX. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +ADVENTURES AND SURPRISES. +</H4> + +<P> +While Riva Baez was struggling with his wounded horse, whose sudden +plunge had nearly unseated him, Ronie was also active, but in quite +another manner. The flash of the shots from the treetops had not sent +out its blaze of lurid light before he had discovered a pair of dark +forms crouching in the foliage overhead, and the double report had not +died away before he had covered one of these with his rifle, his clear, +ringing voice exclaiming: +</P> + +<P> +"Hold, there! Move an inch, and I will send a bullet through your +head!" +</P> + +<P> +Immediately cries of fright were uttered by the twain in their lofty +ambush, but neither man offered to move. The companions of Ronie and +Riva Baez, who had fallen behind a little, startled by these shots and +outcries, now dashed hurriedly upon the scene. +</P> + +<P> +"Cover the other rebel up there with your Mauser, Jack," commanded +Ronie. "Do not hesitate to fire if he dares to lift a finger." +</P> + +<P> +Jack quickly comprehended the situation, and no sooner had his youthful +commander spoken than he took swift aim at the trembling wretch in the +tree, saying, loud enough for the victim to hear: +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, sergeant; I glory in such shooting!" +</P> + +<P> +By this time Riva had succeeded in quieting his horse, which had not +received a fatal wound, and the veteran scout was ready to do his part +in the exciting drama. +</P> + +<P> +"Stand at the foot of the tree to receive them, boys," ordered Ronie. +"I am going to invite them to join us. Their company may be more +desirable than we think." +</P> + +<P> +Then, addressing the twain above, he continued in the best Spanish he +could command: +</P> + +<P> +"Come down, seņors, as quickly as may be." +</P> + +<P> +"Spare our lives, seņor!" begged the one whom the young American had +selected as his victim. +</P> + +<P> +"Upon the condition that you surrender peacefully. As proof that you +mean what you profess, please drop your weapons down to my men." +</P> + +<P> +Without delay, the couple dropped their Mausers, which were caught by +the young Venezuelans. +</P> + +<P> +"If you have any other firearms, kindly let them down, We have more use +for them than you." +</P> + +<P> +This demand was followed by two braces of heavy pistols, followed by a +couple of ugly-looking knives. +</P> + +<P> +"Any more such playthings?" asked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"No, seņor. We have no more weapons, unless you call this rope such." +</P> + +<P> +"Let that down, too. It will come in handy in a few minutes. You were +very thoughtful to take it along with you." +</P> + +<P> +The stout hempen rope was next thrown to the ground, after which the +terrified sharpshooters waited for the succeeding order. +</P> + +<P> +"Now, come down yourselves. Don't waste any powder, boys, if they are +foolish enough to think of trying to run away." +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, sergeant, trust us for that," replied Jack. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie soon had the satisfaction of seeing the two cringing before him +like a couple of curs about to receive a whipping. One of them was +evidently a half-breed, while his companion, who had done the talking +so far, showed more of Spanish blood. +</P> + +<P> +"You have been caught in an ugly game, seņors," said Ronie, whereupon +both bowed, the spokesman saying: +</P> + +<P> +"Do not shoot us, Seņor Americano. If you will spare our lives, we +will fight for you." +</P> + +<P> +"A pretty mess you'd make of it. You were scouts for El Capitan?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>." +</P> + +<P> +"You mistook us for Castro's soldiers?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>. We could not see very plain, and we thought you were +only two." +</P> + +<P> +"Which made your shooting more justifiable, I suppose. Seeing you are +such poor marksmen, we will forgive you, providing you will answer my +questions." +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>." +</P> + +<P> +"Where is El Capitan?" +</P> + +<P> +"At Morova." +</P> + +<P> +"How far is that from here?" +</P> + +<P> +"Four kilometers, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"What is he doing there?" +</P> + +<P> +"Waiting for reinforcements." +</P> + +<P> +"What does he need reinforcements for?" +</P> + +<P> +"To whip the dogs of Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"No doubt he needs them. But are there any of Castro's soldiers in +this vicinity?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>, at Baracoa." +</P> + +<P> +This bit of information caused Ronie to resume his questioning with +greater interest, for he knew this referred to Colonel Marchand's +regiment. +</P> + +<P> +"How many men has El Capitan under him?' +</P> + +<P> +"Five thousand, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"Beware, seņor, for I know now you lie." +</P> + +<P> +"He will have, seņor, before he reaches Valencia." +</P> + +<P> +"So he is headed in that way?" +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>." +</P> + +<P> +"What I want to know is, how many men has he now? Be careful, for +another lie will send your cringing souls to purgatory. How many men +has El Capitan now?" +</P> + +<P> +"Spare me, seņor! I do not lie. El Capitan has about two hundred with +him now, but he expects more soon." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you mean to say he has two hundred at Morova?" +</P> + +<P> +"Seņor misunderstood me. He will have two hundred as soon as Calveras +reaches him with his troops." +</P> + +<P> +"Dog!" cried Ronie, looking as fierce as he could, while he threatened +to resort to violence then and there, "you are trying to cheat me. I +asked you how many soldiers El Capitan has at Morova." +</P> + +<P> +"Fifty, seņor," and the frightened wretch and his companion seemed +about to collapse. +</P> + +<P> +"That is all now," declared the young sergeant. "Secure them, men, at +once." +</P> + +<P> +Nothing loath, his companions began to carry out his order, Jack +assisting Riva Baez in binding the spokesman of the twain. While they +were doing this, the former heard the sound of paper crumpled in the +prisoner's pocket. Thrusting his hand into the receptacle, he quickly +drew forth two soiled and wrinkled missives. +</P> + +<P> +"What have we here?" he asked. "As I live, here is a dispatch for +Colonel Marchand from General Castro," handing, as he spoke, the paper +to Ronie. Then, his eye falling upon the well-known envelope and stamp +of his own country, he exclaimed: +</P> + +<P> +"A letter for you, Ronie; and from New York!" +</P> + +<P> +If honest Jack Greenland had unconsciously committed a breach of good +respect in thus addressing a superior, Ronie did not heed it, while he +took the crumpled missive handed him, his own hand trembling and a mist +coming over his eyes at this unexpected communication from his native +land. This mist deepened and his hand shook more violently, as he +murmured, after glancing at its superscription: +</P> + +<P> +"It is from mother, Jack!" +</P> + +<P> +It was fortunate for the reputation of our hero that his companions +were attentive to their duty, or the prisoners might have eluded their +captors. But he was certainly excusable for his temporary lack of +discretion. The finding of this letter from his mother, under the +circumstances and condition of affairs, was enough to rob him of his +usual presence of mind. While the others completed their tasks, he +examined the missive, to find that it had already been opened. With +blurred sight, he ran hastily over its closely-written page, saying, +when he finished: +</P> + +<P> +"It is as I expected. Mother was to leave New York soon after writing +this, to meet me in Caracas. This was directed in the care of Colonel +Marchand, and has been forwarded through the courtesy of General Castro +to the colonel. She is here in this country, and in trouble, as I have +feared." +</P> + +<P> +"Let us hope it is nothing serious," said Jack. "At least, we can only +hope for the best until we are able to learn more and do more. Has the +dispatch to Colonel Marchand been opened?" +</P> + +<P> +"Excuse me, Jack, for forgetting my duty. It must be duty before +personal afflictions, I suppose. Yes, this has been opened. In that +case, it will do no harm for me to read it, particularly as I may learn +something to guide us in our work. It says," he continued, while he +scanned the document, "that General Castro has been elected president +of the republic for a term of six years. It says also that a body of +his troops have been defeated at Barquismoto by the insurgents; that +the <I>Libertador</I> has fixed on and sunk a Venezuelan ship named <I>Crespo</I> +off Cumarebo, and that Matos has succeeded in landing twenty thousand +rifles and two million cartridges at Trinidad. +</P> + +<P> +"Now I come to news that interests us more. General Castro has sent to +San Carlos demanding that Harrie be set at liberty immediately. That +is good news indeed. But he goes on to say that he cannot set +Francisco free until his case has had an investigation. Well, this has +proved to be a pretty fortunate capture." +</P> + +<P> +"A newsy one, certainly, and not all of it bad news, by any means. +Shall we take these fellows along with us, sergeant?" +</P> + +<P> +"Pardon me, Jack, I must be more mindful of my duty. Yes, I suppose we +shall have to do so. It is also necessary that one of us return to +Colonel Marchand with all haste possible, apprising him of what we have +done, and to take him this dispatch from the general. While you are +arranging for one of the boys to undertake this duty, I will write a +few words to the colonel." +</P> + +<P> +Then Ronie prepared his first war dispatch, succinctly describing what +he had done and discovered. By the time he had finished this Jack had +got one of the younger Venezuelans in readiness for his journey back to +the regiment. Though he was loath to trust these important messages +with this scout, Ronie felt that he could not do any better. He could +not very well spare Jack or Riva Baez. Then, too, the latter vouched +for the honesty and capability of the other, so he saw him depart with +full confidence that the arduous duty would be performed faithfully. +</P> + +<P> +The hands of the prisoners having been securely bound behind them, they +were ordered to march in front of Jack and the younger Venezuelan, +while Ronie and Riva Baez rode in front. In this manner the journey +was resumed, though continued but a short time. It was now getting to +be sunrise, and Riva having a friend in that vicinity, it was deemed +best to stop there for a while—at least, long enough for the animals +to recuperate. +</P> + +<P> +The plantation of this man proved to be a huge farm of many thousand +acres, but much of it valueless on account of the revolutionary state +of the country. He was at home, and as soon as he learned the +character of his visitors from his old friend Riva, he extended a most +cordial greeting to them, promising to do everything in his power to +assist them. The sight of the prisoners pleased him hugely, for he was +a most pronounced admirer and supporter of Castro, and he quickly +placed the two spies in quarters from which they could not escape +without help. +</P> + +<P> +"How is it," asked Ronie, "that you keep from being molested by the +insurgents, when you are situated in the heart of the debatable ground?" +</P> + +<P> +"The reason is simply because I can muster a force that can outwhip any +army of curs that El Capitan can muster," he replied, rather +vaingloriously. "Oh, they have tried it, Sergeant Rand, but I have +routed them like a band of monkeys, and I can do it again." +</P> + +<P> +Our little party fared sumptuously at the hands of this rather pompous +Venezuelan, whose name was Don Isadora Casimiro, and so they could find +no fault if he was a bit boastful and radical in his ideas. He +insisted that they remain with him during the day, showing the +advantage they would gain by waiting until nightfall before starting +out. As much as Ronie disliked this inactivity, he believed it was +wisest to do so. During the day the news was brought in by one of Don +Isadora's scouts that El Capitan was mustering his forces to march on +San Carlos with the purpose of liberating El Mocho. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as the shadows of night began to fall, Ronie prepared to start +anew on his expedition, Jack and the two Venezuelans accompanying him, +the prisoners being left in care of the followers of Don Isadora. The +ride for half an hour continued through an archway of trees growing on +the plantation of their host, when Riva declared that they had reached +the limit of his broad domains. They soon after entered a valley, the +hoof-strokes of their horses muffled by the soft, spongy earth. +</P> + +<P> +It must have been nearly midnight, for they had ridden several miles up +and down the country without discovering any trace of the enemy, when +Riva, who was slightly ahead of the others, abruptly paused in his +advance. Ronie quickly gained his side, where he stopped to learn the +cause of this unexpected halt. It required no words on the part of the +guide to explain his action, as he mutely pointed with his right hand +to a ravine, or gorge, running parallel with the road. The sound of +human voices came up distinctly to the ears of Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +Handing the rein of his horse to his companion, he silently dismounted, +and crept toward the brink of the chasm overhanging the place. In a +moment the light of a camp-fire struggled dimly upward through the +thick foliage, while with the sound of voices came the noise and +confusion of a body of men moving about. +</P> + +<P> +"I believe it is an encampment of El Capitan," he whispered to Jack, +who had joined him. "I have a mind to get a little closer." +</P> + +<P> +"I need not tell you to be careful," said Jack. "Can I go with you?" +</P> + +<P> +"I do not believe you had better, Jack. I will not be gone long. From +the sounds, I judge the party below are about to start on some midnight +raid." +</P> + +<P> +Before he had finished speaking, Ronie began to lower himself down the +descent, moving with such care that he made no noise. The bank did not +prove to be perpendicular, but its smooth side sloped gently away to +its foot, and covered as it was with rank vegetation, Ronie had little +difficulty in descending, except that at places the matted mass of +growth was so dense that he could penetrate it only after persistent +effort. At the end of five minutes he found himself so near the bottom +that his next step was upon the thatched roof of one of the primitive +buildings that seemed to form a row on this side. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap21"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXI. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +"THE MOUNTAIN LION." +</H4> + +<P> +The sight which met Ronie's gaze was one of wildness bordering upon +grandness. Its wildness consisted of a body of armed troops drawn up +in front of the rude building, a mob of untamable savages, as the +spectator from a civilized country must have judged them. They were +half clad, poorly fed, as shown by their emaciated visages, and armed +mainly with the rude implements that the uncivilized use. This wild +aspect of the scene was given the touch of a certain grandeur by the +sublime attention this motley throng paid to him who stood upon a +slightly-raised dais addressing them at this moment. +</P> + +<P> +This speaker was a man of stalwart figure, with a countenance naturally +dark, bronzed by long exposure to the tropic sun, and flashing eye that +could look without flinching upon the midday sun or upon the wildest +rabble that ever gathered under the shadows of the land of revolutions. +His speech was uttered in a manner and tongue in keeping with the man +and the scene. Ronie could not understand all of the fierce language +which seemed to have partaken of the mountain boldness and flowed from +the lips of the orator like a torrent springing from its fountain head +amid the rugged fastness of its native gorge, but he understood enough +to catch the import of this stimulating harangue. He knew the man was +El Capitan, and he was evidently resuming a speech which, for some +reason, had been temporarily broken. +</P> + +<P> +"Soldiers of freedom," he was saying, "the time for action has come. +You have rallied bravely at my call, and now I am ready to lead you to +battle and victory! Our path is clearly marked. To-night let us teach +that braggart, Don Isadora, that he is not a little king; that he +cannot longer defy El Capitan! From the smoking ruins of his estate we +will sweep downward like a torrent from the mountain, and like a +torrent we will gather volume as we sweep along. A trail of devastated +plantations shall mark our course wherever the foolhardy defy us, and +above the ruins of the smaller towns shall rise the captured columns of +Valencia, La Guayra, Caracas—ay, Caracas! When the capital shall be +ours, then will we make laws that lift the poor man into his just +deserts, while the lawless rich shall feel the spur of oppression as +his meeted judgment. Then shall the name of El Capitan stand beside +that of Crespo, the mountain lion!" +</P> + +<P> +As might have been expected, this bombastic speech was frequently +interrupted with wild applause, especially when the orator compared +himself to the late president of the republic. In one respect, at +least, the harangue of El Capitan was apt. Crespo, like himself, was +of humble birth and very large of stature. Whether he would equal the +ex-president in other ways remained to be seen. Crespo was the idol of +his brave followers, who were a dashing, picturesque soldiery, that the +inhabitants of Venezuela looked upon very much as the Parisians must +have looked with awe upon Napoleon's Mamelukes. +</P> + +<P> +The story of this Venezuelan conqueror is a most interesting one. +Following the rule of three or four presidents and dictators who +succeeded the noted Blancos[<A NAME="chap21fn1text"></A><A HREF="#chap21fn1">1</A>]—there were two of these, father and +son—were three or four presidents and dictators whose main object +seemed to be to rob the government of all the money they could, and +then flee from the country. Such proceedings gave the right man an +excuse and an opportunity to rebel. This man was General Crespo, who +with seven hundred followers set out to conquer the country. You have +read history, know how the ambitious Pizarro, in the stormy days of +conquest following the discovery of America by Columbus, overthrew the +empire of the Incas with a handful of followers—only thirteen at the +start. Crespo did better than that, for with only seven men he made +himself president of a country more than twice as large as Spain and +Portugal together, while I am glad to be able to say there was less of +bloodshed and far less of inhuman sacrifice of innocent lives than in +the case of the conqueror of the Incas. +</P> + +<P> +I cannot refrain from giving the following story as typical of the man: +His half-wild followers needed arms, and there was no manufactory to +replenish them. In this extremity, when almost any other leader must +have faltered, Crespo gave the order for his men to strip their bodies +naked to the belt, and cover them with a liberal coating of grease. In +this shape they were to charge upon an encampment of the enemy +numbering more than six to one. This was to be done under cover of +darkness, and as they ran through the camp each man was to hold his +left hand straight out from his body. If it came in contact with a man +wearing a shirt he was to overpower him and seize his firearms. If the +body was like his own, he was to know it was a friend, and to keep on. +In this wild, impressive manner less than three hundred half-naked men, +armed only with their short knives, routed and disarmed over three +thousand troops, comprising the flower of the government's army. +</P> + +<P> +It will be noticed that El Capitan's appeal was personal rather than +patriotic. Like many another Venezuelan revolutionist, he was fighting +for selfish purposes, but his barbaric followers did not stop to +consider this. Some one, with a memory of other days, asked concerning +the liberation of El Mocho, when El Capitan replied: +</P> + +<P> +"El Mocho is not to be trusted," meaning, no doubt, in his mind that he +did not propose to give such a dangerous rival opportunity to be in his +way. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie felt that he had learned enough to show him his path of duty. +Every moment was precious if he would warn Don Isadora of his peril, +and he had no desire to leave the well-meaning don to the hands of this +mountain outlaw. So he at once began his ascent of the bluff, which he +found extremely difficult. But he accomplished the feat in safety, to +find Jack and the Venezuelans anxiously awaiting him. A few words +sufficed to explain the situation to them, when they heartily agreed +with him that it was best for them to hasten to the plantation of the +don as quickly as possible. +</P> + +<P> +"I judge from what I heard while I was leaving my perch that El Capitan +is expecting another body of his followers to join him this side of Don +Isadora's. This division comes from the way of San Carlos. If it is +half as large as the force now under him he will lead a formidable army +against the don." +</P> + +<P> +"A mere rabble," said Riva. "Don Isadora has some trained soldiers +under him." +</P> + +<P> +By this time the four were riding silently away, being careful to move +as cautiously as they could. Riva again led the way, but Ronie and +Jack were close behind him, while the younger Venezuelan kept as near +to them as he could. In this manner the return journey to the don's +plantation was speedily made, and without being discovered by the enemy. +</P> + +<P> +As may be expected, the wealthy planter was profuse in his thanks for +the information they gave him, and he began to prepare for the enemy at +once, with a confidence in his ability to defeat the other that was +sublime. As much as Ronie would have liked to remain and see the +outcome of the affair, he felt it was his duty to start immediately to +find Colonel Marchand. Don Isadora seemed to understand that it was +the proper course for the scouts to pursue, so he offered no objections. +</P> + +<P> +As our little party rode out of the grounds, having left their +prisoners under the don's care, they saw that he had mustered his +entire forces, numbering fully a hundred men, all of whom were armed +with Mausers, pistols and short knives. +</P> + +<P> +"El Capitan will be the one surprised this time," remarked Ronie to his +companions. "I really wish we could stay and see the fun." +</P> + +<P> +Little did any one of the quartet dream of the amount of "fun" in +warlike earnest that he was to take part in before they should get +beyond the don's big estate. +</P> + +<BR> + +<P CLASS="footnote"> +<A NAME="chap21fn1"></A> +[<A HREF="#chap21fn1text">1</A>] Bolivar the "Liberator" was followed by others who managed the +affairs of Venezuela very satisfactorily, until in 1846 two political +parties formed. These were styled the "Liberals" and the +"Conservatives," and trouble increased swiftly. In 1859 Guzman Blanco +became the head of the stronger party, holding his sway until 1864, +when he was succeeded by a rival. In less than ten years, however, his +son came to the front, and, more powerful than his father, he made +himself president, with all the prerogatives of a dictator. This +office he held until 1884, when Crespo became president. Still the +hold of Blanco was not broken, and two years later he reassumed the +reins of government, but in 1890 his successor was defeated, and he +suffered a loss of his good name. In fact, a complete change of heart +for the family which had been dominant in affairs for over thirty years +followed. His name was stripped from one of the States where it had +been placed, and the public statues he had caused to be erected were +torn down, and much of the really good work he had done was destroyed. +But these radical denunciations could not remove the name of the +pompous leader from the historic pages of Venezuela, and it is well to +be so, for with all his shortcomings he did much for the rising +republic, though his stalwart figure is the landmark of a stormy +period.—AUTHOR. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap22"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +A FIGHT WITH THE GUERRILLAS. +</H4> + +<P> +Our scouts had gone about a mile, and Ronie was riding slightly in +advance, when he became aware of the approach of a body of horsemen +coming at a leisurely trot. In a moment he signaled for his companions +to stop. +</P> + +<P> +"We cannot avoid meeting them," he said, "and no doubt they are a part +of El Capitan's army. We have started too late to escape them. Is +there any path turning off from the road that we can turn into, Riva?" +</P> + +<P> +"None, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"Then we must turn aside here. Quick! push your horses back into the +forest, making as little noise and disturbance as you can." +</P> + +<P> +They were so successful in this work that before the approaching riders +had come into sight they were all safely ambushed where they could peer +out upon the passers-by without being seen, except by some scrutinizing +eye. Ronie and Jack sat in their saddles, side by side, while Riva and +his companion were only slightly removed. As the sound of the horsemen +indicated their close proximity, our hero parted the bushes enough to +enable him to obtain a good view of the road. +</P> + +<P> +"If our horses will only keep quiet," he began, "there is a——" +</P> + +<P> +Ronie's attention, in the midst of his speech, had become fastened upon +the foremost of the approaching riders, so his companions never knew +what he was about to say. Nor did he speak until the horsemen were +within half a dozen yards of them. The body of men were riding two and +two, and what had arrested his eyes was the sight of the nearest rider +in the lead. +</P> + +<P> +"It must be—it is Harrie!" he whispered. +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad!" responded Jack, who had been watching as eagerly and closely +as his companion. +</P> + +<P> +"He is lashed upon the horse, and his hands tied behind him. What does +it mean?" +</P> + +<P> +Jack had no time to reply, but the situation was plain to both. The +horsemen were a portion of El Capitan's followers, and were on their +way to attack the don. Could they stand idle there and see Harrie +taken to some fate they could not understand? Ronie's impetuous +temperament would not permit it. He believed a sudden attack, a few +shots, and the unsuspecting enemy could be routed, and their friend +rescued. Jack must have been revolving the same daring scheme in his +mind, for at this critical moment he nudged Ronie, whispering: +</P> + +<P> +"Ready when you say the word, sergeant." +</P> + +<P> +Our hero spoke hastily to Riva and his companion, who quickly +comprehended what was wanted of them. Then the clear command of the +young sergeant broke the stillness of the lonely scene: +</P> + +<P> +"Ready, men, fire!" +</P> + +<P> +In the twinkling of an eye the flashes of the Mausers lightened the +night, and three of the leading riders reeled in their seats, while +sudden commotion took place among the others. +</P> + +<P> +"Forward—charge!" thundered Ronie, setting the example by dashing +furiously from his covert. "Look sharp, Harrie; we are here to save +you." +</P> + +<P> +The animal bestridden by the young engineer began to snort and plunge +excitedly, but Ronie was soon at its bit. His comrades were as swiftly +charging upon the surprised insurgents, who, no doubt thinking they had +been attacked by superior numbers, broke and retreated in wild disorder. +</P> + +<P> +"Give them a parting shot, lads!" cried Jack, who, in his adventurous +career had led more than one regiment upon an enemy. +</P> + +<P> +The Mausers spoke right merrily, the reports mingling with the yells of +the discomfited rebels, who fled down the road as fast as they could +make their steeds go. +</P> + +<P> +In the midst of this rout and confusion Ronie freed Harrie, but he had +barely accomplished this before the thunder of horses' hoofs down the +road suddenly increased in volume, and loud shouts reached their ears. +The clatter of retreating horses abruptly stopped, and it was apparent +to the scouts that the insurgents had come to a stand. +</P> + +<P> +"El Capitan is on the road," declared Ronie. "He is rallying his men. +Come on, boys! We can do no better than to return to the don's. Ha! +who comes here? Halt! Who comes?" +</P> + +<P> +"A friend from Don Isadora," was the prompt reply. "Word came to him +of a party of rebels taking an American prisoner to El Capitan, and he +sent me to warn you." +</P> + +<P> +"In good time, seņor. We have saved our friend. Hark! Yonder riders +are El Capitan's hornets. Back to the estate, and we will go with you." +</P> + +<P> +There being no need of silence now, the six horsemen rode back to the +estate at a furious gait, the messenger going ahead when they had +nearly reached the avenue leading to the building, so as to inform the +don of the approach of friends. He hailed them with hearty gladness, +but quickly prepared to meet the expected onset of the enemy. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and his companions having decided to lend their assistance to the +defenders of the estate, Harrie asked for a rifle, that he might join +his friends. This was soon forthcoming, and while they waited for the +attack of the mountain rabble he found opportunity to say to Ronie: +</P> + +<P> +"I don't know how glad I am to see you, for I have supposed you were +drowned on the night we started to escape from the <I>Libertador</I>. How +is it I find you here?" +</P> + +<P> +"It is a long story, Harrie. I will tell it at the first opportunity. +Jack and I have seen our share of excitement, and it looks as if it +wasn't over yet. Did you escape from the prison at San Carlos?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not through my own efforts. An order came from General Castro for me +to be set at liberty. This was done, and a small escort started with +me to find the regiment of Colonel Marchand. Only think he is +somewhere in this vicinity. We were surprised by a body of rebels, who +put my guard to rout and made me a prisoner. I do not know what would +have become of me if you had not rescued me as you did. Hark! the foes +are coming!" +</P> + +<P> +It was a part of the don's plan to hold back his men, and not to fire +upon the enemy until they should come into close quarters, so no +response was given to the shouts and shots of the oncoming horde, whose +leader expected to carry everything before him by storm. A tempest of +lead followed his command to attack, but not a man was injured on the +estate. Thinking that an easy victory lay before him, El Capitan then +ordered his men to the double-quick. +</P> + +<P> +Don Isadora proved that he had had some military experience, as his men +were not only all well armed, but they stood coolly at bay waiting for +his word to open the fight on their part. Even Ronie began to get +impatient before his stentorian voice cried: +</P> + +<P> +"Now, men, mow them down like grass—fire!" +</P> + +<P> +The entire side of the estate toward the road was illuminated by a +sheet of flame as his followers obeyed the sharp command, and it was +like mowing a swath through grass to see how the motley mob led by the +"mountain lion" went down. The roar of rifles was followed by wild +shouts and shrieks of pain, while those who had escaped the deadly fire +beat a hasty retreat. +</P> + +<P> +"Follow them up, men!" cried the don, but he had barely uttered the +order before a bullet from a stray shot hit him, and staggering back, +he fell into the arms of Jack Greenland, while he murmured: +</P> + +<P> +"I am a dead man!" +</P> + +<P> +It was a sad occurrence. The moment the Venezuelans found their leader +had fallen, confusion and disorder reigned. +</P> + +<P> +"Is he fatally hurt?" asked Ronie, anxiously, as Jack bent over him. +</P> + +<P> +"I cannot tell yet, sergeant. The wound is bleeding profusely. Some +of you help me get him where I can examine him more closely. Is there +a surgeon about the place?" +</P> + +<P> +No one seemed to know. But half a dozen lusty fellows lifted the +wounded don and bore him into the house, while others stared after them +in complete dismay. +</P> + +<P> +"El Capitan is rallying," said Ronie. "It's too bad for us to be in +this condition. He will sweep the place, now the don has fallen." +</P> + +<P> +"Why not take the lead, Ronie?" asked Harrie. "Some one must, or we +are all lost." +</P> + +<P> +"I am not sure they would follow me. Here comes Seņor Riva." +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant Rand, Don Isadora begs me to tell you that he is better, but +is not able to lead his men. He beseeches of you to do this." +</P> + +<P> +There was no opportunity for hesitation. El Capitan was already +advancing for his second attack. +</P> + +<P> +"Help me rally them, Riva, and I will do it," replied Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +Swiftly the word was carried along the ranks, when new life was +enthused into the men, who were really brave fellows. The young +sergeant decided that prompt action would be the most successful, and +to meet El Capitan halfway would show him that the forces on the +plantation were alive to the situation. So the word for an advance was +passed along the line. It met with a hearty response, and as Ronie +sprang forward with his rousing command he found himself supported by a +determined force. +</P> + +<P> +"Open fire—charge!" +</P> + +<P> +The volley of shots was succeeded by loud cheers from the Venezuelans, +who bounded forward under the lead of their gallant champion. +</P> + +<P> +"Forward!" cried Sergeant Rand. +</P> + +<P> +Harrie was close behind him, and so was Riva Baez, all three having +dismounted from their horses as soon as returning to the estate. A +random volley from the rebels answered their first fire, and at the +second, in spite of all that the mountain chief could do, his followers +fled in wild disorder, disappearing from the scene with a rapidity that +was surprising. +</P> + +<P> +That night, at the very outset of his campaign, El Capitan received his +first defeat. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap23"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +THE NEWS AT LA GUAYRA. +</H4> + +<P> +Great rejoicing reigned at the plantation of Don Isadora following the +complete rout of the enemy, and this joy was increased by the fact that +the don had not received a fatal wound. In fact, it was believed with +careful nursing he would soon be about again. As he deserved, Ronie +was the hero of the occasion, while his friends shared with him the +praise showered upon them by one and all. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as the news of the victory had been carried to the master of +the estate he sent for our hero, and was lavish in his commendation, +declaring that he had been instrumental in saving them all from the +brutal clutches of El Capitan. But, as pleasant as all this hearty +applauding was, Ronie was glad to break away from his admirers in order +to be alone with Harrie and Jack. He and the former had much to say, +all of which was listened to with sincere interest by the latter. +Harrie explained how he and Francisco had drifted about in their boat, +looking in vain for their companions until daylight, when they had +sighted land, and gone ashore. Soon after, they were captured and +thrown into prison, as Ronie knew. Then came the unexpected release, +the journey to find Colonel Marchand, the capture by El Capitan's +followers, and the rescue by his friends, which seemed the most +miraculous part of his adventures. Ronie, in turn, told what had +befallen Jack and himself, saying in conclusion: +</P> + +<P> +"There is only one thing more that troubles me. If I knew mother was +safe I could bear this troublesome waiting without murmuring. But I am +afraid some fearful fate has overtaken her. I shall not rest until I +know the truth." +</P> + +<P> +"You know I am with you, Ronie," said Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lad; you can count on old Jack Greenland to stand by you both, +through thick and thin." +</P> + +<P> +"God bless you, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, clasping one hand, while Harrie +seized the other, echoing the words of his friend: +</P> + +<P> +"God bless you, Jack; a nobler soul never lived." +</P> + +<P> +When the three had hastily reviewed the troubles they had passed +through they decided unanimously to return to Colonel Marchand with +such haste as was consistent with safety. They had important +intelligence to bear, beside the fact that El Capitan was upon his +track. Under the changed circumstances, they decided to take the +captives with them, and of course Riva and his friend would keep along. +While the don was very loath to see them depart, he knew it was their +duty to go, and so he offered to send an escort of fifty men to conduct +them on their way as far as might be deemed necessary. At first +thought, Ronie felt like declining this, but he finally asked for an +escort of ten men, who went with them until noon of the second day, +when they turned back and the scouts kept on, reaching the encampment +of the Venezuelan regiment that night in safety. +</P> + +<P> +I need not describe the reception accorded our heroes by the impetuous +colonel, any more than I need dwell upon the scenes that followed. The +campaign had now opened in deadly earnest, and weeks of great activity +and considerable fighting and skirmishing ensued. El Capitan rallying +after a few days from his discomfiture at Isadora sought in every way +to disconcert and capture the doughty Venezuelan regiment. In his +efforts he was encouraged on every hand by the reports of the success +of the insurgents in almost every section. First intelligence came of +the capture of a town on the island of Margarita by the audacious +cruiser <I>Bolivar</I>, erstwhile the <I>Libertador</I>, and earlier the <I>Ban +Righ</I>. Close upon this, Castro's troops under Castillo were defeated +near San Antonio. In May, reports of insurrections came in from every +quarter. Castro suppressed two newspapers which had become pronounced +against him, and in his lack of sufficient funds to carry on the war, +levied a million bolivars from the widow of Guzman Blanco, the former +president. Then the revolution broke out in the State of Bolivar, and +after five days' fighting the president of the State was driven out of +the capital. In June General Matos, encouraged by the success of his +followers, announced a provincial government, with himself as president. +</P> + +<P> +This bit of news reached Colonel Marchand at the close of a warm day's +fight with his old-time enemy, El Capitan. As usual, it had been a +draw game, and the colonel was sitting in his hammock feeling in +anything but an amiable mood. +</P> + +<P> +"By the soul of Bolivar!" he exclaimed, slapping his knee by way of +emphasis, "he is like a ground mole, that runs for its hole the moment +an enemy is in sight. I wish we might meet a foe worthy of our steel. +Orderly, send for Sergeant Rand at once." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was with his friends, discussing the outcome of the recent +meeting with the enemy, and deliberating upon their own fortunes since +they had become comrades under Castro, when this order was given him. +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder what this means?" he exclaimed. "Say to Colonel Marchand I +will report at once." +</P> + +<P> +Upon reaching the officer, the young sergeant found that he was anxious +to send a message to President Castro, and at the same time to +reconnoiter the country between them and the capital. +</P> + +<P> +"Castro must take the field himself," declared our hero, in the course +of the conversation. "If this growth of the insurgents is allowed to +continue much longer his cause will become hopeless." +</P> + +<P> +"By the soul of Bolivar! you are right, Sergeant Rand, and it is just +what I want you to say to Castro himself. You can do it and not offend +him, while I could not. You will go to him at once, taking as many men +as you choose. I have only to instruct you to start as soon as may be." +</P> + +<P> +"It shall be as you say, colonel. I desire to have only three +companions, Seņor Riva Baez and my countrymen, Harrie Mannering and +Jack Greenland." +</P> + +<P> +"As you say, sergeant. Here are the dispatches I wish you to hand to +President Castro personally." +</P> + +<P> +Handing this package to our hero, the colonel offered no further delay. +With feelings akin to gladness, Ronie returned to his expectant +companions. +</P> + +<P> +"I hail it as good news," he said. "We are to meet the 'Little +Captain,' President Castro, with what haste we can. I say we, for I +have the honor of being selected by Colonel Marchand to choose such +companions as I wish and hasten to the capital. You know whom I +select." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was really pleased with this commission, as it would enable him +to enter a wider range of inquiry concerning his mother than he had +been situated to do so far. Thoughts of her were last in his mind as +he lay down to rest after a day's campaigning and the first to arouse +him in the morning. +</P> + +<P> +"Poor mother! how I pity you, and wish that I knew where you are!" +</P> + +<P> +Within an hour the little party was ready to start, deciding to go by +the way of La Guayra, which they reached without adventure, This +old-fashioned Spanish town is the chief seaport of Venezuela, as well +as the entrance way to the capital, situated about five miles inland +behind the series of mountain peaks whose chain runs down to the very +edge of the water. Our young engineers did not fail to notice, as they +looked out over the harbor, the close affinity to the same cerulean hue +that touched both sea and sky, so it was difficult to tell where they +met on the horizon, and blended like a curtain of the same soft +texture. Under the reflections the vessels appeared to rest flat on +the mirror-like surface, in the words of the poet: +</P> + +<P CLASS="poem"> +"Like a painted ship upon a painted sea."<BR> +</P> + +<BR> + +<P> +The most conspicuous spot about La Guayra is the little fortress made +famous by Charles Kingsley, in his "Westward Ho," as the prison house +of his heroine, the Rose of Devon. This was the residence of the +Spanish governors in the days when Venezuela was a dependency of Spain. +Past this ancient point of defense against attacks from the sea and the +winds lead those three ways of travel to the capital, aptly +illustrating the changes of centuries; first, but of least importance +now, the mule path worn no doubt by the natives in their passages back +and forth; second, the wagon track, cut, it may be, when the continent +was young; and finally, that iron-banded course of modern construction, +the railroad. Caracas is embowered among the mountains three thousand +feet above the streets of La Guayra. +</P> + +<P> +Their arrival was soon after the bombardment of Macuto by Venezuelan +ships on account of an outbreak there. As this place was near to La +Guayra, great excitement was prevailing in the latter place. In fact, +the inhabitants everywhere were in an uproar. News came that General +Riera, who, it will be remembered, was a passenger on the <I>Libertador</I> +when our heroes were on that vessel, had captured La Vela de Coro, +while the insurgents had also captured Barquisemoto, and Riera had +sacked Coro, the capital of the State of Falcon. +</P> + +<P> +Our party did not continue their journey to the capital, on account of +the fact that Castro was toward Barcelona, where the revolution had +become centered. With this bit of news came a rumor which, if it bore +but a light bearing on the international contention focused on +Venezuela, awakened an anxious interest on the part of Ronie Rand and +his friends. Riva Baez first learned of it from a native who had come +down from the mountainous districts. This man said an American woman +was held by the insurgents as a hostage of war. He could not give the +name of the woman, but believed she had not been long in the country. +</P> + +<P> +"It is mother!" exclaimed Ronie, as Riva related the story to him. "I +must see this man at once." +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry, seņor, but he disappeared before I started to find you. +Knowing how you would feel about it, and not being able to find you at +once, I went to speak to him again, fearing he would slip away. He was +gone, and no one could tell me where he had left for. I believe he is +a spy." +</P> + +<P> +"Do you not know of some one who saw him?" +</P> + +<P> +"I will see what I can learn, Sergeant Rand." +</P> + +<P> +"Thank you, Riva. Meanwhile, the rest of us will do a little looking +around. Describe the fellow as minutely as possible." +</P> + +<P> +This Riva did, with the graphic speech peculiar to him, and then the +four went out to look for the missing man. In the midst of this +unsuccessful search Ronie learned that Castro had returned to La Guayra. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap24"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXIV. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +INTERVIEW WITH GENERAL CASTRO. +</H4> + +<P> +A soldier's first duty is always to obey his superior in command. Upon +hearing of General Castro's return to La Guayra, Ronie immediately +abandoned his search, leaving his companions to carry it on, while he +sought the president. He found him without difficulty, for he was +already besieged with callers. But our hero had only to send in his +passport from Colonel Marchand to receive an urgent request to come at +once. +</P> + +<P> +He was a little disappointed in the personal appearance of the man who +had become so prominent in the affairs, and whose name he had heard +spoken more often than any dozen others since he had come to Venezuela. +He was below medium height, of rather slight build, and moved with a +limp in one limb, caused by a wound he had received in battle. His eye +was the feature which bespoke most the man, and as Ronie stood before +him he seemed to read him at a glance. +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant Rand," he greeted, in a hearty manner, which quickly won the +American boy's friendship, "I welcome you gladly to La Guayra. Colonel +Marchand sends his message by you?" +</P> + +<P> +"Here are your dispatches, General Castro. I trust they will prove +valuable to you." +</P> + +<P> +"Be seated, sergeant, while I read them." +</P> + +<P> +Ten minutes of silence followed, during which Ronie had ample time to +study the man before him, who seemed absorbed in the written messages +just placed in his hands. Then he laid the last one down, and said: +</P> + +<P> +"If I am not mistaken, you are the young American the colonel spoke of +in such laudable terms in his last. It seems by what he says now that +you have not let your reputation suffer by more recent conduct. It was +your friend I sent to have liberated from the penitentiary at San +Carlos, was it not?" +</P> + +<P> +"It was, general." +</P> + +<P> +"Is he in La Guayra?" +</P> + +<P> +"He is." +</P> + +<P> +"I wish he had come with you, for I am heartily glad to meet two such +allies in a time when the whole world seems against me. Forgive me for +saying that, as I would not have you think I distrust your own +republic. But tell me of what you have seen in the West, Sergeant +Rand. I am glad to get such information as I believe you can give me +of the hotbed of rebellion in my poor country. Take your time, and do +not be afraid to speak of yourself." +</P> + +<P> +Then Ronie described such portions of the events that had come under +his observation as he thought the other would be pleased to hear, +referring to himself very modestly, while General Castro listened with +great interest, now and then asking some question or expressing +admiration at the conduct of Colonel Marchand and his regiment. He was +especially pleased with the rout given El Capitan at the estate of Don +Isadora, and he made Ronie describe the affair so minutely that he was +forced to speak of the part he had taken. +</P> + +<P> +"I have heard nothing so pleasing," said the president. "You shall be +rewarded for your gallant conduct. I am again saying that I am sorry +this friend, or these American friends of yours, did not accompany you +here. I will send for them." +</P> + +<P> +"I am afraid you will not find them readily, as they are in search of a +man in La Guayra that we want to find very much." Then he hastened to +add: "But this is a personal matter, General Castro, and you will +pardon me for introducing it to you. I did not intend to." +</P> + +<P> +"What concerns my comrades, concerns me," cried Castro, with possibly +more vehemence than he had intended. "Tell me all about it, Sergeant +Rand." +</P> + +<P> +Thus urged, Ronie explained what he knew in regard to his mother, the +president listening attentively to every word. When he had finished, +the latter said: +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant, this is a grave matter. To say nothing of my feelings for +you, I cannot afford to let this affair escape my notice. It might +easily be construed to mean an offense against your government. Have +you communicated with Minister Bowen?" +</P> + +<P> +"No, General Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"I should advise you to do so as early as may be. But in the meantime +we will leave no stone unturned to find her." +</P> + +<P> +"You are very kind, general. What would you suggest that we do first?" +</P> + +<P> +"Find the man who had her photograph, and make him tell all he knows." +</P> + +<P> +"I have regretted, general, that we did not return and do that." +</P> + +<P> +"You were hardly prepared to do it, as I understand your condition." +</P> + +<P> +"True, General Castro. We were glad to escape with our lives, and we +have been kept escaping ever since." +</P> + +<P> +"You have proved lively enough in the race. You spoke of that young De +Caprian. What do you know of him?" +</P> + +<P> +"I believe he is as true a patriot as you have in Venezuela," replied +Ronie, boldly. +</P> + +<P> +"I would not let anybody else say that," declared Castro, frankly. +"You think I have misjudged the man, Sergeant Rand?" +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps I ought not to say it, but he appeared honest to us." +</P> + +<P> +"You would like to see him set free?" +</P> + +<P> +"Not if he is an enemy to your government, General Castro." +</P> + +<P> +"I understand. When you go to San Carlos to get your man I will send +by you the papers which shall give him his freedom. I will try him a +while, and if he proves faithful his mother shall be given her liberty. +I have given orders to see that she is given all the privileges +possible under the circumstances. I have been very much interested in +your intelligence, Sergeant Rand, and I trust I shall meet your friends +when you come again." +</P> + +<P> +Taking this as a hint that the interview was ended, Ronie saluted in +military style, and was in the act of withdrawing when Castro said: +</P> + +<P> +"Sergeant, I wish to ask you a question, and trust you will answer it +in the same good faith in which it is asked. What do you believe would +be the most effective thing for me to do toward quelling this rebellion +in the vicinity from which you have come?" +</P> + +<P> +The answer to be made came as quick as a flash into Ronie's mind, and +without stopping to consider how it might sound expressed in so many +words, he said: +</P> + +<P> +"Take the field yourself, General Castro!" +</P> + +<P> +If this reply suited him or not, the president did not show it by the +look upon his features, as he said, simply: +</P> + +<P> +"Good-day, Sergeant Rand." +</P> + +<P> +While in doubt as to the effect his words would have upon the energetic +president of the republic, Ronie was pleased in a large measure with +his interview. He regretted that Harrie was not with him, and he +resolved that the next time he would not go alone. Upon second +thought, he could not see that there would be any occasion for him to +call again. Then he drove these thoughts from his mind, and thinking +of his mother and what her fate might be, he began to look anxiously +for his companions. +</P> + +<P> +About half an hour later he found his friends, but they had to report a +failure in regard to finding the unknown man they had hoped to find. +Riva Baez, as well as Harrie and Jack, listened with interest to +Ronie's account of his meeting with General Castro. +</P> + +<P> +"I have faith to believe he will help us find your mother," said +Harrie, "and with his assistance we cannot fail." +</P> + +<P> +"Unless we are too late," replied Ronie. "I cannot bear this +inactivity." +</P> + +<P> +"I have always found it good policy to 'make haste slowly,'" declared +Jack, quoting an old saw. "Meanwhile let us see how Castro takes to +your advice, sergeant." +</P> + +<P> +"To think that I should have dared to speak in that way," said Ronie, +who feared he had overstepped his position so far as to incur the +displeasure of his superior. But he was speedily disarmed of this +fear, for the following day General Castro came out with a proclamation +in which he defined his purpose of taking the field personally, and of +leading the campaign in the West. An hour later a summons came for our +three Americans to visit the commander, and they met with a welcome +that proved the president had only the kindliest feelings toward them. +They were urged to accompany his army, and were only barred from being +offered a commission from the fact that General Castro did not wish to +curtail any of the liberties they might have if they were not regularly +attached to his forces. +</P> + +<P> +"You can go as far as Valencia with me, and from thence I will send you +an escort to San Carlos, so you may find your man if you can, and also +see that young De Caprian is given his liberty. To prove my good faith +with him, I will hold a commission for him, if he wishes to accept it." +</P> + +<P> +Thanking the general for the kindly interest in them, our three +withdrew, certain that at last something definite was being done. The +next day the entire force moved toward Valencia, and they accompanied +the Venezuelans, Riva also going along. +</P> + +<P> +The week that followed was one of great activity; but very little was +accomplished that seemed to forward matters with the impatient Ronie +and his friends. Leaving Castro's army at Valencia, they reached San +Carlos to find that the bird they were after had flown. As near as +they could learn, he had disappeared the morning our heroes had been +driven away, and that he had not been seen since he had taken them +across the bay in the boat. It was currently believed that he had +either been shot or drowned. In this way was lost what might have +proved an important clew in their search for Ronie's mother. +</P> + +<P> +Their disappointment was brightened somewhat by the joy with which +Francisco hailed his liberty. He embraced his American friends, and +showered upon them praises for their action in his behalf. When he was +told about his mother, he grew less demonstrative, but learning that +she was unharmed, with a promise of good protection, he recovered +exuberance of spirits. +</P> + +<P> +"I shall accept any commission General Castro will bestow upon me," he +said, "and I will show him my fealty to him and the true government of +my country. I am impatient to see him." +</P> + +<P> +Knowing nothing could be gained by remaining longer at San Carlos, our +heroes returned to the army at once. Having learned that he had +removed to Ocumare, they headed thither, learning all along the way +that the insurgents were everywhere successful, until it seemed as if +the government was doomed. These accounts were rendered more hopeless +to the cause by the fact that before they could reach him, Castro had +begun his retreat toward Caracas. +</P> + +<P> +In the face of this, he issued his decree of amnesty to all insurgents +laying down arms within forty days. +</P> + +<P> +"Unless he makes some more decided stand and wins a decided victory to +offset all this noise on the other side, Castro will have no government +for them to lay down their arms to," said Jack, grimly. "Of course it +isn't my dish that's cooking, but I feel just like saying so much." +</P> + +<P> +"General Castro will act decisively when the time comes, according to +his idea," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +In the midst of this uncertainty word reached them from La Guayra that +the cables were to be cut, and that Minister Bowen had sent to +Washington for warships. +</P> + +<P> +Castro's next movement was to take charge of his troops at Guaicaipuro, +and to establish his government there. Then followed the week's battle +with the insurgents led by Mendoza at La Gloria, which was to prove the +turning point in the war. Colonel Marchand's regiment of volunteers +was there, and in the thickest of the fight our heroes had ample +opportunity to prove the metal of which American soldiers are made. It +was a bitter fight, the more trying as it was made with +bush-fighters—scattered bodies of men who fought after the style of +the North American Indians, from behind trees, or whatever cover was at +hand. Fortunately, our friends escaped without a scratch, though +Colonel Marchand received an ugly wound that was likely to drive him +from the field for a time. +</P> + +<P> +His was not the only regiment that covered itself with glory, for there +was another, led by a boyish captain, who seemed everywhere in the +thickest of the fight. This little band gained the high-water mark of +the battle, and it was that more than any other which turned the tide +of the struggle and made of La Victoria a victory indeed. The name of +that gallant leader, who received special mention in the list of honor, +was Francisco de Caprian. General Castro had no longer any reason to +doubt his loyalty to Venezuela, and the president greeted him with the +promise that his conduct had chased away the shadows upon his family +name. +</P> + +<P> +The result of this victory for the government at La Victoria was such +that Matos, the head of the insurgents, gave up active command, while +Castro prepared for a triumphal return to Caracas. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap25"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXV. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +THE SPY OF CARACAS. +</H4> + +<P> +Immediately after the victory at La Victoria our three Americans were +forced to part with Francisco, who was to return to the capital with +General Castro, while they were called to Don Isadora's estate, the +owner thinking he had got on the track of a clew to the whereabouts of +Mrs. Rand. The don received them with open arms, he having fully +recovered from the effects of his wounds, but the errand proved +fruitless, and they felt obliged to abandon the quest in this vicinity. +</P> + +<P> +So they again found themselves in La Guayra. But their stay here was +short. Ronie was anxious to get to Caracas, that he might consult with +Mr. Bowen, to see if nothing could be done by him toward finding his +mother. General Castro was also to join with him, and altogether he +felt very hopeful, though aware that his mother might be beyond his +power of help before this. But he was a brave youth, and he resolved +to do all he could and hope for the best. +</P> + +<P> +It has been said that the capital of Venezuela, while only five miles +inland from its port, La Guayra, is situated in the mountains, three +thousand feet above the seashore. The railroad which connects the two +coils about this rugged ascent like a steel lariat thrown by a dextrous +hand, now winding in and out where some bottomless abyss is encircled +like a huge letter U upon the landscape, or anon clinging upon the rim +of some sharp-pointed rock, where the same train creeps around the +angle, showing mortal fear by its snail-like pace. Another has aptly +compared it to a spider's thread strung from crag to crag. Time and +again the engineer can look back from his cab into the windows of the +rear coach, while between him and the object of his gaze yawns a +rock-walled well hundreds of feet in depth. +</P> + +<P> +The young engineers were standing on the rear platform, watching with +admiring gaze the wild scene stretching away from their feet. +</P> + +<P> +"Isn't it grand, magnificent!" exclaimed Harrie. "I never saw its +equal. Did ever you, Jack?" +</P> + +<P> +"Nothing to surpass it, lad; not even the Alpine Pass of the Colorado. +Where can one find a grander combination of sea, plain, valley and +mountain? And whoever saw a greener plain on a bluer sea?" +</P> + +<P> +"Or a sky quite as serene," added Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +Ronie was fain to agree with his enthusiastic companions, while they +admired together the rugged panorama falling away from them to the +foothills trending from the base of the mountain like the huge roots of +some great tree which had burst from their imprisonment in the earth +and stood out as the bold supports of the mighty burden they upheld. +Between these ridges, or leaping from their gnarled sides in silvery +cascades, numerous streams of water made bright bands on the background +of gray and dark green. Below the mountains, groves of royal palms, +standing with park-like regularity and so far apart that their white +trunks shone like pillars cased in silver foil, were to be seen. Out +from among these gleamed the white and yellow roofs of the cottages of +the people. Beyond these glistened the white line of breakers, forever +coming and forever going, leaving only a chalk mark to tell where they +have been but will never be again. Outside of this lay old ocean, +throbbing under the hot, fierce tropical sun like a hunted creature +panting to get its breath, but never resting. +</P> + +<P> +Still up, up, crept the iron conqueror, until it broke the veil of mist +in cloudland, up where the trees were jeweled with dewdrops and the +track reeked with the wine of the sky. At one place they could look +down into three thousand feet of space, and soon after their sight was +gladdened by the view of the valley on the other side and the thrice +welcome sight of Caracas. Again they were pleased by the happy +blending of art and nature, the beautiful country, the basin under its +stupendous rim, the city marked by the towers of its numerous churches, +the dazzling roofs of public buildings, the regular streets lined with +picturesque cottages, the gardens of white houses of the coffee +planters, and beyond more mountains. +</P> + +<P> +Caracas was founded by Diego de Losada in 1567, and named the "City of +Santiago de Leon de Caracas." The picturesque valley which forms its +site was the capital of the heroic tribe of natives known as "the +people of Caracas," which name was very appropriately given to the +capital of the race which after two hundred years of warfare succeeded +in annihilating the original owners of the soil. This long struggle +against the stronger power by the weaker forms one of the most glorious +pages in South American history, and scintillates with deeds of heroism +and human sacrifice. +</P> + +<P> +Now the ascent has been made, they find that the city is overlooked by +mountains smooth and bare of trees, but covered with a light-green +sward, except where some stream affords a band of a darker tint. The +clouds seem of more than northern fleeciness, and hang over the peaks +like smoke, or float lazily from valley to valley, giving varying hues +to the beautiful landscape. The climate is delightful; the first +impressions of the capital pleasing. +</P> + +<P> +Caracas has a population of about eighty thousand, it being the usage +that only one family shall occupy a house. It is a city of culture and +fashion, of public statues to scholars and artists, as well as +warriors, for not all of the history of this interesting republic is +filled with war. While a land of hotheaded people, whose career has +been largely filled with riots and revolutions, here and there are to +be found evidences of a high civilization, producing marked contracts +of the rival forces of man. +</P> + +<P> +What struck our energetic American as unexpected was the air of repose +which rested upon the scene, giving little hint of the excitement +reigning outside. Slowly along the streets, as if there was no +occasion for haste, moved trains of mules bearing on their backs bags +of coffee, or quite enveloped under huge bales of fodder, which had the +appearance at a distance of some huge, lifeless bulk upon legs. Then +there were bodies of foot soldiers, wearing blue uniforms with scarlet +trousers and facings, also moving with a deliberation which at least +bespoke their importance. This sight was enlivened by the appearance +of an open fiacre whirled along the street by a pair of small but fiery +horses, driven by a coachman from his high box seat, the gold trimmings +to his hat and coat rivaled for brightness by the ornaments on his top +boots. Evidently the carriage bore some person of importance in haste +to his destination. +</P> + +<P> +The cause of this undue haste, as well as the disturbance of the +equanimity of this everyday sight, was explained by the sounds of +another party approaching. Then, as the travelers upon the streets +moved with unaccustomed celerity to one side, a body of men mounted +upon high-stepping horses, strikingly caparisoned and carefully +groomed, appeared in sight, the riders presenting a bold effect in +their uniforms of white duck and high black boots. +</P> + +<P> +"The president's bodyguard," said Ronie. "General Castro and his +troops have returned, and we have got here just in the nick of time." +</P> + +<P> +"There is the general riding in the center," declared Harrie. "How the +people are cheering him! It cannot be that they knew of his coming so +soon. Shall we follow them?" +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps we might as well," said Ronie. "I suppose Francisco is in the +train somewhere. Ay, look, boys! there he comes. Doesn't he look +fine? He has the natural military bearing of his race. Well, I am +glad of his good fortune." +</P> + +<P> +With these words Ronie began to move along with the crowd which had +quickly collected, and cheering lustily began to surge ahead in the +direction taken by the martial train that now moved along the street +farther than they could look. It was not long before they found +themselves surrounded by a jostling, but good-natured, mob, each member +of which seemed determined to keep in sight of the marching column. +The band had now begun to play, and as the strains of martial music +filled the air, Ronie Rand was conscious of hearing a voice muttering +in a deep, sullen tone: +</P> + +<P> +"Curses upon him! His triumph shall be short. Soon shall the sons +of——" +</P> + +<P> +The rest, if spoken aloud, and the words given seemed to have been +uttered involuntarily, were lost to our hero, but he caught his breath +at what he had heard. It was not the import of the words, but the tone +of the speaker which caused such emotion that he could constrain +himself with difficulty from trying to break through the mob and find +him. It was the voice of Manuel Marlin, of San Carlos! +</P> + +<P> +So satisfied was Ronie of this fact that he immediately tried to push +his way forward so as to reach the man, whispering for his companions +to follow. But people in a crowd like that give away slowly, when they +can, and when Ronie had reached the spot where the other must have been +at that time he was missing. Nor could he find any trace of him. +</P> + +<P> +"I am sure it was he," he said to Harrie and Jack, as soon as he +explained his sudden action. "But he has slipped away from me." +</P> + +<P> +"Let's keep along. He will doubtless follow the throng," said Harrie. +So they moved with the spectators toward the most notable building in +Caracas, the Federal Palace, which is built around a great square +overflowing with flowers and fountains, and lighted by swinging +electric lights. The palace is lightly built, and though painted in +imitation of stone, looks like an airy castle which might be blown over +at the next flaw of wind. It is profusely ornamented with statues made +either of plaster of Paris or of wood painted so as to imitate marble. +If this gives the building an unstable appearance and given over to +frivolous amusements, it is in keeping with its environments, the +high-colored walls and open fronts of the adjoining buildings that help +to fill this American Paris, and it is by all odds the handsomest +building in the city. And, rather than given over to scenes of +frivolity and mimic life, here are the chambers of the two branches of +legislature, the different offices of the department of state, and the +reception hall of the president, in which is the national portrait +gallery. The dome of this chamber, which is two hundred feet in +length, and bears many pictures of warlike scenes, is painted with a +panorama of life-size figures depicting the last battle of the +Venezuelans against the Spaniards. It is really a work of artistic +merit. So, altogether, the Federal Palace is a building of substantial +business, and it has played an important part in the shifting affairs +of the republic. +</P> + +<P> +To Guzman Blanco, more than all others, does the city owe these public +buildings. These were originally convents or monasteries, until Guzman +overthrew the power of the church. The Federal Palace was one of these +church buildings, so was the present opera house and the university. +All of them seem well located for their new uses, and go to show that +the church must have had a strong hold on the wealth of the capital +before this daring adventurer overcame them. +</P> + +<P> +Anxious to get sight of this spy, if possible, Ronie and Harrie did not +try to get in so as to witness the president's reception, though Jack +did so, in the hope that he might find the man if he should dare to +remain with the crowd. But the rest of the day passed, however, +without bringing success to them, and the two young engineers were +standing near the entrance to one of those cathedrals which form such +an important portion of the buildings of the capital. They had barely +gained a position where they could watch the comers and goers without +being noticed themselves, when they were glad to see Captain Francisco +de Caprian approaching, with their old-time friend, Jack Greenland. +</P> + +<P> +Naturally, the countenance of the first was radiant with joyous +excitement. +</P> + +<P> +"It has been a great day for Caracas," he said. "President Castro has +reason to be proud of it, as nothing has happened to mar its perfect +harmony. Yet there is a rumor afloat—I know not how it got +started—that there is a secret enemy in the capital, a spy, waiting +for a favorable chance to strike a deadly blow at the hero himself." +</P> + +<P> +"I suppose efforts will be made to capture him?" said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Be assured of that. A handsome reward is offered. Oh, they will get +him, soon or late." +</P> + +<P> +Then a sigh escaped the lips of the handsome young officer, and he +murmured to himself rather than to his companions: +</P> + +<P> +"I would, dear father, you might have been spared to witness this day, +for I believe you would have rejoiced with the rest of us." Then, +suddenly remembering his companions, he said: "Forgive me, seņors, but +to me these very shadows of this building are sacred. It was here, in +the last revolution, my dear father, with nine others, made their final +stand and fought so good a fight that it was found necessary to build a +fire in the tower and smoke them out with the fumes of sulphur. Ay, it +was a desperate test for the ten," said Francisco, while his dark eyes +lighted with an intense light and his thin hand quivered spasmodically. +</P> + +<P> +"Did your father and his friends perish?" asked Harrie and Ronie, both +deeply interested in this simple narrative. +</P> + +<P> +"It was their only alternative, seņors, for to yield meant death and +torture. Father, let it be said to his credit, gave his companions +opportunity to surrender; but, let it be said to their credit, they +stood bravely together. Then, their last shot spent, and the fumes of +the drug rapidly overpowering them, they threw themselves from the +tower into the street. It is said they went downward to their fate +with clasped hands. I am glad I did not witness the sad sight. But I +believe a brighter day is dawning for poor Venezuela, and that her +brave defenders did not give their lives in vain." +</P> + +<P> +Our three friends were deeply touched with this pathetic story, related +in such gentle tones as to make it seem like some sweet vision rather +than one of grim war's bitter sacrifices. Looking beyond their heroic +companion, they were struck with the peacefulness of their +environments, so well in accord with the manner of the speaker, all +tending to soften the tragic interest of the scene of warlike and +heroic action. Where the ill-fated band of patriots, the last to make +a stand at that time, must have fallen, ran the sunken rails of the +tram cars, and in sight were the notion shops and confectionery stores, +where laughing, prattling children were wont to come to find the simple +toys and playthings to amuse them. At nighttime electric lights +illuminated with their dazzling splendor the now peaceful scene, while +seekers of religious promises wended their way softly in and out of the +old cathedral. +</P> + +<P> +"I am afraid I have made you sad, seņors, when there is so much to make +one happy. But I forgot that this is not for you, and that your heart +is heavy, Seņor Rand, over the fate of your poor mother. Let us hope +you, too, may soon find your cup of joy full to overflowing." +</P> + +<P> +"Have you heard how Colonel Marchand is?" asked Harrie, seeing that +Ronie did not feel like replying to their friend. +</P> + +<P> +"He is likely to recover, but his campaigning is doubtless over until +some time in the future. Come, seņors, I shall insist that you stop +with me to-night, and it is time you seek rest." +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap26"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVI. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +"IT IS MANUEL MARLIN!" +</H4> + +<P> +It was a beautiful morning, that which followed, and our friends were +astir early. Wandering out upon the streets, eager to learn if any new +tidings had come of the spy, they soon found themselves walking under +the refreshing shade of rows of ornamental trees. In following this +course, they came somewhat abruptly upon a plaza floored for a wide +space with rare mosaics, and lit at night by swinging electric lights. +</P> + +<P> +"This is the Plaza de Bolivar," said Jack, "a favorite place for the +president's band to come and play. See, there is the statue of the +republic's hero." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Harrie had already discovered an equestrian statue, mounted +upon a heavy pedestal, while the rider held with one hand a +straightened rein on his refractory steed, and with the other he +pointed his sword high into the air, as if he would pierce some +imaginary enemy stationed in space. It was a bizarre affair, the +weather-stained image of a horse rearing into the air after the fashion +of some huge rocking-horse. From the bold figure of man and steed +their gaze dropped to the base, where they saw in raised letters the +name of Simon Bolivar, the Liberator of Venezuela. Instinctively, our +Americans uncovered their heads out of respect to the memory of the man +who was not only a great warrior, but a notable statesman, and a poet +of considerable merit. His proclamations to the armies are examples of +masterly eloquence, and as much to be admired as his military genius, +which won for him the applause of the five republics that he liberated. +The statue of Bolivar is in bronze, and is considered one of the most +notable examples of modern art. +</P> + +<P> +When his young companions had tired of looking at the equestrian figure +of the warrior, Jack said: +</P> + +<P> +"Now come with me, lads, and I will show you a sight worth two of this +to you and me." +</P> + +<P> +Without reply, Ronie and Harrie followed their friend until they came +upon a delightfully retired retreat, which, without the bizarre +attractions of the Plaza Bolivar, had a freshness and quiet beauty the +other lacked. Anticipating now what they were to meet, to our young +Americans there was indeed an air of sanctity and hallowed peace that +the more ornate spot did not possess. With reverential steps they +moved silently but swiftly along the clean, graveled path bordered with +deep, green grass and overhung with interlacing branches of the trees +which formed a roof over their heads, until they reached the center of +the plot, where the torrid sun of the tropics beat down upon the head +of the statue they had come to see. +</P> + +<P> +This was the Plaza Washington, and the man honored here was the +American patriot, the Father of His Country, who had been given this +honored recognition in the capital of the United States of Venezuela. +Uncovering their heads, the three stood for several minutes in a +silence that seemed too sacred to be broken, while they looked upon the +calm, benign features of Washington, honored thus by a race they had +not expected would pay such homage. At that very moment, unobserved by +them, a couple of natives a little way off, at the uncovering of their +heads, removed their wide-brimmed headgear, and looked on with +respectful attention. Farther removed, a group of women, dark-eyed, +dark-featured, but not unpleasant of countenance, also paused in their +morning work to watch the newcomers with respectful admiration rather +than curiosity. Evidently these people understood and shared with +these strangers from a far-away land this spirit of national pride and +patriotism, for true patriots always revere the memory of heroes. +</P> + +<P> +"Isn't it strange Washington should be given a statue here?" asked +Harrie. +</P> + +<P> +"Not so very strange," replied Jack, "when you come to think that the +histories of the two countries are so nearly alike, up to the day of +these two heroes, they might be written by the same historian with +slight modifications. Bolivar was the Washington of Venezuela. Then, +too, you will remember that Miranda, the pioneer of patriots in this +country, served his apprenticeship under Washington, fighting for our +country. When he had finished there he returned to his native land to +take up her battles. What he learned with our army helped him here. +</P> + +<P> +"Bolivar had no small task on his hand when he undertook to free five +republics, and who conquered a territory nearly half as great as Europe. +</P> + +<P> +"It is a common practice for the inhabitants here to strew their +garlands of flowers about this place, and once I remember, upon a +holiday, coming here, to find the statue of Washington, pedestal and +base, literally decked with floral wreaths. Never, it seemed to me, +not even in our own land, did the noble countenance of Washington look +grander than here, surrounded by a race that did not speak his +language, but whose hearts beat as patriotically, as if they understood +every word." +</P> + +<P> +"It was a happy thought that they should have sculptured him as a man +of peace rather than of war," said Ronie. "It is more happy in its +effect, as I look upon him, than the warlike figure of Bolivar." +</P> + +<P> +"Very true; at least, from our standpoint. While they did well to +select this phase of his character, no doubt it thrills their hot veins +more to look on the defiant form of their beloved leader. What I have +said of the two men was truth, but similarity stops there. Bolivar had +very much of the savage wildness about him, and he was reckless, +headstrong, and sometimes foolhardy. But his career was a grand one, +as viewed by his countrymen. It was filled with bold, cunning, +victorious marches. His Valley Forge was the torrid jungles and +sun-swept plains of a tropical clime; his Delaware, filled with +floating ice, to be crossed in mid-winter, the broken mountain pass, or +the pathless swamp filled with deadly malaria. Like our Washington, he +came of a distinguished family, and he was educated in Europe for the +court and camp. But, if educated abroad, his love for his native land +never failed, and Venezuela never had a truer son, or a more valiant +fighter for her natural rights. +</P> + +<P> +"Ay, lads, his campaigns were filled with such stupendous feats of +activity and accomplishment as few have ever equaled. Starting on the +seacoast near Pallao, with his foot soldiers and rude cavalry mounted +on mule back, he crossed the continent. The perils of +mountain-climbing and the hardships of the jungle were met and overcome +by his indomitable followers, inspired by his glowing example, living +much of the time on berries and roots, sleeping at night upon the +ground, to free in turn Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador and Bolivia; then, +sweeping down the Pacific coast, to finally overthrow the empire of +Peru. He was a young man filled with the love of freedom and the fire +of ambition. So little was his heroism appreciated by those whom he +thus met that time and again he was forced to meet the assassin, only +to find himself deserted at last by those whom he had looked upon and +rewarded as friends. So he died alone, of heartaches over the +ingratitude of a people he had led out of bondage. But to-day tardy +justice makes him, as he deserved to be, the hero of five republics." +</P> + +<P> +"Why should his countrymen, after all he had done for them, strip him +of his honors and leave him forlorn and disappointed?" asked Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"It was owing largely to the inborn fickleness of people of a tropical +clime. Two charges, one directly opposed to the other, were brought +against him. One party claimed, after having rid them of kings, he +tried to make a dictator of himself, with power more absolute than that +of those he had deposed. The other said it was because, upon his +followers asking him to accept such power, he declined and went into +voluntary exile at Santa Marta. Be that as it may, it was nearly +twenty years after his death before there was one bold enough to give +him the place in public opinion that he deserved. He caused an artist +to design a statue that should perpetuate his memory. +</P> + +<P> +"Now we come to see how closely the history of this country is blended +with our own. On the neck of the statue the artist placed a miniature +in the form of a medallion which the family of Washington had given +Bolivar. On the reverse of this was a lock of Washington's hair, with +the inscription: +</P> + +<P> +"'This portrait of the founder of liberty in North America is presented +by his adopted son to him who has acquired equal glory in South +America.' +</P> + +<P> +"You will notice that none of the insignias of honors showered upon him +in his hours of triumph by different countries have been retained by +the artist, this portrait of the Father of Our Country having been the +only ornament it was deemed he would have cared for, as in life he was +prouder of this than all else. So you see, the busts and statues of +the Liberator bear only this tribute, while those of his followers are +decked with glittering ornaments." +</P> + +<P> +"I have read of a very pretty story connected with its presentation," +said Harrie. "It was during the time of Lafayette's visit to our +country in 1824. A banquet was given in his honor and the memory of +Washington by Congress. In the midst of the rejoicings and tributes +paid to the venerable visitor, Henry Clay arose to say that, while they +were enjoying the fruits of independence, the grand institutions +founded by their patriotic forefathers, there were those in the +Southern continent who were fighting as valiantly for liberty, with +less hope of ultimate victory. Continuing to wax eloquent, the great +orator said: +</P> + +<P> +"'No nation, no generous Lafayette, has come to their succor; alone, +and without aid, they have sustained their glorious cause, trusting to +its justice, and with the assistance only of their bravery, their +deserts and their Andes—and one man, Simon Bolivar, the Washington of +South America.' +</P> + +<P> +"There was wild cheering then, while men sprang to their feet and +clapped their hands. Then Lafayette, the generous, asked that he might +send the Southern hero some token of their sympathy and appreciation of +his valor. The result was, Lafayette sent Bolivar the portrait of +Washington, and it proved a gift the young patriot of the Southland +revered, while his people grew to admire and cherish it." +</P> + +<P> +"True, my lad, and this spirit has spread so that you will see pictures +of Washington wherever you go. Now it is a portrait; then the American +army crossing the wintry Delaware, under its beloved leader; or, the +war over and victory's mantle of peace spread over the land, he stands +before the door at Mount Vernon. You find squares and public houses +named after Washington, with numerous other testimonials of him, all of +which seems very pretty to the visitor from the North." +</P> + +<P> +While Jack had been speaking, his gaze had become turned in an opposite +direction to where the figure of a man was to be seen skulking in the +thicket of flowers. Harrie and Ronie had already discovered the +suspicious person, but had understood that he would flee at the +slightest indication that he had been seen. Thus, before Jack had +finished his speech, Ronie began to retrace his steps, with apparent +carelessness, in the direction of a row of yellow, blue and pink +houses, with high, barred windows, from which peeped shyly dark-eyed, +swarthy-skinned women. But the moment he had passed beyond the range +of the concealed man's eyes, he darted into the shrubbery so as to +intercept the man should he try to escape by flight. +</P> + +<P> +The wisdom of this action was apparent when Jack and Harrie started +toward the spot, when he fled precipitately. This flight, however, +took him right into the path of Ronie, who quickly covered him with his +pistol, at the same time ordering him to stop, which he did with +trembling limbs, to begin to beg for his life. +</P> + +<P> +A good square look at him revealed his identity to Ronie, who exclaimed +to his companions: +</P> + +<P> +"Come quick, boys! it is the spy, Manuel Marlin!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap27"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +GOOD NEWS. +</H4> + +<P> +Ronie did not have to repeat his call, for almost before he had +finished the last word Harrie and Jack were beside him. It was then +but the work of a moment to disarm the terrified fellow, when he was +ordered to march in front of them to the headquarters of the army. +Then he fell upon his knees, actually too weak to stand up longer, and +with clasped hands and white face, begged for his life. +</P> + +<P> +"Spare me, seņors! I am not a spy, but if you take me before the +officers of Castro they will condemn me without a trial and I shall be +shot! Spare me, I beg of you." +</P> + +<P> +His pathetic supplications touched the hearts of his young captors, but +they did not feel it would be right to let him go. +</P> + +<P> +"If you are innocent you can prove it," said Ronie. "I know you are in +sympathy with the insurgents, but I promise you shall have a fair +opportunity to prove your innocence of being a spy if you are not one." +</P> + +<P> +During these words of Ronie he bent a closer look upon him, and he +suddenly recognized our hero as one of the couple who had saved him +from the jaguar. He saw that Jack was another of his captors. +</P> + +<P> +"I remember you, seņors," he said. "You saved my life, but it would +have been better for me to have been eaten by the jaguar than to fall +into the hands of Castro. I will tell you something, seņor, that will +be worth more to you than my miserable life if you will let me go." +</P> + +<P> +"It is of my mother!" exclaimed Ronie. "You had her photograph. Tell +me where she is." +</P> + +<P> +"If you will spare my life." +</P> + +<P> +"I am a soldier under Castro; you know a soldier's duty, seņor." +</P> + +<P> +"I thought you were one of us," he murmured. "But I am going to tell +all I know. She was taken prisoner by some of El Capitan's men. As +the angels are my witness I had nothing to do with that. Her portrait +fell upon the ground during the struggle and I picked it up. That is +all I had to do about it." +</P> + +<P> +"Where is she now?" demanded Ronie, with extreme earnestness. +</P> + +<P> +"She is held as a prisoner at the old convent in Durango under command +of El Capitan." +</P> + +<P> +"Then she lives!" cried Ronie, in great joy. +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņor</I>. I can lead you to the place, and will if you will give +me my liberty." +</P> + +<P> +"That is beyond my power. I cannot—ha! here comes an officer now." +</P> + +<P> +The newcomer was none other than Captain de Caprian, who asked: +</P> + +<P> +"Whom have we here, seņors?" +</P> + +<P> +"A man we found prowling in the city under what we thought to be +suspicions circumstances, so we stopped him. He is from San Carlos, +and claims he is not a spy." +</P> + +<P> +"I shall leave it for you to say what is to be done with him," said +Francisco, "promising to see that he is fairly treated." +</P> + +<P> +"I know not in regard to his being a spy," replied Ronie, "but he has +given me valuable information in regard to my mother's fate." +</P> + +<P> +"Does he know of her?" asked Francisco, eagerly. "That fact alone +ought to save his life. What has he told you?" +</P> + +<P> +In a few words Ronie explained what he had learned, when the other +said, with an intonation of joy in his voice: +</P> + +<P> +"I am so glad, Seņor Roland. No time must be lost in going to her +rescue. I have this morning received word that my mother has been +given her liberty, and that she is on her way to meet me after many sad +months of separation. But, dear Roland, as much as I long to meet that +mother, if you are willing, and General Castro will permit, I want to +go with you to help save your mother. My company will be sufficient +force." +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Harrie could not conceal their emotion at the earnest words +of their young friend, who showed that he spoke from the heart. +</P> + +<P> +"Nay——" began Ronie, but the other checked him. +</P> + +<P> +"I know what you would say, Seņor Roland, but as much as mother and I +want to see each other, we can both wait until this duty is performed. +I am going to General Castro at once for leave of absence. You can let +this man accompany us if you think he is to be trusted. I will meet +you near the old cathedral half an hour hence." +</P> + +<P> +After a short conference among themselves, in which Manuel Marlin was +allowed to express his opinion, it was decided to let him go with them. +He might prove a valuable companion, for they were all inclined to +think he would not be false to his pledges. +</P> + +<P> +Before an hour had passed, so promptly did they act, Captain de Caprian +led out his regiment of gallant men, to start upon the long and arduous +journey to Durango on the merciful errand of saving a captive from the +power of El Capitan. Were the truth told, more than one of the brave +band hoped they might meet the bold outlaw himself. +</P> + +<P> +I need not describe that journey to Durango. The town proved to be a +little hamlet under the brow of the Cordilleras, where the insurgents +sometimes made their headquarters. Knowing this, the advance was made +with extreme caution as soon as the regiment had entered the debatable +country. Scouts were constantly on the lookout, and among these were +our young engineers. +</P> + +<P> +"I can scarcely wait for the time when we shall attack them," declared +Ronie to Harrie and Manuel, as the three halted on the brink of a steep +hill overlooking the hidden town. +</P> + +<P> +"How quiet the place seems," replied Harrie. "It must be El Capitan +and his troops are away." +</P> + +<P> +"Off on one of his raids, no doubt. It will be so much the better for +us." +</P> + +<P> +"Still I really think Francisco will be disappointed if we do not find +the rebel chief." +</P> + +<P> +"I wonder if yonder old vine-clad building is where mother is +imprisoned?" asked Ronie, pointing to what the three felt must be the +ancient convent pictured by those who claimed to have been there. +</P> + +<P> +"<I>Si, seņors</I>," replied Manuel. "But look there, <I>seņors</I>! what does +the coming of that llaneros mean?" +</P> + +<P> +The question from Manuel was called forth by the sudden appearance of +one of the riders of the llanos, or plains of Venezuela, who drew rein +almost in front of the old convent. With what truly seemed wonderful +celerity the people began to collect, coming from every quarter. +</P> + +<P> +"Perhaps that fellow has discovered our men and is giving the alarm," +said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"I wish I was near enough to hear what he says," replied Manuel. "If +you will wait for me, seņors, a few minutes I will find out." +</P> + +<P> +Manuel Marlin then began the descent into the town, and as the distance +was not far, he soon got within hearing of the new arrival. It was not +over fifteen minutes before he returned to his anxious companions with +the somewhat startling announcement: +</P> + +<P> +"It is as I expected, seņors; El Capitan is on his way home, and is +expected within a few hours!" +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<A NAME="chap28"></A> + +<H3 ALIGN="center"> +CHAPTER XXVIII. +</H3> + +<H4 ALIGN="center"> +VICTORY AND PEACE. +</H4> + +<P> +Ronie and Harrie heard this announcement with considerable alarm, as +with their first thought they believed they had come too late to +accomplish their purpose. +</P> + +<P> +"We must get back to the regiment as soon as possible," declared Ronie. +"If we act promptly we may yet rout the inhabitants of the town and +save mother. How many men has El Capitan under him, do you think, +Manuel?" +</P> + +<P> +"I am sorry that I am not able to tell," replied the Venezuelan. "I +think by what I could catch that he is coming back with a large force." +</P> + +<P> +"Which makes it the more necessary that we act quickly. Come on, boys!" +</P> + +<P> +His companions needed no urging to follow him, and it was not long +before they were able to rejoin Captain de Caprian, who was anxiously +awaiting them. But their news did not disconcert the brave young +patriot. +</P> + +<P> +"It only fulfills my wishes," he said. "We have only to storm the town +without loss of time, and then get ready to meet El Capitan. Ay, we +will give him a welcome home that he little expects. I wish Seņor +Greenland would—but here he comes!" +</P> + +<P> +Jack had also been out on a reconnoissance, and he brought in the same +news that the others had—that El Capitan was expected at Durango +within a few hours. +</P> + +<P> +"They say he comes with five thousand troops," added Jack. +</P> + +<P> +Our heroes turned to see what effect this announcement would have upon +Francisco, but as far as they could see the young captain did not show +that he had heard the words. Fifteen minutes later the regiment was +ordered forward, and then was begun a swift, but silent, advance upon +the stronghold of the insurgents, Captain de Caprian giving out his +orders calmly and confidently, as if about to enter one of the camps of +Castro. Could he reasonably hope to meet successfully El Capitan's +superior numbers? What if the latter had five thousand men under his +command? +</P> + +<P> +Ronie and Harrie could not help asking each other these questions, as +they fell into line and moved sternly forward. When near to the lower +end of the town Captain de Caprian divided his men into two bodies, so +as to attack the place simultaneously from different parts. Our heroes +remained with his division, and entered the mountain hamlet from the +nearest quarter, this advance being along a narrow road overhung by a +range of hills on either side. +</P> + +<P> +In order to give the other division time to gain a position above them, +it was necessary to make a brief delay before opening the attack. But +the wait was not long before the signal was given for the double +assault, and the word rang along the ranks: +</P> + +<P> +"Forward! double-quick—-charge!" +</P> + +<P> +It goes without saying that exciting scenes followed. Ronie, Harrie +and Jack managed to keep together, and it was their good fortune to be +among the first to come within close proximity to the convent where +Mrs. Rand was supposed to be imprisoned. This had, in fact, been a +part of Captain de Caprian's plans. +</P> + +<P> +The surprise was complete as far as the insurgents were concerned. The +onset of the government troops came like a tempest from a clear sky. +Women shrieked and fled, followed by men who made scarcely more +resistance, until they succeeded in rallying about the old convent. +Here then was fought the lion's part of the battle. A hundred or more +of the insurgents made a desperate stand, but they might as well have +hoped to stem the mountain torrent which swept down the gorge just +behind their native hamlet. They seemed to quickly realize this, and +the cry for quarter soon rang out above the medley of battle. +</P> + +<P> +"Forward!" still shouted the youthful commander. "Force an entrance to +the old building before it is too late." +</P> + +<P> +Captain de Caprian showed that he realized what was likely to follow +inside the structure, for he had barely uttered his order before a cry +with womanly sharpness in it rang out—an appeal for help. +</P> + +<P> +Our heroes were already storming the door, having dashed aside the +sentinels on duty there. The next moment, led by Ronie, and followed +by a dozen of the troops, our three burst into the convent. Running +swiftly along the main passage they soon came upon a scene which sent +the blood coursing fiercely through their veins. It would appear that +the insurgents, finding they were being routed by the government +troops, sought to kill the few prisoners they held within this old +building. At the very moment our rescuers appeared on the scene, one +of them was swinging over his head the ugly-looking knife he carried in +the act of slaying the woman who was kneeling at his feet. Ronie sent +the miscreant senseless to the floor, and the next moment clasped his +mother in his arms. +</P> + +<P> +"I was in season, mother," he murmured; "you are safe." +</P> + +<P> +But she had fainted, and as gently as possible, with the assistance of +Harrie and Jack, he bore her to a bench where the fresh air could cool +her fevered temple. +</P> + +<P> +"To think if we had been a minute later," said Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"She opens her eyes," declared Harrie. "She has been spared." +</P> + +<P> +It was indeed an affecting scene, during which Jack Greenland drew +apart. He found that three other captives, all Venezuelans, had been +rescued, and that these had been all the persons held in the convent. +</P> + +<P> +Renewed commotion outside now caught his attention, and he returned to +the side of his friends. +</P> + +<P> +"I think El Capitan is coming, and that the boys are preparing to +welcome him home," he said, grimly. "I think I will help in the +greeting, if you will excuse me, lads." +</P> + +<P> +"Forgive me, Jack, for forgetting my duty," said Harrie. "But I felt +so anxious for Ronie's mother." +</P> + +<P> +"I must go, mother," declared Ronie. +</P> + +<P> +"Oh, my son!" she implored, "must you leave me here and now?" +</P> + +<P> +It was a serious problem for the young engineers to decide, between +filial and martial duty. Happily Jack quickly settled the matter by +saying: +</P> + +<P> +"It is your duty, lads, to remain here. I know Captain de Caprian +would wish it. Look sharp to yourselves, while I join the troops in +their welcome to El Capitan." +</P> + +<P> +The young engineers were fain to agree to this, feeling that it was +better they should. Especially was this the situation as they were not +regularly attached to the regiment. +</P> + +<P> +The "welcome" extended to El Capitan and his followers was given near +the lower end of the town, where the mountain ranges drew so near +together that the valley was narrow, uncomfortably narrow for the +surprised insurgents. El Capitan will never forget that "welcome," nor +will his men, who quickly scattered like sheep scaling the +mountainside. If outnumbering the government troops three to one, +numbers did not count then. Among those who won special distinction +was Manuel Marlin. +</P> + +<P> +As soon as he could do so, Captain de Caprian sought his American +friends to congratulate them, while he described the complete victory +of his troops. Altogether, it was a happy occasion to them. +</P> + +<P> +"I shall order an immediate return to the capital," declared the young +patriot. "You had better go to Caracas with us, friends." +</P> + +<P> +They were nothing loath to do this, and it was an exceedingly happy +company which found its way back to the mountain citadel, where they +were hailed with delight by the president himself. El Capitan, the +insurgent chief who had been so feared, was turned over to the proper +authorities, while Manuel Marlin, in consideration of his recent +bravery, was fully pardoned for any error of the past. Our friends at +this time witnessed what seemed to them rather a peculiar trait of +public justice. This was the return to Caracas of El Mocho, who, it +will be remembered, had been kept a prisoner at San Carlos for a long +time. He had been accused, and apparently with good reason, of +infidelity to the government. But this was now overlooked, and General +Castro openly welcomed him to his arms, upon his promise to be faithful +in the future. +</P> + +<P> +"It is a good specimen of South American sense of justice," remarked +Jack. "One day a man is hunted as an enemy, and the next he is +embraced as a loved friend. It may be all right. I cannot say." +</P> + +<P> +In their happiness our heroes had no desire to criticise, much more to +condemn, such a practice. Ronie was extremely thankful for this +meeting with his mother. While they had many explanations to make and +long stories to tell of what had happened since their parting, there is +little I need repeat here. It was perfectly natural that Mrs. Rand +should seek to improve the opportunity to meet Ronie in Caracas, and +she did not dream of the suffering it was going to cost her, of the +terror of captivity or the horrors of her long imprisonment, but these +had been safely passed, and all felt like rejoicing over the outcome. +</P> + +<P> +Another couple especially happy were Francisco and his mother, whom our +Americans quickly learned to love and respect. She proved indeed to be +a gentlewoman of the noblest type, who adored her patriotic son. +</P> + +<P> +Naturally it was not long before our engineers felt it was time for +them to move on their work, but this could not be done until Colonel +Marchand, who joined with them in their happiness, could recover from +his wounds so as to accompany them. While these healed, and our +friends passed the time pleasantly in the capital, flitting back and +forth between their friends, the warlike affairs of the republic grew +apace. There was some fighting to be done, but mainly it had come to +be a matter of diplomacy and argument between the powers, until finally +the glad news of a peaceful negotiation came to them. +</P> + +<P> +Once more President Castro had triumphed, achieving this time, it +seemed, his grandest victory. When the account of this rang over the +mountain city our American engineers began to prepare for an arduous +campaign of an altogether different kind from that which befell them +when they were COMRADES UNDER CASTRO. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<P CLASS="finis"> +THE END. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR> + +<P> +"Engineer Ralph," by Frank H. MacDougal, No. 87 of the ROUND THE WORLD +LIBRARY, is a splendid story of a boy's supreme struggle to success. +</P> + +<BR><BR><BR><BR> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + +***** This file should be named 34792-h.htm or 34792-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/7/9/34792/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> + +</HTML> + diff --git a/34792-h/images/img-cover.jpg b/34792-h/images/img-cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa0a398 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792-h/images/img-cover.jpg diff --git a/34792.txt b/34792.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..218ca44 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6640 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Where Duty Called + or, In Honor Bound + +Author: Victor St. Clair + +Release Date: December 30, 2010 [EBook #34792] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + + + + +Produced by Al Haines + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: Cover art] + + + + +Round the World Library No. 86 + + + + +Where Duty Called + +OR + +IN HONOR BOUND + + + +By + +VICTOR ST. CLAIR + + +Author of "On His Merit," "Zip, the Acrobat," "Cast Away in the +Jungle," etc. + + + + +STREET & SMITH CORPORATION + +PUBLISHERS + +79-89 Seventh Avenue, New York + + + + +Copyright, 1904 + +By STREET & SMITH + + +Where Duty Called + + + + +All rights reserved, including that of translation into foreign +languages, including the Scandinavian. + +Printed in the U. S. A. + + + + +Contents + + +Chapter + + I. "A Grand Opportunity." + II. A Suspicious Craft. + III. The Young Exile. + IV. Put in Irons. + V. Escape from the _Libertador_. + VI. A Swim for Life. + VII. Taken Ashore. + VIII. Jaguar Claws. + IX. The Mystery of the Photograph. + X. "We have been Betrayed!" + XI. A Perilous Flight. + XII. A Lonely Ride. + XIII. In the Enemy's Country. + XIV. Indian Warfare. + XV. A Friendly Voice. + XVI. Colonel Marchand. + XVII. A Cunning Ruse. + XVIII. Ronie Receives a Commission. + XIX. The Scout in the Jungle. + XX. Adventures and Surprises. + XXI. "The Mountain Lion." + XXII. A Fight with the Guerillas. + XXIII. The News at La Guayra. + XXIV. Interview with General Castro. + XXV. The Spy of Caracas. + XXVI. "It is Manuel Marlin!" + XXVII. Good News. + XXVIII. Victory and Peace. + + + + +WHERE DUTY CALLED. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +"A GRAND OPPORTUNITY." + +"Hurrah, boys! here is a letter from home. At least, it is from the +homeland, as it is postmarked New York. Who can be writing us from +that city?" and the youthful speaker, in his exuberance of feeling, +waved the missive over his head, while he began to dance a lively step. + +"I know of no better way to find out than to open it, Harrie, or let +one of us do it for you; you seem suddenly to have lost your faculty +for doing anything rational yourself. Hand it to Jack if you do not +want to trust me with it." + +"Your very words, to say nothing of your impatient gestures, Ronie, +show that you are not one whit less excited than I am over receiving +some news from the great world outside of this lost corner," replied +the first speaker, beginning to tear open the end of the bulky envelope +he held in his hand. + +"There must be a lot of news, judging by the size of the package," said +the second, approaching so he could look over the shoulder of his +companion while he tore open the covering. + +"Go slow, lads," said a third person, who had been sitting slightly +apart from the others, but who moved near to the twain now. "It won't +do to get unduly excited in this climate." + +The three were none other than our old friends of the jungles of Luzon, +Ronie Rand, Harrie Mannering and Jack Greenland, whose exploits in +opening up one of the great forest tracts on that island were described +in "Cast Away in the Jungle," first of THE ROUND WORLD SERIES. They +had not been long in Manilla, the capital of the island, since +completing that hazardous undertaking, when an incoming steamer brought +them the letter which awakened such an interest, and which was to play +such an important part in their future actions. As its bulk indicated, +it was a lengthy epistle, and this length was more than doubled in +reading matter by the fine chirography which covered its large pages. + +Standing where he could not scan the mysterious pages, Professor Jack +fell to watching the countenance of Harrie Mannering as he followed +with his eye the closely written pages. As he read, his features began +to change their expression from gayety to seriousness, and by the time +he had finished a puzzled look had settled upon his sunburned but +good-looking face, and his lips, forming themselves unconsciously into +a pucker, gave vent to a prolonged whistle. Then, as if to obtain a +more comprehensive understanding of the message, he returned to the +beginning, and was about to read it through again, when Jack said: + +"Look here, boy, you are taking an unfair advantage of a fellow. You +must know that I am just as much interested in news from the homeland +as you, so read it aloud this time. If it is good news, I want to +enjoy it with you; if it is bad news, then I certainly ought to share +it with you." + +"Forgive me, or rather us, Jack--for I am sure Ronie has seen every +word--but it is all so strange and unexpected that my head is not quite +clear yet as to whether I have been reading or dreaming." + +"Then it is all the more necessary that I should hear it, as it is +possible my poor head may help unravel the skein. You remember the +story of the great novelist, Sir Walter Scott, who, upon recovering +from a long illness, was given a book to read for amusement. But upon +reading the book, he could get so little sense out of it that he feared +he had lost his reason. In this perplexed state of mind he handed the +work to another to read without giving his reason, while he waited +anxiously for the result. She, after reading a few chapters, threw the +book aside, declaring it was such senseless twaddle that she did not +care to follow it any further, whereupon the great author breathed +easier." + +"No offense was meant, Jack, and I will try and make amends at once. +In the first place, this is an invitation for us to start upon another +undertaking somewhat similar to the one we have just completed." + +"What! return to the jungles of Luzon?" + +"No; it is to South America this time--to Venezuela. A party of men, +some of whom are connected with the local government, are anxious to +open up the interior of the country in quest of rubber trees. The +writer, who is one of the company, and, I judge, an influential member, +has recommended us as 'capable persons'--you needn't laugh, Ronie, for +those are his words--to survey and engineer for the party. If we +conclude to go, he wants us to meet him at Caracas as soon as possible. +In the meantime, he will get everything in readiness to start as soon +as we arrive. I am at a loss to know what to think of it. The writer, +who is Colonel Rupert Marchand, is very enthusiastic over the scheme, +and he seems anxious that we should come. I never thought the colonel +was one to get wild over anything that was not likely to prove +successful." + +Jack made no reply in words, but took the letter from the hand of his +young friend, and began to hastily run over its contents, saying, by +way of apology for his action: + +"You will pardon me, Harrie, but it may not be best for us to read +aloud or talk to any great extent here. There may be those about whose +motives are not friendly." + +Thinking this suggestion a wise one, Harrie and Ronie willingly +followed their companion to a more retired place, where the three spent +fully five minutes looking over the lengthy missive together before one +of them spoke. Then Ronie said: + +"Well, what do you think of it, Jack?" + +"That it is a grand opportunity for two such adventure-loving fellows +as you are to embrace. But I would not advise less daring and +energetic youths to think of it for a moment." + +"So you think there is likely to be some dangerous experiences attached +to the journey?" + +"It has all of that appearance, though you may come out of it without a +scratch. Colonel Marchand, unless I have misjudged him, is just such a +man as would throw all thought of hazard to the wind if the prize was +worth striving for." + +"You do not believe he would lead any one into needless danger, Jack?" + +"Certainly not; he is too good a soldier for that, and you know he made +an honorable record in our recent war with Spain." + +"I judge, then, you think the people we should be likely to fall among +might be a dangerous element," said Ronie. + +"That is just what I meant. The inhabitants of the interior of the +country where he would have you go are treacherous and dangerous, if +they happen to take a dislike to you; and that they are more prone to +dislike than to like has been my experience." + +"What about this rubber business?" said Harrie. "Colonel Marchand +speaks as if he wants us to take an interest in the company as part pay +for our work. He seems very enthusiastic over that." + +"His excuse for having us take some shares is that we might possibly +have more interest in the venture," said Ronie. "That stipulation +makes me think there may be some sort of a trap to inveigle us into a +profitless adventure, though I do not think the colonel would do that." + +"You are as well able to judge of that as I am. In regard to the +rubber part of the venture, to use a poor simile, that is very elastic. +Unless you have given the matter some consideration you will not, at +first thought, realize the importance of that commodity, which must +govern the possibilities of the article in the markets. I will +acknowledge that I am very favorably impressed with the idea. Rubber +is fast becoming one of the most important commercial articles in +existence. Turn whichever way you will, do whatever you wish, and you +will almost invariably find that rubber is the most necessary thing +needed. + +"Not only is it used in large quantities toward helping clothe men and +creatures, but it is used in house furnishings, such as mattings for +floors, stairs and platforms, on board of ships, as well as in houses, +and in hundreds of other places. It is utilized largely in the +manufacture of druggists' materials; in the manufacture of all kinds of +instruments and machinery that require pliable bearings and supporters, +printers' rollers, wheel tires, rings on preserve jars. Erasers on +lead pencils call for tons of the article. + +"Then steam mills must have rubber belts, cars rubber bearings, and gas +works call for miles of rubber hose, to say nothing of that used in +gardens and on lawns. Billiard tables alone call for nearly a third of +a million dollars' worth of rubber every year, while over a million +dollars are spent for the rubber used in baseball and football! +Typewriters call for a vast amount; so do the makers of rubber stamps, +water bottles, trimmings for harness, and fittings for pipes of one +kind and another. Altogether, the rubber factories of the United +States alone utilize sixty million pounds of rubber annually. You will +not wonder now if I say that rubber ranks as third among the imports of +the country, and that its handling is one of the most profitable +callings of the day. If this is the electrical age, as it has been +called, it is rubber that makes possible the many applications of +electricity." + +"I had not thought it of such importance," remarked Harrie, frankly. +"Where does it all come from?" + +"A very pertinent question," replied Jack. "Originally it came from +India, hence the name of India rubber, which still clings to it, though +the great bulk now, and that which is of the better quality, comes from +other countries. Foremost among these is South America. It is true a +large amount comes from Central America, the west part of Africa, and +the islands of the Indian Archipelago, but the best rubber comes from +the great belt of lowlands bordering upon the Amazon, the Rio Negro and +the Orinoco, the last named tract lying largely in Southern Venezuela. +This country in many respects is the Eldorado of South America." + +"Then we shall not be going into a country without at least one source +of wealth." + +"No; Venezuela is wonderfully well favored by nature. Capable of +producing abundant supplies of first quality coffee, sugar cane, cocoa +palm and cotton plant, it has its rich gold mines, its mines of +asphalt, affording paving enough for the cities of the world; while +last, but not least, are its rubber forests, which have only very +recently been considered as a valuable and available resource. It is +here American capital has entered the field of conquest." + +"Do you think we had better go there, Jack?" + +"That is a question you must answer yourselves. I know you will not +act hastily, and, having acted, will not regret the step taken." + +"What about the climate, Jack?" asked Harrie. "I believe you have been +there?" + +"Yes, I have been there," replied the other, shaking his grizzled head +slowly, "and it was likely at one stage of the scene that I should stay +there forever. But I am not answering your question. The climate of +South America, as a whole, is not very bad, though much of its +territory lies within the torrid zone. This is largely due to local +modifications. The burning heat of the plains of Arabia is unknown in +the western hemisphere. The hottest region of South America, as far as +I know, is the steppes of Caracas, the capital of Venezuela; but even +there the temperature does not reach a hundred degrees in the shade, +while it rises to one hundred and twelve degrees in the sand deserts +surrounding the Red Sea. In the basin of the Amazon, owing to the +protection of vast forests and the influence of prevailing easterly +winds, offshoots of the trade winds, which follow the great river +nearly to the Andes, the climate is not very hot or unhealthy." + +"What do you say, Ronie? Is it go, or stay here until something else +comes our way?" + +"I will suggest the way I would settle it. Let each one take a slip of +paper, and, without consulting the Others, write upon it his answer. +Whatever two of us shall say to be our decision, to go or to remain +here." + +His companions were nothing loath to agree to this, so paper and +pencils were quickly obtained, and each one wrote his reply. Upon +comparing notes a moment later, it was found that all three had written +the short but decisive word: + +"Go!" + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +A SUSPICIOUS CRAFT. + +"I tell you, boys, there is something wrong about this vessel." + +The speaker was Jack Greenland, and his companions were Ronie and +Harrie, but the scene is now many leagues from the quiet corner where +they took their vote to hazard a journey to the rubber forests of +Venezuela. Instead of the quaint old buildings of Manilla on the one +hand, and the sullen old bay, filled with its odd-looking crafts, on +the other, roll the blue waters of the Caribbean Sea, almost as placid +as the southern sky that bends so benignly over their heads, while they +stand by the taffrail of the rakish ship upon which they have only +recently taken passage to the South American coast. + +To explain in detail this change of base would require too much space. +A few words will suffice to describe the long journey by water and land +necessary to make this stupendous change. In the first place, having +decided unanimously to undertake the trip, they were exceedingly +fortunate in finding that they could leave Manilla within twenty-four +hours by steamer for San Francisco. This required some smart hustling, +but our trio were used to this, and the next morning found them safely +aboard ship, looking hopefully forward to a speedy and safe arrival in +the city of the Golden Gate. In this they were not disappointed, while +the run down the coast to Panama was also made under favorable +conditions. Then the isthmus was crossed with some delay and vexation, +when their adventures and misadventures began in earnest. + +At Colon tidings of war in Venezuela reached them. These being +somewhat indefinite, and the republic in question being a land of +revolutions and uprisings, but little attention was given these vague +reports. They had barely left port, however, before the captain of the +little coastwise vessel declared that they were likely to have trouble. + +The next day they were, indeed, fired upon by a strange craft, and +instead of keeping on toward La Guayra, the port of Caracas, he put to +sea. While bent upon this aimless quest, they were overtaken by a +tropical storm, and were eventually driven upon one of the small isles +forming the lower horn of that huge crescent of sea isles known as the +Windward Islands. From this they managed to reach, after repairing +their damages somewhat, Martinique, where our three heroes were only +too glad to part with such uncertain companions. + +There was a strange ship in this port, which immediately attracted +them. Learning that the captain, though he had taken out papers for +Colon, intended to stop at La Guayra, they engaged passage. At the +outset they had felt some distrust in doing this, while the commander +showed equal hesitation in taking them. Still, it was their only +chance to get away, so they resolved to take their chances, with the +determination to keep their eyes and ears open. Thus they had +frequently expressed the opinion among themselves that they had been +justified in their suspicions, though this was the first outspoken +belief in the fact. + +"I agree with you, Jack," declared Ronie. + +"What have you learned that is new, Jack?" asked Harrie. + +"Enough to confirm what doubts I already had as to her character. +Captain Willis does not intend to put in at La Guayra, as he claimed he +should to us." + +"Perhaps he dares not," said Ronie. + +"Ay, lad, that's where you hit the bull's-eye. He dares not do it." + +"That means either that his intentions are not honest, or that the war +in Venezuela is more than a civil war," said Harrie. + +"Now you've hit the bull's-eye with a double shot. I do not believe he +is honest," nodding in the direction of the commander, "and that this +is an international war!" + +"Whew!" exclaimed the young engineers in the same breath. While both +had really about come to this conclusion, the proposition seemed more +startling when expressed in so many words. + +"Before we fully agree to this," continued Professor Jack, "let's +compare notes. In the first place this vessel before undergoing some +slight alterations came to Martinique as a Colombian vessel, officered +and manned by Englishmen. Upon reaching this island she was +immediately sold, and her English crew discharged. But her captain +remained the same, while she still carried the English colors. The +next day it was claimed she had been again sold, this time passing into +the possession of followers of General Matos, the leader of the +Venezuelan revolutionists. Her English flag was now replaced by the +colors of Venezuela, and she was renamed from the _Ban Righ_ to the +_Libertador_. Can the chameleon beat that in changing colors? It is +my private opinion she is a cruiser in the employ of the insurgents, +and that we are booked for lively times." + +"With small chance of reaching Caracas for a long time, if at all," +added Ronie. + +"How came England to allow such a vessel to leave her port?" asked +Harrie. + +"She must have been deceived as to her real character. Thinking she +was a Colombian ship, and being on peaceful terms with that republic, +she had no business to stop her.[1] Hi! what have we here?" + +Jack's abrupt question was called forth by the sudden appearance almost +by his side of a tall, slender youth, whose tawny skin and dark +features proclaimed that he belonged to the mixed blood of the South +American people. He had risen from the midst of a coil of rope, and in +such close proximity that it was evident he had overheard what had been +said. The three Americans realized their situation, though the opening +speech of the young stranger reassured them. + +"Senors speak very indiscreetly," he said, "of affairs which they must +know bode them ill, in case their words reach the ears of others." + +"Who are you?" demanded Jack, who was the first to speak. He +remembered having seen this youth among the men on board, but had not +given him any particular notice, although he noticed that he presented +an appearance that showed he did not belong to the class of common +sailors, while dressed no better than the poorest. There was an air of +superiority about him which they did not possess. + +"It is not always well for one to be too outspoken to strangers," he +answered, glancing cautiously about as he said the words. "Even coils +of rope have ears," he added, significantly. + +"You overheard what we said?" queried Jack, who continued to act as +spokesman for the party. + +"_Si, senor_. I could not help hearing some of it, though you did +speak in a low tone. My ears are very keen, and not every one would +have heard the little I did." + +"It is not well for one to repeat what one hears, sometimes," said +Jack, by way of reply. + +"I have a mind as well as ears, senors," replied the youth. "While I +can see as well as I can hear, I can think for both eyes and ears. You +are not satisfied with the appearance of the _Libertador_?" + +"I judge you are pretty well informed as to our opinion," replied Jack, +more vexed than he was willing to show that they should have been +caught off their guard. "Listeners are not apt to hear any good of +themselves, we are told." + +"Had I been a spy," retorted the youth, with some animation, "I should +have remained quietly in my concealment, and not shown my head at all, +and most assuredly not when I was likely to hear that which was to +prove the most important." + +"Please explain, then, your motive in addressing us at all." + +"Not here--not now," he answered. "When the Southern Cross appears in +the sky, and the sharp-eyed, doubting Englishman at the head sleeps, I +will meet one of you here, and make plain many things you do not +understand." + +"Why not meet all of us?" demanded Jack, suspiciously. + +"Because one of you in conversation with me would create less suspicion +than all of you would be likely to do. That is my only reason, senor." + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please," exclaimed Professor +Jack, "there is a bit of common sense in that. One of us will be here, +if we find it convenient." + +"Good, senor. Now, as we seem to be attracting attention, it may be +well for us to separate. I will be on hand at the appointed time." + +A moment later the unknown youth mingled with the motley crew, leaving +our friends wondering what their meeting with him portended. + +"He seems honest," declared Ronie. + +"He must be half Spaniard, and the other is doubtless something worse, +if that is possible," said Jack, who confessed that he had no liking +for the South American races. + +"Shall we accept his proposition?" asked Harrie. "I will confess I am +curious to know what he has to tell." + +"I do not understand what this disturbance between the countries +means," said Ronie. "When foreign nations take a hand in the affair it +would seem to show that something more serious than a civil revolt is +likely to follow. There could not have been a suspicion of this +outside preparation of war in the United States, or Colonel Marchand +would have known of it. I do not see how this has gone on under the +American eyes." + +"It is probably due to the fact that these republics of South America +are almost continually at war. Venezuela has had a stormy time of it +from the very first. I think one of us had better listen to what this +young Venezuelan has to say. He is evidently not in sympathy with the +commander of this vessel." + +"Who is working in the interest of Matos, the leader of the +revolutionists?" + +"As President Castro is at the head of the government, and the target +for the fire of the whole world at this time." + +It was finally decided that Harrie should meet the stranger at the +appointed time, while Ronie and Jack were to remain nearby to lend +their assistance in case the youth showed any signs of treachery. +Having come to this decision, the three waited, as may be imagined, +with considerable anxiety for the hour to come. + + + +[1] Jack hit nearer the truth than he realized at the time. The _Ban +Righ_ had, in fact, awakened the suspicions of the English authorities, +and the attention of the custom officers was directed to her by the +placing of a searchlight on her foremast. An examination disclosed the +fact that parts of guns and gun-mountings had been stowed away below +deck, where passages had been cut to allow the crew to move about with +facility. She was released and permitted to leave port because the +Colombian official in London claimed that she was being fitted out for +the service of his government. Sailing ostensibly for Colon, she +called at Antwerp, where she was loaded with 175 tons of Mausers and +180 tons of ammunition, besides field guns, billed as "hardware, +musical instruments and kettledrums." She also took on here a French +artillery captain, a doctor, and two sergeants. The guns were mounted +before she reached Martinique, and while there a sham sale was made. +So it will be seen that Jack and the young engineers had ample reason +for mistrusting the vessel whose career reads like a chapter from +romance rather than the actual history of a ship that, possibly, did +more to foment international disputes concerning the Venezuelan war +than anything else.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE YOUNG EXILE. + +The night proved clear and beautiful, a typical southern evening most +fitly closing a day that had been flawless. All the afternoon the sky +and sea, so nearly of the same cerulean hue that where they met they +matched so perfectly as to seem a curtain of the same texture, had +appeared to vie with each other in their placidity, while now the stars +overhead were scarcely brighter than their reflections in the waters +below. On the rim of the distant horizon shone with a soft luster the +glorious radii of the gem of the Antipodes, the Southern Cross. + +Harrie was promptly on hand to keep his meeting with the strange youth, +but no earlier than the other, who greeted him in his musical voice: + +"Senor is in good season. It is well, for our time cannot be long in +which to talk. While we speak let us walk slowly back and forth, arm +in arm, so we shall not be overheard." + +He spoke in a low tone, a little above a whisper, while Harrie allowed +his arm to be drawn into the other's grasp, though he was very watchful +not to be taken unawares in case of an attack on him. + +"In the first place," said the young Venezuelan, "I judge senor is +anxious to know who it is who has placed himself in his way. But +before that I would speak of the ship which is at this moment bearing +us whither we fain would not go." + +"What about the ship?" asked Harrie, as he hesitated. "What have you +to say of that?" + +Lowering his voice so our hero could barely catch his words, he said: + +"It is a pirate ship, senor!" + +Harrie could not repress a low exclamation at this startling +announcement, but he quickly recovered his presence of mind, saying, as +he recalled the wild deeds of Morgan and his freebooters, Conrad and +his Blue Water Rovers, who once boasted dominion over these seas: + +"How can that be?" + +"At least it is outlawed by the Venezuelan Government, and a big reward +offered for its capture. It is a conscript working in the interest of +Matos, the outlaw." + +"Who are you who says this, and how come you by this information? You +appear to be one of the crew; why is this so?" + +"I could answer the last question by asking the same of senor. I am +here solely with the hope of getting back to my native land, and to the +side of my dear mother. Perhaps you will understand my situation +better when I tell you that I belong to a family that once ruled +Venezuela. The two Guzman Blancos, the elder of whom was an American, +were my ancestors. My name is Francisco de Caprian. My family is +hated by Matos, while father, who is not living now, did something to +incur the displeasure of Castro, so I am in ill-favor all around," he +added, with a smile which disclosed two rows of very white teeth. + +"Notwithstanding this," he added, "I am anxious to get back to Caracas, +to protect my dear mother in these perilous times, and, it may be, +strike one blow more for my country. The De Caprians can trace their +ancestry back to Juan Ampues, who founded the first Spanish settlement +in Venezuela, and one of them was a captain under Bolivar. Whatever +they may say of my family, they have ever been true to their native +land. The illustrious General Blanco did much for downtrodden +Venezuela, if some complained of him. You cannot suit all, senor, at +the same time. Whither do you wish to go?" + +"To Caracas," replied Harrie. + +"I am glad to hear that, senor, for it will enable us to join fortunes. +That is, if you do not hesitate to associate with me. I am frank to +say that I am likely to involve you in trouble; but, at the same time, +judging you are strangers there, I may be able to help you. Then, too, +I do not believe they will dare to molest you to any serious extent, so +long as your country is not mixed up in this imbroglio. Yet a South +American aroused is like a wild bull, whose coming actions are not to +be gauged by his former behavior. I never have found an American who +could not take care of himself." + +"Thank you, Senor Francisco. I trust you have not found one who would +desert a comrade in an hour of need." + +Quick and earnest came the reply, while the young Venezuelan grasped +Harrie's hand. + +"Never, senor." + +"You shall find my friends and me faithful to our promises." + +"I was confident of that, or I should not have dared to address you. +Believe me, the risk was greater than you may realize. Were my +identity to become known on this ship I have no doubt but I should be +hung at the yardarm, or shot down like a brute, within an hour." + +The youthful speaker showed great earnestness, and with what appeared +to be genuine honesty and candor. At any rate, Harrie was fain to +believe in his honor, and without further delay related enough of his +experiences for the other to understand the situation of his friends +and himself. + +"I was very sure you were here involuntarily," said Francisco, when he +had finished. "It is likely we can be of service to each other. From +what I have been able to pick up, we are to coast along the shore of +Venezuela, leaving here and there arms and ammunition for Matos and his +insurgents. It is possible we shall stop at Maracaibo. In case we do +so, that will be the place for us to leave the _Libertador_. If there +is a chance before, we shall be remiss as to our personal welfare if we +do not discover and improve it. The eyes of the watch are upon us," he +said, in a lower tone, "and we had better separate. Keep your eyes and +ears open until we have opportunity to speak to each other again." + +Before Harrie could reply, the other had slipped away, and he was fain +to return to his companions, whom he found anxiously awaiting him. In +a few words he apprized them of what had passed between him and the +young Venezuelan outlaw, Francisco de Caprian. + +"His words only confirm what we had concluded, and for that I am +inclined to believe the young man in part, at least. I was in +Venezuela at the time of the downfall of that pompous patriot Guzman +Blanco, and I knew something of the De Caprians. Possibly it was this +fellow's father who was mixed up in the muddle, and who was killed, +according to report, soon after I got away. Mind you, I say this, but +it will be well for us if we are careful whom we trust. In Venezuela +every man is a revolutionist, and where revolutions reign the +sacredness of human faith is lost. As we seem to be in for our share +of lively times, it may be well for us to look at the situation +intelligently." + +"I am surprised at the small amount I know of these South American +republics," declared Harrie. "Though they are much nearer to us, I +really know far less of them than I do of European nations of to-day, +or the ancient empires that crumbled away long years ago." + +"It is usually so," replied Jack. "It is a trait of human nature to be +reaching after the things beyond our reach, while we push right over +those near us. The history of South America is a most interesting one, +but the most interesting chapter is close at hand, when out of the +crude material shall crystallize a government and a people that shall +place themselves among the powers of the world. I should not know as +much as I do of Venezuela if it had not been for the two years I spent +there quite recently--years I am not likely to forget." + +"Ojeda, the Spanish adventurer who followed Columbus, named the country +Venezuela, which means "Little Venice," from the fact that he found +people living in houses built on piles, which suggested to him the +'Queen of the Adriatic,'" said Ronie. + +"Very true," argued [Transcriber's note: agreed?} Jack. "These were +natives living about Lake Maracaibo, but the name was extended to cover +the whole country, though its original inhabitants did not, as a whole, +live in dwellings on poles, and move about in canoes. This Alonso de +Ojeda carried back to his patrons much gold and many pearls that he +stole from the simple but honest natives." + +"If I am not mistaken, Vespucci, who had so much to do with naming the +new continent,[1] accompanied Ojeda's expedition," said Harrie. + +"Very true," replied Jack. "I am glad to think that he was more humane +than the majority of the early discoverers, who treated the natives so +cruelly. The Indians of this country were not only rapidly despoiled +of their gold and pearls, but they were themselves inhumanly butchered +or seized and sold into captivity. The result was they soon became +bitter enemies to the newcomers, who thus found colonization and +civilization not only difficult but dangerous. Among those of a kinder +heart who came here was Juan Ampues, whom your young friend, Harrie, +claims was an ancestor of his. Ampues succeeded, through his kindness, +in winning over the natives to his side, and he was thus enabled to +found the first settlement in Venezuela. This was in 1527, and the +town whose foundations he laid still exists under the name he gave it, +Santa Ana de Coro. But for the most part the Spaniards treated the +Indians in a brutal manner, and in the end the unfortunate race was +looted and slain." + +"But I have read that the people of Venezuela fell into worse hands +when the country was leased for a while to the Germans," said Ronie. + +"Right!" declared Jack, earnestly. "You are evidently well posted on +history. Germany's hold was broken in 1546, but it took two hundred +years to conquer and settle Venezuela, while all the slaughter of human +lives and vast outlay of wealth proved in the end a poor investment for +old Spain. One by one her American dependencies have slipped away from +her control, and Venezuela has the honor of being the first to gain her +freedom from Old World tyranny. + +"The first effort to break the chains was made in 1797. This was +unsuccessful, and another attempt was made in 1806, this time by +General Francisco Miranda, who invaded Venezuela with an expedition +organized in the United States, This revolution was successful only so +far as it served to awaken the people to the possibility that lay +before them. The prime opportunity came when Napoleon dethroned +Ferdinand of Spain, and the inhabitants of this dependency declared +that they would not submit to this Napoleonic usurpation. Though this +movement was made under a claim of allegiance to the deposed king of +Spain, he was incapable of seeing that it was for his interest to stand +by them, so he renounced their declaration. The result was another +declaration made on July 5, 1811, a declaration of independence and a +constitution in some respects like ours." + +"It seems a bit strange that they should have an independence day that +comes so close to ours," said Harrie. + +"Yes; and it is quite as singular that the first blow for liberty was +struck by their ancestors on the same day in April that our forefathers +fired their opening guns upon the British at Concord and Lexington," +replied Jack. + +"What means that confusion and those loud voices upon the deck?" asked +Ronie, as they were arrested in the midst of their conversation by the +sounds of a great commotion having suddenly begun over their heads. + +"There is something new afoot!" declared Jack. "It sounds as if there +was going to be a fight. Follow me, and we will find out what it +means." + + + +[1] Our geographies were wont to credit this nobleman with having given +his name to the continent, but modern research has shown this to be an +error. The country was already called by the native inhabitants +Amarca, or America, which Vespucci very appropriately retained in his +written account of the New World, the first that was given to the +scholars of that day. From this fact his name became associated with +that country, and he became known as "Amerigo" Vespucci, which was very +appropriate, though his real name was Albertigo. Later writers, +without stopping to investigate, declared that the continent had been +named for him, and in that way others accepted the mistake as a fact. +The truth is the name of "America" is older and grander than that of +any of those who followed in the train of Columbus, and was that +appellation given it by the ancient Peruvians, the most highly +civilized people on the Western Continent at the coming of the Great +Discoverer.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +PUT IN IRONS. + +As the three hurried to the deck of the _Libertador_ they found the +noise and confusion increasing, though the seamen were fast falling +into their line of duty with greater regularity. Captain Willis was on +hand giving out his orders in his brusque manner. + +"Where away has it been sighted, lookout?" called the commander. + +"Off our windward quarter, captain." + +"Maintain your watch, sir, and report if there is any change." + +"They have sighted land," whispered Jack. "It must be one of the +islands lying off the Venezuelan coast." + +Both of his companions could not help feeling a thrill of pleasure at +this announcement, while they hoped it might lead to their speedy +escape from their present uncertain situation. But, from their +position, no trace of the looked-for shore could be discovered, and it +is safe to say no three upon the vessel watched and waited for the +morning light with greater anxiety than the two young engineers and +their faithful companion. + +At different intervals the lookout announced the situation as viewed +from his vantage ground, but no satisfactory word came until the dawn +of day, when even those upon deck saw in plain sight the shore of one +of the tropical islands dotting the sea. + +While our friends were looking on the scene with intense interest, +Francisco de Caprian passed by them, whispering as he did so: + +"The island of Curacao. It looks as though we were going to touch at +the port." + +He did not stop for any reply from our party, but Jack said to his +companions a moment later: + +"If I am not mistaken Curacao belongs to the Dutch. It is about fifty +miles from the Venezuelan coast, and westward of Caracas." + +"Which means that we have passed the line of that city," said Ronie. + +"Exactly." + +"Had we better try and land here?" + +"I am in doubt. Perhaps young De Caprian will be able to advise us. +There is no doubt but they intend to stop here." + +This was now evident to his companions, and half an hour was filled +with the exciting emotions of entering harbor after a voyage at sea. +As they moved slowly toward the pier it became evident that they had +been expected, for, early as it was, quite a throng of spectators were +awaiting them, and among the crowd were to be seen a small body of +troops. + +At this moment Francisco managed to pause a minute beside them, saying: + +"They are stopping here to take off one of Matos' officers. The island +seems to have been turned into a sort of recruiting ground for the +insurgents." + +"Aren't the Dutch neutral in this quarrel?" + +"They are supposed to be, but it is my opinion considerable secret +assistance is being given the insurgents from Europe--particularly from +the Germans. But I shall create suspicion if I talk longer. Above +all, appear to be indifferent to whatever may take place." + +"You do not think we had better try and leave the vessel here?" + +"You could not if you would. Every movement of yours is watched. Be +careful what you say or----" + +Francisco de Caprian did not stop to finish his sentence, though his +unspoken words were very well understood by the anxious trio, who saw +him among the most active of the mixed crew a moment later. + +Then they were witnesses of the embarkation of a small squad of +Venezuelan soldiers under charge of an officer who appeared in a +supercilious mood. + +"Whoever he is," whispered Jack, "he stands pretty near the head, and +he evidently intends that every one shall know it. Our stop is going +to be short. Well, the shorter the better, perhaps, for us. If we +should succeed in getting ashore we should find ourselves in the power +of the insurgents, which, it may be, we are at present," he added, with +a smile. "All we can do is to keep our eyes open and await further +developments." + +Jack realized that his companions knew this as well as he, so he did +not expect a reply, while they watched the following scenes in silence. +They saw the last of the little party of insurgents on shipboard, and +soon after the _Libertador_ was once more ploughing her way through the +blue water of the Caribbean. Their course was now south-southwest, but +nothing occurred during the rest of the day to break the monotony of +the voyage. The newcomers went below immediately, so that our friends +saw nothing of them. Toward night Francisco found opportunity to speak +a few words to the three. + +"We are steering directly for the Venezuelan shore," he said. "I +overheard Captain Willis say that he intended to land somewhere near +Maracaibo, where, I judge, our passengers are going. We may find +opportunity to escape then." + +"Do you think we shall touch port again soon?" asked Ronie. + +"The officer and his followers whom we took aboard at Curacao are to be +left somewhere near Maracaibo. That is all I have been able to learn. +They are extremely careful what they say." + +The following morning it was found that the _Libertador_ was flying +signals, which Jack declared were intended to attract the insurgents. + +"Mark my words, we are approaching the shore so closely that we shall +soon sight land." + +Jack proved himself a true prophet, but before this announcement came +from the lookout, something of a more startling nature took place. +About an hour after sunrise the sail of a small coastwise vessel was +sighted, and within another hour the stranger had been so closely +overtaken that she was hailed in no uncertain tones. + +The reply was uttered in defiance, and the sloop showed that she was +crowding ahead with all the speed she could, a steady breeze lending +its favor. But it soon became evident that it would be a short race, +and then the bow-chaser of the _Libertador_ was brought to bear upon +the fugitive. + +As the first shot our heroes had heard in the war rang out over the +sea, and the leaden messenger struck in close proximity to its target, +the strange sloop was seen to soon slacken its flight. A few minutes +later, in answer to the stentorian command of Captain Willis, she lay +to. + +"It is war in earnest," said Harrie, as they saw a boat let down from +the cruiser, and the second officer, accompanied by half a dozen men, +started toward the prize. "I wonder what they will do with the sloop +now she has capitulated?" + +"We shall know as soon as the mate and his men return," replied Jack. + +It proved in the end that an officer and half a dozen men were sent +from the _Libertador_ to take charge of the captured sloop, which took +an opposite course from that pursued by her captor. The latter +continued along the coast, flying her signals, but did not offer to +touch shore until Jack assured his companions that they must be near to +Maracaibo. Then an unexpected thing happened. Though aware that they +were continually under close surveillance, they had not been molested +in any way until now they were ordered below. Upon showing a little +hesitation in obeying, Ronie Rand was sent headlong to the deck by a +blow from one of the sailors, sent to see that the order was carried +out. + +"Our only way is to obey at present," whispered Jack, leading the way +to their berths below, followed by their enemies. They were left here +by the latter. For a little time the three remained silent, each busy +with his own thoughts. Finally Harrie said: + +"This begins to look serious. Why is it done?" + +"It looks to me as if they were afraid we might try to leave them as +soon as we come to port, and they have taken this precaution." + +"What can they wish to keep us for?" asked Ronie. "We have been of no +benefit to them." + +"True. But they may possibly fear to let us go free, as we are +Americans, and would be likely to inform our government about some +things they think we may have learned of them." + +"Hark! I believe they are coming back." + +While this did not prove true at the time, it was less than an hour +later when an officer, with four companions, did visit them, the former +saying he had received orders to put them in irons. + +Upon listening to this announcement, the three looked upon their +captors and then each upon his companions, Unable, at first, to +comprehend the statement. + +"Why should we be accorded such treatment?" demanded Jack. "We have +done no harm to any one, but have come and remained as peaceful +citizens of a country that has no trouble with your government or its +subjects." + +The officer shook his head, as much as to say: "I know nothing of this. +My orders must be obeyed." Then he motioned for his men to carry out +their purpose. + +Although they were not armed, except for their small firearms, and the +Venezuelans carried heavy pistols and cutlasses, the first thought that +flashed simultaneously through the minds of our heroes was the idea +that they could overpower the party, and thus escape the indignity +about to be heaped upon them. But, fortunately, as later events +proved, the calmer judgment of Jack prevailed. If they succeeded in +overpowering these men, they must stand a slim chance of escaping. In +fact, it would be folly to hope for it under the present conditions. +Thus they allowed the irons to be clasped upon their wrists and about +their ankles. This task, which did not seem an unpleasant one to them, +accomplished to their satisfaction, the men returned to the deck, +leaving our friends prisoners amid surroundings which seemed to make +their situation hopeless. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +ESCAPE FROM THE LIBERTADOR. + +During the hours which followed--hours that seemed like ages--the +imprisoned trio were aware of a great commotion on deck, and Jack +assured his companions that the _Libertador_ had come to anchor. + +"We are in some port near Maracaibo," he said. "I feel very sure of +that." + +"If we were only free," said Harrie, "there might be a possibility that +we could get away. It begins to look as if we are not going to regain +our freedom." + +"I wish we had resisted them," exclaimed the more impulsive Ronie. "I +know we could have overpowered them." + +"It would have done no good in the end," replied Jack. "In fact, it +would have worked against us in almost any turn affairs may take. In +case we do escape, we shall be able to show that we have not given +cause for this treatment. The United States Government will see that +we are recompensed for this." + +"If we live to get out of it," said Ronie. + +"That is an important consideration, I allow," declared Jack. "But I +never permit myself to worry over my misfortunes. So long as there is +life there is hope." + +"I wonder if Francisco knows of this," said Ronie. + +"If he does, and he must learn of it sooner or later, he will come to +us if it is in his power," replied Harrie, whose faith in the outlawed +Venezuelan was greater than his companions'. + +Some time later, just how long they had no way of knowing, it became +evident to them that the _Libertador_ was again upon the move. Whither +were they bound? No one had come near them, and so long had they been +without food and drink that they began to feel the effects. Had they +been forgotten by their captors, or was it a premeditated plan to kill +them by starvation and thirst? Such questions as these filled their +minds and occupied most of their conversation. + +"I wonder where Colonel Marchand thinks we are?" asked Harrie. + +"I tell you what let's do, boys," suggested the fertile Jack Greenland. +"Let's remind them that we are human beings, and that we must have food +and drink or perish. Now, together, let us call for water!" + +The young engineers were not loath to do this, and a minute later, as +with one voice that rang out loud and deep in that narrow place of +confinement, they shouted three times in succession: + +"Water! water! water!" + +This cry they repeated at intervals for the next half hour without +bringing any one to their side, when they relapsed into silence. But +it was not long before an officer and two companions brought them both +food and drink. They partook of these while their captors stood grimly +over them, ready to return the irons to their wrists as soon as they +had finished their simple meal. The only reply they could get to their +questions was an ominous shake of the head from the leader of the +party. So Jack gave up, and he and his companions relapsed into +silence which was not broken until the disappearance of the men. + +"This beats everything I ever met with," declared Jack, "though I must +confess I have been in some peculiar situations in my time." + +Nothing further occurred to break the monotony of their captivity for +what they judged to be several hours. Then they suddenly became aware +of a person approaching them in a stealthy manner. At a loss to know +who could be creeping upon them in such a manner, they could only +remain silent till the mystery should be solved. This was done in a +most unexpected way by a voice that had a familiar sound to it, though +it spoke scarcely above a whisper: + +"Have no fear, senors, it is I." + +The speaker was Francisco de Caprian, and he was not long in gaining +their side. + +"How fares it with you, senors?" + +"Poorly," replied Jack, speaking for his captors as well as himself. +"What does this mean?" + +"I cannot stop to explain now. This ship is now bound to Porto +Colombia for some repairs. It stopped off Maracaibo to land General +Riera and his staff. From what I have overheard the present commander +will leave her there, and one of Matos' more intimate followers will +become the captain. It is possible we may fare better in Porto +Colombia than out to sea here. But I am not certain. The captain +seems concerned over what to do with you, and desperate measures may be +carried out. I cannot say. But one fact remains. Every moment we are +being carried farther and farther from Caracas. As far as I could I +have arranged for immediate flight. I have bribed a sailor, who will +help us get a boat. The night promises to be dark, which will +materially aid us in escaping. But there is a lookout who stands in +fear of his life lest he lets anything pass his gaze. It is not more +than an even chance that we can succeed in evading him and the others. +Do you care to take that chance with me, senors, or remain here and +possibly escape with more or less harm?" + +"For one," said Ronie, "I am in favor of getting away as soon as +possible." + +"Will it be possible for us to take our trunk with us?" asked Harrie. +"We can ill afford to lose that." + +"I thought as much, senor," replied Francisco. "I think we can manage +to take it along." + +Though it was too dark for them to see the countenance of their +companion, the young engineers looked anxiously toward him while they +waited for his answer. Jack spoke in a moment: + +"I know how you feel, boys, and I think I have some of that spirit +myself. I have always found, too, that the bold dash for freedom +always counted best. If you think we had better take our chances now, +I am with you, by the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please!" + +"Good!" exclaimed Harrie and Ronie together. "You hear, Francisco, +that we are going with you?" + +"_Si, senors_. We will begin at once. For I will free you from those +irons. Then you must follow my directions to the letter." + +While he was speaking Francisco began to work upon the manacles upon +Ronie's wrists, and he showed that he had come prepared for his task, +as inside of five minutes the three were free, very much to their +relief. + +"Now," said Francisco, "you had better remain quietly here for what you +judge to be an hour. Then you come upon deck, being careful to get +astern without being seen. During this interval of waiting I will have +a boat in readiness, and be prepared to lower your chest into it at +short notice. You will have to bring this with you, and if it is too +heavy to handle easily and rapidly, I should advise you to remove +whatever of its contents you can spare. You understand?" + +"We do, Francisco, and we will not fail to be on hand." + +"I will be there to assist you. In case I fail to accomplish my +purpose in getting the boat, you will hear an alarm, in which case you +had better replace your irons and stay where you are until the +excitement blows over. Under these circumstances it will be for your +interest to look out for yourselves, as you will know that I cannot +help you." + +"We shall not desert you," replied the young engineers, while they +clasped his hands as he started to leave them. + +"He is a brave fellow, and thoroughly unselfish," said Harrie. + +Exchanging now and then a few words, they waited and listened while the +silence remained unbroken. At times the sound of footsteps reached +their ears, and constantly the steady swish of waters, but nothing to +warn them that the plans of Francisco had miscarried. + +"The hour must be passed," declared Jack at last. + +"And we must be moving," added Ronie. + +"Can you find your chest easily?" asked the first. + +"I think so," replied Harrie. "Follow me." + +The next five minutes were occupied in reaching the deck with their +burden. Upon feeling the salt sea breath the three breathed easier, +while they glanced about to see if the way was clear. As Francisco had +prophesied, the night was quite dark, though there were signs in the +west that the clouds were breaking away. No one was to be seen nearby, +and silently the three stole along toward the place where they expected +to meet Francisco, bearing the chest containing the instruments, charts +and papers of the young engineers. Fortunately, this was small, as +they had not taken more than was necessary. + +Harrie and Ronie bore this between them, while Jack followed with every +sense strained to catch the first sight or hear the first movement of +their enemies. In this way they had passed half the distance, and had +caught a glimpse of one ahead whom they believed to be their friend, +when a sharp voice rang out an alarm that for a moment fairly took away +their breath. Before they had fairly recovered the cry was answered +from the fore part of the vessel, and they realized that their flight +had been discovered. + +"Quick, senors!" called Francisco. "In a moment we shall be too late." + +Ronie and Harrie quickened their advance, while Jack prepared to meet +the enemy hand-to-hand, if it should be necessary, while he kept close +beside his companions. + +"The boat is ready," said Francisco. "Let me fasten the rope about the +chest. If we can lower that before they get here, we will give them +the slip." + +Already they could hear the crew of the _Libertador_ rushing wildly +about, uttering confusing cries, which told that they had little idea +of what was taking place, the majority doubtless thinking they had been +attacked by some unknown and mysterious foes. Above this medley of +voices rang the stern command of the captain, trying to bring order out +of the excitement. + +Francisco had now arranged the rope about the chest, and then it was +lowered down the ship's side, rapidly, hand over hand. + +"They are coming!" exclaimed Jack, hoarsely. "If I only had a weapon +of some kind I would show them the mettle of my arm." + +"Over the rail!" said Francisco, and he and Harrie shot down the line +at a furious rate. But before Ronie and Jack could follow they found +their retreat cut off, and themselves confronted by a dozen armed men, +with others coming swiftly toward the scene. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +A SWIM FOR LIFE. + +Thinking that his friends were close beside him, Harrie dropped into +the boat arranged for their flight. At the same moment Francisco +landed in the bow of the slight craft rocking at its moorings, while +flashes of light and wild orders of men under the stress of great +excitement came from the deck of the _Libertador_. + +"Are you all here?" asked the young Venezuelan, while he looked +hurriedly upward to the scene of excitement Over their heads, rather +than about him. + +"Jack and Ronie are not here!" replied Harrie. "Hark! That must be +them engaged in a hand-to-hand fight." + +"We must cut loose!" exclaimed Francisco, through his clinched teeth. +"Some of them are coming over the rail!" + +"Boat ahoy!" thundered a stentorian voice from the vessel. + +Francisco was in the act of cutting the boat adrift at that moment, and +before the sound of the speaker's voice had died away the fugitives +were several yards astern. + +"Ply the oars, for your life!" said Francisco. "Our lives depend on +our work for the next few minutes." + +Loath as he was to make this flight without his friends, it was really +all that Harrie could do, and he lent his arm to that of his companion, +and with each stroke of the oar they were taken farther and farther +from the scene of wild commotion reigning upon the deck of the outlawed +ship. + +"They are laying to," panted Francisco. "They have sighted us, and +boats will be lowered to give us pursuit. Ha! that shows they mean +business." + +A volley of firearms at that instant awoke the night scene, +illuminating the sea for a considerable distance. But the shots flew +wide of their mark, though the light from the guns had disclosed their +position, so the following volley whistled uncomfortably near. A +darkness deeper than ever succeeded the discharge of firearms, and +under this cover the fugitives managed to get beyond range before the +third volley could be sent after them. + +Harrie had improved the passing gleams to look for Ronie and Jack, but +he had failed to learn aught of their fates, and his heart was very +heavy, as he concluded that he alone had been permitted to escape. +Francisco was silently bending over his oar, sending the boat swiftly +through the water into the unknown dangers that must lie in their +pathway. + +Meanwhile, how has it fared with Jack and Ronie, who found their escape +cut off at the very moment they were about to follow their companions? + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please!" gritted the first, +seizing upon a stout lever that some one had dropped nearby, and which +promised to be a formidable club when wielded by his nervous arms, +"when ye keelhaul old Jack Greenland ye'll hear Gabriel's trumpet +sounding not far away!" + +Then, as the mob rushed forward, he sprang in front of Ronie, who had +suddenly found himself flung back from the ship's rail, to be sent +headlong to the deck, and swinging his primitive weapon over his head +he mowed down a semi-circle of the seamen as if he was cutting a swath +of grain. By that time Ronie, whose determined nature was aroused by +this rough treatment, was upon his feet, holding in his right hand a +serviceable small arm that he had been able to pick up. + +Shots were fired upon them by the crew of the _Libertador_, but, +fortunately, the assailants proved but poor marksmen. One burly +ruffian attempting to fell Ronie, the latter pointed at his body and +discharged his firearm. At least he cocked the weapon and pulled the +trigger, but it failed to respond. Realizing that it was empty, he +used it as a club, and a moment later had cleared his path of the big +seaman. At that moment Jack cried out: + +"Quick--into the sea!" + +An instant later their forms disappeared over the rail, and they shot +headforemost into the water. Almost simultaneously with their escape +the deck where they had just stood swarmed with the armed rabble. + +Ronie for a brief while lost consciousness, and then the voice of Jack +came faintly to his ears: + +"Where are you, lad?" + +"Here, Jack." + +"Good! I will be with you in a minute. Drop astern as fast as you +can." + +Ronie was a good swimmer, and as soon as he had recovered from the +shock of his headlong leap from the vessel he gathered himself +together, and when Jack came alongside he felt equal to the task which +seemed to lie ahead. + +"Are you hurt, my lad?" asked Jack. + +"No, Jack." + +"Then keep beside me, and mind that you do not waste any of your +strength, for if we do not find Harrie and the boat it is likely to be +a long swim." + +"Where can he be? I believe they are lowering a boat from the ship." + +"Let them lower away, lad. It'll be a long chase before they overhaul +us. Let's keep a little more to the right, for the boat has in all +probability gone that way, if they got away. I am not sure they did, +but it looked like it." + +Then, the cries of the excited officers and crew of the _Libertador_ +growing fainter, as they swam on and on, Ronie and Jack steadily forged +ahead, peering with anxious gaze into the gloom about them for a sight +of their friends. + +At the end of an hour the dark hulk of the _Libertador_ had faded from +view, and no more did the shouts of the exasperated men on board reach +their ears, while they, feeling the fearful strain upon them, moved +slowly through the water, hope slowly dying out in their breasts. + +"We shall not find them!" declared Ronie. + +"We must!" said Jack. "Let's shout to them again, now, together: + +"Boat a-h-o-y!" + +As they had done a dozen times before without receiving any welcoming +reply, they sent their united voices far out over the sea, shimmering +now in the starlight. Still no response--no sound to break the +dreadful silence of their watery surroundings. + +"My old arms are not quite tired out yet, lad; hold upon me." + +"No--no, Jack. I am young and strong. I can bear up a while longer. +If I only knew Harrie had escaped I should feel better." + +"We can only hope that they have, and fight for our lives a little +longer." + +Nothing more was said for some time, while they continued their battle +with the sea, each stroke of the arm leaving them a little weaker, +until it seemed to the castaways that they could not hold up much +longer. + +"The race is almost over, lad," said Jack, at last. "I feel worse for +you than for myself. You have been a true boy. It does not matter so +much with an old wornout veteran like me, but you are----" + +"Look, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, in the midst of his speech. "I believe +that is the boat!" + +His companion glanced in the direction pointed out by Ronie, and a glad +cry escaped his lips. + +"Boat, ahoy!" he cried. "Help! H-e-l-p!" + +Then they listened for a reply, fearing lest the other should fail to +catch their faint appeal, for both were so hoarse and exhausted that +their united voices could not reach far. + +"It is a sloop," declared Jack. "It is coming straight down upon us. +They cannot miss us--ay, they are veering away! They have not heard +us--they have not seen us--they are going to pass us. Once again, lad, +shout for your life. It is our only hope." + +Never did two poor mortals appeal with greater desperation for succor, +and a moment later a low cry of rejoicing left their sea-wet lips as +the reply rang over the water in a piercing tone: + +"Ahoy--there! Where away?" + +"Here--to your lee!" replied the castaways, and then, quite overcome, +they suddenly lost consciousness. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +TAKEN ASHORE. + +Neither Jack or Ronie had a full realization of what followed. The +sound of a voice that seemed to be muffled rang dimly in their ears, +and soon after strong arms lifted them bodily from the water, to place +them in the bottom of a boat. Some one spoke in a language they could +not understand, when the boat started back to the larger craft awaiting +its return. By the time they had been taken upon the deck of this +strange sloop both had recovered sufficiently to understand their +situation. + +A motley-looking crew stood around them, but they did not give these +particular attention at the time, as one who was in command immediately +caught their notice. He was a stout-framed, bewhiskered man of middle +age, and in spite of his foreign dress, plainly an American. But he +seemed to be the only American on board the sloop. Prefacing his +question with an oath, he demanded: + +"Who are you, and where did you come from?" + +Understanding the suspicious character of the _Libertador_, Jack was +wise enough not to acknowledge that they had come from that vessel +until he should deem it good policy to do so. Accordingly he answered: + +"We are two castaways who fell overboard from a ship just out from +Maracaibo." + +"Pretty seamen!" declared the other, showing that he scouted the idea. +"Is it a trick of yours to fall overboard every time you step on deck?" + +"We were only passengers," replied Jack. "As you will see, like +yourself, we are Americans, who have come to this country with peaceful +intentions." + +"As if anybody was peaceful at such a time as this. What are your +names?" + +"Mine is Jack Greenland, and my friend's is Roland Rand," replied Jack, +respectfully. + +"Names are nothing," grunted the other. "You look like drowned rats. +If you will go below with one of the men he will see that you have a +change of clothing." + +"We do not care for that, sir, Captain----" + +"Captain Hawkins, sirrah. If you prefer wet duds to dry ones it is not +my fault. Shift for yourselves while I look after my men, who are as +lazy a lot of devils as ever swore in Spanish." + +Jack and Ronie were in a dilemma. While they hesitated about arousing +further the other regarding their identity, it seemed cowardly not to +say or do something for Harrie and Francisco, whom they believed afloat +in the boat, though not certain of this. Exchanging a few hurried +words, Jack then ventured to address the captain again, though he felt +he was treading upon dangerous ground. There was that air of mystery +about the sloop and those who manned her, which already created a +feeling in the breasts of our twain of doubt as to the honesty of the +craft. What was this single American doing in these waters with a +Venezuelan crew, not one of whom did they believe could speak a word of +English, and certainly not one of whom appeared as if he would shrink +from cutting a man's throat in case that person stood between him and +any purpose he may have had in view. + +"Captain Hawkins," said Jack, frankly and fearlessly, "we wish to ask +whither you are bound. We realize we are under great favor to you, but +we are very anxious to learn the fate of a couple of friends whom we +have reason to believe were adrift at the time we found ourselves in +the sea." + +"Humph!" grunted the captain. "I should like to know what you expect +of me. You may thank your stars that I am an American, as that fact +alone has spared your lives." + +"For which we are very grateful. But for the sake----" + +"If you haven't been on this craft long enough to know that I am her +master it's because you ---- ---- idiots, and fit food for the fishes +only. I will leave you at the first sod of earth that I see. Is that +enough?" + +It was a trying situation. It was evident that it would be worse than +useless to continue this subject under his present mood. + +"They are better off than we were," declared Jack, aside to Ronie. +"That is, if they really gained the boat." + +"I would give a good deal to know," said Ronie. + +"Captain Hawkins is tacking ship," declared Jack, a moment later. + +"What does that mean?" + +"I cannot tell, unless, by the great horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you +please! he means to keep his word, and run us ashore at the first point +of land to be reached." + +"That will take us away from Harrie," said Ronie. + +"Too true, lad; too true!" + +"Jack, what do you make of Captain Hawkins and his men?" + +"They are greater mysteries to me than the officers and crew of the +_Libertador_. I set them down at once as pirates, but these fellows +stump me out of my boots. All we can do is to watch and wait. They +have done us one good turn, anyway." + +Standing by the rail of this strange sloop, Jack and Ronie watched in +silence the scenes that followed. Dark clouds had again risen on the +sky, obscuring the stars in the west, while throwing a gloom over the +sea far and wide. Captain Hawkins paid no further attention to them, +but appeared oblivious of their presence. + +"Are all of the ships that ply in these waters like those we have +found?" asked Ronie, in a low tone. + +"Not all, lad," replied Jack; "but I fear by far too many have followed +in the wake of Sir Henry Morgan and his buccaneers. By my faith, lad, +we must be going over very nearly the same course pursued by that +infamous outlaw of the sea when he sailed with his expedition to sack +the coast of Venezuela in the last half of the seventeenth century. In +1668 he captured the important city of Puerto Bello, the booty obtained +amounting to over 250,000 pieces of eight, to say nothing of rich +merchandise and precious gems. Encouraged in his unholy warfare by +these ill-gotten gains, he rallied his lawless forces for another raid. +So, early in 1669, he sailed with fifteen vessels and 800 men in this +direction, making the rich city of Maracaibo his object. Again success +came to him, and at that city and Panama he reaped a greater harvest of +spoils than he had done at Puerto Bello. But this time Spain had got +wind of his intentions, and sent a mighty squadron to intercept and +capture him. At last it seemed as though the bold outlaw must yield, +but his daring stood him still in hand, and by a sudden and unexpected +swoop upon his unsuspecting foe he carried confusion and dismay into +their midst, burning several of their ships and actually routing the +fleet. There was still a blockading fort to pass, but throwing his +colors to the breeze, now bearing directly down upon the guns, and then +veering off, he succeeded in running the gantlet without the loss of a +vessel. + +"As may be imagined, Morgan was king of the buccaneers now. Did he +need more men he had but to say so, and they flocked to his standard by +scores. So a year later, in command of thirty-seven vessels and over +two thousand men, he started upon the most difficult and the most +audacious expedition ever planned by the wild outlaws of this coast. +The outcome was too horrible to contemplate. The Spaniards fought +well, for their all was at stake, but against the demoniac followers of +a man who knew neither mercy nor hesitation in carrying out his +infamous purposes. Panama was laid in ruins, and her unhappy +inhabitants were nearly all inhumanly butchered or spared to fates even +worse. Following this terrible expedition, the infamous leader was +knighted by an infamous king, and for a time it seemed as if his evil +deeds were to bear him only fruits of contented peacefulness. But it +was not long before his old spirit began to reassert itself, he fell +into trouble, was seized for some of his crimes, thrown into prison, +where his history ends in oblivion." + +Ronie was about to speak, when the cry of "land--oh!" came from the +lookout, when their attention was quickly turned toward a dark line +that had seemed to come up on the distant horizon. + +"The sloop is about to lay to," declared Jack. + +"And it looks as if they were going to lower a boat," added Ronie. + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! that is what they are +doing. I wonder what is on hand now?" + +They were kept in suspense but a short time, when Captain Hawkins +approached them, saying: + +"Whatever else Jerome Hawkins may have to answer for, it cannot be said +that he ever failed to keep his word. You said you wanted to go to +Venezuela. Yonder lies its shore, and I bid you a hearty God-speed. +No thanks, sirrah," as Jack was about to speak, "you go your way and +I'll go mine." + +Without further words he turned upon his heel, and our twain had no +further opportunity to exchange speech with him. A moment later they +were ordered by gestures more forcible than speech to enter the boat, +and knowing they could do no better, they obeyed. A crew of four +accompanied them, and in a short time the keel of the boat grated upon +the sandy shore of a point of land jutting out into the sea. + +Understanding what was expected of them, and knowing it would avail +nothing to resist, Jack and Ronie sprang out upon the land. Without +even a parting gesture, the boatmen started upon their return to the +sloop, whose dark hull loomed up gloomily in the distance. So intense +was the feeling of the utter loneliness hanging over the hapless couple +that neither of them spoke until they had seen the boat reach the +strange sloop and the four seamen climb to the deck, when Jack said: + +"Well, my lad, we are in Venezuela at last." + +"But how different is our coming from what we had expected." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +JAGUAR CLAWS. + +Jack Greenland made no reply to the remark of Ronie. In fact, there +did not seem anything for him to say by way of answer. They saw that +the country which lay back of them appeared barren and desolate. A few +sickly shrubs pushed their crabbed heads above the sand dunes, but as +far as they could see in the night the country was nearly level, and +nothing more inviting than a sandy plain. The only cheerful sight that +greeted their gaze was the crimson streak marking the eastern horizon, +and which announced the breaking of a new day. + +"I would give a good deal to know where Harrie is at this moment," said +Ronie. + +"We can only hope that he is able to look after himself," replied Jack. +"And we can only make the most of our situation. As for me, I feel +better on this sand bar than I have felt on board such ships as we have +known since leaving Colon." + +"If this is a sample of Venezuela," said Ronie, "I am heartily sick of +it already." + +"It is not. From what Captain Hawkins said, I judge we are on or near +the shore, where the narrow tongue of water connects Lake Maracaibo +with the sea. If this is the case we are twenty miles from the city. +The lake is about one hundred and twenty miles long and ninety miles +wide." + +"But there must be some town nearer than the city you mention," said +Ronie. + +"Quite likely. As we can do no good by remaining here we might as well +do a little prospecting. It may be well for us to move cautiously, as +it is uncertain how we shall be treated. It is unfortunate that our +letters of credit and other papers were lost with our chest." + +"And all of our instruments and charts. Truly, Jack, it would seem as +if we had been prompted to undertake this trip under the influence of +an unlucky star." + +Jack made no reply to this, but led the way from the shore, closely +followed by Ronie. It was getting light enough for them to move with +ease, as well as to get a good idea of their surroundings, which were +not very inviting so far. But in the distance could be seen the dim +outlines of the mountains and the borders of one of those luxuriant +forests for which South America is noted. + +Something like half a mile was passed in silence, when Jack paused, +saying: + +"If I am not mistaken, there is a small settlement off to our right. +Perhaps we had better get a little nearer, though I hardly believe it +will be good policy for us to be seen until we get a better +understanding of our situation. We certainly cannot boast of being +able to present a very attractive appearance," he added, ruefully, +while he looked over his companion and himself. + +In their bedraggled garments, not yet fully dry, it was small wonder if +they did present a decidedly disheveled appearance. + +"Do you think we are liable to an attack from the inhabitants in case +we should be seen?" + +"I do not know what to think. If this rebellion is general then we are +in constant danger. I know of no better way than for us to push ahead +and find out." + +Suiting action to his words, Jack resumed the advance, with Ronie still +beside him. It was now rapidly growing lighter, which was a source of +satisfaction to them, as the cover of the growth they were entering +promised to prove as effective a shield as the darkness had been when +upon the sand plain. + +Contrary to the expectations of Jack, they had not found the settlement +looked for. In fact, as far as they could see, there were no signs of +habitation anywhere in that vicinity. Thus, as they advanced, a +feeling of loneliness came upon them that they could not throw off. + +"I would give a good sum, if I had it, just to hear some one speak," +declared Jack, thrusting his hands into his pockets, to pull them out +the next moment with a prolonged whistle, which caused Ronie to start +with fear at the unexpected sound. + +"What is it, Jack?" + +"By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! talk of being penniless +when one pulls out of his pockets a whole handful of Spanish coin." + +"It must be what you took in exchange at Colon," said Ronie, appearing +relieved to find that nothing worse than a happy discovery had for a +moment seemed to upset his companion. "I may have a little, too," +beginning to search his pockets. "If I have not got money, then I have +something here that may prove of use to us," producing a small pocket +compass. + +"Right, lad," said Jack. "Zounds! here's something that pleases me +quite as much as the Spanish silver pieces. Here is the old knife I +have carried with me on so many jaunts that it seems a part of myself. +It had slipped down between the lining and the outside cloth of my +jacket. In this jungle one feels better to have something with which +to defend himself, even if it is nothing more than a good, stout knife, +with a blade that has been tried and tested in some tough scrimmages. +I think more of the old knife than ever." + +The revival of Jack's usual good spirits served to encourage Ronie to +somewhat forget their perils and uncertainty. + +"Let's see," said Jack, dropping the coin back into his pocket, but +holding the knife firmly in his hand, "if I'm not mistaken, by going +due west we shall eventually reach the shore of Lake Maracaibo. We +shall not have much difficulty then in reaching the city, from which we +can go by rail to Caracas; if not all of the way, nearly so." + +"In that case the compass will come in handy," said Ronie, and having +selected their course, they now pushed forward with better courage than +at any period since they had come to land. + +It must have been half an hour later, and the sun was now sending its +bright bars of light down through the umbrageous branches of the forest +trees, one kind of which was laden with a profusion of bright and +beautiful flowers, making the largest and most magnificent bouquets of +floral offerings Ronie had ever seen, even in the Philippines, where +the vegetation abounds on the grandest scale, when they were attracted +by the sound of a human voice. + +"There we get what a few minutes ago I was willing to give a big silver +piece to hear," declared Jack. "By my faith, the fellow has lusty +lungs. He must be getting excited, too." + +"His tone shows he is in great fear," said Ronie. "Whoever he be, he +is in some great danger or critical situation." + +"Perhaps we had better push ahead, so as to lend him a helping hand in +case he needs one." + +Quickening their pace they tore through the tropical vegetation, the +undergrowth of which stood high over their shoulders, in the direction +of the appeals for help. These grew rapidly louder and more fraught +with terror. + +"He is close at hand," panted Jack, and the next moment they came upon +a startling sight, which, for a brief while, held them spellbound. The +underbrush had here been beaten down, and bruised into fragments by the +furious trampling back and forth of a huge specimen of that king of the +South American forest, the jaguar. The cause of the anger of this +terrible brute, equal in size and ferocity to the tiger of the jungles +of Asia, was the sight of a human being--a man--suspended in midair, +almost over the head of the maddened creature. It was this person who +had given forth his frantic cries for help, and who, unconscious of the +arrival of strangers upon the scene, was continuing to utter his +piteous appeals. His situation was as singular as it was startling. +Somehow his feet had become caught in the topmost branches of a tall, +slender sapling, which, bowed by his weight, held him head downward in +the air, swaying to and fro like the pendulum of a clock. Fortunately, +the tree was too small for the jaguar to climb so as to reach him in +that way, while he hung just above the clutch of the brute as it sprang +upward time and again in its furious attempt to seize its prey. + +At that moment the infuriated creature was crouching to the earth +preparatory to making another vault into the air in order to pounce +upon its victim. Then the scent of newcomers reached its nostrils, and +its small, piercing eyes quickly became fixed upon its prey within +reach. The long tail lashed the air with renewed fury, the lissom form +hugged closer to the ground, as it made swift preparation to spring +upon the couple who had dared to enter its domain at this critical time. + +To Jack and Ronie it was a moment not to be forgotten. The first +clutched his knife savagely, but what could he hope to do against such +a foe with so simple a weapon? In the brief interval between the +discovery of the brute and its attack upon them, Ronie's gaze fell upon +a thrice-welcome sight. This was nothing less than a short, +serviceable-looking firearm, lying scarcely a yard distant from his +feet. It was doubtless the property of the man hanging from the +pendant tree, and who had somehow dropped it at the outset of his +meeting with the jaguar. + +He had no time to think of this, or even to question whether the gun +was loaded or empty before the dark form of the jaguar shot into the +air, and the maddened creature came like a cannon ball toward the twain. + +"Jump for your life!" cried Jack, and so closely followed the animal +upon his words that, as the couple separated, Ronie springing to the +right and he to the left, an outstretched paw of the creature brushed a +shoulder of each as it sped past them! + +The jaguar had not struck the ground a few feet away, flinging up a +cloud of dirt where he landed in a heap, before Ronie had seized the +firearm. It was the work of but another instant for him to cock the +gun and bring its stock to his shoulder. + +As quickly as this was done, the jaguar had as quickly recovered from +the effect of its disastrous jump, had wheeled about, and now crouched +for a second leap, his maddening rage increased twofold by his recent +failure. The muzzle of Ronie's firearm now caught its attention, and +our hero was now its object. + +So hurriedly had this all taken place that Ronie was still in ignorance +as to the condition of his weapon, and knowing that his life hung upon +the result, he took hasty aim and pulled the trigger. + +A quick, sharp report sent a thrill of joy through his frame, while it +was so swiftly followed by a cry of rage that the latter seemed an echo +of the first, and then the jaguar again sprang upward and forward, +fully ten feet into the air before it descended at Ronie's feet, +snarling, twisting, struggling, in an outbreak of fury frightful to +behold. + +Trembling lest his shot had only served to add to the volcano of +ferocity burning in the brute's form, Ronie would have failed to +retreat quickly enough to escape its claws had not Jack's ringing voice +warned him of his danger. The next moment his companion was beside him. + +"You fixed the creature," declared Jack, "but it dies hard. Give it +plenty of room, lad, we can afford to." + +Then, in silence they watched the dying struggles of the brute, as it +beat earth and space with its lacerated body, now groveling in the +dust, now bounding upward in blind endeavor to reach an enemy it could +not see, each moment growing weaker, until it lay at last quite still, +scarcely less terrible to look upon in death than it had been in life. + +"Your shot saved us," said Jack, frankly. "It was well done, lad, +exceedingly well done, and it alone has saved us from the claws of the +jaguar." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE MYSTERY OF THE PHOTOGRAPH. + +"It seemed as if I could not miss, Jack; but I do not care to go +through that ordeal again." + +"Nor I, Ronie. But now that we are safe, let's look after the chap +over our heads. It must be he needs our aid bad enough. I never saw +one in just such a predicament." + +The hapless man had ceased his outcries, and was trying to find out +what had taken place underneath him, and as to what bearing it would +have upon his fate. Seeing no other way to reach him, Ronie +immediately climbed the tree holding him. His weight, added to that of +the other's, caused the sapling to bend so that Jack was soon able to +reach the poor fellow by standing under him. + +"A little lower, lad, and I shall be able to get him. His feet are +caught in the tree's bootjack, but I--there! I have got him free and +clear. Look out that the tree doesn't hang you up." + +Jack quickly laid the man upon the ground, and began to straighten out +his limp limbs. + +"Has he fainted?" asked Ronie, quickly joining him by springing from +the tree to the earth, leaving the sapling to leap back into its normal +position with a force that cut the air like a lash. + +"He is overcome by his experience. But he'll soon come out all right, +as I do not see that he has been injured more than a few scratches. +Looks like a tolerable sort of a fellow for a South American. Got a +little of the native blood in him mixed up with the Spanish. He +belongs to the common class." + +The man was a person of middle age, of slight figure, but wiry build. +He presented a somewhat warlike nature by the armament he carried about +his body. This consisted of a pair of heavy pistols, a huge knife, and +inside his stout jacket a pair Of smaller pistols were to be seen. He +also had fastened about his waist by a belt a good stock of cartridges, +evidently for the firearm Ronie had picked up. Certainly it had not +been for a lack of means of defense that he had fared so roughly in his +meeting with the jaguar. + +It seemed like a long time to our friends before he opened his eyes and +revived enough to seek a sitting posture. Then he rubbed his head, +stared stupidly about, and tried to regain his feet, giving expression +to his surprise in Spanish. Both Jack and Ronie were able to converse +in that language, and Jack at once assured him of his safety at that +moment. + +He was profuse in his thanks, though somewhat reticent in regard to +himself. He had climbed a tree near the sapling, but somehow had lost +his footing and fallen into the topmost branches of the latter. +Lodging between the branches of this his weight had brought it and him +into the positions in which they had been found. The jaguar had come +along, and discovering him began at once its attempted attack. That +was what Jack and Ronie made out of his disjointed account. + +"I do not know what to make of him," said Jack, aside in English. "He +is either afraid of us, or he is a rogue. Probably both. I will see +if I can find out where we are." + +Then, addressing the Venezuelan, he said: + +"How far is it to the nearest town?" + +"You mean San Carlos, senor?" + +"_Si, senor_," replied Jack, at a hazard. + +"Have you friends at San Carlos?" asked the other, without answering +the question propounded him. + +"I hope so, senor." + +This reply seemed to stagger him for a moment, but he managed to +recover in a moment, when he said: + +"How long have you been in this country, Senor Americanos?" + +"Since sunrise," was the reply, which gave the other a second surprise. + +"I do not understand, senor." + +Thinking nothing could be gained by withholding all of the truth from +him, Jack soon explained how they had been lost overboard from a vessel +in the gulf, picked up by another, and then left ashore among strangers +in a strange land. He did not consider it necessary or advisable to +enter into descriptions of the ships they had recently left. If his +account aroused at first some suspicion in the mind of the Venezuelan, +Jack's honesty of tone quickly dispelled this, and the other said: + +"You have been unfortunate, senors. There are many ships upon the sea +at this time who do not care to pick up strangers. No doubt the craft +was one of Castro's spies. They are looking far and wide for the +_Libertador_, but they cannot find her," he concluded, showing evident +pleasure at the thought. Then he asked, as if a new thought had come +suddenly to him: + +"What do they say of us in the Great Republic?" + +"The sympathy of the United States is ever with the down-trodden," +replied Jack, cautiously. "But we are not able to say just how our +nation looks upon the revolution here, except that it will see fair +play, for you must remember it has been nearly a year since we left +home." + +The other showed his disappointment at this, but soon asked: + +"Have you friends in this country?" + +"If we were at Caracas we might find them." + +At this the man shook his head. + +"It would be worth more than your lives to get to Caracas at this time. +The 'Sons of Liberty' are looking sharp after the dogs of Castro." + +"This man is one of the insurgents," was the thought which came +simultaneously to Jack and Ronie. Then the latter asked: + +"You said we were near to San Carlos. Is this town held by Castro or +by the followers of Matos?" + +"You prove yourself a stranger, senor, by your words. San Carlos holds +the blackest spot on fair Venezuela, the dungeon that keeps in captive +chains the noble El Mocho." + +"You mean General Hernandez, senor? I have heard of him. But I +thought he was once friendly to Castro." + +"So he was, senor, until the tyrant abused the common people, then El +Mocho led his gallant followers against Castro, was betrayed by a +cowardly dog, and now he lies at San Carlos a captive." + +"Do you live near here?" + +"_Si, senor._" Then he added, with a curve of his lips, which gave an +ugly-looking smile: "When I am at home. I was going hither when I met +with this little adventure, which would have ended the warfare of +Manuel Marlin for the freedom of poor Venezuela. If you will come with +me the hospitality of my humble home is at your disposal." + +"I do not think we can do any better than to go with him," said Jack, +aside to Ronie, "providing we keep our eyes and ears open." + +Ronie was about to signify his assent, when an object nearly buried in +the crumpled foliage and torn up earth where the jaguar had made its +stand, caught his attention. It was about the size of an ordinary +postal card, and at first glance looked like a piece of cardboard. But +Ronie had discovered on the other side a portrait, which prompted him +to pick up the photograph, as it proved to be. + +It was crumpled and soiled, but hastily brushing as much of the dirt +from it as he could, he gazed earnestly at the sweet, womanly face +pictured before him. As he gazed the color left his countenance, his +hand shook so it threatened to drop the card, while he exclaimed in a +husky voice: + +"My mother!" + +Jack showed almost as much emotion as his young companion, as he +stepped quickly beside him, saying: + +"Your mother's photograph in this place? How can that be?" + +"I do not know, Jack. But it is surely hers. See! It was taken in +New York." + +"Doubtless Senor Marlin can throw some light upon the matter," declared +Jack. "You picked it up almost under where he had been hanging. The +photograph fell from one of your pockets, Senor Manuel?" asked Jack, +addressing the Venezuelan. + +The latter had retreated a few paces, and he showed considerable +agitation, while he shook his head, replying in a low tone: + +"If it was in my pocket, I did not know it, senors. Some one else must +have dropped it here. It would not be strange, as there are many +scouts in the forests at this time." + +Both Jack and Ronie felt sure that the man was trying to deceive them, +but deemed it wise not to let him know it. + +"I mistrust the fellow," whispered Jack, aside. "We must keep a close +watch upon him. I do not think he understands English, so he does not +know what relation the portrait may bear to you. Let's feign +indifference in the matter, and keep with him." + +So Ronie placed the photograph in one of his pockets without further +remarks, though he found it difficult to conceal his emotions. While +he was doing this Jack signified to Manuel Marlin that they were +anxious to go to his home, or at least to be shown the way out of the +forest. Then, with rapid steps, the Venezuelan led the way out of the +jungle, not once looking back in his hasty advance. This gave our +friends opportunity to exchange thoughts, though they were careful not +to say enough to arouse the suspicions of their guide. + +"I cannot understand what it means," declared Ronie. "How could +mother's picture be brought here, and why?" + +As this was a question Jack could not answer, he merely shook his head, +adding: + +"This fellow, or some of his friends, may have been in New York, and +accidentally picked it up. In that case it would not indicate any +cause for worriment." + +"I cannot help feeling, Jack, that there is some other explanation. I +cannot help thinking that in some way it portends trouble to mother. +It can do no harm to question this fellow more closely in regard to the +matter." + +"We will take our chances on that score, though I believe he is a +thoroughbred liar." + +Then they did question this man as closely as they thought prudent, but +without gleaning a single ray of light upon the subject. In fact, he +persisted in maintaining an absolute ignorance in regard to it. So +finally Ronie was compelled to drop the subject, while he tried in vain +to find some plausible explanation of the mystery. + +Manuel Marlin showed that he was glad of the sight ahead, when at last +they reached the edge of the forest, and found themselves looking at +the rim of sandy sea-coast, with the glimmer of water in the distance. +The day was very calm, and the bay stretched as smoothly as if formed +of plate glass, while overhead the sky had that peculiar flat +appearance so common in the tropics. + +"Does senors see that dismal building on yonder point of land?" asked +their guide, and, without waiting for their reply, went on: "It is the +fort of San Carlos, where the 'El Mocho' is chained like a dog!" + +"Look yonder!" exclaimed Ronie, "there is a train of men going thither +now." + +"Looks to me as if they were conducting prisoners to the penitentiary," +said Jack. "If my old eyes do not deceive me one of them is an +American." + +"I am sure you are right, Jack. Let's get a little nearer, so we can +see as they pass along." + +Their guide showed some hesitation in doing this, though he led the way +somewhat circuitously forward, so as to gain a view of the soldiery +train without being seen themselves, saying as he did so: + +"This is more of the dirty work of Castro's dogs of war." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +"WE HAVE BEEN BETRAYED!" + +Ronie and Jack paid but little heed to the words of their companion, as +their attention was already fixed upon the file of men moving with +martial steps toward the gloomy structure, whose walls had echoed to so +many cries of distress from its heart-broken captives. Even now this +squad was taking thither two prisoners, as Jack had said, and one of +these had awakened an exciting interest. He was surely an American, +and in the distance there seemed something familiar about him, which +caused them to hold their breath while they watched and waited. Then +the truth of their convictions finally overpowered their doubts, and +Ronie exclaimed under his breath: + +"It is Harrie, Jack!" + +"Ay, lad; and Francisco is with him." + +"What does it mean, Jack?" + +"One thing certain, lad; they have escaped the sea. It is better than +becoming victims to that." + +"I agree with you, Jack. Now that we have found them it will be our +duty to rescue them. Perhaps Manuel here can give us some light on the +subject." + +The train had by this time passed beyond them, and not thinking it wise +to follow, our friends turned to their companion for such information +as he might be able to give. Upon learning that the prisoners were +friends of theirs, Manuel suddenly became very friendly. + +"So you belong to the Sons of Liberty!" he exclaimed. "Yonder +penitentiary is where Castro imprisons some of his most important +captives. But it won't be so for long. The mountain Indian[1] cannot +long hold his own against the noble Matos, who belongs to the Guzman +Blanco family. Senors shall soon see their comrades free." + +While this thought tickled the vanity of the Venezuelan to a high +degree, it did not afford any satisfaction to Jack and Ronie, the last +saying: + +"We must act promptly in their behalf. Have you any plan to suggest, +Manuel?" + +"Only this, senor. I know of one who lives in San Carlos, who makes it +his business to keep posted on what is going on. I will see him at +once, and no doubt he will be able to give us information that will be +of assistance." + +Ronie and Jack gladly agreed to this, and while Manuel was seeing his +friend it was thought best for them to remain at his home. This proved +to be less than a mile away, so it was only about an hour later that +the Venezuelan started upon his errand, leaving our twain anxiously +awaiting his return. Since he had learned that they had friends in the +hands of his enemies, he had grown very friendly. They had not thought +it best to say anything to create a feeling of distrust, but Ronie +freely confessed to Jack, as soon as they were alone: + +"I want to know what Harrie's imprisonment means before I decide to +which side I belong." + +"It is generally prudent to take the side of the government," replied +Jack. "I can easily understand how an insurgent like Manuel can come +to hate the name of Castro, and call him a savage from the mountains. +Mountaineers sometimes are men who accomplish much, and President +Castro seems to be one of them. I remember a few years ago, about +eight, when I was in this country, he suddenly appeared from obscurity +to lead a body of men against President Crespo in the interest of +President Andrade. He soon proved that he was made of good metal, for +he usually led his followers to victory. The Crespo party being +successful, the president offered Castro a position in his cabinet if +he would desist from further opposition. Possibly the daring +mountaineer foresaw greater possibilities, for he declined the honor. +Then, when President Crespo named General Andrade as his successor, +Castro appeared on the Colombian frontier with the nucleus of a +revolutionary army. From the very outset success perched upon his +banner, and after overcoming the government troops wherever he met +them, taking city after city, all the time receiving reinforcements to +his army, he laid siege to the capital. President Andrade fled at this +point of the war, and General Castro was declared ruler of the +republic. Our country a few months later was the first, I think, to +recognize him as ruler. I do not think he has been elected president +by vote of the people.[2] Be that as it may, his dash and courage, +with considerable military ability, has endeared him to a large number +of the people. General Matos and his followers, on the other hand, +claim that he has been corrupt in his management of the country's +affairs, as well as dictatorial beyond the bounds of endurance." + +From a discussion of the affairs of the country, they began to seek +some solution to the mystery of the photograph found in such a strange +way, Ronie firm in his belief that his mother was in dire distress at +that very moment. + +"I cannot help thinking that for some reason she is in this country, +Jack, and in trouble." + +"Tut--tut, lad! that cannot be. The mere fact that her picture has in +some way found its way to this place does not prove that she is nearby, +too. No doubt, as soon as we reach Colonel Marchand we shall get good +news from her. She may have sent her photograph by him to you, and +some of the rebels have stolen it." + +"Forgive me, Jack. Of course that may have been the case. Now you +speak of it, it is really the most likely solution to the mystery. By +that I am led to believe that you think Colonel Marchand has joined +President Castro's party." + +"He would be likely to do it. In fact, it would be good policy for him +to do so, as it would be necessary for him to be on good footing with +the government in order to carry out the business venture which has +drawn us all to this country." + +"I agree with you, Jack. I feel better, too, in regard to mother. Now +if we can rescue Harry safely it will bring great relief. I wish +Manuel would come with some word of him." + +"Do not get impatient, lad. It is likely to take the fellow some time +to get his information, even if he gets any. I do not have great faith +in the rascal, and if we were not in his own house, I should not expect +to see him back." + +If Jack counseled patience in waiting for the insurgent's return, he +quite forgot his advice before Manuel Marlin put in an appearance, and +with good reasons, for it was well into the following night before he +came. He seemed then greatly excited, and told his story in a +disjointed way. + +"Senors' friends came ashore in a boat from the _Libertador_," he +declared, in what seemed an exultant tone. "Then Castro's spies +captured them and threw them into prison. But senors need not fear, +for the Sons of Liberty will soon free them. Even now Matos is hewing +his way toward the capital. Many recruits are being added to his army, +and never did the prospects of down-trodden Venezuela look brighter." + +"So our friends are held as prisoners of war?" asked Jack. + +"As spies under Matos," replied Manuel. "Perhaps I should add, senors, +that Francisco de Caprian has been recognized as an old offender +against Castro. But they cannot hold him any more than they can hold +long El Mocho." + +If this information did not disturb the spirits of Manuel Marlin, it +did awaken considerable uneasiness on the part of Ronie and Jack. + +"Perhaps, if we should see the authorities at San Carlos they might set +Harrie, at least, free," said Ronie. + +Manuel shook his head. + +"No power below Castro's can free them until Matos enters San Carlos." + +Ronie was about to reply, when a commotion outside of the dwelling +arrested their attention, and before they were able to understand what +it meant, the wife of the Venezuelan hurriedly entered the apartment, +exclaiming: + +"Fly, for your life, Manuel! The yard is full of soldiers searching +for the Gringos!" + +Even Ronie knew this last word was a term applied by the Spanish races +to Americans, and that he and Jack were the objects sought for by the +newcomers. + +Manuel Marlin quickly anticipated the truth, and he cried out in alarm: + +"We have been betrayed! Some one has carried the news of your coming +to El Capitan. Quick! flee from here, if you value your lives and +mine." + + + +[1] President Castro was horn of humble parentage, his parents being of +mixed blood, mostly Indian, in the mountainous district of Western +Venezuela. Thus the revolutionists were wont to paint him as an +untamable savage, who had come to the surface in the turbulent broil of +the uprisings of the times and had hewn and burned his way to the +presidency. Manuel Matos was of superior birth, and was related by +marriage to the Guzman Blanco family. He had had some military +experience under President Blanco, but was more of a civic leader. He +claimed that the Castro administration was corrupt.--AUTHOR. + +[2] Singularly enough, General Castro was elected President for a term +of six years on February 20, 1902, within a few days of this +talk.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A PERILOUS FLIGHT. + +Renewed outcries now came from outside the building, and it seemed +evident that the mob was about to enter the place. Certainly it would +unless something could be done to evade such a movement. Jack +Greenland was the first to speak: + +"Can't you or the woman parley with them long enough for us to slip +away by the rear of the building, Manuel?" + +"Me--parley? They would string me up like a dog. Curses upon their +pig heads!" + +By this time his wife had become calmer than he, and she showed that if +he was lacking in courage to meet the enemy, she was not. So she +immediately offered to keep the crowd at bay long enough for them to +effect their escape, her husband showing great eagerness to profit by +her heroism. Accordingly, she returned to the front part of the +dwelling without loss of time, and a moment later Ronie heard her +challenging the leader of the would-be captors. + +"While it may not be good policy for us to use them too freely, it may +not be amiss for us to provide ourselves with firearms," said Jack. + +"Si, senors," replied Manuel, quickly darting away from them, but +returning in an incredibly short time with a couple of short, but +serviceable weapons, one of which he handed to each of his companions. + +"Follow me, senors. They are getting impatient, and Dolores will not +be able to hold them back long. I think we had better cross the bay to +the other shore. I have a boat." + +As Ronie and Jack had no better plan to offer, they followed the +speaker in silence. He led the way to the rear of his humble dwelling, +where they paused to listen for sounds of their enemies. These came +from the front, and judging that the soldiers had not yet surrounded +the place they plunged boldly into the midst of the dense tropical +plants which reached above their heads, Manuel still leading the way. +But they had not gone far before he suddenly stopped, and motioned for +his companions to do the same. + +As the three fugitives thus abruptly paused they heard the sound of +footsteps, which rapidly became plainer. There were evidently several +persons approaching at a headlong rate, and knowing only enemies were +likely to be in that vicinity, they dropped swiftly and silently to the +earth, the broad leaves of the thrifty plants about them affording +shields for their bodies. + +A minute later, half a dozen men burst through the rank vegetation +within a yard of where they were lying! Jack and Ronie, believing they +were going to be discovered, thought hastily of flight in another +direction, but the party quickly swept past and disappeared in the +distance below them. As soon as they felt it was prudent they resumed +their flight, having no further cause for alarm until they came in +sight of the narrow body of water ahead. Between the growth and this +was a broad belt of sand, where not a shrub found sustenance. The +clear, starlit night made this space almost as bright as by day. + +"Hark!" panted Manuel Marlin, "they are coming! They have scented us +like bloodhounds. Our only hope is in reaching the boat. It is just +above that highest sand bar. Run for your lives, senors!" + +Ronie and Jack now heard plainly the sounds of their enemies +approaching from their rear, and the exciting words of their companion +were not needed to urge them ahead. With light, swift steps they +bounded forward across the open country. When about halfway to the +shore a volley of bullets was sent after them, and then their pursuers +burst out from the growth into sight. + +The aim of the pursuing crowd must have been poor, for their shots +failed to strike any of the fugitives, who were urged on to greater +effort, if that were possible. Jack, glancing back, saw the party +following at a furious pace upon their heels, and instinctively glanced +toward the water. It was nearer to the boat than back to their +pursuers, and he felt confident they would be able to reach the little +craft in season. Ronie was slightly ahead, while Manuel was as far +behind, unable to make as good speed as the young American engineer. + +"Don't leave me!" sputtered the latter, and as if he were going to make +this a necessity he stumbled over a sand knoll, to measure his length +on the ground. His companions, not hearing him fall upon the soft +earth, and being ahead, were not aware of his mishap until prolonged +yells from their pursuers and piteous cries from him, caused both to +look backward. + +The ring of triumph in the tones of the soldiers in the distance told +plainly that they anticipated a certain capture of at least one of the +fugitives, but Manuel rallied quickly, and was again upon his feet. + +"Keep on for the boat!" cried Jack, who felt that it would be fatal for +them to stop now. So they sped ahead, with Manuel sprinting his best +to overtake them, and the armed posse behind madly pursuing. + +They were soon close down to the boat, drawn up on the white sand, out +of the reach of the water, and then Ronie and Jack, panting for breath, +stopped beside it. + +"Quick! push it out into the water," said Jack, seizing upon the +gunwale and giving the object a furious shove toward the tide. Ronie +had already caught upon the boat, and together they sent it forward +more than its length in the twinkling of an eye. But the short delay +enabled Manuel to overtake them, so, as the boat floated on the water, +he sprang into the stern. There were a pair of oars in the bottom, and +Jack and Ronie each took one of these, to begin to send the light craft +flying across the narrow bay, while the Venezuelan steered for the +opposite shore. + +Renewed cries from their pursuers reached their ears in the midst of +this flight, and another volley of shot followed them. But the latter +proved as ineffectual as the first, and glancing back a few minutes +later, Manuel gave expression to a chuckle of delight, while he said: + +"We've outstripped them, senors. There is not another boat they can +get in season to follow us before we reach the land." + +Nothing further was said until the keel of the boat grated on the sand, +when Ronie and Jack jumped out upon the land, closely followed by +Manuel. The shadowy forms of their enemies could be discerned upon the +other side of the water, but feeling comparatively safe from them, our +twain turned to their guide for such suggestion as he might have to +offer. It was a beautiful tropical night, the full, round moon of the +South, now fairly above the horizon, was gliding over a sky of +cloudless blue, having already driven the stars into the background of +space, so that only Venus, the zone of Orion and the brilliant radii of +the Southern Cross were visible. + +Away from their feet stretched the silvery mirror of the sea, marking +the meridian of the moon. So calm and silent lay the deep water that a +satellite sky seemed carved from its azure depths. Upon the other +hand, the country, growing more and more broken in the distance, lay +clothed in its tropic verdure as silent and mysterious as the Blue +Water Empire. The beauty of nature, however, had no attraction for +Manuel Marlin, who felt that his life was at stake, and only swift +flight could save him. + +"A friend of mine, living a short distance from here, has a couple of +horses you can get," he said. "I shall not need one," he added, seeing +their looks of inquiry, "as I shall not go very far. I have friends +who will afford me protection until this shall blow over." + +Then he led the way up from the shore and along a path at times nearly +choked with the overhanging growth, until they finally reached the home +of a planter. After considerable trouble Manuel succeeded in rousing +the owner, who did not appear in very good humor at being thus +disturbed. But as soon as he understood the errand of his untimely +caller he became more genial. Would he let the Americanos have horses +to carry important news to the revolutionists near Caracas? Most +assuredly he would for so important a purpose! It will be noticed that +Manuel did not try to stick very near to the truth in the matter, and +neither of our friends felt like correcting him under the circumstances. + +Finally the planter ordered out a couple of peons, who soon brought +forward a pair of small, but hardy ponies, which their owner declared +were good for all that might be required of them. Leaving Manuel to +arrange for the loan of them in such a manner as he thought best, Ronie +and Jack sprang into the saddles and prepared to start upon their long +and hazardous journey. + +"Keep your eyes open for our friends, Manuel," were the parting words +of Ronie. + +"Trust me for that, senor, and may you live to come back with the +welcome word that Caracas is once more safe from the spoils of the +mercenary knaves that flock to the mountain savage." + +Murmuring an unintelligible reply to this, the couple then urged their +ponies forward, and a moment later were starting side by side upon the +first stage of a ride through a country overrun with hostile armies and +dangers which they had not stopped to contemplate. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +A LONELY RIDE. + +Ronie and Jack were crossing the vast plain which extends westward and +southward along the shore of Lake Maracaibo, upon the border of which +stands that beautiful city by the same name, and which is the capital +of the State of Zulia. The climate of this region is warm, but cooled +by the lake breezes, as well as by the breath of old ocean, it becomes +very enjoyable. Thus they rode on under conditions that must have been +pleasant had it not been for the shadows of war which overhung every +step of their journey. + +The road, if the trampled path at places overgrown with rank +vegetation, and at others smooth and bare as an open floor, deserved +the dignity of the name, soon after leaving the sand belt of the coast, +wound across broad fields of sugar cane, indigo and tobacco, or through +great plantations given over to the cultivation of cacao trees, which +yield those luscious beans that have been described as affording food +for gods. These trees to flourish well have to be protected by some +taller species of tree, and for this purpose the tall, over-arching +_Erithynas_ is raised, giving the scene the appearance at a distance of +being a huge forest, rather than a cultivated field. + +Frequently the progress of our heroes was checked, if not quite +stopped, by growths of weeds which had sprung up on deserted +plantations. In Venezuela land is so cheap that it is more +advantageous to abandon a tract of land when it becomes worn out by +cultivation, and clear a new territory, than it is to reclaim the old. +The latter thus soon becomes a forest of weeds, which, insignificant at +first, soon develop into trees with branches, so that by the second +season these overtop the head of a man on horseback. These huge +tree-weeds afford support for dense masses of creepers, among which +Ronie noticed the convolvulus, begonias and passion flowers. These at +places hung their flowering heads so as to form graceful festoons, or +anon lifted them proudly to the breeze, forming picturesque bowers and +floral archways. + +If displaying beauty and magnificence in their bountiful offerings, +these jungles were anything but pleasant paths to follow, and it +required skillful management on the part of the rider to save himself +from being pulled from his seat, or escape that fate he might expect at +the hands of the hangman. The native riders show wonderful ability to +run these gantlets, which the newcomer must naturally lack. Now +hanging by one leg down the side of his horse, or stretching himself +along its back, he would escape the blows a novice would be sure to +receive while continuing his flight with speed scarcely abated. + +By and by, however, Ronie and Jack came out into a more thickly +populated country. The sun was beginning to crimson the eastern +horizon with its early beams, and the two drew rein for a short +consultation. + +"I am afraid we have kept too far to our right," said Jack. "Manuel +spoke of leaving the mountains over our shoulder, and we seem to be +approaching them." + +"If the country is becoming more broken, it has the appearance of being +more thickly populated. Do you think, Jack, we need to stand in much +fear of the insurgents in this vicinity?" + +"Manuel spoke of a victory for his side recently at Barquisimete, and +if I am not mistaken, we shall pass near that city--certainly near +enough to be within range of the revolutionists. In fact, I feel +pretty sure that the revolution is mainly centered in this part of the +republic." + +"I almost wish we had taken the route to Valencia." + +"No doubt, whichever we had taken we should wish we had taken the other +before we reached our destination. But that is not the right way to +look at it. We must put on a bold front and push ahead." + +"In order to do that we must see that our horses have sufficient food +to enable them to keep moving, even if we go hungry ourselves." + +"Right, my lad, and if there is an inn in yonder village I suggest we +stop there long enough to allow them rest and feed." + +"I agree to that. Shall you claim to be a revolutionist or a follower +of Castro?" + +"At present that must depend on circumstances. Ha! as I thought, we +are approaching a coffee planter's little republic, with the liberty of +his followers left out. Look beyond that ridge, and in the valley +formed by the twin ranges of foothills you will see a typical peasant +settlement, which certainly denotes that not far ahead we shall come +upon some wealthy planter. These peons of Venezuela are to all intents +and conditions slaves, resulting from the debts, it may be, contracted +by their remote ancestors, as generation after generation have been +doomed to work to satisfy the laws and customs of a country which never +outlaws its debts, when those debts have been contracted by a weaker +party. The consequence is that the poor of these South American States +are destined to remain poor until some radical change has been made in +this direction. It is true, Venezuela is not as bad off in this +respect as some of the other republics, but it is bad enough here. Ay, +in South America the word 'republic' loses the significance of liberty +that it bears in other lands. It is natural a people condemned to +lifelong poverty, for no fault of their own in most cases, should be +ever ready to listen to the call to arms as a summons to a holiday. So +you see it is easy to raise an army of this sort, and it is small +wonder Venezuela has been bothered with so many outbreaks against its +peace and progress. But here we are close upon the spacious abode of +the coffee planter, who is the principal man of this vicinity, unless +there happens to be another of his class." + +After having seen the pyramidal structures of the peasants or peons, +with roofs slanting to within a few feet of the ground, and thatched +with palm leaves, the collection looking like a colony of beehives, +Ronie was somewhat surprised to find now a dwelling that closely +resembled the houses of his native land. It was, in fact, a fine +residence, standing back several rods from the road, and reached by a +broad avenue running under rows of stately trees resembling the +American elms. He was to learn that these were known here as the +_Alcornoque_, lifting as graceful heads, and as tall, tapering trunks +as their northern cousins. Everything about this home of the coffee +planter denoted wealth and comfort, in marked contrast to the humble +huts scarcely beyond the vision, and of a style of architecture +peculiar to the country. + +"Whoever lives here must be a man of importance," remarked Ronie. + +"True, lad, and being such a rich man, we are running little risk in +assuming him to be a follower of Castro at this time. The cultivation +of coffee is, in fact, a more certain way of earning a competence, and +it may be, something above a living, than any other calling in +Venezuela. For this reason nearly all others have been neglected. +Sugar cane can be raised profitably, but that requires more capital to +start with, and more manual labor to carry it on. To cultivate sugar +successfully one must fertilize it, so to speak, with gold. But any +man, if he is poor, can have a coffee estate if he has courage to work +and wait for a short season. The day his bushes yield their first red +berries he finds something coming into his pockets. The berries are +worth as high as thirty dollars a hundred pounds, and cost less than +one-third to raise. So you see a poor man, who may have hired the use +of a piece of land, which he pays for on long instalments, may plant a +coffee farm with the aid of his family, living on products that mature +earlier on the same land, until at the end of three years he gathers +his first crop of berries, followed by a full crop the next year. We +shall doubtless meet with more of these small coffee plantations after +this. If I mistake not, here comes the planter himself. Let us risk +it in claiming to be friendly to the government." + +Their approach had evidently attracted the owner of the estate, for +Ronie had already seen a small, wiry-framed man, of a very dark +complexion and dashing dress, coming, toward them. He now stopped to +allow them to come forward, saying in a tone of apparent friendliness: + +"Good-morning, senors," somewhat to their surprise speaking in their +language. + +"Good-morning," replied both in unison. + +"You must have taken an early start, senors." + +"It is because our journey is a long one, senor," replied Jack, who +acted as spokesman. "Our horses are tired, and we would bespeak for +them food and rest at your hospitality." + +"Dismount, gentlemen. My men will look after them, while I entertain +you." + +While Jack and Ronie did as they were told, a couple of peons appeared +on the scene, to lead the tired animals away, as the hospitable planter +requested his visitors to follow him to his favorite morning retreat +under one of the beautiful shade trees standing in his yard within +sight of his house. If he had shown a friendly spirit in his tone so +far, his next words, as the three sank upon the rustic benches +encircling the tree, showed that he was not free from concern in regard +to the character of his early callers: + +"You say your journey is a long one, sirs; no man travels a long +journey without an urgent purpose. Especially is this true on an +occasion like this." + +Jack, who could see no good likely to result from appearing mysterious, +replied frankly and promptly: + +"We are bound for Caracas, though it may not be well for every idle ear +to catch the word." + +"Right, sir. Who would you see in Caracas?" + +"President Castro." + +"Then your journey will be in vain, for the President is unavoidably +kept away from the capital. You might have traveled much quicker by +rail." + +"Possibly. But as you say the President is not in Caracas, that would +not have helped us. Can you tell if Minister Bowen is at the capital?" + +"If he is, he would hardly be accessible at this time. Come, +strangers, throw off your cloak of reticence and let us be frank with +each other. My name is Jose Pelado, and having lived several years in +your country, I am free to confess I have imbibed some of your Yankee +spirit." + +Our Americans immediately gave their names, adding that it was to +obtain assistance in securing the freedom of a companion that they were +on their way to the capital. + +"I expected something of this kind. It is fortunate that you have come +thus far without molestation, and I will assure you you cannot go as +far on your next stage without falling into the hands of the guerilla +hordes that infest the jungles. But, pardon me for keeping you from +the rest and food that you must need. Partake of such refreshments as +I can offer you, then we will discuss the situation." + +Ronie and Jack were not loathe to do this, though while they ate, their +host related to them much they had not known of the situation in the +country. He showed that he was not only an educated man, but that he +was well posted upon affairs, while he was very pronounced in his +admiration for Castro. + +"Venezuela has had revolutions and shades of revolutions, but not one +more unwarranted than this. Castro is a patriot, and the uprising that +he led a few years since, and which placed him at the head of the +government, is no more to be compared to this than the snarling of a +cowardly cur seeking to rob a bigger dog of his breakfast because he is +too lazy to hunt for his own, is to the good, honest bark of a mastiff +that seeks to defend his master's property. Andrade's administration, +following Crespo's, was grossly dishonest, and would have drained the +republic of its healthy interest, had it not been for the mountain +patriot, Castro, who fought his way straight from the Venezuelan +frontier, a good thousand miles, to Caracas, the capital. In a +twinkling Andrade went out and Castro went in. He lost no time in +setting about to clear up the clouded system of government. It +required a masterly hand to guide the current of affairs. He soon +found it difficult to know whom to trust. + +"Among those who had rebelled with apparent honesty against Crespo and +then his successor, Andrade, was the hunchback warrior, Manuel +Hernandez, called by friends and foes alike as 'El Mocho.' His forces +were scattered about in this region, he having rallied them by +inflammable speeches against Andrade, whom he declared had been +selected by fraud. Finally two thousand men, under the command of a +relative of Crespo, met his band of scarcely five hundred near +Valencia. In this unequal fight Crespo was killed and his men utterly +routed by the hunchback, who instantly sprang into wild favor. His +little army was swiftly increased by recruits. The people in general +rejoiced at the fate of Crespo, who had made himself obnoxious to many. +But the military prestige of Hernandez suffered an early frost. +Andrade sent his minister of war to treat with him, and in the next +battle he was defeated, his troops utterly routed, and he himself put +into prison. + +"Then Castro's triumph completely changed this. Andrade fled, and many +of the followers of El Mocho joined the new ruler, who soon freed +Hernandez, and offered him a place in his cabinet. Hernandez accepted, +though it proved that he had not stifled his ambition to become +president. He improved his new opportunity to inflate some of Castro's +followers with his wild dreams. He believed he had had the experience +now to enable him to overthrow the ruling power, so he stole out of the +capital between two days, leading a small army at his heels. + +"El Mocho made a desperate fight for his cause, but he misjudged the +ability of his rival. Castro did not worry over his escapades, but +when the favorable opportunity came he caught the hunchback rebel and +returned him to the prison where he is likely to remain for a goodly +time. Castro is the last man to be baffled where so much is at stake. +What can be on foot now?" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +IN THE ENEMY'S COUNTRY. + +The last words of Jose Pelado were called forth by the sudden +appearance of a peon with the announcement that a body of insurgents +had been seen the night before, and that a flock of cattle had been +killed or driven away by them. Upon receiving this intelligence, the +coffee planter replied in Spanish in a tone that showed great anger. +When he had conversed with the messenger for a few minutes he turned +back to his guests, saying: + +"The hungry hounds are again abroad. That mountain outlaw, Juan +Rhoades, is at his old pranks, and this time he has become bolder than +common from the fact that he has succeeded in calling about him more +than five hundred rebels. News also comes from San Carlos that two +spies are in this vicinity, and that efforts are being made to hunt +them down. Well, let the fools look after themselves. Rhoades had +better give me a wide berth." + +Ronie and Jack were beginning to think it was about time for them to be +on their way. Their horses were well rested by this time, so they +proposed to Senor Pelado that they bid him good-by. He seemed +disappointed to find they were not going to stay longer, and showed his +good-will by offering to send an escort of men to protect them in case +they should be attacked by Rhoades and his outlaws. But our heroes +stoutly opposed this, while thanking him for his kindness. + +"Two will be able to get through where a larger body might attract +attention and find it difficult to escape," replied Jack. + +"You seem like plucky fellows, and I think you will get through all +right. In case you do need help, do not hesitate to call on Jose +Pelado. If you succeed in meeting General Castro give him my regards." + +These parting words were not spoken until Ronie and Jack had regained +their saddles, and were heading their horses toward Caracas. As they +dashed out upon the road they noticed a crowd of peons watching them +with looks not altogether friendly. + +"Did you notice that tall fellow--the one with the extraordinary +mustache--who stood somewhat in the background while we talked with +Pelado?" asked Ronie. + +"That I did, lad, and I says to myself: 'That fellow is hatching +mischief.' He was not in sight the last part of our stay." + +"I did not see him, Jack. What do you think he will do--follow us?" + +"Not exactly; but if we do not meet some of his confederates before +night I shall be happily disappointed. At any rate, it behooves us to +be on the lookout continually." + +The way now wound through a coffee country, and they were frequently +met by these small planters, sometimes singly, but more often by twos +or in squads. + +"The idleness that usually follows in the footsteps of war seems lo +have fallen on the inhabitants," remarked Jack. + +As this did not seem to call for any reply, Ronie remained silent, his +mind busy with the thoughts of past adventures and conjectures over the +possibilities ahead. So the midday was passed, and the afternoon came +on apace, while they moved leisurely on so as not to exhaust their +horses. These were given their noon meal, and allowed two hours of +rest under the friendly shade of a tacamahaca, which was fragrant with +the resinous substance that it exuded from its trunk, an opaque, +lemon-colored sort of wax which the natives on the Orinoco used very +much for torchlights. This was a tree of great size and beauty. They +were now in a region broken by the outlying spurs of mountain, and +about sunset reached a mountain hamlet which bore a decidedly deserted +appearance. + +It had been their intention to push on beyond this place, preferring to +pass the night at some isolated planter's than here, but Ronie's horse, +which had showed slight lameness for several hours, now became unable +to go any farther. In this dilemma they looked about for a stopping +place. In this matter they soon found they were not to be given much +choice. The dwellings were so nearly alike, and built after the +pyramidal style of architecture already described, slanting roofs +reaching nearly to the ground, thatched with palm leaves, four posts +with ox hides stretched between composed the walls, so the collection +looked like a colony of beehives. Unfortunately, they were soon to +learn that it was not "a land of milk and honey." The houses possessed +no doors and windows, professedly for the reason that they were not +needed in that climate. Neither were they needed to protect the +occupant from prowling thieves, for the very simple reason that the +owner owned nothing worth stealing! + +After passing nearly the length of this poverty-marked hamlet, our +heroes hailed with delight the appearance of a building which looked +like a palace when compared to the others. It did prove to be a sort +of public house, or, rather, a hospital where people seeking the +bracing atmosphere of this mountain retreat and the mineral water to be +found here could stop. The lower half of the walls were made of stout +planks in the rough, with doors and windows. The upper portion was +left open to allow free passage of air and light. Ample protection +from sun and storm was afforded by the slanting roof, which reached to +within five feet of the ground. Under these overhanging eaves a narrow +veranda encircled the building. + +Half a dozen swarthy-hued men in loose attire, a pair of breeches, +tightly buttoned at the knees, and a shirt of bright colors, marked off +like a checkerboard, lounged about the abode, but not one of them +offered them any attention, except to stare upon them with undisguised +curiosity, as our twain paused in front of the main entrance. Upon +dismounting and entering the building, they were greeted by the +proprietor with many smiles and much scraping and bowing. + +"Senor, Americanos have heard of the wonderful curative powers of the +waters of San Andrea, and have come hither to recover their wasted +vitality?" he half questioned, half answered, bowing at almost each +word which he delivered in a musical tone. + +"Partly for that, and partly for pleasure," replied Jack. "Our horses +are tired, and one of them is lame. We ourselves are weary and dust +laden, and so desire rest and quiet more than we do food." + +"_Si, senors_," waving one hand to a group of peons, who instantly left +the apartment, ostensibly to look after the jaded animals, and the +other toward an opening leading into an adjoining room. Thinking it +was meant for them to repair thither, Jack and Ronie did so at once. +It must have been dark in the room at midday; it was certainly now too +dusky for them to distinguish each other with clearness. Seeing two or +three clumsy, cedar chairs, covered with rawhide, standing near the +wall, they each selected a seat, while they glanced about them with +feelings hard to describe. If the place boasted as the resort for +invalids and pleasure seekers, it had very little to offer in the way +of the comforts of either. It was in truth scarcely better fitted to +accommodate its guests than the tent of the wandering Arab of the +desert. In addition to the rude chairs mentioned, there was a rough +table placed against the wall, evidently because it could not stand +alone, and a couple of grass hammocks that were intended for the double +purpose of bed and lounge. Nothing in the shape of a bowl in which to +lave their dust-stained faces and hands was to be seen, while they were +to learn a little later that water was too scarce at this resort of +mineral springs to show any need of it. + +"Well," said Jack, in a low tone, "this beats anything we have found +before. But if they will give our poor horses care we can get along +ourselves." + +"I suppose we had better give them our personal attention," said Ronie. + +"In due course of time, lad. I wish now we had kept nearer the +seacoast, but I will not borrow trouble. Who is coming now?" + +The visitor proved to be an attendant of the house, who wished to +inquire in regard to the wants of their "illustrious guests." + +"We need nothing more at present," replied Jack, "than a couple of +basins of cool water in which to lave these bodies and limbs of ours." + +"_Si, senors_; your slightest wish is law at San Andrea," and, bowing +very low, the speaker withdrew, and our friends were left alone for +more than half an hour, when the man returned bearing in either hand a +small calabash filled with water that was too thick with mud to spill +over. These rude dishes possibly contained a quart of the dirty liquid +each. Depositing these vessels on the table, the servant expressed the +wish that they might enjoy a "very excellent bath." + +"No doubt we shall," declared Jack. "Did you have to bring this far?" + +"From the river, senor; two kilometers away." + +"Horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please, we'll excuse you for the time +it took you. But haven't you water nearer than a mile?" + +"A little, senor. Supper will be ready when you have washed." + +After supper they went to examine their-horses, to find that Ronie's +did not show much improvement. One of the peons, however, had +interested himself so far as to bandage the limb in some black +decoction that he claimed was good for a sprain, which was evidently +the trouble with the creature. This man became very friendly upon +finding that his efforts were so well appreciated, and he began to talk +glibly of other matters, saying, among other things: + +"You come from Maracaibo, I think, senors. Did you see anything of +Captain Rhoades and his bold riders?" + +"We heard of him," replied Jack. "We have been looking for them. Are +you expecting them this way?" + +"No one can tell where El Capitan will strike next, senor. He is very +brave, and he moves about as if he and his men had wings." + +"Is it possible that Castro's hirelings have penetrated into this +region?" asked Jack, as a feeler. + +"Possible it may be, but not probable. He has been whipped on every +hand, and I have no doubt General Matos will ride into Caracas its +conquerer before we are much older." + +"_Si, senor_," replied Jack, who, finding that nothing more was likely +to be learned, led the way back into the house. A few men were +standing about in the reception-room, but everything seemed very quiet, +giving little indication of the storm so soon to rise. + +Ronie and Jack lay down upon their hammocks without delay, believing it +would be good policy to rest while they; might, knowing not what an +hour might bring forth. They had slept about three hours, when they +were awakened by a commotion in the adjoining apartment, supplemented +by loud voices. In a moment they were sitting bolt upright, listening +to catch what was being said. The tones were loud enough for them to +do this, but the speakers, all of whom were talking in Spanish, spoke +in such excitement and disjointed manner that it was some time before +even Jack could understand sufficient to explain the situation. + +"I think it is a band of the mountain guerrillas," he whispered to +Ronie, as they moved close together. "It may be Rhoades' band, I +cannot say. Ha! they are speaking of a couple of Americanos coming +this way. Now the proprietor is telling them there are two stranger +Americanos in here. Lad, they mean us! It looks so we have got to get +out or fall into their hands." + +Before his companion could reply an ugly-looking visage appeared above +the edge of the woodwork forming the walls of the building, and which, +as has been said, were built only half the height of the structure. +Then it became evident from the sounds that the body of soldiers in the +adjoining room were about to enter their quarters! + +"We are in for it now!" said Jack. "We might as well make a bold dash +for liberty. The time for palavering is past." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +INDIAN WARFARE. + +Ronie realized that it was a critical moment for them. While it was +too dark in the room to see anything plainly, the dark visages above +the walls were silhouetted against the background of the night with +vivid clearness. They proved beyond a doubt that the building was +surrounded by the armed men. All this flashed through his mind very +quickly, for they lost no time in attempting to make their escape. + +"Follow me," whispered Jack, leading the way to the rear wall. Then, +notwithstanding the presence of the enemies without, he caught upon the +top of the wall, and, springing into the air, cleared the obstruction +with an agility some young athletes might have envied. Nor was Ronie a +bit behind him. Seizing firmly on the wall, the young engineer bounded +upward, and, turning a complete somersault, landed on his feet a couple +of yards beyond the other side of the wall. + +Jack struck within half a dozen feet of him, outside of the cordon of +watchers surrounding the building. At the same moment an outburst of +cries from inside the building told that the mob within had entered the +room our twain had just left so unceremoniously. Without stopping to +hear more, they darted into the thicket of bushes bordering the +clearing about the dwelling. + +They were barely in time to escape a volley of bullets sent after them +by the insurgents, who had rallied with celerity and prepared to start +in pursuit, giving expression to loud yells of mingled surprise and +consternation at the bold act just performed. These cries served to +tell the fugitives of their situation without doing any material harm. +At any rate, Ronie and Jack found themselves several rods from the +building before their enemies mustered for pursuit. But at the very +outset it promised to be a stern chase. + +Unacquainted with the grounds as they were, Ronie and Jack had to be +constantly on the watch against running into some of the impassable +thickets that grew in every direction. The woods seemed to be full of +the insurgents, for go whither they would they soon found their further +flight cut off in that course by a body of the armed outlaws lying in +wait for them, or crossing their path like so many hounds running down +a brace of foxes. They could still hear the outcries and excitement +prevailing at the building they had left. + +"Hist!" exclaimed Jack, suddenly grasping Ronie by the arm. "I hear +them coming from the right and left. Down upon your hands and knees, +lad. We must crawl for it." + +It was evident the enemies were too numerous for them to risk a +hand-to-hand struggle, so the fugitives dropped close to the earth and +began a tedious advance through the matted bushes which formed a sort +of hedge between the parties of insurgents. Jack was slightly ahead, +but Ronie kept as near to him as possible. In this way they advanced +for three or four yards. It was quite dark in the growth, but they +could discern the forms of the natives plain enough to see that a dozen +or more were within a few paces of them. Then Jack paused, signaling +to Ronie to do the same by a gentle grip upon his wrist. + +It had become very still in the jungle-like forest, and Ronie was +wondering what this movement of his companion meant, when a sharp +scream pierced the night air. It was a woman's voice, freighted with +great fear and suffering. + +"We are not the only ones in trouble," whispered Jack. + +"What does it mean? Hark, Jack! she is pleading for her liberty. +There is a man's voice, and he, too, is begging for some one to spare +his life. Is there nothing we can do for them?" + +"It looks as if we had about all we could look after to save our own +lives, lad. But, as long as it is in our way let's creep a little +nearer the place." + +The insurgents, having apparently moved farther to their right, they +cautiously advanced, being careful not to disturb a bush or make any +noise. They advanced in this way for a few rods, when they found +themselves on the margin of a sunken swamp, dense with a growth of +vines and bushes enveloped in moss and lichens. Finding this +impenetrable, they crawled along its border, though forced to steer +more to their right than they thought prudent. It was evidently this +impassable jungle which had changed the course of the insurgents. + +They must have advanced a hundred rods without finding any end to the +swamp, when the sound of voices now became distinctly heard, though +they were not raised above an ordinary tone. It was the same woman +speaking they had heard before, while her accents were scarcely less +intense. She was saying, in Spanish: + +"Have mercy, senors! I have never wronged you nor the poor country you +profess to be fighting for. My poor husband died in her defense, and I +am willing to give my life in her cause, but do not torture me." + +"Tell us where he is and we will spare you," replied a masculine voice, +pitched in a high key. + +"Alas! I do not know. I would that I did, senors. But if I did you +cannot think me cowardly enough to betray him, not at the price of my +poor life. God forbid that I should for a moment have such a thought +or that you should so far misjudge me in my weakness. He is all there +is left me--if he yet lives, which I am not certain--my noble son, the +noblest of the De Caprians." + +At the mention of that name Ronie and Jack instantly remembered the +brave young exile then with Harrie in prison at San Carlos, and, as may +be imagined, listened with excitement hard to suppress for the next +words, which were hissed rather than spoken by the man who held her a +prisoner: + +"You lie!" and the concealed listeners fancied they could see him lift +his armed hand over her head, as if he would kill her then and there. +Her reply was spoken with the calmness born of despair: + +"Think as you will, senor; I have spoken the truth. Had I a dozen +lives depending on my answer, it would be the same. Kill me if you +wish. I can die without a regret, knowing that Francisco is not here +to witness my death or suffer at your hands, El Capitan." + +"She is Francisco's mother," whispered Ronie, anxiously. + +"Ay, lad; and he is Rhoades, the insurgent leader." + +"Must we let him butcher her in cold blood and remain inactive?" asked +Ronie, whose hot nature was aroused by this unwarranted treatment of a +helpless captive. + +"Hist!" warned Jack. "We are watched by an enemy in yon coppice." + +Ronie saw nothing in the direction indicated by his companion, but +under the circumstances he felt certain he was right, and he grasped +his firearm more firmly, feeling that it would not be long before he +would be obliged to use it. The voices of the speakers ahead had +become silent, so that not a sound broke the stillness of the scene. + +"What can we do, Jack?" + +"I have been thinking lad, that it may be well for us to do a little +scouting, in order to get a better idea of the situation. That fellow +in the thicket has got to be disposed of before we can do much else. +If you will lie here and not let any of them spring a surprise on you, +I will see what I can do in the way of Indian warfare. I do not +believe I have lost the little cunning I picked up in fighting the +Igorrotos of Luzon." + +Without waiting for Ronie's reply, Jack began to creep to their rear, +moving so silently that our hero was not aware of his retreat until he +had fairly left his side. The voice of the insurgent chief again fell +on his ear, followed by the reply of the woman, which was spoken too +low for him to distinguish. Jack had now disappeared, and he knew he +was alone in the midst of enemies. + +Five minutes dragged themselves slowly away without bringing any +material change in the situation. Ronie had not discovered any sign of +Jack, but twice he had seen a man's head thrust cautiously above the +matted undergrowth where he knew one of their enemies lurked. +Evidently the scout, for such he judged him to be, was getting uneasy +and anxious to end the suspense. During the time he had heard a small +body of horsemen ride up to where the insurgent leader and his prisoner +were stopping. + +"Jack told me at the end of five minutes to lift my cap on the muzzle +above the rim of bushes," he mused. "The time must be up now. I think +I will try it." + +Then Ronie removed the covering on his head, and, placing it on the end +of his rifle barrel, gently raised the weapon as he had been told, in +doubt as to what the result would be. He had barely accomplished the +simple feat before the sharp report of a firearm rang out, and a bullet +sped just over him with a hearty zip! The cap dropped by his side, and +when he came to pick it up he found that it had a hole through its +crown where the bullet had gone. Most assuredly the insurgent was a +good marksman, and he shuddered to think what his own fate would have +been had he carelessly exposed himself. + +The shot of the sharpshooter brought an exclamation from the lips of +the chief, but beyond that Ronie heard nothing to explain to him what +was succeeding. He fancied at first he heard the man starting toward +him, but he was not quite sure of it. He was becoming alarmed in +regard to Jack. Where could he be all this time? Had he fallen into +some trap and become a prisoner? In the midst of these reflections he +suddenly became aware of the presence of some one near him, and he was +about to act in his defense when the familiar voice of Jack caused him +to stop. + +"Easy, lad! It's all right with him yonder. Your ruse worked to +perfection and just in the nick of time. I managed to handle him +without making a disturbance. His shot has not seemed to arouse them, +and it is time for us to act. The road is not far away, and the +insurgents seemed to have halted near the outlet of this swamp. I +judge they are waiting for some of their force to join them. Besides +the woman, they have one or two other captives, which I judge they are +taking to headquarters. If you feel like looking at them, follow me. +We might as well go that way as any other, for the woods are full of +the cusses behind us. Somehow, they run an idea we have taken to the +mountains, which is natural, I suppose." + +Ronie was nothing loath to move, as he had begun to tire of this +inactivity, so he kept close behind Jack, who began to worm his way +along the margin of the lowlands, until, after several minutes of this +tedious advance, Jack paused. + +"If I am not mistaken, we are within gunshot of these brown-skinned +rebels," he whispered. "But there is no doubt but they are on the +lookout for us, and we must move with great caution. Let's make +another hitch." + +Once more they went forward, keeping close to the earth, and under the +cover of the overhanging tropical vegetation, being careful how they +disturbed each bush, and with their eyes constantly trying to pierce +the gloom around them. So, like woodsmen following some Indian trail +in the days of the pioneers, they wormed their way along, Jack ever and +anon lifting his head slightly so as to get a wider view of his +surroundings, but always careful not to expose any part of his figure. + +Finally he paused again, Ronie quickly imitating his example, while he +listened for the explanation he knew his companion was ready to make. +Though slightly behind him, he had discovered the shadowy outlines of +several horsemen drawn up in a semi-circle. + +"We have reached the road," said Jack, softly. "Can you see the +horsemen just to our right, where the way curves slightly?" + +"Yes," replied Ronie, in the same cautious tone. + +"And the woman? She is a little beyond the main body, on the gray +horse." + +"I see her, now that you have called my attention to her. I should +know her by her skirts." + +"Right, lad. The brook is just below. The crafty dogs are still +harkening and waiting. But they will not wait much longer. Hark! a +body of horsemen are coming up the road at this moment! It is probably +these they are waiting for." + +"What do you propose to do, Jack?" + +"Get a little nearer, lad." + +"Do you think we can save her?" + +"We will try, but it can be done only at great risk and under cover of +the excitement of the meeting of these squads. Come on, lad, every +moment is precious to us." + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A FRIENDLY VOICE. + +In the work that followed, Jack Greenland showed that he was no novice +in woodcraft, but it would take more space than I can give to it to +describe minutely the details of what I shall only attempt to outline. +It would not do for them to leave the thick fringe of bushes +overhanging the road, and yet, in order to accomplish his purpose, it +was necessary for them to shorten the space between them and the rebel +riders under "El Capitan," as the mountain insurgent was called. To do +this more safely, Jack retreated about a yard, and then crept forward +in the same direction of the road. In spite of his extreme caution, +Ronie heard a stick snap under his knee, when his heart came into his +mouth. Fortunately, one of the horses stamped its foot at this moment, +and thus the fainter sound was drowned by the heavier. Then the harsh +voice of the insurgent was heard to exclaim: + +"Fire on the head of the laggard! I cannot wait here any longer. +Forward, men! on to the mansion, which shall be the cage for our bird." + +Without further delay the body of half a dozen riders struck their +impatient steeds smartly with their spurs, and would have swiftly +disappeared from the scene, but for an accident to the foremost. His +animal, thus suddenly aroused, reared into the air and then plunged +forward, but, either stepping into a hole or stumbling, it staggered +ahead, coming nearly upon its knees. Its rider was flung headlong into +the bushes within a hand's reach of our amateur scouts! + +This mishap plunged the rest of the riders into confusion, nearly +unseating Rhoades himself, but who rallied with a horrible imprecation +upon the head of his unfortunate follower. With rare presence of mind +the woman on the gray horse wheeled her spirited animal quickly around +to make a bold dash for freedom. There were horsemen behind her, but +that was her only way of escape, if she could hope to get away at all. +In a moment the entire scene had become one of wildest excitement, and +above the clatter of hoofs and the cries of his men, rang the voice of +the leader, as he swung his own horse around, calling upon his +panic-stricken followers: + +"Don't let her escape! Shoot her if must be, but stop her!" + +The mountain outlaw was about to carry out his own order, when he +received a terrific blow from Jack Greenland, which tumbled him from +his seat to the ground. Jack and Ronie had been quick to perceive that +in this exciting tableau lay their chance of action. + +"Mount the free horse and ride down the road for your life!" said Jack. +"A bold dash will carry us through." + +Then he sprang forward to capture the horse ridden by the insurgent +chief, knowing that, could he be successful in this, it would throw the +squad into confusion. Without a leader they were not likely to make a +very effective pursuit. I have described the result of his swift and +daring onset. And, as Rhoades, stunned by the blow, sank helpless to +the earth, the fearless American seized the bridle rein of the +frightened horse before it could clear itself from the hand of its +former master. Almost simultaneously with this action Jack would have +been in the saddle, but for the fact that the right foot of the +insurgent had caught in the stirrup. This caused a brief delay, but, +wrenching the offending limb aside, the captor vaulted into the seat +just as two or three shots whistled through the air at random from the +discomfited insurgents, who were at a loss to account for just what was +being enacted in their midst. One of these bullets cut away a lock of +his silvered hair, but, unminding his narrow escape, he turned the +horse sharply about, crying to the woman, who had succeeded in heading +her steed down the road: + +"Ride for your life. It is your only hope." + +She had already reached the outside circle of the little group, and her +horse, a spirited one, cleared the last of the dismayed riders, to bear +her down the way at a terrific pace, her long, black hair streaming in +the wind as she sped on. Once a white face was turned backward for a +moment, and then she disappeared from sight. + +Meanwhile Ronie was having an experience equally as exciting and even +more dangerous to his life and liberty. He had succeeded in catching +upon the bridle of the horse that had thrown its rider, and he gained +the saddle an instant later, while the terrified animal reared and +plunged furiously. But the young engineer had secured a firm hold on +the reins, and was likely to obtain quick control over the creature, +when he found stout hands laid on the bridle with a power which threw +the struggling brute back upon its haunches. + +The attack of the insurgents, three in number, was so sudden and +powerful that Ronie's escape seemed impossible. + +"Shoot the dog!" cried one of the insurgents. + +"Don't let him get away!" exclaimed the chief, who had rallied by this +time sufficient to realize something of the situation. + +Ronie knew he could expect no assistance from Jack, who was having all +he could attend to, and he resolved to make a desperate attempt to get +away. Accordingly, he whipped out the stout knife which had been given +him by Manuel Marlin, and as the shots of his enemies sped past his +head, he cut the reins upon which the insurgents were clinging, when +the men, suddenly losing their hold, staggered forward, leaving the +animal freed from their clutches. + +Finding itself thus relieved of the weight dragging it down, the horse +flung up its head, gave vent to a wild snort, and bounded madly over +their writhing forms, to rush like a whirlwind down the road, scarcely +a head behind Jack, mounted on the chief's fleet-footed steed. Though +nearly unseated by this abrupt onset, Ronie held fast to his position, +while he was borne on at a rate of speed which fairly took away his +breath. Even Jack, going at his terrific pace, was passed, and then +the woman on the stout gray was outdistanced. Without check or +guidance to its headlong flight, Ronie soon found that his horse was +running away! + +The cries and the rifle shots of his enemies were soon lost in the +distance, but the young engineer had barely recovered his equilibrium, +so to speak, when he became conscious of the approach of a body of +horsemen from ahead. Naturally expecting only enemies, he began to +wonder how he was to come out of this new danger. The sounds of the +approaching horses told that this party were coming at a gait almost as +swift as that by which he was carried along. Thus he was not given +sufficient time in which to prepare for the meeting, if any preparation +could be made by him in his plight, before he found himself carried +into the very midst of a squad of a dozen horsemen, sweeping toward him +at a breakneck pace. Wild shouts rang in his ears, but if efforts were +made to stop him he was not aware of it. In some manner, never quite +plain to him, he was carried through the party of riders, brushing +against them on the right and left, but clearing them in an incredible +space of time, to be still carried on with unabated speed. + +So far Ronie had not gathered his scattered faculties enough to act, +but now, remembering that the bridle was still left on the head of the +horse he bestrode, he leaned forward and grasped the side straps close +down to the bit. Perhaps the animal had begun to tire of its wild race. + +At any rate, it quickly yielded to the strong hands wrenching at its +mouth, and began to slacken its speed. + +All this really took place in less time than it has taken to describe +it, even in outline, and the excitement and confusion of the surprised +riders in his rear were yet ringing in his ears, when Ronie, for the +second time, became aware of the approach of horsemen. But before he +could obtain control of his own horse, or anticipate who might now be +in his pathway, a stentorian voice thundered in English: + +"Halt! Who comes here?" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +COLONEL MARCHAND. + +It was fortunate for Ronie Rand that he had succeeded in getting +control of the horse he rode, or his experiences in Venezuela would +have terminated in a tragic manner. With the thrilling command of the +leader of this body of horsemen, the firearms of his soldiers leaped to +their shoulders, and in another moment a volley of bullets would have +stopped the advance of our hero. Seeing only the inevitable to be met, +he cried out: + +"I am an American! I surrender if need be." + +"Hold, men!" called out the officer. "He is a lone American. He +cannot belong to the gang we are running down. Who are you, sir?" + +"My name is Roland Rand, sir, and I have only recently reached this +country. With a friend I am on my way to Caracas, and just escaped +from the rebels under El Capitan." + +Ronie had answered thus boldly and openly, for he was certain the body +of soldiers in front of him were not a part of the insurgents he had +just escaped by so narrow a margin. By this time the sound of other +horses approaching came from near at hand, and the officer ordered his +men to be in readiness to meet them. Believing them to be Jack and the +captive woman, he wheeled smartly about, saying: + +"I believe they are friends of mine. Hold up, Jack!" he cried, as the +latter, with the woman riding abreast of him, came into sight. "I +believe these are friends." + +"Halt! Who comes here?" demanded the officer. + +"Friends," replied Jack, suddenly checking his headlong flight, while +the woman followed his example. Then, before anything further could be +said or done, the officer did a most unexpected thing. Urging his +horse close beside Ronie, he cried: + +"Roland Rand! Is it possible I find you here?" + +Ronie, at first thinking the other meant to do him harm, shrank back, +but he quickly rallied at the familiar tone of the speaker. Then, with +a wild feeling of joy, he looked more closely upon him, to exclaim the +next moment: + +"Colonel Marchand!" + +"At your service, Mr. Rand, but I am puzzled to know how it is I meet +you here, where I least expected to find you." + +"It is a very long story to tell, Colonel Marchand, and I will gladly +explain it all to you at the first opportunity. This is my friend, +Jack Greenland," signifying that individual, who had not yet recovered +from the surprise he had experienced. + +"Glad to meet you, too, Mr. Greenland. But where is Harrie, Ronie? Is +he coming behind you?" + +"He is in prison at San Carlos, colonel. Jack and I were on our way to +Caracas to find relief for him." + +"What is he in prison for? The penitentiary is mainly filled with +rebels now." + +"That is the charge against him. He was taken under suspicious +circumstances, but I can vouch for his honor." + +"Then you are not rebels, Ronie?" + +"No, sir--that is, we have not committed ourselves as being against the +government." + +"Good! You evidently carry a level head. I am at the head of a +regiment fighting for President Castro. We were in hot pursuit of a +body of the insurgents whom we routed in a fight below here. But who +is this woman with you?" + +"She is a captive in the hands of Rhoades' guerrillas. I do not know +her name. Perhaps she will give it herself. We were trying to strike +a blow in her behalf." + +The strange woman, thus appealed to, said, in that musical voice so +common to the better class of Venezuelans: + +"You are very kind, senors. I do not know that you would care to hear +my name, for it has too often been a bone of contention in this unhappy +land. My husband was Francisco de Caprian. I am not ashamed to say +that." + +Colonel Marchand uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, though Ronie +Rand was expecting this reply, he could not wholly conceal his emotion +at the mention of that name which he had learned to both fear and +respect. He could not refrain from saying: + +"You are Francisco's mother?" + +"You know my son!" she cried somewhat wildly. + +"We met him on the _Libertador_, senora. He is now in prison at San +Carlos with our friend." + +"Then he lives! They told me he was dead. Oh, my son! When shall I +meet him again?" + +"I do not understand this," declared Colonel Marchand, brusquely. "You +talk of the _Libertador_, the outlawed scourge of the coast, of the De +Caprians, every one of whom is denounced as spies, and of loyalty to +Castro, the patriot president, all in the same breath." + +"I will explain fully if I am given the opportunity," replied Ronie, +stoutly. + +"Pardon me, Ronie," Colonel Marchand hastened to say. "I do not doubt +you, but this is no time for explanations here. We have dallied too +long already, if we would catch our birds. Go to the rear, you three, +under an escort to protect you. Mind you, Lieutenant Garcia, the woman +remains with you until I return. We will make short work of the +mountain rebels." + +Upon finishing his brusque orders, Colonel Marchand wheeled smartly +about and dashed up the road, followed by his troops, numbering half a +hundred or more, Lieutenant Garcia and three privates remaining to look +after the two Americans and Senora de Caprian. The lieutenant showed +by his reluctance to move on his duty that he was not well pleased with +the plan, and he was heard to exclaim under his breath that it was a +shame to be cheated of the sport at this juncture. However, he soon +recovered his good nature, and, requesting his companions to follow, +rode sharply in an opposite direction to that just taken by his +superior officer. + +About two miles below they came upon a small town, where Lieutenant +Garcia ordered a halt until he should receive further orders from +Colonel Marchand, or meet him in person. This place, which had been +the scene of a stirring skirmish a few days before, was now in the +hands of the government troops, which the latter did not hesitate to +display in their actions. Though Senora de Caprian was treated with +extreme courtesy, Ronie and Jack did not fail to observe that a strict +watch was kept over her, and the room assigned her at the house where +the little party made its headquarters had a guard stationed outside +the door. Of course, our heroes were allowed their liberty, but they +were only too glad to improve the interval of waiting for the +reappearance of Colonel Marchand by throwing themselves down upon the +floor and seeking sleep. + +It was broad daylight when they awoke, and the sound of a body of horse +outside the building at once attracted their attention. They were soon +highly pleased to find that Colonel Marchand had returned. News came +to them that he had been successful in his pursuit of El Capitan and +his mountain rebels. As anxious as they were to see their old friend, +Ronie and Jack deemed it wise to wait until he had sought them. + +This did not give over half an hour's suspense before an orderly called +upon them to say that the colonel was awaiting them in his +headquarters. It is needless to say that they lost no time in obeying +this request to see him. They found the genial commander established +in one of the smaller buildings of the village, engaged in studying a +map of the country. But at sight of them he quickly forgot his chart, +and motioned for them to be seated, saying: + +"I have sent for you that I might know your story. We have sent the +rebels flying back into their mountain caves like rats driven to their +holes. They will not dare to show a head for at least twenty-four +hours, so I have a half-day's leisure, except that I must prepare my +report to send to General Castro. First I want to hear your story, and +I suggest you begin at the very beginning, so I may understand its +details and know how to act." + +Ronie, acting as spokesman, told their story in as few words as +possible from the time they had left Manilla to the present moment, +interrupted several times by the impulsive officer, who was both +surprised and pleased at the information they gave him. + +"By the right hand of Bolivar!" he exclaimed finally, "you may not be +aware of it, but you bear valuable intelligence that I shall take the +liberty to forward to General Castro. The character of the _Ban Righ_ +or the _Libertador_ has been pretty well known to us, but you make +plain some things which have been dark. I can see how Harrie fell +under suspicion under the conditions that he was taken prisoner." + +"You can secure his freedom, can you not, Colonel Marchand?" + +The colonel was a tall, slender man, with flashing, black eyes and long +mustache, which he was wont to twist very vigorously when he was +excited. He gave these a savage twirl now, and, springing to his feet, +began to pace to and fro furiously. + +"I know what I can do, I can try," he declared, returning to his seat +after pacing back and forth several times. "If I had been a little +more successful up this way, and he himself had not met with so many +reverses, I can imagine he might be more willing to grant my request. +But I will try--of course, I will try! I can but fail. If I do," and +here he lowered his voice, "by the right hand of Bolivar, the sword of +Leon Marchand shall be sheathed while Cipriano Castro holds the rein of +government." + +Both Ronie and Jack were somewhat taken aback by this speech, which +they could see was not a discreet one to make, especially in that +place. But the excitement of Colonel Marchand passed as quickly as it +had arisen, and he resumed, with marked calmness: + +"Coming here strangers, as you have, you can have little idea of the +real feeling slumbering like a volcano in the hearts of us Venezuelans. +The truth is, our people are the most ungrateful on the face of the +earth. All of the revolutions and political plots that have harassed +our country have been almost entirely uncalled for, though I will +confess our leaders have made an excuse easy through their eagerness to +"feather their nests," as you would say. But honest men have ever +found little encouragement to remain honest, when the populace stands +ready to take up the cry of 'fraud' the moment some disgruntled office +seeker utters such a cry to cover his own disappointment. The +utterance of the word becomes instantly the battle cry to call the mob +to riot and ruin. From a Venezuelan riot a general uprising will +follow in a single day, until the country is ravaged far and wide. +This is accounted for mainly by the fact that the population is made up +to nine out of ten of Indians, half-breeds and mulattoes, who are +naturally ignorant and easily aroused to fight. + +"Matos is followed by just such a rabble. He is rich, but not a +soldier by training. Still, it was enough that he was brilliant in +uniform and pompous in bearing; these, coupled with the rattle of the +drum and the tramp of many feet, aroused the mongrel crowd, until the +disgruntled rebel found himself tagged by an army of ragged, +boisterous, hungry men, who gladly followed him, and follow him still. +We saw an example of the stock in El Capitan's mountain horde. He +escaped me only by the skin of his teeth." + +"Here I am making a proclamation of war when I ought to be preparing my +dispatch for General Castro. I will use every argument I can for +Harrie, as I know he is a noble boy, and that his imprisonment is +unjust and wicked." + +"How about Francisco de Caprian?" asked Ronie, for Colonel Marchand had +not hinted of him. + +"I can do nothing," he replied, with a shake of the head. "The De +Caprians are very much in ill-favor just now. However, for your sake I +will mention him, and suggest that it will do no harm to set him free. +I think you said he suggested that he was willing to espouse our cause. +By the way, what do you say to a campaign under the illustrious Castro, +the modern Bolivar of Venezuela? I will mention your willingness, and +you can answer me afterward." + +Then Colonel Marchand became very busy with the preparation of his +dispatch. When it was finished he called an orderly, who was told to +see that it was forwarded to the commander-in-chief with as great +promptness as possible. + +"Bring me back a reply," added the colonel, and when he had seen the +messenger depart he turned to resume his conversation with Ronie and +Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +A CUNNING RUSE. + +"Speaking about joining our forces," said Colonel Marchand, "under the +circumstances it will be impossible for me to fulfill my promise to you +when I wrote. Neither would it be practicable to carry out plans made +under different conditions. Join our army for a while; it will prove a +lively vacation for you, and just as soon as this little cloud blows +over we will start. We will have the government behind us, too. It is +a great undertaking in more senses than one. I expect to become +regularly attached to Castro's army within a short time. In fact, I am +away now only temporarily. What do you say to becoming comrades under +Castro?" + +"I should want to consult Harrie before I decided," replied Ronie. + +"So you shall. Now that is settled, let us talk of other matters. It +is perfectly natural, however, that you should cast your fortunes with +ours for a short time. Venezuela does not forget that it was due to +Miranda's experience gained in fighting for the independence of the +Great Republic that he learned something of what might come to his +native land, and that it was the friendship of Lafayette, Hamilton and +Fox which encouraged him to push forward. When the revolution opened +in 1810, the United States furnished Venezuela with her munitions of +war. Two years later, when the earthquake destroyed twenty thousand of +our people, she sent supplies with a liberal hand to us. In this +crisis, which I believe is to be the most important affair in her +history, we stand in need of Northern friendship. Europe is against +us, and in the jealousy of the powers there would gladly hail any +pretext upon which she could seize us." + +"The Monroe Doctrine must be a great safeguard to you." + +"If it hadn't been for that these little South American republics would +have been swallowed by European powers long before this." + +"While the swallowing would have caused some bloody wars." + +"Very true, but we are used to that. There has not been a time within +my remembrance when there has not been a war of some form in process. +Speaking of the European nations swallowing us, you may forget that we +are three times as large as France or Germany, and five times as large +as Italy. We are larger than any European country outside of Russia. +Something of its natural features may be understood from the fact that +it holds within its domain some beautiful bodies of inland water, the +largest of which, Lake Maracaibo, is somewhat larger than Lake Ontario. +Within the republic are over a thousand rivers, the largest of which is +the Orinoco, next in size to the Amazon of the rivers of South America. + +"In regard to its physical features, the country may be divided into +three great zones, increasing in size according to the following order: +First, the zone of agriculture; second, the zone of grazing land; last, +the larger in area than both of the others, the zone of the forests. +There are two seasons, the wet and the dry, called winter and summer. + +"Venezuela is thinly populated, having about two and one-half millions +of inhabitants. They still preserve the type of the Spanish race, +which afforded them origin, though they have become largely a +cosmopolitan race, due to the mixture with the natives. These have +retained to a wonderful extent their primitive beauty, so the men are +manly and symmetrical, the women graceful and beautiful." + +"How is it about the wild horses our geographies describe as still +roaming with flowing manes and foaming nostrils and llanoes and +pampas?" asked Ronie. + +"They disappeared before the buffalo vanished from your Western plains. +I would say also of the people, instead of the wild beauties your books +tell you are yet living in almost primitive simplicity, you will find, +when you get to the capital, women and maidens looking quite as +anxiously for the fashion sheet from Paris as her sisters in New York. +We are apt to think the only civilization is that around us. How well +do I remember that my first impressions were that the little space +about me in which I was reared comprised the world. Gradually my +vision extended, and my knowledge expanded, until I find it is a big +old world, and that it holds many people." + +Colonel Marchand's kindly words, and his willingness to inform his +friends, put our couple very much at their ease. Ronie improved the +first opportunity to speak of that matter which was frequently +uppermost in his mind, the finding of his mother's photograph under +such peculiar circumstances. He was unable to offer any solution of +the mystery, while he showed a deep concern. + +"I cannot think your mother would come to this country, even with the +hope of meeting you, without first sending me word of her intentions. +Of course, I should have tried and met her at La Guayra." + +"You have not heard from her?" + +"Not a word, though I did expect to get a letter in regard to your +coming. I feel very sure the photograph must have been brought from +New York by some disinterested party, who came into possession of it by +accident. I cannot imagine anything else, though this is rather hard +to believe." + +Realizing that Colonel Marchand had affairs that needed his attention, +Ronie and Jack asked if they might look about the town, and the simple +request being granted, they passed the next few hours in exploring the +place, though finding little to interest them. The regular inhabitants +had nearly all fled, and those who had remained appeared ill at ease +under the existing conditions, as they might have been expected to be. + +"I tell you what it is, Jack," said Ronie, "it looks to me as if these +revolutions are sapping the very life out of the country." + +"Ay, lad; and now it looks as if you and I were to become actors in one +of them. I wonder what is going on yonder." + +These words were spoken by Jack as their attention was caught by the +sight of a group of people gathered near the building where they had +been lodged. As they advanced with quickening steps, it became evident +that a fight or street brawl was in process. Around this a couple of +dozen or more civilians had clustered, and by the way they encircled +the combatants it looked as if they were trying to shield them from the +gaze of the soldiers, should any of these happen to come that way. For +a wonder not one of these was in sight at that moment, though the +steady tread of the sentry within the building could be heard as he +paced back and forth with measured step. + +"Better give them a wide berth," declared Jack. "It never does any one +good to get mixed up in one of these senseless encounters. Why, if you +should go to the assistance of one of them, thinking he was being +abused, the chances are more than even he would join with the other in +abusing you. By the horn of rock--Gibraltar, if you please! this does +not seem to be a fight by common brawlers, for their _mantas_ show they +belong to the better class of civilians." + +The garment which had attracted the attention of Jack was the _manta_ +or _poncho_ made of white linen, which has the quality of repelling the +heat of the sun on a warm day. These garments are worn almost +continually by certain classes, among them the vaqueros, or riders of +the pampas. That of the latter consists of two blankets sewed +together, one of a dark blue color and the other of a bright red. +These hues are universally selected for a purpose, as they receive +light and heat differently, and are used so as to afford the best +results. Thus in dark and cloudy days the dark side of the blanket is +turned outward; on other days this is reversed. The double blanket +thus formed is quite two yards square, with a hole in the center to +admit the head of the owner. Its purpose is two-fold, to protect the +rider from the heavy dews and showers of the tropics, and to spread +under him at night when there is no place to sling up his hammock. But +the effect of this linen _manta_ worn by these street fighters was even +better than that of the woolen _cobija_ of the vaqueros. These +_mantas_ worn by this twain were fancifully embroidered, and showed +that they were expensive garments. At a distance they would present a +striking, picturesque appearance. + +Our heroes found it difficult to get near enough to obtain a view of +the stirring scene in the little opening made by the encircling +on-lookers, and, caring little for the affair, anyway, quietly +retreated. Then, the alarm having been spread, no doubt, the soldiers +began to appear in sight, and a squad led by an orderly started in to +disperse the crowd. But the spectators seemed too earnest to be easily +driven off, while the soldiers themselves quickly became so interested +in the contest that they tried little more than to get a good look at +the tableau. + +"I never saw a Venezuelan yet who didn't relish a good fight," remarked +Jack. + +"But look there, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "What is going on that way?" + +As Ronie pointed toward the rear of the building already mentioned, +Jack saw half a dozen loungers hanging along in a manner suspiciously +like a row of loafers, and not in knots, as men of this kind usually +congregate. + +"See! two of them are helping away a woman. Why, Jack! it is the +prisoner, Senora de Caprian! She is trying to escape." + +In a moment the whole situation was plain to them. The brawl and fight +was simply a ruse to catch the attention of the soldiers while the +captive woman made her escape. So cleverly had it been carried out so +far, that it was likely to succeed beyond the most sanguine expectation. + +Ronie glanced hurriedly around to see that the orderly and his men were +in the thickest of the mob, oblivious of all except the hand-to-hand +tussle. Another minute and the captive would be beyond recapture, +except, possibly, after a long chase. His first thought was that of +gladness for the unfortunate woman, then he remembered that there was +another side to the question, and that it might be well to retain her +as a prisoner of war. He decided quickly upon his course of action; +whether it was right or wrong must be proven in the future. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +RONIE RECEIVES A COMMISSION. + +"She must not be allowed to escape, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie. "I heard +Colonel Marchand say that she knows secrets which it would not be well +for his enemies to learn." + +"Ay, lad; it is not too late for us to stop them." + +Without further delay the twain sprang forward, and were in season to +intercept the fugitives. As they brought their firearms to bear upon +the men who had constituted themselves Senora de Caprian's escort, +Ronie cried, sharply: + +"Stand where you are!" + +The woman uttered a cry of dismay at this command, while the men +suddenly stopped, facing the determined Americans with frightened looks. + +"Let me pass, senors, I implore you," begged the prisoner, the tears +springing to her eyes, while she clasped her hands and turned upon them +such looks of agony as haunted them for many a day. Ronie, at least, +felt that he had committed an act which he should regret, and it is +possible if the opportunity had remained when he could have allowed her +to escape with safety, he might have done it. But the die was cast, +and there was no retreat. The loud, authoritative words had aroused +others. The soldiers were suddenly recalled to their duty, while the +sight of the fugitive and their captors quickly caught the attention of +the newcomers upon the scene, foremost among these being Colonel +Marchand! + +He instantly comprehended the situation, and a look of admiration for +the prompt deed lightened the bronze upon his cheeks, while he said: + +"By the soul of Bolivar! you have done well, senors. Soldiers, secure +the prisoner immediately, and see that her liberators are taken into +custody." + +"I hope there will be no cause for us to regret what we have done, +colonel," said Ronie, who really felt sorry for the prisoner. + +"You may cut off my right hand if you do, Senor Rand. At present it is +necessary that we hold the woman as a prisoner of war, but she shall be +well treated, and I have no doubt be set free soon." + +Ronie knew Colonel Marchand was a man of his word, and he felt better +over what he and Jack bad done. This pleasure was further increased by +the words of the colonel as they accompanied him to his headquarters. + +"This will prove a good day's work for you, Ronie. I only regret I had +not been able to report it to General Castro when I sent my dispatch, +but better late than never. What do you say to going with us on our +campaign toward Maracaibo? We start within an hour. The rebels are +rallying in that direction, and we must look after them before they +become too strong." + +The fact that it was likely to take them nearer to Harrie, if not quite +to San Carlos, was enough to shape their decision, and inside of an +hour they were mounted and riding with the troops toward the west, +Ronie getting his first taste of warfare. + +The days that followed would never be forgotten by our American +soldiers in the service of Venezuela. Colonel Marchand seemed to be +always on the move, but the enemy was even more active than he, and +always kept one scene ahead of him. For instance, he left the little +hamlet where Ronie and Jack joined his forces to go to another country +town called Verona, where it was reported the insurgents had made a +raid. Upon reaching this settlement, which was little more than a +collection of coffee planters' conical dwellings, it was ascertained +that the enemies had been gone a few hours, and that they were headed +toward Juan. Hither, posthaste, dashed the Venezuelan cavalry, +resolved to be in season this time, only to find that again the bird +had flown. But Castro's troops were led by a captain who had the name +of never sleeping, and once more he followed on their heels. Then he +learned they had gone back to Verona! Thus two weeks were spent in +vain advances and retreats, swift dashes ahead and equally as rapid +doubling upon the track, until we finally find the grimy riders halted +near the rim of a little plain which formed the foot of a mountain +range trending away toward the more lofty peaks making the highest +elevations of land in the Western World. As may be imagined, the +doughty colonel was in no enviable mood, as he sat by the door of his +tent, whose roof was the bended sky. It was one of those inns found at +those outposts between the agricultural and pastoral regions. + +The men were busy getting the evening meal, which was to be made up +largely of a fat bullock killed a few minutes before. Evidence had +been witnessed where the insurgents had broken into a herd that very +day and slaughtered several of the best beeves. This killing of cattle +was characteristic of Venezuelan warfare. The ragged troops of the +revolutionists must be fed, and what easier way to do it? + +Ronie and Jack, who had ridden until they were tired and sore, were +attending to their tough ponies before spreading their ponchos over the +stony spot which they had cleared of the rank vegetation so as to +prepare their couch for the night, as there were no posts upon which to +hang their hammocks, when a messenger informed them that Colonel +Marchand wished to see them immediately. At a loss to know what this +order could mean, they lost no time in answering the summons. + +They found the colonel, usually so genial, very much out of humor. At +first Ronie feared that he had done something to arouse this uncommon +state of mind on the part of his superior. + +"Sergeant Rand," greeted the colonel, brusquely, giving our hero a +title quite unexpected to him, "I have sent for you to see if your +Yankee ingenuity and courage cannot help me out of this difficulty." + +"I am at your service, colonel," replied Ronie, with a military salute, +"and I am sure my friend here is equally as faithful." + +"Ay, ay, Colonel Marchand; where Ronie Rand leads I----" + +"Sergeant Rand, if you please, Senor Greenland," interrupted the +officer. "I will now explain what I want of you." + +Though taken somewhat aback by this greeting, our twain bowed and +waited respectfully for the other to explain. + +"In the first place," began the colonel, "I need not tell you how I +have been buffeted about for the last ten days. It has set my teeth on +edge. On every hand my scouts have been baffled by these scoundrels of +the bush, who make a farce of war and style themselves 'Sons of +Liberty!' Word comes in that they are everywhere successful, and that +Castro is discouraged. I know better than the last. He is not that +kind of a man. But enough of that. What I want of you is simply this: +Take as many men with you as you wish, and reconnoiter the country as +far as you think best, and report to me as often as possible. Are you +willing to undertake this hazardous mission?" + +"I am willing to do my duty, Colonel Marchand." + +"Ay, ay, colonel," added Jack. + +"Spoken like true soldiers. I know I can depend on you. Now name the +number of men you want to go with you, and I will have them detailed at +once. Remember you are to have command of the squad, with your friend +as deputy." + +"I assure you, colonel, we appreciate the honor. I think three men +will be sufficient. A small body of men can go where a large one would +be likely to attract attention." + +"Good! My scouts dare not stir out of their hammocks without an army +is at their heels. How soon can you be ready to report, sergeant?" + +"In half an hour, colonel." + +"Thank you, sergeant. That will give me time to detain [Transcriber's +note: detail?] the men, and I will see that you have the best in the +regiment. By the way, sergeant, I wish to say that I have received as +yet no reply from General Castro, but I probably shall before you get +back. I would also add that I expect to move to Baracoa in the +morning, where I shall await news from you." + +"Well, Jack, what do you think of this?" asked Ronie, as soon as they +had left the presence of Colonel Marchand. + +"Looks as if we were going to taste of real warfare," replied Jack. "I +can't say that I am sorry, for as long as we cannot go ahead with our +work it will serve to break the monotony." + +"If I only knew that mother was safely at home, and Harrie was with us, +I really think I should enjoy it. If there was only some way I could +get a letter sent to her, I would write to mother in New York, hit or +miss." + +"Perhaps the colonel will have a chance to get it to the capital," +suggested Jack. "If you want to write it, I will see that everything +is got in readiness for our start." + +"You are very kind. I think I will do it. It will certainly do no +harm." + +So Ronie wrote his letter to his mother, describing briefly his recent +experiences, and speaking particularly of the portrait he had picked +up. He had to make his letter short, for he not only prepared that, +but he ate a hasty meal, which Jack had prepared, and with his faithful +companion presented himself at the commander's tent in exactly half an +hour. + +"I am glad to find you so punctual," remarked the colonel. "Yes, I +will send your letter along at the first opportunity. Here are the men +who are to accompany you. I wish you success, but I do not believe I +need to caution you to move cautiously. You have been here long enough +to know something of the character of these bush rebels." + +In this brusque manner Colonel Marchand saw them depart, though he did +not return to his papers until they had disappeared beyond the line of +forest vegetation which encircled the clearing in the shadows of the +mountains. His eye trained upon the spot where he had last seen them +after they had vanished for several minutes, he finally turned back, +saying, under his breath: + +"I hope I shall not be disappointed in them as I have the others who +have gone before them." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +THE SCOUT IN THE JUNGLE. + +Riding at a leisurely pace, the five scouts started upon their +dangerous quest, Ronie and one of the Venezuelans riding side by side, +with Jack and another behind them, leaving the single man to follow. +The young sergeant was pleased to find that the trio selected to +accompany him by Colonel Marchand were very prepossessing men, one of +them a man with gray hair, while the others were but a little over +twenty years of age. The oldest, whose name was Riva Baez, claimed he +knew the country well, so it was he who rode beside our hero to show +the way. + +"About ten kilometers to the west we shall strike the main road to +Truxillo," he remarked. "But it may be well for us to avoid that. El +Capitan and his followers are believed to be hovering around the +foothills between here and Barquisimete. It is a country just suited +to ambuscade and concealment." + +"How far is it to the nearest town?" + +"Less than five kilometers. It is a small town called Caro." + +"Is it held by the insurgents?" + +"No, though it bears the marks of one of their raids. The people have +been left too poor to be either feared or sought for." + +"We need not go there?" + +"About a kilometer this side we can strike a mountain road leading into +the wild country." + +"Where we are likely to find El Capitan and his insurgents?" + +"_Si_, Sergeant Rand." + +"Then that is our course, senor. Show us the way." + +Nothing further was said until possibly three miles had been passed, +when Riva Baez drew rein. The road they had taken soon after leaving +the encampment of the troops, by this time had sort of "dwindled away," +as Jack put it, until it was now little more than a cattle path. The +country ahead was thinly populated, if settled at all. The guide of +the little party was the first to speak: + +"If we follow this course half a kilometer farther we shall come out +upon the road leading to Caro, which winds down from the mountains. +Beyond, the country is infested with the insurgents, and we are likely +to run upon them at every turn. If we keep on through Caro we shall +soon come into the lower country, where we shall find a string of towns +along the way, but the people, as a rule, unfriendly to us. If we bend +to the left here we shall be able to make a short cut over the spur of +the ridge and reach the region of Maracaibo without much risk of +stirring up El Capitan's hornets. Which way shall we go, sergeant?" + +"Our purpose is to learn all we can of the enemy," replied Ronie. +"According to your account, we shall learn very little of them by +keeping to the left. Neither are we especially anxious just at present +to seek towns in the lower country. But we will go to Caro first." + +"_Si_, Sergeant Rand," and without longer delay Riva Baez led the march +forward again. Owing to the unfavorable conditions of the route, they +had advanced slowly, and it was now past midnight. The moonbeams +tipped the treetops with a silvery halo, but underneath this foliage it +was so dark that our riders had to pick their way with constant +caution, lest they should run into some trap of nature or set by the +hand of an enemy that claimed this country as his own. + +Nothing to cause them actual alarm, however, took place, and after a +while Riva declared they were close down to Caro, which he described as +lying in a narrow valley through which wound one of the numerous +mountain streams watering the country. Upon receiving this +intelligence, Ronie called a halt, and after a short consultation with +his guide and Jack, he decided to enter the town alone with the former, +leaving the others to await their return, unless called by a signal +agreed upon. With this understanding he and the guide rode cautiously +forward, the road overhung with the dense vegetation springing from a +rich soil under most favoring conditions of the atmosphere. + +A ride of less than five minutes, even at a slow pace, brought the two +scouts in sight of the little hamlet made tip of coffee planters' +homes. At that time the silence of sleep lay upon the place, no sound +of night breaking the gentle murmur of the river flowing parallel with +the road. Near the edge of the first plantation Ronie motioned for his +companion to stop, when he slipped from the saddle to the ground. + +"I am going to make a little exploration alone," he whispered. "Do you +remain here with the horses. I will not be gone over ten minutes. If +I am, you may understand that I am in trouble, and act at your own +discretion." + +"Look sharp, senors," warned Riva Baez. "No one seems to be astir, +but, for all that, one of El Capitan's sharpshooters may be lying in +wait to shoot you down like a jaguar." + +"I have had a bit of experience among the Igorrotes of Luzon," replied +Ronie, "and you can count upon me not running headlong into an ambush. +What a beautiful night it is," he could not refrain from adding. + +"If you think this is delightful, sergeant, you ought to witness a +night on the Orinoco in the great rubber country of the south." + +Without making any reply to this, Ronie stole silently forward upon +foot, soon finding himself in the midst of the beehive homes of the +small coffee planters. But not a soul seemed to occupy the primitive +dwellings without doors or windows, but left free for the passage of +the night breeze. + +"It is singular no one should be awake," he mused, "but the houses +appear to be as deserted as if they had never been occupied. There is +a mystery about this I do not understand. I am inclined to risk my +chances and enter one of them. I will if they all prove to look as +empty as these." + +With these thoughts in his mind he moved stealthily along past hut +after hut, reached by avenues bordered by stately, flowering plants of +tropical brightness and verdure. But everywhere he went prevailed the +utter loneliness and emptiness which had first struck him as so +unusual. Finally, satisfied in his own mind regarding the actual +situation, he ventured to enter one of the dwellings, though not +without extreme caution. He crept along under cover of a row of +broad-leafed guamos bearing pods eight or ten inches in length, which +were filled with rows of black beans enveloped in a pulp of snowy +whiteness and agreeable sweetness. But if these facts had been known +to the young scout at this time they would certainly have been unheeded +by him, as he made his stealthy advance. He was aware that the time +for his return to Riva Baez was nearly passed, but he disliked to +return until the mystery of the silent town had been solved. So he +continued his advance until at last he stood on the earth floor under +the thatched roof, where the complete silence of undisturbed repose +reigned. + +The conviction which had at first forced itself upon him had before +this become a settled fact. The dwelling was entirely deserted. Not +only was this the case with the hut he had entered, but it was true of +all the others. Caro was an abandoned town! + +Anxious now to return to his companions with the intelligence, he lost +no further time in retracing his steps, but he had barely gained the +road when he was aware of the approach of a horse! Ay, listening a +moment, he was certain there were two of them. Knowing it was +necessary for him to be on the alert for enemies, he drew back into the +mass of plants and waited until he should obtain a good view of the +riders who were abroad, half expecting one of them to be Riva Baez. He +was rewarded a moment later by the sight of his guide, who had become +uneasy and had come in search of him. A signal from him attracted the +Venezuelan's attention, and he showed unfeigned delight at finding his +leader so quickly. + +Riva Baez expressed little surprise when Ronie told him that Caro was a +deserted settlement, though he could offer no satisfactory explanation +for the fact. + +"El Capitan may have taken them all captives, or butchered them in cold +blood." + +"There is nothing to show that violence has been done them. The huts +are simply deserted, just as if the owners had been called suddenly +away for a brief absence." + +"True, Sergeant Rand. Shall we stop here a while or push on toward the +next place?" + +"We have no time to waste at this stage of action," replied the +energetic young American. "Let's move on into the country of the +insurgents. We can learn nothing by keeping away from them. The day +will soon be breaking." + +"_Si_, sergeant; I am at your command. We will climb the hill back of +us, and then turn to the right. At the top of the hill I think a call +will bring our comrades." + +"The safer call is to go to them. I will wait on the hill while you +are gone." + +From the vantage he had gained where he waited for his companions to +rejoin him, Ronie obtained a wide sweep of the surrounding country, a +view he knew was likely to prove of great value to him in his future +actions. He could not follow, even in the pale light of the western +moon, which was beginning to lose its glory before the coming of the +new light on the eastern horizon, the trend of the mountain ranges as +he had not been able to do before. He was really in the region of a +distinct offshoot of mountains from those that lead away from the +greatest mountain chain on the globe, the mighty Andes. The mountain +system which crosses Venezuela in this district is an offset from the +eastern Cordillera, and runs down to the Caribbean Sea in irregular +conformity with the eastern shore of the Lake of Maracaibo. From this +chain the Venezuelan system of two ranges, running almost side by side, +extends toward the east, the most northerly branch, which follows quite +closely to the seashore culminating in the Island of Trinidad. As he +looked down upon it in the still morning atmosphere, the whole panorama +of country appeared like a solid mass of forest, uneven, it is true, +but unbroken by the hand of man. The intense silence which had hung +over deserted Caro was intensified here, so that it became oppressive. +Ronie could not fully throw off this spirit of utter loneliness which +weighed down his very soul, so that he exclaimed involuntarily, in an +undertone: + +"Strange I should feel so impressed that something wrong is going to +happen. Somehow, I cannot shake off the impression that I stand in the +presence of a power that portends me mortal danger." + +He had only partially succeeded in overcoming this passing weakness +when he hailed with delight the reappearance of his companions, and the +five then moved ahead with their accustomed caution. + +Half an hour later, when the light of the new day was beginning to +penetrate the tropical foliage with growing brightness, they were still +slowly moving along the narrow way, overhung by tall, graceful trees, +adorned at their tops with brilliant flowers, when the silence of the +scene was suddenly broken by a loud rifle shot. It was, in fact, two +reports blending into one, for two bullets cleft the air; with a swift, +hissing sound. One of these struck the horse ridden by Riva Baez, and +the poor animal reared suddenly into the air, and snorted with pain and +terror. The other bullet cut away a lock of hair from the temple of +Ronie, and for an instant he was stunned by the force of the shot. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +ADVENTURES AND SURPRISES. + +While Riva Baez was struggling with his wounded horse, whose sudden +plunge had nearly unseated him, Ronie was also active, but in quite +another manner. The flash of the shots from the treetops had not sent +out its blaze of lurid light before he had discovered a pair of dark +forms crouching in the foliage overhead, and the double report had not +died away before he had covered one of these with his rifle, his clear, +ringing voice exclaiming: + +"Hold, there! Move an inch, and I will send a bullet through your +head!" + +Immediately cries of fright were uttered by the twain in their lofty +ambush, but neither man offered to move. The companions of Ronie and +Riva Baez, who had fallen behind a little, startled by these shots and +outcries, now dashed hurriedly upon the scene. + +"Cover the other rebel up there with your Mauser, Jack," commanded +Ronie. "Do not hesitate to fire if he dares to lift a finger." + +Jack quickly comprehended the situation, and no sooner had his youthful +commander spoken than he took swift aim at the trembling wretch in the +tree, saying, loud enough for the victim to hear: + +"Ay, sergeant; I glory in such shooting!" + +By this time Riva had succeeded in quieting his horse, which had not +received a fatal wound, and the veteran scout was ready to do his part +in the exciting drama. + +"Stand at the foot of the tree to receive them, boys," ordered Ronie. +"I am going to invite them to join us. Their company may be more +desirable than we think." + +Then, addressing the twain above, he continued in the best Spanish he +could command: + +"Come down, senors, as quickly as may be." + +"Spare our lives, senor!" begged the one whom the young American had +selected as his victim. + +"Upon the condition that you surrender peacefully. As proof that you +mean what you profess, please drop your weapons down to my men." + +Without delay, the couple dropped their Mausers, which were caught by +the young Venezuelans. + +"If you have any other firearms, kindly let them down, We have more use +for them than you." + +This demand was followed by two braces of heavy pistols, followed by a +couple of ugly-looking knives. + +"Any more such playthings?" asked Ronie. + +"No, senor. We have no more weapons, unless you call this rope such." + +"Let that down, too. It will come in handy in a few minutes. You were +very thoughtful to take it along with you." + +The stout hempen rope was next thrown to the ground, after which the +terrified sharpshooters waited for the succeeding order. + +"Now, come down yourselves. Don't waste any powder, boys, if they are +foolish enough to think of trying to run away." + +"Ay, sergeant, trust us for that," replied Jack. + +Ronie soon had the satisfaction of seeing the two cringing before him +like a couple of curs about to receive a whipping. One of them was +evidently a half-breed, while his companion, who had done the talking +so far, showed more of Spanish blood. + +"You have been caught in an ugly game, senors," said Ronie, whereupon +both bowed, the spokesman saying: + +"Do not shoot us, Senor Americano. If you will spare our lives, we +will fight for you." + +"A pretty mess you'd make of it. You were scouts for El Capitan?" + +"_Si, senor_." + +"You mistook us for Castro's soldiers?" + +"_Si, senor_. We could not see very plain, and we thought you were +only two." + +"Which made your shooting more justifiable, I suppose. Seeing you are +such poor marksmen, we will forgive you, providing you will answer my +questions." + +"_Si, senor_." + +"Where is El Capitan?" + +"At Morova." + +"How far is that from here?" + +"Four kilometers, senor." + +"What is he doing there?" + +"Waiting for reinforcements." + +"What does he need reinforcements for?" + +"To whip the dogs of Castro." + +"No doubt he needs them. But are there any of Castro's soldiers in +this vicinity?" + +"_Si, senor_, at Baracoa." + +This bit of information caused Ronie to resume his questioning with +greater interest, for he knew this referred to Colonel Marchand's +regiment. + +"How many men has El Capitan under him?' + +"Five thousand, senor." + +"Beware, senor, for I know now you lie." + +"He will have, senor, before he reaches Valencia." + +"So he is headed in that way?" + +"_Si, senor_." + +"What I want to know is, how many men has he now? Be careful, for +another lie will send your cringing souls to purgatory. How many men +has El Capitan now?" + +"Spare me, senor! I do not lie. El Capitan has about two hundred with +him now, but he expects more soon." + +"Do you mean to say he has two hundred at Morova?" + +"Senor misunderstood me. He will have two hundred as soon as Calveras +reaches him with his troops." + +"Dog!" cried Ronie, looking as fierce as he could, while he threatened +to resort to violence then and there, "you are trying to cheat me. I +asked you how many soldiers El Capitan has at Morova." + +"Fifty, senor," and the frightened wretch and his companion seemed +about to collapse. + +"That is all now," declared the young sergeant. "Secure them, men, at +once." + +Nothing loath, his companions began to carry out his order, Jack +assisting Riva Baez in binding the spokesman of the twain. While they +were doing this, the former heard the sound of paper crumpled in the +prisoner's pocket. Thrusting his hand into the receptacle, he quickly +drew forth two soiled and wrinkled missives. + +"What have we here?" he asked. "As I live, here is a dispatch for +Colonel Marchand from General Castro," handing, as he spoke, the paper +to Ronie. Then, his eye falling upon the well-known envelope and stamp +of his own country, he exclaimed: + +"A letter for you, Ronie; and from New York!" + +If honest Jack Greenland had unconsciously committed a breach of good +respect in thus addressing a superior, Ronie did not heed it, while he +took the crumpled missive handed him, his own hand trembling and a mist +coming over his eyes at this unexpected communication from his native +land. This mist deepened and his hand shook more violently, as he +murmured, after glancing at its superscription: + +"It is from mother, Jack!" + +It was fortunate for the reputation of our hero that his companions +were attentive to their duty, or the prisoners might have eluded their +captors. But he was certainly excusable for his temporary lack of +discretion. The finding of this letter from his mother, under the +circumstances and condition of affairs, was enough to rob him of his +usual presence of mind. While the others completed their tasks, he +examined the missive, to find that it had already been opened. With +blurred sight, he ran hastily over its closely-written page, saying, +when he finished: + +"It is as I expected. Mother was to leave New York soon after writing +this, to meet me in Caracas. This was directed in the care of Colonel +Marchand, and has been forwarded through the courtesy of General Castro +to the colonel. She is here in this country, and in trouble, as I have +feared." + +"Let us hope it is nothing serious," said Jack. "At least, we can only +hope for the best until we are able to learn more and do more. Has the +dispatch to Colonel Marchand been opened?" + +"Excuse me, Jack, for forgetting my duty. It must be duty before +personal afflictions, I suppose. Yes, this has been opened. In that +case, it will do no harm for me to read it, particularly as I may learn +something to guide us in our work. It says," he continued, while he +scanned the document, "that General Castro has been elected president +of the republic for a term of six years. It says also that a body of +his troops have been defeated at Barquismoto by the insurgents; that +the _Libertador_ has fixed on and sunk a Venezuelan ship named _Crespo_ +off Cumarebo, and that Matos has succeeded in landing twenty thousand +rifles and two million cartridges at Trinidad. + +"Now I come to news that interests us more. General Castro has sent to +San Carlos demanding that Harrie be set at liberty immediately. That +is good news indeed. But he goes on to say that he cannot set +Francisco free until his case has had an investigation. Well, this has +proved to be a pretty fortunate capture." + +"A newsy one, certainly, and not all of it bad news, by any means. +Shall we take these fellows along with us, sergeant?" + +"Pardon me, Jack, I must be more mindful of my duty. Yes, I suppose we +shall have to do so. It is also necessary that one of us return to +Colonel Marchand with all haste possible, apprising him of what we have +done, and to take him this dispatch from the general. While you are +arranging for one of the boys to undertake this duty, I will write a +few words to the colonel." + +Then Ronie prepared his first war dispatch, succinctly describing what +he had done and discovered. By the time he had finished this Jack had +got one of the younger Venezuelans in readiness for his journey back to +the regiment. Though he was loath to trust these important messages +with this scout, Ronie felt that he could not do any better. He could +not very well spare Jack or Riva Baez. Then, too, the latter vouched +for the honesty and capability of the other, so he saw him depart with +full confidence that the arduous duty would be performed faithfully. + +The hands of the prisoners having been securely bound behind them, they +were ordered to march in front of Jack and the younger Venezuelan, +while Ronie and Riva Baez rode in front. In this manner the journey +was resumed, though continued but a short time. It was now getting to +be sunrise, and Riva having a friend in that vicinity, it was deemed +best to stop there for a while--at least, long enough for the animals +to recuperate. + +The plantation of this man proved to be a huge farm of many thousand +acres, but much of it valueless on account of the revolutionary state +of the country. He was at home, and as soon as he learned the +character of his visitors from his old friend Riva, he extended a most +cordial greeting to them, promising to do everything in his power to +assist them. The sight of the prisoners pleased him hugely, for he was +a most pronounced admirer and supporter of Castro, and he quickly +placed the two spies in quarters from which they could not escape +without help. + +"How is it," asked Ronie, "that you keep from being molested by the +insurgents, when you are situated in the heart of the debatable ground?" + +"The reason is simply because I can muster a force that can outwhip any +army of curs that El Capitan can muster," he replied, rather +vaingloriously. "Oh, they have tried it, Sergeant Rand, but I have +routed them like a band of monkeys, and I can do it again." + +Our little party fared sumptuously at the hands of this rather pompous +Venezuelan, whose name was Don Isadora Casimiro, and so they could find +no fault if he was a bit boastful and radical in his ideas. He +insisted that they remain with him during the day, showing the +advantage they would gain by waiting until nightfall before starting +out. As much as Ronie disliked this inactivity, he believed it was +wisest to do so. During the day the news was brought in by one of Don +Isadora's scouts that El Capitan was mustering his forces to march on +San Carlos with the purpose of liberating El Mocho. + +As soon as the shadows of night began to fall, Ronie prepared to start +anew on his expedition, Jack and the two Venezuelans accompanying him, +the prisoners being left in care of the followers of Don Isadora. The +ride for half an hour continued through an archway of trees growing on +the plantation of their host, when Riva declared that they had reached +the limit of his broad domains. They soon after entered a valley, the +hoof-strokes of their horses muffled by the soft, spongy earth. + +It must have been nearly midnight, for they had ridden several miles up +and down the country without discovering any trace of the enemy, when +Riva, who was slightly ahead of the others, abruptly paused in his +advance. Ronie quickly gained his side, where he stopped to learn the +cause of this unexpected halt. It required no words on the part of the +guide to explain his action, as he mutely pointed with his right hand +to a ravine, or gorge, running parallel with the road. The sound of +human voices came up distinctly to the ears of Ronie. + +Handing the rein of his horse to his companion, he silently dismounted, +and crept toward the brink of the chasm overhanging the place. In a +moment the light of a camp-fire struggled dimly upward through the +thick foliage, while with the sound of voices came the noise and +confusion of a body of men moving about. + +"I believe it is an encampment of El Capitan," he whispered to Jack, +who had joined him. "I have a mind to get a little closer." + +"I need not tell you to be careful," said Jack. "Can I go with you?" + +"I do not believe you had better, Jack. I will not be gone long. From +the sounds, I judge the party below are about to start on some midnight +raid." + +Before he had finished speaking, Ronie began to lower himself down the +descent, moving with such care that he made no noise. The bank did not +prove to be perpendicular, but its smooth side sloped gently away to +its foot, and covered as it was with rank vegetation, Ronie had little +difficulty in descending, except that at places the matted mass of +growth was so dense that he could penetrate it only after persistent +effort. At the end of five minutes he found himself so near the bottom +that his next step was upon the thatched roof of one of the primitive +buildings that seemed to form a row on this side. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +"THE MOUNTAIN LION." + +The sight which met Ronie's gaze was one of wildness bordering upon +grandness. Its wildness consisted of a body of armed troops drawn up +in front of the rude building, a mob of untamable savages, as the +spectator from a civilized country must have judged them. They were +half clad, poorly fed, as shown by their emaciated visages, and armed +mainly with the rude implements that the uncivilized use. This wild +aspect of the scene was given the touch of a certain grandeur by the +sublime attention this motley throng paid to him who stood upon a +slightly-raised dais addressing them at this moment. + +This speaker was a man of stalwart figure, with a countenance naturally +dark, bronzed by long exposure to the tropic sun, and flashing eye that +could look without flinching upon the midday sun or upon the wildest +rabble that ever gathered under the shadows of the land of revolutions. +His speech was uttered in a manner and tongue in keeping with the man +and the scene. Ronie could not understand all of the fierce language +which seemed to have partaken of the mountain boldness and flowed from +the lips of the orator like a torrent springing from its fountain head +amid the rugged fastness of its native gorge, but he understood enough +to catch the import of this stimulating harangue. He knew the man was +El Capitan, and he was evidently resuming a speech which, for some +reason, had been temporarily broken. + +"Soldiers of freedom," he was saying, "the time for action has come. +You have rallied bravely at my call, and now I am ready to lead you to +battle and victory! Our path is clearly marked. To-night let us teach +that braggart, Don Isadora, that he is not a little king; that he +cannot longer defy El Capitan! From the smoking ruins of his estate we +will sweep downward like a torrent from the mountain, and like a +torrent we will gather volume as we sweep along. A trail of devastated +plantations shall mark our course wherever the foolhardy defy us, and +above the ruins of the smaller towns shall rise the captured columns of +Valencia, La Guayra, Caracas--ay, Caracas! When the capital shall be +ours, then will we make laws that lift the poor man into his just +deserts, while the lawless rich shall feel the spur of oppression as +his meeted judgment. Then shall the name of El Capitan stand beside +that of Crespo, the mountain lion!" + +As might have been expected, this bombastic speech was frequently +interrupted with wild applause, especially when the orator compared +himself to the late president of the republic. In one respect, at +least, the harangue of El Capitan was apt. Crespo, like himself, was +of humble birth and very large of stature. Whether he would equal the +ex-president in other ways remained to be seen. Crespo was the idol of +his brave followers, who were a dashing, picturesque soldiery, that the +inhabitants of Venezuela looked upon very much as the Parisians must +have looked with awe upon Napoleon's Mamelukes. + +The story of this Venezuelan conqueror is a most interesting one. +Following the rule of three or four presidents and dictators who +succeeded the noted Blancos[1]--there were two of these, father and +son--were three or four presidents and dictators whose main object +seemed to be to rob the government of all the money they could, and +then flee from the country. Such proceedings gave the right man an +excuse and an opportunity to rebel. This man was General Crespo, who +with seven hundred followers set out to conquer the country. You have +read history, know how the ambitious Pizarro, in the stormy days of +conquest following the discovery of America by Columbus, overthrew the +empire of the Incas with a handful of followers--only thirteen at the +start. Crespo did better than that, for with only seven men he made +himself president of a country more than twice as large as Spain and +Portugal together, while I am glad to be able to say there was less of +bloodshed and far less of inhuman sacrifice of innocent lives than in +the case of the conqueror of the Incas. + +I cannot refrain from giving the following story as typical of the man: +His half-wild followers needed arms, and there was no manufactory to +replenish them. In this extremity, when almost any other leader must +have faltered, Crespo gave the order for his men to strip their bodies +naked to the belt, and cover them with a liberal coating of grease. In +this shape they were to charge upon an encampment of the enemy +numbering more than six to one. This was to be done under cover of +darkness, and as they ran through the camp each man was to hold his +left hand straight out from his body. If it came in contact with a man +wearing a shirt he was to overpower him and seize his firearms. If the +body was like his own, he was to know it was a friend, and to keep on. +In this wild, impressive manner less than three hundred half-naked men, +armed only with their short knives, routed and disarmed over three +thousand troops, comprising the flower of the government's army. + +It will be noticed that El Capitan's appeal was personal rather than +patriotic. Like many another Venezuelan revolutionist, he was fighting +for selfish purposes, but his barbaric followers did not stop to +consider this. Some one, with a memory of other days, asked concerning +the liberation of El Mocho, when El Capitan replied: + +"El Mocho is not to be trusted," meaning, no doubt, in his mind that he +did not propose to give such a dangerous rival opportunity to be in his +way. + +Ronie felt that he had learned enough to show him his path of duty. +Every moment was precious if he would warn Don Isadora of his peril, +and he had no desire to leave the well-meaning don to the hands of this +mountain outlaw. So he at once began his ascent of the bluff, which he +found extremely difficult. But he accomplished the feat in safety, to +find Jack and the Venezuelans anxiously awaiting him. A few words +sufficed to explain the situation to them, when they heartily agreed +with him that it was best for them to hasten to the plantation of the +don as quickly as possible. + +"I judge from what I heard while I was leaving my perch that El Capitan +is expecting another body of his followers to join him this side of Don +Isadora's. This division comes from the way of San Carlos. If it is +half as large as the force now under him he will lead a formidable army +against the don." + +"A mere rabble," said Riva. "Don Isadora has some trained soldiers +under him." + +By this time the four were riding silently away, being careful to move +as cautiously as they could. Riva again led the way, but Ronie and +Jack were close behind him, while the younger Venezuelan kept as near +to them as he could. In this manner the return journey to the don's +plantation was speedily made, and without being discovered by the enemy. + +As may be expected, the wealthy planter was profuse in his thanks for +the information they gave him, and he began to prepare for the enemy at +once, with a confidence in his ability to defeat the other that was +sublime. As much as Ronie would have liked to remain and see the +outcome of the affair, he felt it was his duty to start immediately to +find Colonel Marchand. Don Isadora seemed to understand that it was +the proper course for the scouts to pursue, so he offered no objections. + +As our little party rode out of the grounds, having left their +prisoners under the don's care, they saw that he had mustered his +entire forces, numbering fully a hundred men, all of whom were armed +with Mausers, pistols and short knives. + +"El Capitan will be the one surprised this time," remarked Ronie to his +companions. "I really wish we could stay and see the fun." + +Little did any one of the quartet dream of the amount of "fun" in +warlike earnest that he was to take part in before they should get +beyond the don's big estate. + + + +[1] Bolivar the "Liberator" was followed by others who managed the +affairs of Venezuela very satisfactorily, until in 1846 two political +parties formed. These were styled the "Liberals" and the +"Conservatives," and trouble increased swiftly. In 1859 Guzman Blanco +became the head of the stronger party, holding his sway until 1864, +when he was succeeded by a rival. In less than ten years, however, his +son came to the front, and, more powerful than his father, he made +himself president, with all the prerogatives of a dictator. This +office he held until 1884, when Crespo became president. Still the +hold of Blanco was not broken, and two years later he reassumed the +reins of government, but in 1890 his successor was defeated, and he +suffered a loss of his good name. In fact, a complete change of heart +for the family which had been dominant in affairs for over thirty years +followed. His name was stripped from one of the States where it had +been placed, and the public statues he had caused to be erected were +torn down, and much of the really good work he had done was destroyed. +But these radical denunciations could not remove the name of the +pompous leader from the historic pages of Venezuela, and it is well to +be so, for with all his shortcomings he did much for the rising +republic, though his stalwart figure is the landmark of a stormy +period.--AUTHOR. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +A FIGHT WITH THE GUERRILLAS. + +Our scouts had gone about a mile, and Ronie was riding slightly in +advance, when he became aware of the approach of a body of horsemen +coming at a leisurely trot. In a moment he signaled for his companions +to stop. + +"We cannot avoid meeting them," he said, "and no doubt they are a part +of El Capitan's army. We have started too late to escape them. Is +there any path turning off from the road that we can turn into, Riva?" + +"None, senor." + +"Then we must turn aside here. Quick! push your horses back into the +forest, making as little noise and disturbance as you can." + +They were so successful in this work that before the approaching riders +had come into sight they were all safely ambushed where they could peer +out upon the passers-by without being seen, except by some scrutinizing +eye. Ronie and Jack sat in their saddles, side by side, while Riva and +his companion were only slightly removed. As the sound of the horsemen +indicated their close proximity, our hero parted the bushes enough to +enable him to obtain a good view of the road. + +"If our horses will only keep quiet," he began, "there is a----" + +Ronie's attention, in the midst of his speech, had become fastened upon +the foremost of the approaching riders, so his companions never knew +what he was about to say. Nor did he speak until the horsemen were +within half a dozen yards of them. The body of men were riding two and +two, and what had arrested his eyes was the sight of the nearest rider +in the lead. + +"It must be--it is Harrie!" he whispered. + +"Ay, lad!" responded Jack, who had been watching as eagerly and closely +as his companion. + +"He is lashed upon the horse, and his hands tied behind him. What does +it mean?" + +Jack had no time to reply, but the situation was plain to both. The +horsemen were a portion of El Capitan's followers, and were on their +way to attack the don. Could they stand idle there and see Harrie +taken to some fate they could not understand? Ronie's impetuous +temperament would not permit it. He believed a sudden attack, a few +shots, and the unsuspecting enemy could be routed, and their friend +rescued. Jack must have been revolving the same daring scheme in his +mind, for at this critical moment he nudged Ronie, whispering: + +"Ready when you say the word, sergeant." + +Our hero spoke hastily to Riva and his companion, who quickly +comprehended what was wanted of them. Then the clear command of the +young sergeant broke the stillness of the lonely scene: + +"Ready, men, fire!" + +In the twinkling of an eye the flashes of the Mausers lightened the +night, and three of the leading riders reeled in their seats, while +sudden commotion took place among the others. + +"Forward--charge!" thundered Ronie, setting the example by dashing +furiously from his covert. "Look sharp, Harrie; we are here to save +you." + +The animal bestridden by the young engineer began to snort and plunge +excitedly, but Ronie was soon at its bit. His comrades were as swiftly +charging upon the surprised insurgents, who, no doubt thinking they had +been attacked by superior numbers, broke and retreated in wild disorder. + +"Give them a parting shot, lads!" cried Jack, who, in his adventurous +career had led more than one regiment upon an enemy. + +The Mausers spoke right merrily, the reports mingling with the yells of +the discomfited rebels, who fled down the road as fast as they could +make their steeds go. + +In the midst of this rout and confusion Ronie freed Harrie, but he had +barely accomplished this before the thunder of horses' hoofs down the +road suddenly increased in volume, and loud shouts reached their ears. +The clatter of retreating horses abruptly stopped, and it was apparent +to the scouts that the insurgents had come to a stand. + +"El Capitan is on the road," declared Ronie. "He is rallying his men. +Come on, boys! We can do no better than to return to the don's. Ha! +who comes here? Halt! Who comes?" + +"A friend from Don Isadora," was the prompt reply. "Word came to him +of a party of rebels taking an American prisoner to El Capitan, and he +sent me to warn you." + +"In good time, senor. We have saved our friend. Hark! Yonder riders +are El Capitan's hornets. Back to the estate, and we will go with you." + +There being no need of silence now, the six horsemen rode back to the +estate at a furious gait, the messenger going ahead when they had +nearly reached the avenue leading to the building, so as to inform the +don of the approach of friends. He hailed them with hearty gladness, +but quickly prepared to meet the expected onset of the enemy. + +Ronie and his companions having decided to lend their assistance to the +defenders of the estate, Harrie asked for a rifle, that he might join +his friends. This was soon forthcoming, and while they waited for the +attack of the mountain rabble he found opportunity to say to Ronie: + +"I don't know how glad I am to see you, for I have supposed you were +drowned on the night we started to escape from the _Libertador_. How +is it I find you here?" + +"It is a long story, Harrie. I will tell it at the first opportunity. +Jack and I have seen our share of excitement, and it looks as if it +wasn't over yet. Did you escape from the prison at San Carlos?" + +"Not through my own efforts. An order came from General Castro for me +to be set at liberty. This was done, and a small escort started with +me to find the regiment of Colonel Marchand. Only think he is +somewhere in this vicinity. We were surprised by a body of rebels, who +put my guard to rout and made me a prisoner. I do not know what would +have become of me if you had not rescued me as you did. Hark! the foes +are coming!" + +It was a part of the don's plan to hold back his men, and not to fire +upon the enemy until they should come into close quarters, so no +response was given to the shouts and shots of the oncoming horde, whose +leader expected to carry everything before him by storm. A tempest of +lead followed his command to attack, but not a man was injured on the +estate. Thinking that an easy victory lay before him, El Capitan then +ordered his men to the double-quick. + +Don Isadora proved that he had had some military experience, as his men +were not only all well armed, but they stood coolly at bay waiting for +his word to open the fight on their part. Even Ronie began to get +impatient before his stentorian voice cried: + +"Now, men, mow them down like grass--fire!" + +The entire side of the estate toward the road was illuminated by a +sheet of flame as his followers obeyed the sharp command, and it was +like mowing a swath through grass to see how the motley mob led by the +"mountain lion" went down. The roar of rifles was followed by wild +shouts and shrieks of pain, while those who had escaped the deadly fire +beat a hasty retreat. + +"Follow them up, men!" cried the don, but he had barely uttered the +order before a bullet from a stray shot hit him, and staggering back, +he fell into the arms of Jack Greenland, while he murmured: + +"I am a dead man!" + +It was a sad occurrence. The moment the Venezuelans found their leader +had fallen, confusion and disorder reigned. + +"Is he fatally hurt?" asked Ronie, anxiously, as Jack bent over him. + +"I cannot tell yet, sergeant. The wound is bleeding profusely. Some +of you help me get him where I can examine him more closely. Is there +a surgeon about the place?" + +No one seemed to know. But half a dozen lusty fellows lifted the +wounded don and bore him into the house, while others stared after them +in complete dismay. + +"El Capitan is rallying," said Ronie. "It's too bad for us to be in +this condition. He will sweep the place, now the don has fallen." + +"Why not take the lead, Ronie?" asked Harrie. "Some one must, or we +are all lost." + +"I am not sure they would follow me. Here comes Senor Riva." + +"Sergeant Rand, Don Isadora begs me to tell you that he is better, but +is not able to lead his men. He beseeches of you to do this." + +There was no opportunity for hesitation. El Capitan was already +advancing for his second attack. + +"Help me rally them, Riva, and I will do it," replied Ronie. + +Swiftly the word was carried along the ranks, when new life was +enthused into the men, who were really brave fellows. The young +sergeant decided that prompt action would be the most successful, and +to meet El Capitan halfway would show him that the forces on the +plantation were alive to the situation. So the word for an advance was +passed along the line. It met with a hearty response, and as Ronie +sprang forward with his rousing command he found himself supported by a +determined force. + +"Open fire--charge!" + +The volley of shots was succeeded by loud cheers from the Venezuelans, +who bounded forward under the lead of their gallant champion. + +"Forward!" cried Sergeant Rand. + +Harrie was close behind him, and so was Riva Baez, all three having +dismounted from their horses as soon as returning to the estate. A +random volley from the rebels answered their first fire, and at the +second, in spite of all that the mountain chief could do, his followers +fled in wild disorder, disappearing from the scene with a rapidity that +was surprising. + +That night, at the very outset of his campaign, El Capitan received his +first defeat. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE NEWS AT LA GUAYRA. + +Great rejoicing reigned at the plantation of Don Isadora following the +complete rout of the enemy, and this joy was increased by the fact that +the don had not received a fatal wound. In fact, it was believed with +careful nursing he would soon be about again. As he deserved, Ronie +was the hero of the occasion, while his friends shared with him the +praise showered upon them by one and all. + +As soon as the news of the victory had been carried to the master of +the estate he sent for our hero, and was lavish in his commendation, +declaring that he had been instrumental in saving them all from the +brutal clutches of El Capitan. But, as pleasant as all this hearty +applauding was, Ronie was glad to break away from his admirers in order +to be alone with Harrie and Jack. He and the former had much to say, +all of which was listened to with sincere interest by the latter. +Harrie explained how he and Francisco had drifted about in their boat, +looking in vain for their companions until daylight, when they had +sighted land, and gone ashore. Soon after, they were captured and +thrown into prison, as Ronie knew. Then came the unexpected release, +the journey to find Colonel Marchand, the capture by El Capitan's +followers, and the rescue by his friends, which seemed the most +miraculous part of his adventures. Ronie, in turn, told what had +befallen Jack and himself, saying in conclusion: + +"There is only one thing more that troubles me. If I knew mother was +safe I could bear this troublesome waiting without murmuring. But I am +afraid some fearful fate has overtaken her. I shall not rest until I +know the truth." + +"You know I am with you, Ronie," said Harrie. + +"Ay, lad; you can count on old Jack Greenland to stand by you both, +through thick and thin." + +"God bless you, Jack!" exclaimed Ronie, clasping one hand, while Harrie +seized the other, echoing the words of his friend: + +"God bless you, Jack; a nobler soul never lived." + +When the three had hastily reviewed the troubles they had passed +through they decided unanimously to return to Colonel Marchand with +such haste as was consistent with safety. They had important +intelligence to bear, beside the fact that El Capitan was upon his +track. Under the changed circumstances, they decided to take the +captives with them, and of course Riva and his friend would keep along. +While the don was very loath to see them depart, he knew it was their +duty to go, and so he offered to send an escort of fifty men to conduct +them on their way as far as might be deemed necessary. At first +thought, Ronie felt like declining this, but he finally asked for an +escort of ten men, who went with them until noon of the second day, +when they turned back and the scouts kept on, reaching the encampment +of the Venezuelan regiment that night in safety. + +I need not describe the reception accorded our heroes by the impetuous +colonel, any more than I need dwell upon the scenes that followed. The +campaign had now opened in deadly earnest, and weeks of great activity +and considerable fighting and skirmishing ensued. El Capitan rallying +after a few days from his discomfiture at Isadora sought in every way +to disconcert and capture the doughty Venezuelan regiment. In his +efforts he was encouraged on every hand by the reports of the success +of the insurgents in almost every section. First intelligence came of +the capture of a town on the island of Margarita by the audacious +cruiser _Bolivar_, erstwhile the _Libertador_, and earlier the _Ban +Righ_. Close upon this, Castro's troops under Castillo were defeated +near San Antonio. In May, reports of insurrections came in from every +quarter. Castro suppressed two newspapers which had become pronounced +against him, and in his lack of sufficient funds to carry on the war, +levied a million bolivars from the widow of Guzman Blanco, the former +president. Then the revolution broke out in the State of Bolivar, and +after five days' fighting the president of the State was driven out of +the capital. In June General Matos, encouraged by the success of his +followers, announced a provincial government, with himself as president. + +This bit of news reached Colonel Marchand at the close of a warm day's +fight with his old-time enemy, El Capitan. As usual, it had been a +draw game, and the colonel was sitting in his hammock feeling in +anything but an amiable mood. + +"By the soul of Bolivar!" he exclaimed, slapping his knee by way of +emphasis, "he is like a ground mole, that runs for its hole the moment +an enemy is in sight. I wish we might meet a foe worthy of our steel. +Orderly, send for Sergeant Rand at once." + +Ronie was with his friends, discussing the outcome of the recent +meeting with the enemy, and deliberating upon their own fortunes since +they had become comrades under Castro, when this order was given him. + +"I wonder what this means?" he exclaimed. "Say to Colonel Marchand I +will report at once." + +Upon reaching the officer, the young sergeant found that he was anxious +to send a message to President Castro, and at the same time to +reconnoiter the country between them and the capital. + +"Castro must take the field himself," declared our hero, in the course +of the conversation. "If this growth of the insurgents is allowed to +continue much longer his cause will become hopeless." + +"By the soul of Bolivar! you are right, Sergeant Rand, and it is just +what I want you to say to Castro himself. You can do it and not offend +him, while I could not. You will go to him at once, taking as many men +as you choose. I have only to instruct you to start as soon as may be." + +"It shall be as you say, colonel. I desire to have only three +companions, Senor Riva Baez and my countrymen, Harrie Mannering and +Jack Greenland." + +"As you say, sergeant. Here are the dispatches I wish you to hand to +President Castro personally." + +Handing this package to our hero, the colonel offered no further delay. +With feelings akin to gladness, Ronie returned to his expectant +companions. + +"I hail it as good news," he said. "We are to meet the 'Little +Captain,' President Castro, with what haste we can. I say we, for I +have the honor of being selected by Colonel Marchand to choose such +companions as I wish and hasten to the capital. You know whom I +select." + +Ronie was really pleased with this commission, as it would enable him +to enter a wider range of inquiry concerning his mother than he had +been situated to do so far. Thoughts of her were last in his mind as +he lay down to rest after a day's campaigning and the first to arouse +him in the morning. + +"Poor mother! how I pity you, and wish that I knew where you are!" + +Within an hour the little party was ready to start, deciding to go by +the way of La Guayra, which they reached without adventure, This +old-fashioned Spanish town is the chief seaport of Venezuela, as well +as the entrance way to the capital, situated about five miles inland +behind the series of mountain peaks whose chain runs down to the very +edge of the water. Our young engineers did not fail to notice, as they +looked out over the harbor, the close affinity to the same cerulean hue +that touched both sea and sky, so it was difficult to tell where they +met on the horizon, and blended like a curtain of the same soft +texture. Under the reflections the vessels appeared to rest flat on +the mirror-like surface, in the words of the poet: + + "Like a painted ship upon a painted sea." + + +The most conspicuous spot about La Guayra is the little fortress made +famous by Charles Kingsley, in his "Westward Ho," as the prison house +of his heroine, the Rose of Devon. This was the residence of the +Spanish governors in the days when Venezuela was a dependency of Spain. +Past this ancient point of defense against attacks from the sea and the +winds lead those three ways of travel to the capital, aptly +illustrating the changes of centuries; first, but of least importance +now, the mule path worn no doubt by the natives in their passages back +and forth; second, the wagon track, cut, it may be, when the continent +was young; and finally, that iron-banded course of modern construction, +the railroad. Caracas is embowered among the mountains three thousand +feet above the streets of La Guayra. + +Their arrival was soon after the bombardment of Macuto by Venezuelan +ships on account of an outbreak there. As this place was near to La +Guayra, great excitement was prevailing in the latter place. In fact, +the inhabitants everywhere were in an uproar. News came that General +Riera, who, it will be remembered, was a passenger on the _Libertador_ +when our heroes were on that vessel, had captured La Vela de Coro, +while the insurgents had also captured Barquisemoto, and Riera had +sacked Coro, the capital of the State of Falcon. + +Our party did not continue their journey to the capital, on account of +the fact that Castro was toward Barcelona, where the revolution had +become centered. With this bit of news came a rumor which, if it bore +but a light bearing on the international contention focused on +Venezuela, awakened an anxious interest on the part of Ronie Rand and +his friends. Riva Baez first learned of it from a native who had come +down from the mountainous districts. This man said an American woman +was held by the insurgents as a hostage of war. He could not give the +name of the woman, but believed she had not been long in the country. + +"It is mother!" exclaimed Ronie, as Riva related the story to him. "I +must see this man at once." + +"I am sorry, senor, but he disappeared before I started to find you. +Knowing how you would feel about it, and not being able to find you at +once, I went to speak to him again, fearing he would slip away. He was +gone, and no one could tell me where he had left for. I believe he is +a spy." + +"Do you not know of some one who saw him?" + +"I will see what I can learn, Sergeant Rand." + +"Thank you, Riva. Meanwhile, the rest of us will do a little looking +around. Describe the fellow as minutely as possible." + +This Riva did, with the graphic speech peculiar to him, and then the +four went out to look for the missing man. In the midst of this +unsuccessful search Ronie learned that Castro had returned to La Guayra. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +INTERVIEW WITH GENERAL CASTRO. + +A soldier's first duty is always to obey his superior in command. Upon +hearing of General Castro's return to La Guayra, Ronie immediately +abandoned his search, leaving his companions to carry it on, while he +sought the president. He found him without difficulty, for he was +already besieged with callers. But our hero had only to send in his +passport from Colonel Marchand to receive an urgent request to come at +once. + +He was a little disappointed in the personal appearance of the man who +had become so prominent in the affairs, and whose name he had heard +spoken more often than any dozen others since he had come to Venezuela. +He was below medium height, of rather slight build, and moved with a +limp in one limb, caused by a wound he had received in battle. His eye +was the feature which bespoke most the man, and as Ronie stood before +him he seemed to read him at a glance. + +"Sergeant Rand," he greeted, in a hearty manner, which quickly won the +American boy's friendship, "I welcome you gladly to La Guayra. Colonel +Marchand sends his message by you?" + +"Here are your dispatches, General Castro. I trust they will prove +valuable to you." + +"Be seated, sergeant, while I read them." + +Ten minutes of silence followed, during which Ronie had ample time to +study the man before him, who seemed absorbed in the written messages +just placed in his hands. Then he laid the last one down, and said: + +"If I am not mistaken, you are the young American the colonel spoke of +in such laudable terms in his last. It seems by what he says now that +you have not let your reputation suffer by more recent conduct. It was +your friend I sent to have liberated from the penitentiary at San +Carlos, was it not?" + +"It was, general." + +"Is he in La Guayra?" + +"He is." + +"I wish he had come with you, for I am heartily glad to meet two such +allies in a time when the whole world seems against me. Forgive me for +saying that, as I would not have you think I distrust your own +republic. But tell me of what you have seen in the West, Sergeant +Rand. I am glad to get such information as I believe you can give me +of the hotbed of rebellion in my poor country. Take your time, and do +not be afraid to speak of yourself." + +Then Ronie described such portions of the events that had come under +his observation as he thought the other would be pleased to hear, +referring to himself very modestly, while General Castro listened with +great interest, now and then asking some question or expressing +admiration at the conduct of Colonel Marchand and his regiment. He was +especially pleased with the rout given El Capitan at the estate of Don +Isadora, and he made Ronie describe the affair so minutely that he was +forced to speak of the part he had taken. + +"I have heard nothing so pleasing," said the president. "You shall be +rewarded for your gallant conduct. I am again saying that I am sorry +this friend, or these American friends of yours, did not accompany you +here. I will send for them." + +"I am afraid you will not find them readily, as they are in search of a +man in La Guayra that we want to find very much." Then he hastened to +add: "But this is a personal matter, General Castro, and you will +pardon me for introducing it to you. I did not intend to." + +"What concerns my comrades, concerns me," cried Castro, with possibly +more vehemence than he had intended. "Tell me all about it, Sergeant +Rand." + +Thus urged, Ronie explained what he knew in regard to his mother, the +president listening attentively to every word. When he had finished, +the latter said: + +"Sergeant, this is a grave matter. To say nothing of my feelings for +you, I cannot afford to let this affair escape my notice. It might +easily be construed to mean an offense against your government. Have +you communicated with Minister Bowen?" + +"No, General Castro." + +"I should advise you to do so as early as may be. But in the meantime +we will leave no stone unturned to find her." + +"You are very kind, general. What would you suggest that we do first?" + +"Find the man who had her photograph, and make him tell all he knows." + +"I have regretted, general, that we did not return and do that." + +"You were hardly prepared to do it, as I understand your condition." + +"True, General Castro. We were glad to escape with our lives, and we +have been kept escaping ever since." + +"You have proved lively enough in the race. You spoke of that young De +Caprian. What do you know of him?" + +"I believe he is as true a patriot as you have in Venezuela," replied +Ronie, boldly. + +"I would not let anybody else say that," declared Castro, frankly. +"You think I have misjudged the man, Sergeant Rand?" + +"Perhaps I ought not to say it, but he appeared honest to us." + +"You would like to see him set free?" + +"Not if he is an enemy to your government, General Castro." + +"I understand. When you go to San Carlos to get your man I will send +by you the papers which shall give him his freedom. I will try him a +while, and if he proves faithful his mother shall be given her liberty. +I have given orders to see that she is given all the privileges +possible under the circumstances. I have been very much interested in +your intelligence, Sergeant Rand, and I trust I shall meet your friends +when you come again." + +Taking this as a hint that the interview was ended, Ronie saluted in +military style, and was in the act of withdrawing when Castro said: + +"Sergeant, I wish to ask you a question, and trust you will answer it +in the same good faith in which it is asked. What do you believe would +be the most effective thing for me to do toward quelling this rebellion +in the vicinity from which you have come?" + +The answer to be made came as quick as a flash into Ronie's mind, and +without stopping to consider how it might sound expressed in so many +words, he said: + +"Take the field yourself, General Castro!" + +If this reply suited him or not, the president did not show it by the +look upon his features, as he said, simply: + +"Good-day, Sergeant Rand." + +While in doubt as to the effect his words would have upon the energetic +president of the republic, Ronie was pleased in a large measure with +his interview. He regretted that Harrie was not with him, and he +resolved that the next time he would not go alone. Upon second +thought, he could not see that there would be any occasion for him to +call again. Then he drove these thoughts from his mind, and thinking +of his mother and what her fate might be, he began to look anxiously +for his companions. + +About half an hour later he found his friends, but they had to report a +failure in regard to finding the unknown man they had hoped to find. +Riva Baez, as well as Harrie and Jack, listened with interest to +Ronie's account of his meeting with General Castro. + +"I have faith to believe he will help us find your mother," said +Harrie, "and with his assistance we cannot fail." + +"Unless we are too late," replied Ronie. "I cannot bear this +inactivity." + +"I have always found it good policy to 'make haste slowly,'" declared +Jack, quoting an old saw. "Meanwhile let us see how Castro takes to +your advice, sergeant." + +"To think that I should have dared to speak in that way," said Ronie, +who feared he had overstepped his position so far as to incur the +displeasure of his superior. But he was speedily disarmed of this +fear, for the following day General Castro came out with a proclamation +in which he defined his purpose of taking the field personally, and of +leading the campaign in the West. An hour later a summons came for our +three Americans to visit the commander, and they met with a welcome +that proved the president had only the kindliest feelings toward them. +They were urged to accompany his army, and were only barred from being +offered a commission from the fact that General Castro did not wish to +curtail any of the liberties they might have if they were not regularly +attached to his forces. + +"You can go as far as Valencia with me, and from thence I will send you +an escort to San Carlos, so you may find your man if you can, and also +see that young De Caprian is given his liberty. To prove my good faith +with him, I will hold a commission for him, if he wishes to accept it." + +Thanking the general for the kindly interest in them, our three +withdrew, certain that at last something definite was being done. The +next day the entire force moved toward Valencia, and they accompanied +the Venezuelans, Riva also going along. + +The week that followed was one of great activity; but very little was +accomplished that seemed to forward matters with the impatient Ronie +and his friends. Leaving Castro's army at Valencia, they reached San +Carlos to find that the bird they were after had flown. As near as +they could learn, he had disappeared the morning our heroes had been +driven away, and that he had not been seen since he had taken them +across the bay in the boat. It was currently believed that he had +either been shot or drowned. In this way was lost what might have +proved an important clew in their search for Ronie's mother. + +Their disappointment was brightened somewhat by the joy with which +Francisco hailed his liberty. He embraced his American friends, and +showered upon them praises for their action in his behalf. When he was +told about his mother, he grew less demonstrative, but learning that +she was unharmed, with a promise of good protection, he recovered +exuberance of spirits. + +"I shall accept any commission General Castro will bestow upon me," he +said, "and I will show him my fealty to him and the true government of +my country. I am impatient to see him." + +Knowing nothing could be gained by remaining longer at San Carlos, our +heroes returned to the army at once. Having learned that he had +removed to Ocumare, they headed thither, learning all along the way +that the insurgents were everywhere successful, until it seemed as if +the government was doomed. These accounts were rendered more hopeless +to the cause by the fact that before they could reach him, Castro had +begun his retreat toward Caracas. + +In the face of this, he issued his decree of amnesty to all insurgents +laying down arms within forty days. + +"Unless he makes some more decided stand and wins a decided victory to +offset all this noise on the other side, Castro will have no government +for them to lay down their arms to," said Jack, grimly. "Of course it +isn't my dish that's cooking, but I feel just like saying so much." + +"General Castro will act decisively when the time comes, according to +his idea," said Ronie. + +In the midst of this uncertainty word reached them from La Guayra that +the cables were to be cut, and that Minister Bowen had sent to +Washington for warships. + +Castro's next movement was to take charge of his troops at Guaicaipuro, +and to establish his government there. Then followed the week's battle +with the insurgents led by Mendoza at La Gloria, which was to prove the +turning point in the war. Colonel Marchand's regiment of volunteers +was there, and in the thickest of the fight our heroes had ample +opportunity to prove the metal of which American soldiers are made. It +was a bitter fight, the more trying as it was made with +bush-fighters--scattered bodies of men who fought after the style of +the North American Indians, from behind trees, or whatever cover was at +hand. Fortunately, our friends escaped without a scratch, though +Colonel Marchand received an ugly wound that was likely to drive him +from the field for a time. + +His was not the only regiment that covered itself with glory, for there +was another, led by a boyish captain, who seemed everywhere in the +thickest of the fight. This little band gained the high-water mark of +the battle, and it was that more than any other which turned the tide +of the struggle and made of La Victoria a victory indeed. The name of +that gallant leader, who received special mention in the list of honor, +was Francisco de Caprian. General Castro had no longer any reason to +doubt his loyalty to Venezuela, and the president greeted him with the +promise that his conduct had chased away the shadows upon his family +name. + +The result of this victory for the government at La Victoria was such +that Matos, the head of the insurgents, gave up active command, while +Castro prepared for a triumphal return to Caracas. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THE SPY OF CARACAS. + +Immediately after the victory at La Victoria our three Americans were +forced to part with Francisco, who was to return to the capital with +General Castro, while they were called to Don Isadora's estate, the +owner thinking he had got on the track of a clew to the whereabouts of +Mrs. Rand. The don received them with open arms, he having fully +recovered from the effects of his wounds, but the errand proved +fruitless, and they felt obliged to abandon the quest in this vicinity. + +So they again found themselves in La Guayra. But their stay here was +short. Ronie was anxious to get to Caracas, that he might consult with +Mr. Bowen, to see if nothing could be done by him toward finding his +mother. General Castro was also to join with him, and altogether he +felt very hopeful, though aware that his mother might be beyond his +power of help before this. But he was a brave youth, and he resolved +to do all he could and hope for the best. + +It has been said that the capital of Venezuela, while only five miles +inland from its port, La Guayra, is situated in the mountains, three +thousand feet above the seashore. The railroad which connects the two +coils about this rugged ascent like a steel lariat thrown by a dextrous +hand, now winding in and out where some bottomless abyss is encircled +like a huge letter U upon the landscape, or anon clinging upon the rim +of some sharp-pointed rock, where the same train creeps around the +angle, showing mortal fear by its snail-like pace. Another has aptly +compared it to a spider's thread strung from crag to crag. Time and +again the engineer can look back from his cab into the windows of the +rear coach, while between him and the object of his gaze yawns a +rock-walled well hundreds of feet in depth. + +The young engineers were standing on the rear platform, watching with +admiring gaze the wild scene stretching away from their feet. + +"Isn't it grand, magnificent!" exclaimed Harrie. "I never saw its +equal. Did ever you, Jack?" + +"Nothing to surpass it, lad; not even the Alpine Pass of the Colorado. +Where can one find a grander combination of sea, plain, valley and +mountain? And whoever saw a greener plain on a bluer sea?" + +"Or a sky quite as serene," added Harrie. + +Ronie was fain to agree with his enthusiastic companions, while they +admired together the rugged panorama falling away from them to the +foothills trending from the base of the mountain like the huge roots of +some great tree which had burst from their imprisonment in the earth +and stood out as the bold supports of the mighty burden they upheld. +Between these ridges, or leaping from their gnarled sides in silvery +cascades, numerous streams of water made bright bands on the background +of gray and dark green. Below the mountains, groves of royal palms, +standing with park-like regularity and so far apart that their white +trunks shone like pillars cased in silver foil, were to be seen. Out +from among these gleamed the white and yellow roofs of the cottages of +the people. Beyond these glistened the white line of breakers, forever +coming and forever going, leaving only a chalk mark to tell where they +have been but will never be again. Outside of this lay old ocean, +throbbing under the hot, fierce tropical sun like a hunted creature +panting to get its breath, but never resting. + +Still up, up, crept the iron conqueror, until it broke the veil of mist +in cloudland, up where the trees were jeweled with dewdrops and the +track reeked with the wine of the sky. At one place they could look +down into three thousand feet of space, and soon after their sight was +gladdened by the view of the valley on the other side and the thrice +welcome sight of Caracas. Again they were pleased by the happy +blending of art and nature, the beautiful country, the basin under its +stupendous rim, the city marked by the towers of its numerous churches, +the dazzling roofs of public buildings, the regular streets lined with +picturesque cottages, the gardens of white houses of the coffee +planters, and beyond more mountains. + +Caracas was founded by Diego de Losada in 1567, and named the "City of +Santiago de Leon de Caracas." The picturesque valley which forms its +site was the capital of the heroic tribe of natives known as "the +people of Caracas," which name was very appropriately given to the +capital of the race which after two hundred years of warfare succeeded +in annihilating the original owners of the soil. This long struggle +against the stronger power by the weaker forms one of the most glorious +pages in South American history, and scintillates with deeds of heroism +and human sacrifice. + +Now the ascent has been made, they find that the city is overlooked by +mountains smooth and bare of trees, but covered with a light-green +sward, except where some stream affords a band of a darker tint. The +clouds seem of more than northern fleeciness, and hang over the peaks +like smoke, or float lazily from valley to valley, giving varying hues +to the beautiful landscape. The climate is delightful; the first +impressions of the capital pleasing. + +Caracas has a population of about eighty thousand, it being the usage +that only one family shall occupy a house. It is a city of culture and +fashion, of public statues to scholars and artists, as well as +warriors, for not all of the history of this interesting republic is +filled with war. While a land of hotheaded people, whose career has +been largely filled with riots and revolutions, here and there are to +be found evidences of a high civilization, producing marked contracts +of the rival forces of man. + +What struck our energetic American as unexpected was the air of repose +which rested upon the scene, giving little hint of the excitement +reigning outside. Slowly along the streets, as if there was no +occasion for haste, moved trains of mules bearing on their backs bags +of coffee, or quite enveloped under huge bales of fodder, which had the +appearance at a distance of some huge, lifeless bulk upon legs. Then +there were bodies of foot soldiers, wearing blue uniforms with scarlet +trousers and facings, also moving with a deliberation which at least +bespoke their importance. This sight was enlivened by the appearance +of an open fiacre whirled along the street by a pair of small but fiery +horses, driven by a coachman from his high box seat, the gold trimmings +to his hat and coat rivaled for brightness by the ornaments on his top +boots. Evidently the carriage bore some person of importance in haste +to his destination. + +The cause of this undue haste, as well as the disturbance of the +equanimity of this everyday sight, was explained by the sounds of +another party approaching. Then, as the travelers upon the streets +moved with unaccustomed celerity to one side, a body of men mounted +upon high-stepping horses, strikingly caparisoned and carefully +groomed, appeared in sight, the riders presenting a bold effect in +their uniforms of white duck and high black boots. + +"The president's bodyguard," said Ronie. "General Castro and his +troops have returned, and we have got here just in the nick of time." + +"There is the general riding in the center," declared Harrie. "How the +people are cheering him! It cannot be that they knew of his coming so +soon. Shall we follow them?" + +"Perhaps we might as well," said Ronie. "I suppose Francisco is in the +train somewhere. Ay, look, boys! there he comes. Doesn't he look +fine? He has the natural military bearing of his race. Well, I am +glad of his good fortune." + +With these words Ronie began to move along with the crowd which had +quickly collected, and cheering lustily began to surge ahead in the +direction taken by the martial train that now moved along the street +farther than they could look. It was not long before they found +themselves surrounded by a jostling, but good-natured, mob, each member +of which seemed determined to keep in sight of the marching column. +The band had now begun to play, and as the strains of martial music +filled the air, Ronie Rand was conscious of hearing a voice muttering +in a deep, sullen tone: + +"Curses upon him! His triumph shall be short. Soon shall the sons +of----" + +The rest, if spoken aloud, and the words given seemed to have been +uttered involuntarily, were lost to our hero, but he caught his breath +at what he had heard. It was not the import of the words, but the tone +of the speaker which caused such emotion that he could constrain +himself with difficulty from trying to break through the mob and find +him. It was the voice of Manuel Marlin, of San Carlos! + +So satisfied was Ronie of this fact that he immediately tried to push +his way forward so as to reach the man, whispering for his companions +to follow. But people in a crowd like that give away slowly, when they +can, and when Ronie had reached the spot where the other must have been +at that time he was missing. Nor could he find any trace of him. + +"I am sure it was he," he said to Harrie and Jack, as soon as he +explained his sudden action. "But he has slipped away from me." + +"Let's keep along. He will doubtless follow the throng," said Harrie. +So they moved with the spectators toward the most notable building in +Caracas, the Federal Palace, which is built around a great square +overflowing with flowers and fountains, and lighted by swinging +electric lights. The palace is lightly built, and though painted in +imitation of stone, looks like an airy castle which might be blown over +at the next flaw of wind. It is profusely ornamented with statues made +either of plaster of Paris or of wood painted so as to imitate marble. +If this gives the building an unstable appearance and given over to +frivolous amusements, it is in keeping with its environments, the +high-colored walls and open fronts of the adjoining buildings that help +to fill this American Paris, and it is by all odds the handsomest +building in the city. And, rather than given over to scenes of +frivolity and mimic life, here are the chambers of the two branches of +legislature, the different offices of the department of state, and the +reception hall of the president, in which is the national portrait +gallery. The dome of this chamber, which is two hundred feet in +length, and bears many pictures of warlike scenes, is painted with a +panorama of life-size figures depicting the last battle of the +Venezuelans against the Spaniards. It is really a work of artistic +merit. So, altogether, the Federal Palace is a building of substantial +business, and it has played an important part in the shifting affairs +of the republic. + +To Guzman Blanco, more than all others, does the city owe these public +buildings. These were originally convents or monasteries, until Guzman +overthrew the power of the church. The Federal Palace was one of these +church buildings, so was the present opera house and the university. +All of them seem well located for their new uses, and go to show that +the church must have had a strong hold on the wealth of the capital +before this daring adventurer overcame them. + +Anxious to get sight of this spy, if possible, Ronie and Harrie did not +try to get in so as to witness the president's reception, though Jack +did so, in the hope that he might find the man if he should dare to +remain with the crowd. But the rest of the day passed, however, +without bringing success to them, and the two young engineers were +standing near the entrance to one of those cathedrals which form such +an important portion of the buildings of the capital. They had barely +gained a position where they could watch the comers and goers without +being noticed themselves, when they were glad to see Captain Francisco +de Caprian approaching, with their old-time friend, Jack Greenland. + +Naturally, the countenance of the first was radiant with joyous +excitement. + +"It has been a great day for Caracas," he said. "President Castro has +reason to be proud of it, as nothing has happened to mar its perfect +harmony. Yet there is a rumor afloat--I know not how it got +started--that there is a secret enemy in the capital, a spy, waiting +for a favorable chance to strike a deadly blow at the hero himself." + +"I suppose efforts will be made to capture him?" said Ronie. + +"Be assured of that. A handsome reward is offered. Oh, they will get +him, soon or late." + +Then a sigh escaped the lips of the handsome young officer, and he +murmured to himself rather than to his companions: + +"I would, dear father, you might have been spared to witness this day, +for I believe you would have rejoiced with the rest of us." Then, +suddenly remembering his companions, he said: "Forgive me, senors, but +to me these very shadows of this building are sacred. It was here, in +the last revolution, my dear father, with nine others, made their final +stand and fought so good a fight that it was found necessary to build a +fire in the tower and smoke them out with the fumes of sulphur. Ay, it +was a desperate test for the ten," said Francisco, while his dark eyes +lighted with an intense light and his thin hand quivered spasmodically. + +"Did your father and his friends perish?" asked Harrie and Ronie, both +deeply interested in this simple narrative. + +"It was their only alternative, senors, for to yield meant death and +torture. Father, let it be said to his credit, gave his companions +opportunity to surrender; but, let it be said to their credit, they +stood bravely together. Then, their last shot spent, and the fumes of +the drug rapidly overpowering them, they threw themselves from the +tower into the street. It is said they went downward to their fate +with clasped hands. I am glad I did not witness the sad sight. But I +believe a brighter day is dawning for poor Venezuela, and that her +brave defenders did not give their lives in vain." + +Our three friends were deeply touched with this pathetic story, related +in such gentle tones as to make it seem like some sweet vision rather +than one of grim war's bitter sacrifices. Looking beyond their heroic +companion, they were struck with the peacefulness of their +environments, so well in accord with the manner of the speaker, all +tending to soften the tragic interest of the scene of warlike and +heroic action. Where the ill-fated band of patriots, the last to make +a stand at that time, must have fallen, ran the sunken rails of the +tram cars, and in sight were the notion shops and confectionery stores, +where laughing, prattling children were wont to come to find the simple +toys and playthings to amuse them. At nighttime electric lights +illuminated with their dazzling splendor the now peaceful scene, while +seekers of religious promises wended their way softly in and out of the +old cathedral. + +"I am afraid I have made you sad, senors, when there is so much to make +one happy. But I forgot that this is not for you, and that your heart +is heavy, Senor Rand, over the fate of your poor mother. Let us hope +you, too, may soon find your cup of joy full to overflowing." + +"Have you heard how Colonel Marchand is?" asked Harrie, seeing that +Ronie did not feel like replying to their friend. + +"He is likely to recover, but his campaigning is doubtless over until +some time in the future. Come, senors, I shall insist that you stop +with me to-night, and it is time you seek rest." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +"IT IS MANUEL MARLIN!" + +It was a beautiful morning, that which followed, and our friends were +astir early. Wandering out upon the streets, eager to learn if any new +tidings had come of the spy, they soon found themselves walking under +the refreshing shade of rows of ornamental trees. In following this +course, they came somewhat abruptly upon a plaza floored for a wide +space with rare mosaics, and lit at night by swinging electric lights. + +"This is the Plaza de Bolivar," said Jack, "a favorite place for the +president's band to come and play. See, there is the statue of the +republic's hero." + +Ronie and Harrie had already discovered an equestrian statue, mounted +upon a heavy pedestal, while the rider held with one hand a +straightened rein on his refractory steed, and with the other he +pointed his sword high into the air, as if he would pierce some +imaginary enemy stationed in space. It was a bizarre affair, the +weather-stained image of a horse rearing into the air after the fashion +of some huge rocking-horse. From the bold figure of man and steed +their gaze dropped to the base, where they saw in raised letters the +name of Simon Bolivar, the Liberator of Venezuela. Instinctively, our +Americans uncovered their heads out of respect to the memory of the man +who was not only a great warrior, but a notable statesman, and a poet +of considerable merit. His proclamations to the armies are examples of +masterly eloquence, and as much to be admired as his military genius, +which won for him the applause of the five republics that he liberated. +The statue of Bolivar is in bronze, and is considered one of the most +notable examples of modern art. + +When his young companions had tired of looking at the equestrian figure +of the warrior, Jack said: + +"Now come with me, lads, and I will show you a sight worth two of this +to you and me." + +Without reply, Ronie and Harrie followed their friend until they came +upon a delightfully retired retreat, which, without the bizarre +attractions of the Plaza Bolivar, had a freshness and quiet beauty the +other lacked. Anticipating now what they were to meet, to our young +Americans there was indeed an air of sanctity and hallowed peace that +the more ornate spot did not possess. With reverential steps they +moved silently but swiftly along the clean, graveled path bordered with +deep, green grass and overhung with interlacing branches of the trees +which formed a roof over their heads, until they reached the center of +the plot, where the torrid sun of the tropics beat down upon the head +of the statue they had come to see. + +This was the Plaza Washington, and the man honored here was the +American patriot, the Father of His Country, who had been given this +honored recognition in the capital of the United States of Venezuela. +Uncovering their heads, the three stood for several minutes in a +silence that seemed too sacred to be broken, while they looked upon the +calm, benign features of Washington, honored thus by a race they had +not expected would pay such homage. At that very moment, unobserved by +them, a couple of natives a little way off, at the uncovering of their +heads, removed their wide-brimmed headgear, and looked on with +respectful attention. Farther removed, a group of women, dark-eyed, +dark-featured, but not unpleasant of countenance, also paused in their +morning work to watch the newcomers with respectful admiration rather +than curiosity. Evidently these people understood and shared with +these strangers from a far-away land this spirit of national pride and +patriotism, for true patriots always revere the memory of heroes. + +"Isn't it strange Washington should be given a statue here?" asked +Harrie. + +"Not so very strange," replied Jack, "when you come to think that the +histories of the two countries are so nearly alike, up to the day of +these two heroes, they might be written by the same historian with +slight modifications. Bolivar was the Washington of Venezuela. Then, +too, you will remember that Miranda, the pioneer of patriots in this +country, served his apprenticeship under Washington, fighting for our +country. When he had finished there he returned to his native land to +take up her battles. What he learned with our army helped him here. + +"Bolivar had no small task on his hand when he undertook to free five +republics, and who conquered a territory nearly half as great as Europe. + +"It is a common practice for the inhabitants here to strew their +garlands of flowers about this place, and once I remember, upon a +holiday, coming here, to find the statue of Washington, pedestal and +base, literally decked with floral wreaths. Never, it seemed to me, +not even in our own land, did the noble countenance of Washington look +grander than here, surrounded by a race that did not speak his +language, but whose hearts beat as patriotically, as if they understood +every word." + +"It was a happy thought that they should have sculptured him as a man +of peace rather than of war," said Ronie. "It is more happy in its +effect, as I look upon him, than the warlike figure of Bolivar." + +"Very true; at least, from our standpoint. While they did well to +select this phase of his character, no doubt it thrills their hot veins +more to look on the defiant form of their beloved leader. What I have +said of the two men was truth, but similarity stops there. Bolivar had +very much of the savage wildness about him, and he was reckless, +headstrong, and sometimes foolhardy. But his career was a grand one, +as viewed by his countrymen. It was filled with bold, cunning, +victorious marches. His Valley Forge was the torrid jungles and +sun-swept plains of a tropical clime; his Delaware, filled with +floating ice, to be crossed in mid-winter, the broken mountain pass, or +the pathless swamp filled with deadly malaria. Like our Washington, he +came of a distinguished family, and he was educated in Europe for the +court and camp. But, if educated abroad, his love for his native land +never failed, and Venezuela never had a truer son, or a more valiant +fighter for her natural rights. + +"Ay, lads, his campaigns were filled with such stupendous feats of +activity and accomplishment as few have ever equaled. Starting on the +seacoast near Pallao, with his foot soldiers and rude cavalry mounted +on mule back, he crossed the continent. The perils of +mountain-climbing and the hardships of the jungle were met and overcome +by his indomitable followers, inspired by his glowing example, living +much of the time on berries and roots, sleeping at night upon the +ground, to free in turn Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador and Bolivia; then, +sweeping down the Pacific coast, to finally overthrow the empire of +Peru. He was a young man filled with the love of freedom and the fire +of ambition. So little was his heroism appreciated by those whom he +thus met that time and again he was forced to meet the assassin, only +to find himself deserted at last by those whom he had looked upon and +rewarded as friends. So he died alone, of heartaches over the +ingratitude of a people he had led out of bondage. But to-day tardy +justice makes him, as he deserved to be, the hero of five republics." + +"Why should his countrymen, after all he had done for them, strip him +of his honors and leave him forlorn and disappointed?" asked Ronie. + +"It was owing largely to the inborn fickleness of people of a tropical +clime. Two charges, one directly opposed to the other, were brought +against him. One party claimed, after having rid them of kings, he +tried to make a dictator of himself, with power more absolute than that +of those he had deposed. The other said it was because, upon his +followers asking him to accept such power, he declined and went into +voluntary exile at Santa Marta. Be that as it may, it was nearly +twenty years after his death before there was one bold enough to give +him the place in public opinion that he deserved. He caused an artist +to design a statue that should perpetuate his memory. + +"Now we come to see how closely the history of this country is blended +with our own. On the neck of the statue the artist placed a miniature +in the form of a medallion which the family of Washington had given +Bolivar. On the reverse of this was a lock of Washington's hair, with +the inscription: + +"'This portrait of the founder of liberty in North America is presented +by his adopted son to him who has acquired equal glory in South +America.' + +"You will notice that none of the insignias of honors showered upon him +in his hours of triumph by different countries have been retained by +the artist, this portrait of the Father of Our Country having been the +only ornament it was deemed he would have cared for, as in life he was +prouder of this than all else. So you see, the busts and statues of +the Liberator bear only this tribute, while those of his followers are +decked with glittering ornaments." + +"I have read of a very pretty story connected with its presentation," +said Harrie. "It was during the time of Lafayette's visit to our +country in 1824. A banquet was given in his honor and the memory of +Washington by Congress. In the midst of the rejoicings and tributes +paid to the venerable visitor, Henry Clay arose to say that, while they +were enjoying the fruits of independence, the grand institutions +founded by their patriotic forefathers, there were those in the +Southern continent who were fighting as valiantly for liberty, with +less hope of ultimate victory. Continuing to wax eloquent, the great +orator said: + +"'No nation, no generous Lafayette, has come to their succor; alone, +and without aid, they have sustained their glorious cause, trusting to +its justice, and with the assistance only of their bravery, their +deserts and their Andes--and one man, Simon Bolivar, the Washington of +South America.' + +"There was wild cheering then, while men sprang to their feet and +clapped their hands. Then Lafayette, the generous, asked that he might +send the Southern hero some token of their sympathy and appreciation of +his valor. The result was, Lafayette sent Bolivar the portrait of +Washington, and it proved a gift the young patriot of the Southland +revered, while his people grew to admire and cherish it." + +"True, my lad, and this spirit has spread so that you will see pictures +of Washington wherever you go. Now it is a portrait; then the American +army crossing the wintry Delaware, under its beloved leader; or, the +war over and victory's mantle of peace spread over the land, he stands +before the door at Mount Vernon. You find squares and public houses +named after Washington, with numerous other testimonials of him, all of +which seems very pretty to the visitor from the North." + +While Jack had been speaking, his gaze had become turned in an opposite +direction to where the figure of a man was to be seen skulking in the +thicket of flowers. Harrie and Ronie had already discovered the +suspicious person, but had understood that he would flee at the +slightest indication that he had been seen. Thus, before Jack had +finished his speech, Ronie began to retrace his steps, with apparent +carelessness, in the direction of a row of yellow, blue and pink +houses, with high, barred windows, from which peeped shyly dark-eyed, +swarthy-skinned women. But the moment he had passed beyond the range +of the concealed man's eyes, he darted into the shrubbery so as to +intercept the man should he try to escape by flight. + +The wisdom of this action was apparent when Jack and Harrie started +toward the spot, when he fled precipitately. This flight, however, +took him right into the path of Ronie, who quickly covered him with his +pistol, at the same time ordering him to stop, which he did with +trembling limbs, to begin to beg for his life. + +A good square look at him revealed his identity to Ronie, who exclaimed +to his companions: + +"Come quick, boys! it is the spy, Manuel Marlin!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +GOOD NEWS. + +Ronie did not have to repeat his call, for almost before he had +finished the last word Harrie and Jack were beside him. It was then +but the work of a moment to disarm the terrified fellow, when he was +ordered to march in front of them to the headquarters of the army. +Then he fell upon his knees, actually too weak to stand up longer, and +with clasped hands and white face, begged for his life. + +"Spare me, senors! I am not a spy, but if you take me before the +officers of Castro they will condemn me without a trial and I shall be +shot! Spare me, I beg of you." + +His pathetic supplications touched the hearts of his young captors, but +they did not feel it would be right to let him go. + +"If you are innocent you can prove it," said Ronie. "I know you are in +sympathy with the insurgents, but I promise you shall have a fair +opportunity to prove your innocence of being a spy if you are not one." + +During these words of Ronie he bent a closer look upon him, and he +suddenly recognized our hero as one of the couple who had saved him +from the jaguar. He saw that Jack was another of his captors. + +"I remember you, senors," he said. "You saved my life, but it would +have been better for me to have been eaten by the jaguar than to fall +into the hands of Castro. I will tell you something, senor, that will +be worth more to you than my miserable life if you will let me go." + +"It is of my mother!" exclaimed Ronie. "You had her photograph. Tell +me where she is." + +"If you will spare my life." + +"I am a soldier under Castro; you know a soldier's duty, senor." + +"I thought you were one of us," he murmured. "But I am going to tell +all I know. She was taken prisoner by some of El Capitan's men. As +the angels are my witness I had nothing to do with that. Her portrait +fell upon the ground during the struggle and I picked it up. That is +all I had to do about it." + +"Where is she now?" demanded Ronie, with extreme earnestness. + +"She is held as a prisoner at the old convent in Durango under command +of El Capitan." + +"Then she lives!" cried Ronie, in great joy. + +"_Si, senor_. I can lead you to the place, and will if you will give +me my liberty." + +"That is beyond my power. I cannot--ha! here comes an officer now." + +The newcomer was none other than Captain de Caprian, who asked: + +"Whom have we here, senors?" + +"A man we found prowling in the city under what we thought to be +suspicions circumstances, so we stopped him. He is from San Carlos, +and claims he is not a spy." + +"I shall leave it for you to say what is to be done with him," said +Francisco, "promising to see that he is fairly treated." + +"I know not in regard to his being a spy," replied Ronie, "but he has +given me valuable information in regard to my mother's fate." + +"Does he know of her?" asked Francisco, eagerly. "That fact alone +ought to save his life. What has he told you?" + +In a few words Ronie explained what he had learned, when the other +said, with an intonation of joy in his voice: + +"I am so glad, Senor Roland. No time must be lost in going to her +rescue. I have this morning received word that my mother has been +given her liberty, and that she is on her way to meet me after many sad +months of separation. But, dear Roland, as much as I long to meet that +mother, if you are willing, and General Castro will permit, I want to +go with you to help save your mother. My company will be sufficient +force." + +Ronie and Harrie could not conceal their emotion at the earnest words +of their young friend, who showed that he spoke from the heart. + +"Nay----" began Ronie, but the other checked him. + +"I know what you would say, Senor Roland, but as much as mother and I +want to see each other, we can both wait until this duty is performed. +I am going to General Castro at once for leave of absence. You can let +this man accompany us if you think he is to be trusted. I will meet +you near the old cathedral half an hour hence." + +After a short conference among themselves, in which Manuel Marlin was +allowed to express his opinion, it was decided to let him go with them. +He might prove a valuable companion, for they were all inclined to +think he would not be false to his pledges. + +Before an hour had passed, so promptly did they act, Captain de Caprian +led out his regiment of gallant men, to start upon the long and arduous +journey to Durango on the merciful errand of saving a captive from the +power of El Capitan. Were the truth told, more than one of the brave +band hoped they might meet the bold outlaw himself. + +I need not describe that journey to Durango. The town proved to be a +little hamlet under the brow of the Cordilleras, where the insurgents +sometimes made their headquarters. Knowing this, the advance was made +with extreme caution as soon as the regiment had entered the debatable +country. Scouts were constantly on the lookout, and among these were +our young engineers. + +"I can scarcely wait for the time when we shall attack them," declared +Ronie to Harrie and Manuel, as the three halted on the brink of a steep +hill overlooking the hidden town. + +"How quiet the place seems," replied Harrie. "It must be El Capitan +and his troops are away." + +"Off on one of his raids, no doubt. It will be so much the better for +us." + +"Still I really think Francisco will be disappointed if we do not find +the rebel chief." + +"I wonder if yonder old vine-clad building is where mother is +imprisoned?" asked Ronie, pointing to what the three felt must be the +ancient convent pictured by those who claimed to have been there. + +"_Si, senors_," replied Manuel. "But look there, _senors_! what does +the coming of that llaneros mean?" + +The question from Manuel was called forth by the sudden appearance of +one of the riders of the llanos, or plains of Venezuela, who drew rein +almost in front of the old convent. With what truly seemed wonderful +celerity the people began to collect, coming from every quarter. + +"Perhaps that fellow has discovered our men and is giving the alarm," +said Ronie. + +"I wish I was near enough to hear what he says," replied Manuel. "If +you will wait for me, senors, a few minutes I will find out." + +Manuel Marlin then began the descent into the town, and as the distance +was not far, he soon got within hearing of the new arrival. It was not +over fifteen minutes before he returned to his anxious companions with +the somewhat startling announcement: + +"It is as I expected, senors; El Capitan is on his way home, and is +expected within a few hours!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +VICTORY AND PEACE. + +Ronie and Harrie heard this announcement with considerable alarm, as +with their first thought they believed they had come too late to +accomplish their purpose. + +"We must get back to the regiment as soon as possible," declared Ronie. +"If we act promptly we may yet rout the inhabitants of the town and +save mother. How many men has El Capitan under him, do you think, +Manuel?" + +"I am sorry that I am not able to tell," replied the Venezuelan. "I +think by what I could catch that he is coming back with a large force." + +"Which makes it the more necessary that we act quickly. Come on, boys!" + +His companions needed no urging to follow him, and it was not long +before they were able to rejoin Captain de Caprian, who was anxiously +awaiting them. But their news did not disconcert the brave young +patriot. + +"It only fulfills my wishes," he said. "We have only to storm the town +without loss of time, and then get ready to meet El Capitan. Ay, we +will give him a welcome home that he little expects. I wish Senor +Greenland would--but here he comes!" + +Jack had also been out on a reconnoissance, and he brought in the same +news that the others had--that El Capitan was expected at Durango +within a few hours. + +"They say he comes with five thousand troops," added Jack. + +Our heroes turned to see what effect this announcement would have upon +Francisco, but as far as they could see the young captain did not show +that he had heard the words. Fifteen minutes later the regiment was +ordered forward, and then was begun a swift, but silent, advance upon +the stronghold of the insurgents, Captain de Caprian giving out his +orders calmly and confidently, as if about to enter one of the camps of +Castro. Could he reasonably hope to meet successfully El Capitan's +superior numbers? What if the latter had five thousand men under his +command? + +Ronie and Harrie could not help asking each other these questions, as +they fell into line and moved sternly forward. When near to the lower +end of the town Captain de Caprian divided his men into two bodies, so +as to attack the place simultaneously from different parts. Our heroes +remained with his division, and entered the mountain hamlet from the +nearest quarter, this advance being along a narrow road overhung by a +range of hills on either side. + +In order to give the other division time to gain a position above them, +it was necessary to make a brief delay before opening the attack. But +the wait was not long before the signal was given for the double +assault, and the word rang along the ranks: + +"Forward! double-quick---charge!" + +It goes without saying that exciting scenes followed. Ronie, Harrie +and Jack managed to keep together, and it was their good fortune to be +among the first to come within close proximity to the convent where +Mrs. Rand was supposed to be imprisoned. This had, in fact, been a +part of Captain de Caprian's plans. + +The surprise was complete as far as the insurgents were concerned. The +onset of the government troops came like a tempest from a clear sky. +Women shrieked and fled, followed by men who made scarcely more +resistance, until they succeeded in rallying about the old convent. +Here then was fought the lion's part of the battle. A hundred or more +of the insurgents made a desperate stand, but they might as well have +hoped to stem the mountain torrent which swept down the gorge just +behind their native hamlet. They seemed to quickly realize this, and +the cry for quarter soon rang out above the medley of battle. + +"Forward!" still shouted the youthful commander. "Force an entrance to +the old building before it is too late." + +Captain de Caprian showed that he realized what was likely to follow +inside the structure, for he had barely uttered his order before a cry +with womanly sharpness in it rang out--an appeal for help. + +Our heroes were already storming the door, having dashed aside the +sentinels on duty there. The next moment, led by Ronie, and followed +by a dozen of the troops, our three burst into the convent. Running +swiftly along the main passage they soon came upon a scene which sent +the blood coursing fiercely through their veins. It would appear that +the insurgents, finding they were being routed by the government +troops, sought to kill the few prisoners they held within this old +building. At the very moment our rescuers appeared on the scene, one +of them was swinging over his head the ugly-looking knife he carried in +the act of slaying the woman who was kneeling at his feet. Ronie sent +the miscreant senseless to the floor, and the next moment clasped his +mother in his arms. + +"I was in season, mother," he murmured; "you are safe." + +But she had fainted, and as gently as possible, with the assistance of +Harrie and Jack, he bore her to a bench where the fresh air could cool +her fevered temple. + +"To think if we had been a minute later," said Ronie. + +"She opens her eyes," declared Harrie. "She has been spared." + +It was indeed an affecting scene, during which Jack Greenland drew +apart. He found that three other captives, all Venezuelans, had been +rescued, and that these had been all the persons held in the convent. + +Renewed commotion outside now caught his attention, and he returned to +the side of his friends. + +"I think El Capitan is coming, and that the boys are preparing to +welcome him home," he said, grimly. "I think I will help in the +greeting, if you will excuse me, lads." + +"Forgive me, Jack, for forgetting my duty," said Harrie. "But I felt +so anxious for Ronie's mother." + +"I must go, mother," declared Ronie. + +"Oh, my son!" she implored, "must you leave me here and now?" + +It was a serious problem for the young engineers to decide, between +filial and martial duty. Happily Jack quickly settled the matter by +saying: + +"It is your duty, lads, to remain here. I know Captain de Caprian +would wish it. Look sharp to yourselves, while I join the troops in +their welcome to El Capitan." + +The young engineers were fain to agree to this, feeling that it was +better they should. Especially was this the situation as they were not +regularly attached to the regiment. + +The "welcome" extended to El Capitan and his followers was given near +the lower end of the town, where the mountain ranges drew so near +together that the valley was narrow, uncomfortably narrow for the +surprised insurgents. El Capitan will never forget that "welcome," nor +will his men, who quickly scattered like sheep scaling the +mountainside. If outnumbering the government troops three to one, +numbers did not count then. Among those who won special distinction +was Manuel Marlin. + +As soon as he could do so, Captain de Caprian sought his American +friends to congratulate them, while he described the complete victory +of his troops. Altogether, it was a happy occasion to them. + +"I shall order an immediate return to the capital," declared the young +patriot. "You had better go to Caracas with us, friends." + +They were nothing loath to do this, and it was an exceedingly happy +company which found its way back to the mountain citadel, where they +were hailed with delight by the president himself. El Capitan, the +insurgent chief who had been so feared, was turned over to the proper +authorities, while Manuel Marlin, in consideration of his recent +bravery, was fully pardoned for any error of the past. Our friends at +this time witnessed what seemed to them rather a peculiar trait of +public justice. This was the return to Caracas of El Mocho, who, it +will be remembered, had been kept a prisoner at San Carlos for a long +time. He had been accused, and apparently with good reason, of +infidelity to the government. But this was now overlooked, and General +Castro openly welcomed him to his arms, upon his promise to be faithful +in the future. + +"It is a good specimen of South American sense of justice," remarked +Jack. "One day a man is hunted as an enemy, and the next he is +embraced as a loved friend. It may be all right. I cannot say." + +In their happiness our heroes had no desire to criticise, much more to +condemn, such a practice. Ronie was extremely thankful for this +meeting with his mother. While they had many explanations to make and +long stories to tell of what had happened since their parting, there is +little I need repeat here. It was perfectly natural that Mrs. Rand +should seek to improve the opportunity to meet Ronie in Caracas, and +she did not dream of the suffering it was going to cost her, of the +terror of captivity or the horrors of her long imprisonment, but these +had been safely passed, and all felt like rejoicing over the outcome. + +Another couple especially happy were Francisco and his mother, whom our +Americans quickly learned to love and respect. She proved indeed to be +a gentlewoman of the noblest type, who adored her patriotic son. + +Naturally it was not long before our engineers felt it was time for +them to move on their work, but this could not be done until Colonel +Marchand, who joined with them in their happiness, could recover from +his wounds so as to accompany them. While these healed, and our +friends passed the time pleasantly in the capital, flitting back and +forth between their friends, the warlike affairs of the republic grew +apace. There was some fighting to be done, but mainly it had come to +be a matter of diplomacy and argument between the powers, until finally +the glad news of a peaceful negotiation came to them. + +Once more President Castro had triumphed, achieving this time, it +seemed, his grandest victory. When the account of this rang over the +mountain city our American engineers began to prepare for an arduous +campaign of an altogether different kind from that which befell them +when they were COMRADES UNDER CASTRO. + + + + +THE END. + + + + +"Engineer Ralph," by Frank H. MacDougal, No. 87 of the ROUND THE WORLD +LIBRARY, is a splendid story of a boy's supreme struggle to success. + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Where Duty Called, by Victor St. Clair + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHERE DUTY CALLED *** + +***** This file should be named 34792.txt or 34792.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/7/9/34792/ + +Produced by Al Haines + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/34792.zip b/34792.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2fac5c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/34792.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c123325 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #34792 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/34792) |
